Home

RASS-S User Manual Vol4 v6.1.0 December 2003

1. Export A18 Data vi Export IRD Data vi Please define EXPORT folder to contain txt file Exporting large modelb test3 IRD to IRD data Destination Folder Destination Folder j Path an a Time format X e Time format Header Data and Destination fields Index Recording Time Time of interrogation Recording Date Date of interrogation Azimuth ACP Int Type Azimuth of interrogation Scan nr v Power dBm ILY S address Int Header Data and Destination fields filter Progress Progress Record nr of Record nr of E Lites written Sean nr T unes written Scan nr 4 Click the v button to stop the TRD Import Export tool RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 3 nask dadon ee RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 13 4 0 The S Hle Viewer The S File Viewer tool can be used to check the contents of the exported 5 file formatted files prior to the linking and merging process The S17 18 and 548 format files can be viewed using this tool All the recorded messages are present in these files This means that for example the S18 file can be used to check the Keep Alive procedure for the GDLP DLF connection or the S17 file can be used to analyse the NIM messages for the SCF cluster stabil
2. Multiline Histogram vi EH Azimuth of Recording deg a Hits Azimuth of Recording deg for 69 0 p Settings r Statistics Absolute 2433123 611 Total __ Relative 183 535 Mean 60 0 D Cumulative 104 263 STD 55 0 Bin size 211 083 RMS lower Inclusion 359 978 Max 50 0 z60 Bins 0 000 Min 45 0 r Population r Statistics non zero 13257 Count 182 549 Mean m Population non zero 104 255 STD 35 0 15236 f count 211 091 RMS 40 0 p Cursor 359 978 Max 30 0 29 00 Hits ive 1 High Comment NEN Mas 23 Lee mm Urg 21 y XJ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 LI 25 S0 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 200 z25 360 Azimuth of Recording deg One of the three axes can be selected using the selector top right corner of the window The following settings can be done in the historgram function Realtive or absolute value representing f Absolute ih o Relative Cummulative value representing Cumulative Bin size value The Bins indicator is directly coupled with the Bin size value 10 000 Bin size 70 Bins Boundary inclusion lower Incluzian These parameters can be altered at any time and this will result in an immediate recalculation and redisplaying of the histogram Some statistics are automatically calculated on the selected data set and are dis
3. Comm D failure b A Comm amp invalid sequence p M Comm C failure vd a bd lt M a o o 1 EXT I mI j I 1 j Ta 10 0 il i i J 80 0 30 0 100 0 1100 120 0 les Us Alt x I S add TE soak CA V v rr ooo M Broadcast Comm B failure 126 000 0 812 2 157 esoo o son 7 000 looo0 000 5 254 0 618 poo NE 2000 0 062 0242 1000 o000 1000 O 0 500 7000 p 845 2500 oso0 3000 44 000 1375 5 254 14 667 9 978 28 000 0 000 4 000 618 2500 0 500 a CN 1 Saddress Run d do Failures fs oa e e o o iN N o oO A on N e e o 0 618 2 500 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 415 rsss 0 471 2000 0 000 000 91 000 2 844 sss s s5s 6353 28 000 o 000 1 000 Eq nu d 4 000 000 0 125 d j CO O1 OL OL O1 O1 OI NP NP NPN PN hm ht 2 This diagram shows the data link failure for Mode A code Change ACAS RA AICB Broadcast CommB Comm D Comm A Comm C and the sum of all the above 3 The user can show the failures per target by using the menu in the control bar The X axis can contain one of 4 different values 5 address Target ID combination of S address or target ID and Run nr RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 iniacatt dadose RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 40 RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02
4. There are 3 possiblities configurations for a X25 channel PVC Incomming SVC and Outgoing SVC They can be configured by clicking the respective tabs To add a logical PVC channel to the hardware connection select a LCN from the list and transfer it to the current selection list by clicking on the gt button X25 Channel Select P5 vi PVC Y SVC In Y SVC Out Current Selection List EDR hardware channel 1 Calling Address List Calling Address None Call User Data To add a logical SVC incomming call to the hardware connection select a calling adddress from the list and transfer it to the current selection list by clicking on the button To add a logical SVC outgoing call to the hardware connection select a called adddress from the list and transfer it to the current selection list by clicking on the button optionally the calling address and user data can be included in the outgoing call This can be done by checking the respective boxes A logical channel can be deleted for the current selection list by clicking the button To confirm the logical channel configuration and return to the preferences window click the button Click the button to ignore the logical channel configuration RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 a mask deckonies_Loume RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV
5. 98 13 All non Zei 99 55 x100000 2226 99 64 2226 99 64 x100001 2226 2225 E 99 60 x100002 2226 99 64 2226 99 64 1000023 2226 2226 99 64 99 64 x100004 2225 99 60 2225 99 60 x100005 2226 99 64 2226 99 64 x100006 2225 99 60 2224 99 55 ix100007 2226 99 64 99 64 f 2226 x100008 2225 99 60 2225 99 60 x100009 2226 99 64 2226 99 64 x10000 2226 99 6 2226 99 6 x10000B 2226 2226 x10000C 2226 99 64 2228 99 51 0 00 0 00 ix10000D o o0 E Oi Ot x10000E 2226 99 64 2226 99 64 E x10000F 2226 2226 100010 2226 99 64 2226 99 64 0 00 0 00 xt 11 2224 2224 000 99 55 x100012 2226 99 64 2225 99 60 100013 2226 2224 99 55 99 64 E x100014 2225 99 60 2224 99 55 2226 99 64 99 64 100015 2226 x100016 2226 99 64 2226 99 64 100017 2223 2223 x100018 222 99 2226 13 6 5 3 6 Data Link Comm C and D Segment Retransmission Analysis The PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis separately calculates individually for Comm C and Comm D exchanges the number of segment re transmissions plo o o o o o o o o o o o o o e o p S S S5 S S s e S5 S 5 S S5 S Blo 3 o E o o o o o o 5 o o XTXTX alo r E amp amp 8 E 2 a 3 a S P amp bi x E z T ololololol ee a 2 SSS SSS 3 in in ulalalalslala an EI WIE B E z a id S a x E 3 z alo alololalea S EJEJPSEJE in e e S aja E
6. Time Merger P2B vi S gt n Pd amp Acc MA Please select the input data Scenario Folder Result Folder Macintosh AY C AMP AIGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE Macintosh AV CAIMP AIGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE 440 440 SCENARIO SHAW_MODES RESULTS SHAw MODES V440 shaw modes S4E e wu e tv 2 RES Recording Folder Dutput s4sc MM si8 s48 saRDb WM x RD m eg P Ses TRDO o i Kiz EDR Recording Folder Macintosh AY C AMP AIGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE V440 DAT A R AW RDR SHAW MODE S T1 Progress Process time s Line selection paco total D3J1L12L1sD3 D15 1e Ge t j 00 00 00 000 s 1 Tool Selection Select the Pd amp Acc option in the toolbar This will allow you to merge a scenario replay file and automatically generate an S4RD file Pd amp Acc a SCENARIO LIVE I E Ace 2 Source File Selection select the scenario folder This can be the copied scenario folder on the EDR computer or the original scenario residing on the shared hard disk of the RES computer Use the first select button in the upper left corner of the window SelectFolder vi Please select a scenario folder Info Scenario input file SCENARIO pss Scenario Folder Playstation Alain C AMF amp lGM 24 TROU i CAMP 41GN SCENARIO RESOLUT ION NT SLOW rezalutian low S4T J zcan Next select the
7. 2 Load the data in the Data Display o Data Display P5 vi E 2 AEA 9 5 TRD Latitude deg TRD Latitude deg f TRD Longitude deg raq 8 l PER wa e 47 EL esl sll x f i i x _7275 int v 52227 I 1 PU EE r Legend 2 i 14 DUSS N 1B GATW wks 1C N8 i 1D N4 t Dm 400539 Z 1F N6 24 None 2B None TA 2C None i 2D None Du 7 Bi 2E None 2F None 34 None 3B None 3C None 3D None SE None Ferrer rre ehe ett SF None r MD Flag Man Designation O Target Info vap ACode 4105 m FL 360 m s 400423 oeee Range Nm 59 62 1 E iw d Azimuth deg 18 68 d s Scan 185 N Source Dusseldorf tir unn Time 10 28 22 122150 10 20 52 122130 1 9 10 2 wv BackGround TRD Longitude deg BET s50 MN I m Intersoft Electronics 1F N6 DEES No Math fit No Math fi Wino Math fi S No Math f Wi No Math fit Sf no Math f Now select the target or message of interest using the red cursor and click the Multi Link to Cat048 Link to Cat018 FE Link to CatO17 level link menu Jotiktoviees J Select a level to link to e g cat 46 An alternative way to link is by using the Status display Open the SCF status display and select a message intarsen dadene volume RUMA Ch V
8. Mane b ud Logical Channel If the GPS timing box is checked make sure a GPS is connected to the system GPS timing is mandatory for PSR Scenario generation and transmission delay analysis GPS Timing C Use OFS Timing UTC A list of allowed SVC DTE addresses incomming and outgoing and PVC LCN s can be configured Address List SVC LCM List PVC CO es O D emm hese neers Srnec Cee rr Rrra Specify the SVC address or PVC LCN in the the respective control and click the button to transfer it to the list Use the ga button to remove the selected items from the list Notice that these are general lists out of which for each hardware channel individual numbers can be chosen For outgoing SVC calls the upper Max LCN and lower boundary Min LCN for the LCN can be chosen as wel as the LCN sequence for consequative outgoing SVC calls Outgoing SVC LON Range Finally any comment related to the general set up can be added in the comment display l The preferences window is also used to configure the different channels individually Each of the six channels can have its own settings Select a channel by clicking on its respective tab According to the Line settings some controls can be disabled The following window will appear RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 a inmaak dadene Volumes 3 RASS S User Manual Line 1 Physical Layer Line Type RS232 DTE
9. pasek aadrentes X 7 ANTENNA INPUT GPS251 GPS RECEIVER ine COMMUNICATION PORT uy dB25m A RJ45 5 or 5Om cable dB15HDm a amp ere a dB15HDm For RVR connections see Vol 5 Chapter III Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 8 2 1 2 Interrogation and Reply Recording In order to record the interrogations and replies we need the RES scenario software to create an interrogation recording This is performed 2 1 2 1 RES Connections The RES needs to be connected to the radar see Volume 5 for details and the ACP ARP pulses need to be distributed in the correct way This means that the ACP ARP is connected to the RIU or AFU ACP ARP output For details on the connections of the RES generation tool we refer to Volume 5 chapter III of the RASS S User manual A general overview of the connections are shown in the figure on the next page The user has the option of choosing between the FAT or SAT setup or opting for FRUIT injection or no FRUIT injection 2 1 2 2 RES Software The RES Interrogation recording software is used to record the interrogations Run the tool while the RES is connected to the Radar Make sure the RES is fed with ACP ARP data either via an APM or RVI RES Int Recorder P5 vi E Recording Info Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 PS Filesize 0 41 Mb In
10. Line Settings Type Layer Appearance Rx Clock Internal Tx Clock Baudrate EDR Preferences vi r LAP B Layer DCE bel 1 n 5 isec TZ Sec Nt bytes 429 Layer w 2 J Size 151 Bytes T10 Sec T11 _10 tsec T12 Sec Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 8 RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 T13 Sec T20 Sec T21 Sec T22 Sec T23 Sec T28 Sec r 425 Channels z HH m Comment NENNEN w2 10 t 1 krz J It is most convenient to enter the settings left to right starting with the Line Settings 1 Specify the type of recording None Passive Active or Y Passive None means that this channel is not used No further settings need to be entered Passive means that this channel is recorded in spy mode listening only The Line Type electrical standard needs to be selected Set the Rx and Tx clock to external slave mode Active means that on this channels the protocol is actively supported by the EDR Most of the parameters need to be entered Y Passive means that this channel is recorded in spy mode The channels are automatically paired 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 5 amp 6 during the further processing This allows for spying on both directions up and down The Line Type electrical standard needs to be selected Set the Rx and Tx clock to external slave mode Notice that
11. Toggle Help window on off Start Analysing RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 S rxe dackeniesYame RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 22 RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 Stop process Define a filter for analysis Select one the source folder for the analysis Stop the tool 3 Next select a LINKED DATA folder containing the linked TRD data 4 If you have just run the Data Linker tool this selection is made automatically from the last selected LINKED DATA folder SelectFolder vi Please select a Linked Data folder containing the TRD data LINKED DATA T E LARGE MODELB TEST3 LARGE MODELB TEST3 T2 LIMEED D AT A Folder E TED data LARGE MODELB TEST3 T3 PlayStation Alain C APP AIGH S4 Ral caben qan xs a PTE P262 TESTING LIMKED DATA LM Gabel SESCENT EI p RADlAL 36 SCENI T 5 F seier E C RADIAL 36 SCENI T2 09 59 43 4 15 11 2000 4 Now set up the proper parameters for the analysis Parameters Max Comm duration zza scans Max CommE duration 7 2 0 scans Max Commi duration Tan scans Max Comm duration 7 5 0 scans lax code Change dur En scans Comm C Closeout required Pd GICB EDS Periodicity Tan BPS i scan a50 BPS i sean aeo BPS i sean sro BOS Ti scan Mas acquisition scans GICB gt zn scans Model logic error
12. o Data Display Info P5 vi Blo Data Display Info P5 vi E fa f uv TRD y TRD a ttyl gt ges jm J Cluster Responsibility ORLY GATW DUSS None None None Coverage Data link Lock out I Lock out P Procedure R Running E Expected Initiated C Completed S Successful 9 By loading filtering zooming and selecting custom X Y axis a specific data set can be displayed on in the Data Display tool This data subset can be saved to disk by clicking the button The following window will appear SelectFalder vi Please select a TRDfolder to save the data LINKED DATA T E C3 LARGE MODELE TEST3 RADIAL 36 SCEN1 DFS Cj RADIAL 36 SCENI TI RADIAL 36 SCENI T2 Cj RADIAL 36 SCENI T3 C RADIAL 36 SCENI T4 C RADIAL 36 SCENI T6 17 m3 21 08 12 2000 Select an existing TRD folder to be overwritten or create a new TRD folder to hold the data subset A progress bar in the lower left corner will indicate the progress of the save process RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 aco dadon et Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 35 RASS S User Manual 10 By clicking the button the Fast Filter function is enabled This allows the user to quickly filter on the data that is already loaded into the Data Display P5 tool The following window will appear Fast Filter TRD
13. Format Server Client Bl ASTERIX 192 158 888 8077 1666 182 168 0g8 77 28088 a2 ASTERIX 192 1568 85889 877 1881 192 168 608 877 2881 H3 ASTERIX 192 1568 85889 877 15882 192 168 608 877 28082 Now define the first filter This is done by clicking the Add button A filter definition window will appear y naek EBLES Volume 4 RE RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI9 TCP_IP filter parameters vi Format Server Client Eres aema 160606 192 168 668 877 Z OBH Error Walid filter 171 Cancel Predefined Servers Predefined Clients i 192 168 668 078 28082 i 192 158 000 078 2881 192 168 8088 8728 2886 In this window select The protocol used in the filter Currently limited to ASTERIX and EADS SIP PEX or EADS PEX ST Farmat V ASTERIX EADS SIF FE amp EADS FER ST The Server IP address in dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx of the TCP IP source The server port number entered after a collon he Client IP address in dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx of the TCP IP destination The Client port number entered after a collon If the user enters a value erroneously in the setup window a message will announce the problem Error Invalid filter sockets 1 1 Click on the Ok button to leave the window Ok is only available if a valid filter is defined Add more filter if needed using the Add button Us
14. 4x select one of the source destination folders for the process l2 w Ev Stop the tool SCENARIO lt SCENARIO LIVE 3 First select the SCENARIO option in the Time Merger x ESL Now select the scenario folder This is the same folder as the one you selected in the scenario generators and in the RES main SelectFolder vi Please select a scenario folder Info Test scenario created SCENARIO gt C3 POEMS EXAMPLES 6 C3 PSR GENERATION1 by DERA Scenario Folder C SHAW_MODEAC E SHAW MODES H Playstation Alain CAMP AIGN 24 PTE C STATIC 32 P2B1 FAT SCENARIO SHAW MODES AMY See ee shaw modes S464 scan CUTEST MODEL B SCEN 3 SHAW MODES 4 Next select the RES recording folder This is the folder you selected prior to running the RES main in the Scenario results section This folders stores the interrogation and result data of the scenario you selected Beware the same scenario might have multiple scenario result folders since it can be run several times nask dadn et S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 14 SelectFolder vi Please select the scenario result folder RESULTS C DATALINK 1 C DATALINK 2 T1 C DATALINK MERGE TEST3 C3 IRD TESTDATASET RES Recording Falder SHAW MODES TAKE2 5 Now s
15. Importing Please wait Destination Folder PlayStation Alain C AMP AIGN S4 PTE P2B2 q TESTING RESULTS RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T6 IMPORT Header Data and Destination fields v Index lt gt Index Recording Time lt gt Recording Time Recording Date lt gt Recording Date V Azimuth ACP lt gt Azimuth ACP vf Scan N lt gt Scan N v Type lt gt Type v Cause lt gt Cause Diag lt gt Diag Time of day lt gt Time of day Former Il lt gt Former II Current Il lt gt Current II v S address lt gt S address v Counter of Mode S address list lt gt Counter of Mode S address list VIILII Importing Please wait Destination Folder PlayStation Alain CAMP AIGN S4 PTE P2B2 2 TESTING RESULTS RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T6 IMPORT Header Data and Destination fields Index lt gt Index Recording Time lt gt Recording Time Recording Date lt gt Recording Date Azimuth ACP lt gt Azimuth ACP Scan N lt gt Scan N SAC lt gt SAC SIC lt gt SIC Target report descriptor lt gt Target report descriptor N arning error condition lt gt Warning error condition Rho measured position lt gt Rho measured position v Theta measured position lt gt Theta measured position X calculated position lt gt X calculated position Y calculated position lt gt Y calculated position
16. RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 as een usus Veme4 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 81 Define XY Axis vi CALC Rr Mi Mei f TRD Range Mm T ww sm Axiz Range Nm Yo sis CALC w ww Rri Ww ww CALC Rr Mi Nei TRD Range Mm Shared Slant Y Mm f Shared Slant x Nmn Cancel Shared Rho Mm f Shared Theta deg Define Custom eSumarise the data per Range window Open Preferences For Layer 1 Set Math to Sum window size to e g 5 Nm and Step to 2 5Nm Select proper color and symbol Data Display Preferences vi Layer settings Dynamic Mathematics Nene Q No Math ur Q Max Q Min Q RMS Shared Axis Q Risan i Q Delta Up Filter O f3 vn And C TRD Scan And TRD Scan Next the data display shows Roll Call interrogation rate per range window X scale shows the center of the window 1 Data Display vi EH CALC Rr Ni Nei CALC Rr Ni Nei f TRD Range N ll 5 an A a yy s vos a x x Y fal m Legend BackGr Map EM Layer 1 y t Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Layer 7 Layer 8 Layer 9 Layer 10 MD Flag Man Designation ad r Target Info 4 1 1 I I I 1 1 1 I A 2 20 40 60 160 180 200 220 240 C BackGround TRD Range Nm SITE wolfm 1 REC LIVE M a ir m
17. Use the P button edit the list or use the Define Custom item to add a new item to the B RUMA ChIX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 E ES N Volume 4 plese eedrentes RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 55 list The following window will appear m Define XY Axis vi X Slant X Nm gt Axis Slant Nm Cancel This window allows the editing loading and saving of the geographical display type list load list from disk save list to disk add item lo list uf J remove item from list rename item in list The default list is called DefaultDDGraphs grph This list can also be adapted to the needs of the user There are six possible sources to define an axis The Shared source is somewhat special because it uses the layer preferences setting to decide the actual source of the axis see preferences later This way it is possible to display a common axis in several layers and use for each layer a different source for the common axis Each source has its own list of possible axis Therefore there are six different lists available The list of possible axis is automatically adjusted corresponding to the selected source v Slant X Nm Slant Y Nm Rho Mm Theta deg Click the OK button to activate the new edited list and to return to the selected geographical display Click the cancel button to ignore the changes and return to the geograph
18. RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 22 4 3 3 Conversion of Data Recorder Data for RASS S Analysis 1 Select conversion source There are 3 possibilities recording file IOSS and EDR wW Recording Ims EDR 1 1 If Recording file or IOSS is chosen you need to specify the full path name which describes the location of the file which you want to convert You can either type in the path name or use the n Or B to select a file A File dialog will appear Macintosh amp V C AMF amp IGN S4 Source ACCEPTANCE W440 D AT AR AW REDE 1 2 If EDR is chosen the source parameters i e the offset and the length are automatically defined Offset is always read zero and length is always the size of the disk Use this selection to make a live conversion during a recording Source Fil oJ onset 0 im So000 Length kB EDR 2 Destination of the data There are 4 possibilities RASS DCP None and REDR RASS is the format used in all RASS S analysis tools DCP is a format used for the input of a RASS C analysis REDR is the format used for data replay on the EDR or LAN Destination 2 1 If RASS S or IOSS is chosen you need to specify the full path name which describes the location of the file which should hold the result of the selected conversion 4g You can either type in the path name or use the LLLI button to select or create a file Destination A file dia
19. View site file vi Site Info Data 1 2 Data 3 4 Format 1 Format 2 Protocol Protocol Format ASTERIX F Format EUROCONTROL Dialect STANDARD Dialect STANDARD Precision Precision Bum OX Nm Ral 232 Mm Prev Y Nm Farameterz sac n sic o uae o Cancel The following protocol parameters can be entered depending on the kind of protocol Format and dialect these parameters are dynamically loaded from disk Range Azimuth or X Y precision only applies to formats with variable precision See 5 0 Protocol Support SAC SIC UAP only applies to Asterix stations Validation bit 4 Line selection To find out which lines where used in a recording use the button line sel You need to specify which serial lines are included in the conversion by checking their respective boxes 5 Start conversion Click the Start gt button to start the conversion While the convertor is running three features can be used to observe the data being converted Hex PPI and Info Depending on the computer data format and traffic density conversion may take from 5 to 100 of the real recording time Therefore we recommend not to use the PPI display while conversion is taking place except for brief checking or for real time checking while recording is taking place If available use a fast desktop workstation instead of a portable laptop for conversion nask dadn Voume zi RUMA Ch I
20. dB15HDm yo dB15HDm dB15HDm For RVR connections see Vol 5 Chapter III TE E E A Volume 4 hane Lene RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 11 2 1 7 1 RES Software The RES Interrogation recording software is used to record the interrogations Run the tool while the RES is connected to the Radar Make sure the RES is fed with ACP ARP data either via an APM or RVI Scenario Generation eve T T Antenna Diagram Editor Trajectory Scenario Generation Trajectory Reconstruction Ewent Scenario Generator Interference Generator RES RES Main Control Interrogation Analysis RES Self Test amp Calibration Mass Recompile Scenarios RES Interrogation Recorder RES Int Recorder P5 vi jx Destination Folder Recording Info Configuration Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 PS File size 0 41 Mb Int 8895 a Mike Abie TESTING AV RESULTS TEST Pages 138 R w 7 Interarrival Time ms he pel AIT 17 000 PE vgl X r Display 16 000 Update y Pages i 15 000 pie x Scale deal v UF 4 20 Reference All Call v 14 000 UF 5 21 m Interrogation Info Other 13 000 tphase 36 5315 ms 867 11 E B H N Asks pvi LEM Saris Hs 12 000 UF 1 1 PR 0 Il 0 CL 0 44 10986C 11 000 Revolution 6 10 000 Azimuth 236 964 deg r PPI Info 9 00
21. ree 5 e o rw pes qe pe qe pe C Absent C Garbled C non Validated C Yalididated Total C 4 Absent 4 Garbled Man validated c 4 cero Validated 4 Validated n zero Average Total Plots scan 40 53 d Plat count 42234 42234 Flots zcan pong ge a LL gn ses 2 3 Analysing the Data Probability of Detection Calculation The RASS S data can be used to perform specific probability of detection calculations The principle is based on the tracker output where Pd will be specified as Pd Tracker plots received plots expected The received plots are calculated for each individual track number The expected number of plots is calculated by subtracting the scan number at the end of a specific track from the scan number at the beginning Further calculations sort the plots to their validity RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE j anf js li 2 mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 29 An individual Pd for valid mode A and Mode C code is calculated also These Pd values can be represented in two ways 1 Tabular sorted perscan numberand A code The tabular Pd will give you the following information Fd calculation vi Spt Application Font ww Min scans Export Recorded from D Frox Sz 54 24 M p Lj progress ral E er ee a rons n 22 45 2200 fes Jo hai fisz n age jo fo no fot 2z p feu possis pam k
22. 5 address Target ID combination of 5 address or target ID and Run nr Use the X scale menu to select one 4 scale amp address 5 address Target ID S address Run nr Target ID Run nr In case S address or S address Run nr is selected you can modify the X scale format into hex representation by using the graph s pallet a Format Decimal HE Mapping Mode gt Engineering Tabular resu rop Pop Binary Octal z2 j4 4 Hexadecimal Relative Time Absolute Time 4 The viewer has a number of buttons to call special functions Call The help window Printout the tabular result Printout the graph Printout the contents of the graph as a table Eee elle Call the histogram function E RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 E ES N Volume 4 Peso cadrentes RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 28 Call The online reference pdf files Close the window 5 The user can also enable or disable one of the graphs by using the check boxes near the graphs legends This improves the readability of the curves 20 Comm Ap LJ 18 Comm C1 b LJ 16 Comm c2b O 132 CommD 5 Sum L1 ieri o co aM 10 b 4 8 k M 6 B4 4 2 0 7 I I I I I I I EET ERR EEI n SE 0 8 10 18 20 28 30 38 40 48 50 58 60 68 70 78 s e ammi mum x soale 6 The general results of the activity data are shown in the tabular display under the graph E we pesoorezs eoe pass
23. ACAS R S NC ACAS RAO ACAS RAC F 1 1I 80 0 90 0 101 0 Scan nr Ii 1 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 Peale C ao IL 9000 Img Tabular result i IPIE ojo IP n o aja ojo The tool mainly consists of a graph and a tabular display representing the results of the calculation according to the selected analysis type To select a specific analysis use the Analysis types selector in the upper right corner of the window v AC AS RA Status Cat 18 activity Comm D Status Failurez Link Count This list contains all the TRD analysis types which are at that moment present in the CAMPAIGN GENRAL TEMPLATES directory An individual analysis type from the list can be edited by clicking the button The following window will appear with a different contents because the selected analysis type is displayed by default Define TRD Counters vi B Be 4 Analysis ACAS RA Status Counter Description List e ounter name yp nterva Z ACASRAA ACAS RA O 1 0000 ACAS R S C Counter Contents acas kA 2c CALC ACAS RAO ACAS RA C Click the button to load another analysis type The following dialog will appear iniacat dadon eet zi RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 77 File Dialog TEMPLATES ayn O ACAS RA Status cnt O Cat
24. Import A48 Data vi Import IRD Data vi Importing Please wait Destination folder PlayStation Alain C AMP AIGN S4 PTE P2B2 q TESTING RESULTS RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T6 IMPORT Header Data and Destination fields Int nr lt gt Int nr Time of interrogation lt gt Time of interrogation Date of interrogation lt gt Date of interrogation Int Type lt gt Int Type Azimuth of interrogation lt gt Azimuth of interrogation Scan nr lt gt Scan nr Power dBm lt gt Power dBm v S address Int lt gt S address Int VF UF lt gt UF RL lt gt RL V AQ lt gt AQ PC lt gt PC vY RR lt gt RR The headers of the TSF files are read first and are compared against the templates required in standard RFS A48 A18 or IRS IVS data as specified in the PTE P2B1 ICD If any header is different from the default one the user can use an edit function to assign a certain column to a certain TRD field by double clicking the item of interest The following window will appear to allow the user to select a different destination for the item of interest Please select a destination field for the import of column JAC Field list Index Recording Time Recording Date Azimuth 6 ACP Sean M SAC SIC Target report descriptor Warningerror condition Rho measured position Theta measured position 4 calculated pos
25. Predefined Clients i 192 168 668 078 28082 i 192 158 000 078 2881 192 168 8088 8728 2886 In this window select The protocol used in the filter Currently limited to ASTERIX and EADS SIP PEX or EADS PEX ST Farmat V ASTERIX EADS SIF FE amp EADS FER ST The Server IP address in dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx of the TCP IP source The server port number entered after a collon he Client IP address in dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx of the TCP IP destination The Client port number entered after a collon If the user enters a value erroneously in the setup window a message will announce the problem Error Invalid filter sockets 1 1 Click on the Ok button to leave the window Ok is only available if a valid filter is defined Add more filter if needed using the Add button Use the Delete button to clear a filter from the definition window Close both windows after defining all required filters 3 Now start the recording by clicking on the Record button e nask dadn Voume S RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XL14 Active TCP IP Recorder vi Spacketz bytes status Bi ASTERIX 192 168 608 677 1888 182 168 8g88 877 2888 TE 34631 T_OATASFER Recording Information Recording Time Inn 00 02 The byte and packet counters will increment and will show the number of packets and bytes
26. Time of Generation h m s TRD Index Scan TRD Time of Generation h m s Fractional scan TRD S Address TRD Range Nm TRD Azimuth deg TRD Altitude ft Speed Mm h Heading deg Flight Level FL Power dBm Elevation deg Relative Heading deg Target ID Target Generator Overlap Set 1 Code 2 Code Broadcast Comm B events RA events The user can select a number of items to be listed from the Export Selection List at the left side of the window by double clicking the item of interest or by selecting it and clicking the button There are five sources of information Each source has its own specific list with export fields The export selection list is automatically adjusted according to the selected source The selected item is transferred to the Export List and a check mark is added to the corresponding item in the Export Selection list At startup the default Export List is loaded from disk This default list is called DefaultTabularView The default list like any other list can be edited loaded and saved according to the needs of the user A selected item in the Export list can be shifted up or down s Use the LE to delete the selected item from the Export list An Item can be selected by B 7 in the list Once the contents of the Export list is defined it can be saved format ll gl disk Use the ey button to load format an earlier sa
27. Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis IIL 14 For more details about the graph palette consult the LabVIEW user manual Enlarging or shrinking the Inventory tool can be done by clicking and dragging the 7 lower right corner of the Inventory tool window Click the E button in the upper right corner to expand the inventory tool to full screen size Click the button in the lower right corner of the window to square the display of the Inventory tool 8 To get more information on a specific plot position the red cross cursor on that plot and observe the target information panel Remember that only the active layer can be accessed Click X to centre the cursor Click ES to select the cursor This target information can be queried in every display type Target Info A Code FL 5 Range Mr 0 00 Azimuth deg 0 00 ME Type Track Power dEr D n Fec Time 0D 00 00 00 Rec Date 01 70171904 Scan If detailed information about the selected target is needed click the a button next to the target info field This button will launch an Info window displaying all available information for the selected target Click the el a button to close the Info window The Info window runs in parallel with the Inventory tool and is updated every time the curdor is moved to another target RUM6 Ch IMI RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH a hr j anf js l mil m Volume 4 RASS
28. Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 34 Oo Data Display Info P5 vi 810 Data Display Info P5 vi E TRD Ext ASTERIX Cat817 record 1 2 Time 13 07 43 806 400 H M S Date 10 01 2002 Azimuth 332 938 deg Scan 827 G18 Data Source Identifier SAC 8x34 SIC 101 812 Data Destination Identifier DR C 8x88 DIC 034 000 Message Type 6 Track data 220 rere address 140r ina of day UTC Time 13 67 43 2969 845 Calculated Position in WGS84 Coordinates LATITUDE HGS 84 52 079399 deg 52 04 45 837 hms LONGITUDE WGS 84 1 493990 deg 1 29 38 366 hms 70 Mode 3 A Code in Octal Representation G GIL Mode 3 A 1000 50 F Light Levelin Binary Representation B G G Altitude 19000 ft 208 Track Velocity in Polar Coordinates Ground Speed 558 88 kt Heading 135 17 deg 238 Transponder Capabili tu CA 25 At least Comm A and B and the ability to set CA code 7 airborne p 248 d Status g Irer alert al Position Mismatch I Network Info Long 0 0104 Deg aSpeed 0 00 Nm h Network Delay 0 000100 s ALat 0 0188 Deg AHead 0 00 deg Duplicate Mess 1 A Alt o ft Source Gatwick 17 ref number 1 Destination Orly
29. radar data list is browsed simultaneously and visa versa Edit Scenario list Edit ASTERIR list Aad Link gt A code LITE Time Azimuth Range Miss Acq E Acode UTC Time Azimuth Range False ALoue Error 66 5000 15 31 60 150 2178 OO 2 5000 15414667 147 2122 OUO False plots and missed reports are marked with the link value 999999 This indicates that no link was found Once you are finished with the window s close them using the OK button Now the calculated Pd and Accuracy figures are presented on the Panel of the window a biegen Gladvonties VolumelV S z RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 22 On the right hand side Mode 5 data is presented while the left table presents the Mode SSR data All data can be printed using the Print button This will evoke the following preview window This window allows you to print the data directly to a printer or via a file to a spreadsheet application PrintTables vi E o Indication of SSR and Mode S Probability of Detection and Accuracy Calculation using scenario resolution slow S4SC Asterix recorded file resolutie slow plots S4 EE Time window ms ee asooo Range window Nm 0 500 Theoretical SSR Range bias Nm 5 7 Exporting Result data The linked data in memory can be processed for further use in two different ways 1
30. tert ia I I I 09 44 00 09 46 00 09 48 00 Recording Time H M S 1 opportunit m No Math fg NoMamnfg Lo No Math F Processing Delay v A 39677932 9 H 4 Codes Track 0 Power dBm 0 0 Rec Time 00 00 00 00 Rec Date 01 01 1904 Scan 0 i III 33 In fact sector messages and targets can be mixed during an analysis It is also possible to to a delay analysis for regular targets just like for sector messages E g on a PPI view north messages will be displayed in the origin range 0 and azimuth o and sector messages will be displayed on a range of 512 Nm and an azimuth corresponding to their sector number REM invent ry2B vi SS ri i AEA sevevwewvwe orooiiiiii EE Y Nm 512 Not defined 300 m BackGround m Map 4 m vi 5 Ba RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 I 200 E 912 amp Nm 400 1 opportunit m No Math gg WeMeng C No Math Range Nm 0 00 Azimuth deg 0 00 MB Type Track 0 Power dBm 0 0 Rec Time 00 00 00 00 Rec Date 01 01 1904 Scan 0 EF il i77 all Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 34 The following figure displays the transmission delay of the target in green the transmission delay of the sectors
31. 4 OO FF 40 64 Fa sc CO 2 SB 01 90 60 08 CO 00 O05 FO 75 CF FF OO 1B CC CO 44 10 41 FC 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 OF v Msg Hr 4 ize Status Hot au Time mz1 25 35 i Level LHP B Frame Unnumbered Response CRC Hot nu Format UA HERO Nigh P F 1 User data Hone Lx ize Status Hat aw Time ms 14 23 i Level LAF E Frame Unnumbered Response CAG Hot aw Format OM HeBos Hex PF llzer data Hane 2 5 3 X 25 Displaying Mode X25 is the third layer The number of messages the size the status the timestamp in ms the line and the level are indicated Also the kind of packet the CRC bytes the format byte and the user data are shown Comm Layer Tx analysis Msg Mr 12130 Size 5 Status Hot av Time ms1 490560 30 Line 2 Level E28 Packet Flow control amp reset CRC Hot nuu Format DCE RR bit Hone D bit None FER 2 Peso H bit Hone GF I 1 LGH LEN 1 User data Hone Msg Mr 12127 Size 5 Status Hat au Time mz1 490548 25 Line 2 Level x25 Packet Flow control amp reset CRC Hot au Format DCE RR bit Hone D bit Hone PAR 1 Pes H bit None GFI 1 LGH LEH 1 User data Hone Msg Mr 12124 Size 5 Status Not aw Time ms1 490536 35 Line 2 Level x25 Facket Flow control amp reset CRC Hot au Format DCE RR bit Hone D bit Hone FOR i nol press H
32. 60 0 80 0 100 0 120 0 7140 0 160 0 180 0 D 50 000 200 0 2200 D 1 1 208 055 150 000 100 000 50 000 0 000 100 000 ee al 150 000 215 245 No Math Define Math Slant Y Nm SFile info Lo Rev start Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 ACCEPTANCE V 443 RESULTS SCFIL 203190802 02 sefi_203_190802_02 548 Mese 59 16 iy rz vos x F 2 1 Color Display Rey L Entire file 55 11687 Messages in file 4192 Messages loaded 101 60 mHE Revolutions cale 4 020 TYP 050 Mode 2 Code None None None None None JE 1 1L JE 1E 2000 Message Info SSR Target Report S Address x 0 Recording Time 10 10 09 184 Recording Scan Recording Date 19 08 2002 Recording Azimuth 0 00 deg Record Number 1 r Message Contents 010 Data Source Identifier SAC axa3s4 SIC 181 148 Time of Day UTC ime 10 10 08 562 a Target Report Descri led Wild rd ptor IS I2 a TYP Single SSR detection 848 Measured Position in Slant Polar iud yen RHO 117 5 Mm THETA 300 21 eat 3 R Code in Octal Representation G G L 8 Mode 3 A 3312 000 ode C Code in Binary Representation G G a Mode C 16000 ft 138 Yodan Plot Characteristics Primary Subfield SRL SSR SAM PRL PAM RPD APD FX RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 3 1
33. BSG cable From RVI box The Interrogation of the radar must be fed via a RF signal coupled from the Sum Channel of the radar This can be done using a Coupler and an attenuator BEWARE the RFTS has a maximum input power of 10dBm typ range 10 gt 50 dBm so put 60 dB attenuation between the Antenna and the RFTS input Typical 20 dB for the coupler 40 dB attenuation adar Rf TESTSET IW 2 1 7 4 RFTS Software The RFTS Interrogation recording software is similar to the RES software See 2 1 7 2 for details 3 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 ELT omen d intaseh dadn ume RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 13 2 2 Recording in Central Mode In the central mode the data recording is performed by means of one EDR and GPS systems recording the data of N nodes of the cluster which is brought to the central point by means of a Wide Area Network One RES or RFTS per Node can perform the task of recording the interrogations but typically this function is not used in this mode 2 2 4 Individual Connections The following pictures provide an indicative connection list for connection of the PTE P5 recorder to each of the three setup locations of the experimental POEMS Phase 2 Y connection passive Cat 17 data w local CAT48 SVC CAT48 Lap B HDLC zz remote CAT48 PVC eae femote CAT48 SVC orkstation CAT17 CHA CAT48
34. Commo faire pz fa eoo rers szsa reser e578 2000 nomo eooo Eon A vald segels e s000 wise neis zsoo osoo sooo po poo Comme taire pz fe esoo ous pars es pem 2000 onoo froo Er fir proe nee ses sass esse z000 ooo io L L LCLCLCLCL LCLCL LL S S E E E N E E 7 If the user clicks the 2 button the table is printed 8 If the user wishes to print the graph he has to click the eae assent cladvenies olume RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 41 9 Use the tabular output to create a table from the graph data 10 The data can also be passed to a histogram function by clicking the button 11 The cursor can be used to query on specific points in the graph 5 3 5 Data Link Probability of Successful Comm B Delivery Through CatO48 Analysis The PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis calculates from the ASTERIX Cat 048 message individually for each target the probability of successful Comm B delivery through Cat 048 This probability is defined as the ratio of the number of ASTERIX Cat 048 messages containing the user selected BDS in the Mode S MB data data item of Cat 048 compared to number of beam dwells during which the MB field was requested This number shall be calculated as follows tend tstart TGICB Tend is the time of the last TRD of that target and tgtgyt is the minimum of the time of the first TRD of that target cont
35. DU 110 100 Target Info Q 4 Code 7555 FL 269 S 394006 AF2142 Range Nm 39 95 Azimuth deg 150 22 I I I I I I I I I I Im S 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 erem Eee 50 o C BackGround TRD Azimuth deg E 77 nara RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 nask dedna RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 1 Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Network Analysis 1 0 Introduction This section of the PTE user manual relates to the analysis of Surveillance Coordination Function on a Mode 5 station and a Mode 5 Cluster Typical parameters related to the delivery of SCF data between the individual Station of a Cluster are assessed in this section You will learn how to operate the different tools designed for this assessment A special section in the PTE Reference manual Chapter III is dedicated to the details and theoretical background of the calculations of the data link analysis parameter See also SASS Se PTEP1 2 5 Application Note 002 Single Station Recording Cluster Analysis Using PTE P5 Five steps are required to perform the data complete link analysis 1 Data Recording 2 Data Conversion and Merging 3 Data Linking 4 Data Analysis 5 Data Displaying Some of these steps have to be repeated multiple times dependin
36. IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX di RUM6 Table of Contents v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE Ua oe uM 4 o WI WI iu eah r ll 36 lt 99 IX 42 44 46 50 50 50 90 50 51 92 02 79 79 79 79 80 82 82 83 O 0000701 Ai BDO WH Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Table of Contents 5 Chapter XI Network Recording Tools on UDP IP XI 1 1 0 Introduction XI 1 2 0 Network Recording Hardware Requirements XI 1 3 0 Making a Recording Checklist XI 2 3 1 Procedure XI 4 3 2 Connections XI 4 3 3 Recording the Data UDP IP recorder XI 5 3 4 Converting and Viewing the data XI 7 3 3 1 Introduction XI 7 3 3 2 Convert vi XI 7 3 3 3 Conversion of UDP IPRecorder Data for RASS S AnalysisXI 10 RUM6 Table of Contents v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE i 7 2 Eee i fall 44 mil Volume 4 RASS S User Manual e Chapter e Chapterll e Chapter lll e Chapter IV e Chapter V Chapter VI e Chapter VII e Chapter VIII e Chapter IX e Chapter X e Chapter Xi RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S4 Information l Organisation of This Volume The RASS S User manual is a complete user manual describing how to use the hardware and software of the RASS S Radar Analysis Support System The RASS S User manual is divided into seven volumes Volume 1 Introduction Technical Specifications Volume 2 Antenna Diagram Measurements Volume 3 Reply R
37. Line selection 1 ASTER I ww V 1 ASTERIE 2 DDE as iens dadia oume zi RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI 20 5 Start conversion Click the Start button to start the conversion While the convertor is running five features can be used to observe the data being converted Hex PPI Info format and stats The conversion process can be stopped at all times by clicking the LI button The data already converted converted is saved to disk The conversion process can be paused at all times by clicking the button By clicking the button the conversion process can be advanced one message at a time Each message can then be observed using one different viewing options Releasing the button will relaunch the conversion process Depending on the computer performance data format and traffic density conversion may take from 5 to 100 of the real recording time Therefore we recommend not to use the PPI display while conversion is taking place except for brief checking or for real time checking while recording is taking place If available use a fast desktop workstation instead ofa portable laptop for conversion ihiiaselt cilisis Wem B RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI21 6 Running a batch of multiple conversions
38. RASS S vero Covers SASS S PIE P1 P2 P5 RASS M ini ium gt EDR Control P5 vi mI gf r Recording PPI D HD size 78150744 ZR RadarAnalysis Support System for Site Measurements User Manual Volume 4 Senal and LAN Radar Data Recording amp Analysis Conform RASS S v6 1 0 Product Conforms RASS M v6 1 0 Product Conform PTE P1 P2 P5 v4 4 Product Conforms SASS Se v4 4 Product Released December 2003 RASS S User Manual Table of Contents Table of Contents Volume 4 Chapter I Introduction 1 0 Radar Data Recording and Analysis 2 0 Radar Data Recorder Hardware 2 1 Radar Data Recorder RDR 184 2 2 Extended Data Recorder RDR 339 3 0 Software tools and related files 3 1 Radar Data Recording 3 2 Radar Data Analysing Chapter II Radar Data Recording 1 0 Introduction 2 0 Radar Data Recorder Hardware Requirements 3 0 Data Recorder Connections 4 0 Making a Recording Checklist 4 1 Procedure 4 2 Checking the Data Data Analyser 4 3 Replaying the Data Replaying vi 4 4 Recording the Data Bit Recorder 4 5 Convert Radar Data 4 5 1 Introduction 4 5 2 ConvertRadarData vi 4 5 3 Conversion of Data Recorder Data for RASS S Analysis Chapter III Radar Data Analysis 1 0 Introduction 2 0 Radar Data Analysis 2 1 The Inventory tool 2 2 Analysing the Data Statistics tool 2 3 Analysing the Data Probability of Detection Calculation Chapter
39. RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 Fy N E i ENE hii fill rll i E mil Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 8 Recording HD pas kb Time 02 00 00 1 1 1904 UDR Status UDR serial Mr At the right hand side there is a PPI panel to monitor the radar turning ACP ARP information If no radar timing signals are connected this panel will not be updated and the dial will not turn Notice that it is not mandatory to have the radar timing signals connected to make an UDR Serial recording However some analysis features are not available when ACP ARP signals are not connected PPI P Make sure all the necessary hardware connections are made properly before proceeding 2 Run the UDR Serial Recording tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window The first time the tool is run the preferences window will automatically pop up This window can also be called by clicking the preferences button Preferences i UDR Preferences vi General Linel Line Line settings 1 Physical Layer 1 Layer U HDLC Line Type Type Passive Appearance pce Protocol Rx Clock Tx Clock External Baudrate By default the Line tab is set to front Three tabs are selectable The tab General is used to specify the number of ACP pulses per revolution connected to the UDR 12 bit 4096 ACP per revolution 14 bi
40. T x soale Jl 9 521 w X 6 The general results of the delays are shown in the tabular display under the graph Comm Cre ntRate se pe resonsoes ara snes sara rrooo r 000 roo ms ps paosoopozss pss pose 7267 reco eoo 600 rr E 7 If the user clicks the button the table is printed 8 If the user wishes to print the graph he has to click the LE 9 Use the tabular output to create a table from the graph data 10 The data can also be passed to a histogram function by clicking the button 11 The cursor can be used to query on specific points in the graph zu Huse uns oume RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 46 5 3 7 Data Link Model B compliance Analysis The PTE P2B2 Data link model B compliance status calculation calculates for a whole scenario without any filter applied the following percentages of success of the data link exchanges performed during the scenario run The data link model B compliance status shall be equal to the percentage of successful run within a complete scenario e GICB BDS gt 4 0 e Comm C e Comm D e Global GICB Comm C Comm D model B compliance status A run shall be declared successful if e all the data link transactions Comm C and Comm D are successful e All GICB extractions has been successful The PTE P2B2 tool declares GICB extraction successful f
41. The Recording functionality of data for data link analysis purposes consists of the recording of Radar Surveillance Data asterix cat 48 on X25 3 level Data link messages asterix cat 18 on Lap B or X25 3 level and Interrogations replies data The first two are recorded by means of an EDR and GPS unit The connections and operations are the same as in SCENARIO case See 2 1 1 for details 2 1 2 Interrogation and Reply Recording In order to record the interrogations and replies we need the RVR pulse recording software to create an interrogation reply recording The complete setup and operating sequence is described in Volume 3 chapter IV of this manual In the special cases where you do not require the reply data but only interrogation data we can also use the RFTS or RES in stand alone mode and record the interrogations locally on the RFTS or RES This feature is described in 83 3 of Volume 3 Chapter IV IVS export 2 1 3 Order of Launching the Tools It is very important that the tools RVR pulse recorder and EDR control are launched in the proper order First load both tools and launch them Next Click the Start button of the EDR control tool and wait until the GPS is synchronised Wait until the north mark of the radar has passed by watching one of the software dials or monitoring the ARP led on the AFU or RVI and click OK in the GPS window Then guickly start the Pulse recording before the next ARP p
42. arp file Poems EXAMPLES 5 TAKEZ arp EDR index file for search in asterix loggings idx POEMS EXAMPLES 5 TAKE2 edr EDR raw recorded data all framed messages edr E POEMS EXAMPLES 5 TAKES idx fl e POEMS EXAMPLES 5 TAKE utc EDR UTC log file from GPS utc file x Lj RESULTS uy a POEMS EXAMPLES 5 TAKE tal poems examples 3 takez S4R te poems examples 3 takez S4RD E poems examples 3 takez S4R5 E poems examples 5 take S45 d POEMS EXAMPLES 5 rlg v OU scenario kr a POEMS EXAMPLES 3 bg poems eee Aircraft database AC file Ti poems examples 5 547 Original scenario Relative timestamped S4TJ file E poems examples 5 scen Original scenario definition file Scen file fas poems examples 5 TBDE Transponder database TBDB file fas PORE eene T Transponder Information data file for RES TI file Scenario positional data for RES TP file Scenario Transponder to target link file TRID RES preferences file Result file Scenario data S4RA file Converted Cat 48 data S4RD file Result file Asterix data S4RS Time merged Scenario data S4SC Scenario result log datalink events rlg poems examples 3 TP a poems examples 3 TRID al RES Preferences Lj vigo poems examples 5 take2 pls 5 1 Generation of Scenario In order to perform a Pd Code performance and Accuracy analysis of a Radar we must first inject a scenario into the radar Typically these scenarios shall
43. m Sum fg NeMahfg Mo Math fg 6 2 1 5 Display of the roll call re interrogation rate for a selected set of target reports RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 e Re use the Rr f Range display and preferences defined above e Reload the data and define the parametric filter set e g Range lt 50 Nm and FI 300 LoadTRDDatafromFolder vi Please select the data for layer 1 r TRD Folder pathname PlayStation Alain C AMP AIGN S4 PTE P2B2 TESTING LINKED_D AT A REC LIVE TRD Scan select I od r Filter CALC Datalink transaction And TRD Range Nm And TRD Altitude ft False 50 000000 30000 000000 is equal to is less than is less than Volume 4 3 cisgexelie aadrentes RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 83 6 2 1 6 Display of the roll call re intemrogation rate in a color display e Select the proper X and Y scales in the data display Define XY Axis vi Benea TRD Range Nm f TRD Azimuth deg R Axis Azimuth deg v Y xis TRD w Range Nm T e Next click the Third View button and select Rr as Z scale Define Z Axis vi Bewley 8 CALC Rr Ni Nei Z Axis CALC Ww Rr Ni Nei v Cursor fij ats aro TRD Range Nm 2398 230 220 2105 200 el 2o00 190 Color scale 180 170 160 1507 140 130 Cursor Legend TRD
44. r Failures ACAS RA AICB Comm D Comm C CNN RTT eT NND es heal dedtentes Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 65 9 By loading filtering zooming and selecting custom X Y axis a specific data set can be displayed on in the Data Display tool This data subset can be saved to disk by clicking the button The following window will appear SelectFalder vi Please select a TRD folder to save the data LINKED _DATA T E C3 LARGE MODELB TEST3 i Cj RADIAL 36 CEN1 DFS Cj RADIAL 36 SCENI TI CERCHI Cj RADIAL 36 SCENI T2 Cj RADIAL 36 SCENI T3 1 RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T4 queues 7 pipri i RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T6 b uua 17 3 21 08 12 2000 Select an existing TRD folder to be overwritten or create a new TRD folder to hold the data subset A progress bar in the lower left corner will indicate the progress of the save process 10 By loading filtering zooming and selecting custom X Y axis a specific data set can be displayed on in the Data Display tool This data set can be displayed as a histogram by clicking the histogram button l Histogram The following window will appear Multiline Histogram vi E Histogram x r Settings r Statistics Hits 274 0 absolute 8191 645 Total 260 0 Q Relative 2 549 Mean EE J Cumulative 15 724 3 471 Bin size 15 929 0 220 0 Inclusion 34 774
45. 0 600 o o b Comm A throughput delay L 0 550 9 o eo o o Comm C throughput delay 5n L1 o B o MIT 0 500 o 9o a o B4 o 0 450 5 e a 8 e g 9 o B8 o 0 400 b g o 0 350 s rp AE Iz eg emi x m I I I I I l I I 1 I I I I 5 0 10 0 15 0 20 0 25 0 30 0 35 0 40 0 45 0 50 0 55 0 60 0 65 0 70 0 75 0 80 0 85 0 90 0 95 0 IX 38 6 The general results of the delays are shown in the tabular display under the graph Exo tege p y Y Ly e y o k AICE throughput delay t isos 2966 ear ases err rrer loses osse pe aco sedleres oam eres om posoz osse oss Ho peces osor ooo Josor onoo o Joss ozs Es pues pass nose pass loose lovee ose ose rt LL 7 If the user clicks the button the table is printed 8 If the user wishes to print the graph he has to click the button 9 Use the tabular output to create a table from the graph data B 10 The data can also be passed to a histogram function by clicking the button 11 The cursor can be used to query on specific points in the graph RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 hace Gedronties Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 30 5 3 4 Data Link Failure Analysis The PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis separately counts the number of the following types of data link exchanges which were failed e a announcement of a
46. 14 972 15 806 16 64 17 473 18 308 19 142 19 976 20 809 21 643 22 477 23 31 24 144 24 978 25 812 26 647 27 48 Azimuth Nm Speed Nm h Heading deg Cat 48 A codeCat48 Time False T Swap 500 135 i 134 574 134 646 134 697 134 735 134 764 134 788 134 807 134 824 134 837 134 849 134 859 134 868 134 876 134 882 134 889 134 894 134 899 134 904 134 908 134 912 134 915 134 919 134 922 134 924 134 927 134 93 134 932 134 934 134 936 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 ACCPTANCE P1 4 TAKE2SSR txt 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 0 11 16 53 273 1200 11 17 00 078 1200 11 17 06 086 O 11 17 08 680 O 11 17 09 625 1200 11 17 12 086 1200 11 17 18 094 1200 11 17 24 102 11 17 20 102 1200 11 17 1200 11 17 48 1 1200 11 17 54 109 1200 11 18 00 117 1200 11 18 06 125 1200 11 18 12 125 1200 11 18 18 125 1200 11 18 24 133 1200 11 18 30 133 1200 11 18 36 141 1200 11 18 42 148 1200 11 18 48 148 1200 11 18 54 148 1200 11 19 00 156 1200 11 19 06 156 1200 11 19 12 156 1200 11 19 18 164 1200 11 19 24 164 o cOocOooOoocococooooooooooooooooooo oo cOocooOooooooooooooooooooooooooocooo BE z A Vbit i v Volume IV RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and A
47. 14 bit ACPR 16284 16 bit ACPR 65536 Host Settings Line None wi Number H GPS Timing L use GPS Timing UTC Conment r Outgoing SYC LCN Range Mintcn o Maxtcn 1 There are eight tabs selectable of which seven are accessible from the EDR Serial Recording tool The tab GDLP is not accessible from the EDR Serial Recording tool disabled The tab General is used to specify the number of ACP pulses per revolution connected to the EDR mandatory for GDLP PSR Scenario Generation 12 bit 4096 ACP per revolution 14 bit 16384 ACP per revolution 16 bit 65536 ACP per revolution ACP Input a 12 bit ACPR 4096 3 14 bit ACPR 16284 3 16 bit ACPR 65536 The host settings panel is only used for the GDLP functionality and PSR Scenario Generation The host line is the serial communication channel used for streaming data to the POEMS bidirectional serial communication There is only one host line available RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 d mask dackonies_Youme RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 7 The physical channel selects the hardware connector and the logical channel selects the X25 logical channel when applicable to be used as host line Host Settings Physical Channel
48. 2l button will display the third axis in absolute values The default representation of the dot the point style can be chosen from a picture list by clicking the button The graph is redrawn with the point style of your choice This does not change anything for the colour scaling or XY scaling The selector just on top of the graph displays the current Data Display layer which is represented in the Third view tool 1 RADIAL 36 SCEM1 DFS ww The user can select one of the 10 layers of the Data Display tool and the corresponding data will be loaded in to the Third View tool with the third axis as a colour scale Data Display layers with no data are listed as None zs siters nb elsi Volume zi RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 73 RADIAL 36 SCEH1 DFS Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone 0 Hone 1 2 4 T 6 T 8 9 1 By clicking the button select query cursor and X button centre query cursor the query cursor can be dragged to a specific target and the corresponding target information will be displayed in the target info panel Target Info C Y G amp Code 62o N H FL 220 Range Nm 61 28 amp zimuth deg 222 89 13 Scan button to open the Data Link Status Display window The information displayed in this window is linked to the target selected by th
49. 300 0 280 0 2600 240 0 Fa Message Info 220 0 Network Information 200 0 Pal Record Number 6366 S Address x n Recording Time 16 43 22 228 Recording Scan 190 07 Recording Date 05 12 2001 Recording Azimuth 196 50 deg 160 0 t Message Contents 1400 57 8183Data Source Identifier SAC x SIC 838 cage i 812 Oata Destination Identifier f DAC B amp xiz DIC 34 100 0 e BBaMessage Type HBA Network information a 358 Cluster Station Hode List LU SAC maB8 SIC 038 SAC mxBb SIC B48 60 0 SAC ei2 SIC 34 SAC BHxl12 SIC 836 40 0 SAC BeBe SIC B44 20 0 00 7 m imm Ine 1 mmi i r EA I 55751392 56000 000 56200 000 56400 000 56600 000 56800 000 57000 000 57200 000 57389 39 No Math Time of Recording h m s Zooming and panning in the display can be done using the graph palette PERG TERE F azae T e I auto scale X axis y z auto scale Y axis z li i auto scale Z axis zm X axis settings EE Y axis settings er Z axis settings E Zoom tool fh Pan tool Eta Select cursor X Centre cursor e Select default cursor type Connect dots is display To get more information on a specific point position the red cross cursor on that point and observe the message information panel Click X to centre the cursor Click Es to 5i nask dedne Volume 5 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII I8 select the
50. 3323 The second number is the maximum width that can be used for printing the list according to the vf Portrait selected printing type For viewing purposes only wider list can be used The value behind each item is the individual width the item will take in the list Items with a width equal to zero are currently not implemented To view the list click on the button To leave the Data Export window and return to the Inventory click the button Depending on the selected items the following window will appear notice the the data is sorted in ascending order according to the consecutive selected items RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 E j anf js I es mil s Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Oo ati s Fee Chapter III Radar Data Analysis PrintTables vi Inventory listing Layer name 1 opportunity raw S4RD Window x max 291 14 x min 279 55 1v max 113 81 Nm v min 103 78 Nm Rec Date a mReo Time th m Sean s addres 3 a corr Range IN azimuth Trac Type av 2 cvco T fa ti 1999 Joss z549 is lo irri sao messe peesos o ose 1111 1 ijo nn eo fores pessis o fer 1111 _ fis fo fon emo forz foeseze o jose 133 0 J fie fo fun feso froc cae faesaos o jose roro J rp b b b Qo I i D D a m A 4 wg on Qo I D D D o D A No e e cen D D D a m A
51. AN Ni Nei Rr Ni Nei NaN Link Info TRD Index O Link Index Count S48 1 Countsig 0 Count IRD O ComtS17 2 Data Display Info P5 vi Data Display Info P5 vi fa f a i IRD DLF f TRD S4 TRD Ext 848 SCF Y RSTERIX Rec Tim SAC 146 Tim 1 048 Mea RHO 896 nod Amp SAM 170 Tra Rec Azimuth 302 871 deg Cat848 record 1 1 e 13 07 49 284 458 H M S Rec Date 16 01 2002 Rec Scan 828 G18 Data Source Identifier 6x 08 SIC 434 e of Day UTC Time 13 07 49 2734 820 Target Report Descriptor TYP TYP TYP ie Ier ajajoje 8 1 8 sured Position in Slant Polar Coordinates 248 67 Nm THETA 325 42 070 Mode 3 A Code in Octal Representation yv G a L e Mode 3 A 1000 e C Code in Binary Representation 8 G G Mode C 19000 ft y 138 Radar Plot Characteristics Primary Subfield SRL SSR SRM PRL PAM RPD APD FX aja 1 ajeajajajea li tude of M SSR replu dBm 228 Rircraft address 1 248 Rircraft Identification PTEGG1 161 Track Number 0 r 208 Calculated Track Yeloci ty Ground Speed 550 00 kt Heading 135 88 ick Status CNF RAD RAD DOU MAH CDM CDM FX a 1 aleajajajaje RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 imtersoft
52. B8m8 881 8802 B B Finally the tool has an indication of the recording time beware is computer time so make sure the computer clock is set correct before launching LabVIEW and the Buffering 2 Now Run the UDP IP Recording tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window Now setup the filter parameters This can be done by clicking the preferences button Setup UDP IP parameters vi Stream Port Destination IP Source F ASTER IX B 1234 am Hal Hal ma aa 881 681 Bes Bias AG 881 881 Be AG B81 Gal Aes Now define the first filter This is done by clicking the Add button A filter definition window will appear UDP IP filter parameters vi Format Stream Fort Destinatian IP Source IP T ASTERIK f s RUM4 Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 nask dadn met RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XIS In this window select The protocol used in the filter Currently limited to ASTERIX and DDE Format The stream reference number 1 32 Multiple filters can apply to the same stream but the recording formats Asterix DDE must be the same The port number 1 65535 used in the recorder the same for source and destination The Source IP address in dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx of the UDP IP source The destination IP address in dot notation xxx xxx xxx xxx of the UDP IP destination If the user enters a value erroneousl
53. BDS D scan CommD txBo Bos f1 scan code Change zo N R x60 BDS f scan Max acquisition scans GICE 20 ModelB logic error 1 if evnt exchngs Min of Succesfull GICBs run 20 0 The data Linking process uses the data created by the recording and processed in the Merging step to create a new logical data file called TRD or Target Reference Data In this linking process the software parses through the reference data S4SC or S4RD files the asterix image files 548 S18 and Interrogation Reply files IRD to create cross reference indexes All data is linked using two main criteria S address and time of detection or recording Since 5 address is a main criteria the linker does not allow duplicate S addresses A second reason behind this limitation lies in the fact that Data link messages Asterix Cat 18 sometimes have no time of detection embedded and have no reference to duplicate S address reference values Therefore we have to use time of recording for linking which does not allow for discrimination between duplicate S addresses The details of the operation of the linking process can be found in the PTE Reference manual and ADD RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 a Huse Gaines oume S RASS S User Manual Input Analysis Parameters Time window mz Time Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 16 710 00 s between Runs Li Comm C
54. C co ce we pip I oO D m a D A e e ce we hy o D A tN N e j mer eoo fioeosel2e5205 o fs 1111 _ reo ir sooo iossos peeser o e 11099 hs o in fao fosos o jose 19 1 I nm eo esszpeszes o 1939 _ jo in eoo rssz2 pesezr o jose 19 1 42 50 727 22 p rrr sono poster esses o e 1039 s2sss zs lo un e0 _ ros aas 2a5 07e o e 103 9 sieere ze p un s2o rosses pese o e 103 9 43 26 822 25 p un so meses mzsoz o pe roro b rn eoo orizs pezse o ss 19 1 nm eoo rszopezzes o pe 31939 _ nm eo weszspezze o fer 19319 _ nm je weisepezsz o p 1 010 o NNNM o qum aoo nossspezere o sek 1 oto JJ o qum joo rmsszopessez o sek i oro JJ Clan o o o e RETE wW wo IRE ET ojo o AR Nop r2 W eI e j wih oO o eo wo Do Ian eo e e O j so o D D Nm m a m o o o o 0 A BR BR A SE 4 04 Od ho Io Bof fi fih fii FH A i O 4 c co C 4 4 ei m a m m 64 I en 1 N N eo I oO m m a m A 4 Ww eo eo I 0 Do Ian ojo AIR Ol Nya e 9o C o on h e eo I a52 28 EJ aka be I D jso D so O j so a D A A C eo D e 0j
55. C amp D a i rborne ASTERIX Cat818 record 1 3 Time 13 42 04 492 H M 5S Azimuth 328 898 deg 936 Data Source Identifier SAC 6x60 SIC aoa 837 Data Destination Identifier SAC 8xaaa SIC aoa 868 Message Type 6x46 GICBLextraction 005 Mode S Address 6x666081 828 GICB Extraction Periodicity 4 sec 836 GICB Properties PRIORITY 8 PC AU s n a 825 GICB Number 1 827 BDS Code 8x48 13 11 aa Info General 18 11 2000 Date B lre dy S address co Datalink Type x 500 Datalink State Data Display Info vi Data Display Info vi Type GICB Extraction GICB Reply State GICB Start Interrogation Az Int ACP 2 592773 deg Int Power 49 29 dBm int ze at fo solo Jo o ss ss ssjo o 73 Int type GICB End Interrogation tUTCp 13 42 05 196 921 UF 5 PC 0 RR 20 BDS40 DI 1 IIS 0 Reply Reply type F21 Range 35 502 Az Reply ACP 2 600959 Az Reply OBA 5 000000 Reply Power 3515 OBA Value NaN Code e taoao Flag b 11000010 Reply aslo fe o 4o ao ao 40 40 40 lao fo Jo t MBS 0 MESz 0 LOS 1 RSS 0 TMS 0 44 000001 Reply tRUTC 13 42 05 197 057 DF 21 FS 0 DR 0 1IS 0 IDS 0 4code 1000 MB 40404040404040 44 000001 RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 4 code Change Bre Comm B Cat18 invalid Comm amp
56. Cat48 S4RD mp 5 25 294 YOR Leena pm m m Jj 9391 sey XJ Sc en K S4SC 0 400 0 600 Range Nm UE RN o S4 feel o oadlayer2 Nen Scenario reference file ne erm n seem mem ven One EET Vm usd ues m load layer3 6 Pd and Accuracy Tool 8 Pd amp Acc vi E 7 JHA uses Inventory Asterix Result A g 27327 Pott et aon 1658 man jpa mn ot ses Temporay E EET 99 938 Pd Excl Acq 1618 Pd Excl Acq S Memor im 0500 Azimuth window deg y as 0 50000 Time rsen 1 90 Av Acq scans Av Acq scans S 5 0000 Range bias input Nm d Autosave 100 00C P SSRevA PIS MScvA r Progress T J 0 051 Range bias Nm 0 019 Range bias Nm 0 0000 Azimuth bias input deg 100 00C P SSRevC i 3 P MScvC D or R l AR B Time error compensation 0 000 P SSRivA o zi P 96 MSivA i Cat 8 e Su t S yi Y B Show Linking window 0 000 P SSRivC 0 i P 96 MSivC i 0 371 PSSR Ft 6 PSSR Ft S O SSR analysis only 21 XXXX J Resolution analysis 172 082 Time bias ms 37 73 Time bias ms CORE 0 011 Azimuth bias deg 0 019 Azimuth bias deg RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 T Fig 2 Steps for Pd and Accuracy calculation step 7 Create Results File s Print results and export link tables to spreadsheet formats The visualisation of results can be performed from the inventory tool or from a spreadsheet appl
57. Click the Tab in the lower left corner to show or hide the Batch Process oO OV E H iJ e Ee gt JL LL Conversion Selection Info m Pues Start scan z Reoxthg v surtsan Message E Macintosh AY CAMP AIGN S4 ae i ACCEPT ANCE V440 DATA RAW ROR NI ime 379999 Date Destination passe w Current Kb T ERA error Macintosh AV C AMF A amp IGN 24 Display ACCEPT ANCE V440 RESULTS udpz S4RD oO ES Progress Line selection L1 Format 1 ASTERIKS E stats es Batch Frocess i Jii e J JL Jm Ju Running a conversion can be a time consuming process s Therefore if you want tot run several conversions in a row you may wish to put them in a batch process Copy the single conversion selected by the green rectangle in the Batch List to the controls in the EDR functions section Add a single conversion at the position of the green rectangle to the Batch list Remove a single conversion at the position of the green rectangle from the Batch list Save the Batch list to disk for later use or reference Load a Batch list from disk gt Run the batch this will successively starts the specified conversion Abort a running batch procedure UL View Preferences Settings To build a batch list fill in the LAN convert parameters as for a single convert process Make sure all needed parameters are accounted for Then click the button to add the single conversion to the batch conversion list
58. Copynght This RASS S4 manual and the hard and software described in it have been developed and copyrighted by Intersoft Electronics and are licensed to you on a non transferable basis Under the copyright laws this manual and or the software may not be copied in whole or part except to make a backup copy of the software Copyright 1992 2002 Intersoft Electronics All rights reserved Intersoft Electronics Lammerdries 27 B 2250 Olen Belgium Tel 432 14 23 18 11 Fax 32 14 23 19 44 intaisat clecenties otume 3 RASS S User Manual RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S4 Information 3 Trademarks of other corporations The following trademarks have been mentioned in this manual and are credited to their respective corporations Apple the Apple logo Macintosh and Finder are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc LabVIEW is a registered trademark of National Instruments Technical Support It may occur that even after you have patiently read the manual and experimented accordingly you still have problems in figuring out what exactly is happening If you are having problems it is recommended to carefully read the manual In case you would not find the appropriate answers to your questions or if you would still be in need of assistance do not hesitate to contact us on the following address Intersoft Electronics Lammerdries 27 B 2250 Olen Belgium Phone 32 14 23 18 11 Fa
59. Load TRD data from disk Save TRD sub set to disk Filter TRD data dynamic layers only gt Start dynamic layer Pause dynamic layer Ll Stop dynamic layer Step backward in dynamic layer m Step forward in dynamic layer Show preferences window Print current display ET Multi Level Linking Tabular TRD Data View Export Histogram Display Third View Display Data Link Status Display nask dackonies_Youme 3 RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 54 Counting Function v Stop the Data Display tool Most of the left side is occupied by the geographical display At the right side we can find the legend manual Designation Flag and the Target Information Legend BackGr Map Layer 1 Layer z Layer 3 TRD Slant Y Nm TRD Slant Y Nm f TRD Slant X Mm ww y 300 a laa L 4 a a ayer 275 E d 250 a MR unit SE z Layer 5 225 d M 200 ut QU enitn 1 Layer amp 175 Eg Aet E a x Layer 7 225 57 DA X gt oN DE UC Layer 8 m 0 5 o 7470 0X4 M X L E 1 We JA P ayer 79 i FON EU X f X en y 307 f i H fes gebe 280 X i i g Layer 10 25 bi y E E odere beber 1 f f 1 i i f i Mo Fla 25 s PR ET I 1 Si 26 Ps P t a 50 27 et TTI amy p g r a
60. Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 17 View EDR Preferences vi Format j Scan bounda ASTERIX v On ARP v 1001 042 quantisation factor Nm Only the convert tab is editable All the other parameters were stored during the recording process and are not to be changed for the conversion process Enter the format to be used for the conversion ASTERIX or RDIF In case of ASTERIX enter the correct SIC and SAC code to be used during the conversion process In case of ASTERIX cat001 002 conversion also enter the 1001 42 quantification factor for the X and Y range Use On ARP as Scan boundaries since this option will make sure that the scan numbers entered in the S4 files are correct If you have not connected ARP ACP to the EDR you can use the On North Message option 4 Line selection The boxes of the used line s will turn green upon selection of the EDR recording folder line sel You need to specify manually which serial lines are included in the conversion by checking their respective boxes 5 Start conversion Click the Start button to start the conversion The process takes a few seconds to complete The progress bar indicates the progress of the proces A new scenario file named x S45C is created in the result folder This file contains an absolute time stamped 54 version of the scenario This file is the first reference input of the Pd and accuracy
61. Progress Process time Macintosh AV CAPP AIGN S4 RCEL TR408 PATS ENN s quoted Message Time 12 07 22 009 Rey o Date 12 02 2001 Current Kb 15 137 g total f m m Line selection Cancel OK Dj1b92L sL 4 D 1s D e Error o 00 01 24 788 s RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 Las inccoseit Gladventes _Voume4 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 19 3 2 Life data Merging without re data 3 2 1 Operation for LIFE In case LIFE data is used for the data link analysis we need four different data files S4RD converted radar data converted straight from EDR Asterix recording S48 Asterix cat 48 surveillance image file converted from EDR Asterix recording 518 Asterix cat 18 data link function image file converted from EDR Asterix recording IRD Interrogation reply data The LIFE mode of the Time Merger can be used to create the IRD datasets without reply data Additionally the tool creates 54RD 548 and 518 data from the recorded EDR data For this purpose the tool must be switched to LIFE mode LIVE re T J SCENARIO LIYE Pd amp Acc The first file S4RD is a substitute for the scenario reference position file S45C since this is not available in life situation Any other source of reference data e g SASS S multi radar information P4 reference output data could be used as a substitute for this file but converts for
62. RASS S User Manual Chapter VII P1 P4 interface VII 2 Pause conversion Step conversion LI Stop conversion View EDR recording preferences Which lines are used during the recording EDR file format only Stop the P1 P4 convert tool At the upper right side of the window there is the source panel This panel is used to select a source folder an EDR recording folder a scenario folder or a folder containing a DGPS data file Source At the lower right side of the window there is the destination panel This panel is used to select a destinatiuon file for the converted data Destination At the left side there is a format panel which allows the selection of the file format to be converted Depending on the selected format different parameters are presented to the user Format a sa File Format J EDR File Scenario wr At the lower left side of the window there is a progress indicator which also indicated the size of the P4 format file Progress F4 n n Kb ro 2 Before proceeding make sure you have the necessary file available 3 Run the P1 P4 convert tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window as here Gledventes__voumes 3 RUM4 Ch VII P1 P4 interface v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VII P1 P4 interface VIL 3 Several selectors will be disabled according to the current file format selection They will become enabled during the process 4 First th
63. Test counter Counter name type Interval Counter Contents CALC Linked S48 In Indiessmeussmulttleccubteimcan bended oa same way multiple counters can be added to a single type of Analysis Each counter is represented by a line in the graphical display or by a line in the tabular display of the main window En Use the button to cut a counter from the counter definition list use the button to copy a counter from the counter definition list or use the button to paste a counter into the counter definition list Once the analysis definition is finished use the button to save the analysis in the CAMPAIGN GENRAL TEMPLATES directory The new type of analysis will be added to the Analysis types list and will appear from now on each time that the TRD Counting window is opened Click the button to close the TRD Counting window and return to the Data Display tool rinse dadon eleme 4 RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 79 6 2 Some application examples 6 2 1 Display of re interrogation Rate To Perform the re interrogation rate assesment following graphs are required e The roll call re interrogation rate per scan which will consist of a graph with on the horizontal axis the scan number and on the vertical the re interrogation rate e The roll call re interrogation rate per range window as a sliding window result w
64. The progress can be monitored in the progress bar After copying the window will close automatically The saving process can be stopped at all times by clicking the cancel button Notice that in total four different kind of files are saved to disk sequentially This means that whenever a saving process is cancelled the remaing files are not saved and the corresponding information will not be available 9 Click the Recover button to recover the data stored on the EDR hard disk whenver the system has malfunctioned Even in a case of power failure the data already recorded can be recovered after start up of the system As long as there is no new recording started by clicking the button the previous recording can always be restored including the UTC time stamping As a maximum the last 5 seconds of the previous recording can be lost 10 The EDR recording is an endless loop type recording This means that whenever the end of the EDR disk is reached the recording will restart at the beginning of the EDR disk During this process the contents of the EDR disk is gradually overwritten while the recording goes on The Custom Save function can be used to retrieve a specific part from the recording that is on the EDR disk Launch the Custom Save function from the EDR recording tool user interface Custom Save The following window will appear Offload Data from EDR vi 5 10 57 11 569 12 01 13 672 Start T End T 0570272002 2 Ur
65. To change a conversion from the batch list select it with the green rectangle and copy it up to the single conversion display using the button Change the parameters and add the new parameters again to the batch list by clicking the button as iens dadia oume S RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI 22 Click the button to remove the selected green rectangle conversion from the batch list Click the gt button to start the batch convert The batch convert can be stopped at any time by clicking the Ll button s Close the batch conversion window afterwards by clicking the button Once the required data is converted in to the same format it can be used for comparison or analysis in the selected radar analysis tool lie incre Gladventtes oiume4 S RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 1 Chapter IV Serial Communication using UDR 1 0 Introduction The final stage in the radar chain is the data processor and the corresponding data transmission elements data lines modems telephone or dedicated data lines The USB Data Recorder UDR 600 is a low cost data recorder that supports passive recording of serial data on two channels simultaneously Unlike the existing generation of RASS 5 equipment this new device connects to the host com
66. Via an export to a spreadsheet application 2 Via an export of the data to one or two new S4 data files 1 For the exporting of the data use the export button above the Mode S or Mode SSR result fields This will evoke a file dialog allowing you to specify a text file containing all linked data for eater Mode SSR or Mode S data Following data is present in the list for Mode A Ref A code Reference Mode A code Ref Time Reference Time stamp Miss Miss flag 0 or 1 Acquire Acquire Flag Range Nm Range of reference after eventual correction Azimuth Nm Azimuth of reference after eventual correction Speed Nm h Speed of Reference Headingl deg Heading of reference Cat 48 A code A code of Asterix plot Cat48 Time UTC timestamp as output by radar Cat 48 or 1 False T False flag E sitsers ft clecvenies Volume IV 3 RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Swap A Vbit C Vbit A Val amp Corr C Val amp Corr A Val amp lIncorr C Val amp Incorr Range Nm Azimuth deg Rng Error Nm Az Error deg Time Error ms Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation Swap flag VI 23 A valid bit as copied from Asterix I048 070 bit 16 C valid bit as copied from Asterix I048 090 bit 16 A code found valid see definition below and Correct C code found valid see definition below and Correct A code found valid see definition below and Incorrect C code fou
67. Y 1 LL Sy es C ee A Lo LL eee ie ee Se p qq E Lo LL eee ee 3 a a T ee LL Ll a qu E q Tq NENNEN ee Lo LL eee E 1 es ee ee ee LL E ss ee gt D N The top row buttons operate the window Toggle Help window On Off Save list to disk RASS S file Load list from disk RASS S file Import list from spreadsheet Ei Export list to spreadsheet Cut item from list Copy item from list paste item in list Empty list em Undo last delete Select all Print list directly to paper Close window ka Sort the data using one of the columns 8 If the user wishes to print the graph he has to click the button back in the result viewer window This will bring up the print graph window RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 E z Volume 4 an tersolelectremies RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 30 Report vi All colored items may be changed by the user Logo a Title Date x Fig d4 r Copies 4 Activity Target p fig e p Activit 160 ae a 140 120 100 80 onan a 2 o 0000 o u oo MESI a n 40 ph 20 a Humb suum uum 2000 ooo Ue a a 1 aoe et 1 eae et 1 ar omen 1 ires e beso rnt iex 1 esse Lg Hr C 10 14 18 iC 20 24 28 2C 20 34 23 3C 40 44 48 4C SO 34 38 SC 60 64 68 6C 70 74 T H
68. announcement of an AICB and its output through an ASTERIX Cat 018 message for that target e d announcement of a broadcast Comm B and its output through an ASTERIX Cat 018 message for that target e e announcement of a broadcast Comm B BDS 10 or 20 and its output through an ASTERIX Cat 048 message for that target e f announcement of a Comm D and its output through an ASTERIX Cat 018 message for that target e 2 transmission of the first segment of a multi segment COMM A by the station and the reply to the last segment by PTE P2B2 eh transmission of a COMM C reservation by the station and transmission of a Cat 016 message acknowledeing the transaction The PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis separately calculates individually and for all data link exchange types the processing delay that the first up link component of the following types of data link exchange were delayed ea GICB BDS gt 4 0 e b Comm A e c Comm C The PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis separately calculates individually and for all data link exchange types the delivery delay between the end of a down link exchange and the output of the relevant ASTERIX Cat 018 048 message for the following data link exchanges types ea broadcast Comm B A48 e b GICB BDS gt 4 0 A48 e c AICB A18 e d Comm D A18 The PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis separately calculates the duration globally for all targets of Comm A Comm C and Co
69. as X axis or Y axis The other axis can be chosen according to the kind of display the user wants to make gt axis Processing Delay s Vertical fM axis Mode 4 cade firec time Flight Level flrec time Recording Time h m s Y R fleleyation R flrec time amp z firec time Track 2f rec time Define Custom Menu From this moment the necessary data is present in the Inventory tool and can be used for analysis All functions available in the Inventory tool can be used for this analysis There are no limitations since these sector and north messages are treated just like other regular targets RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH E j anf js li 2 mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis SSS inyventory2B vi 2 el 5 Le JL seveveveven ESI ES ca EI ES Jd Processing delay s PLE UM t Specie 0 f 44 atts te ee utt Md id Me kee gb urine eas pie M RARUS Bistrot et s act 0 00 03 28 40 m BackGround m Map 4 ij m oi 5 8 te S ut t amp AMICI ie a I I 09 42 00 Not defined s 4 4 an oe 4 4 t Mou il t P id Ot 5 ttt 2 h e g VAN SERS T sens S t M a PE CE TV i Vect 395 38h 2583 ORF ah ae ret Hn LAG de e s s i Q d Yeti
70. both channels of a pair need to be configured individually 2 Select the Line Type electrical standard RS 232 or RS 422 Continue only if Active type is selected 3 Choose the protocol appearance of the recorder DTE or DCE This is the logical appearance of the channel electrically it is default wired as a DTE 4 Select the Rx and Tx clock generation internal or external If internal is chosen for one of both specify the baud rate Pudrste 5 Select the protocol Layer to be used for the active recording LAP B X25 or U HDLC If LAP B is chosen only the LAP B layer parameters need to be entered further These parameters are named according the ITU T recommendation X25 For more details about these parameters consult ITU T recommendation X25 If X25 is chosen continue with the list 6 Enter the X25 Layer parameters These parameters are named according the ITU T recommendation X25 For more details about these parameters consult ITU T recommendation X25 7 Select a number of SVC s and PVC s from the specified list Click the button to a Volume 4 mamci aedrenies RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 9 make a selection The following window will appear X25 Channel Select P5 vi SVC In SVC Out Current Selection List EDR hardware channel 1 LCN List 100 m 200 Calling Address None Call User Data
71. connection on an existing link of Cat 48 make sure you connect the proper data to the EDR input In this case the recording mode is passive and no active parameters need to be set 2 1 2 Surveillance Coordination Function Data Recording For the SCF data we can not use an active connection since the data is exchanged between stations Each EDR channel typically has ONE receiver channel and ONE transmission channel That is why in active mode you can record both Tx and Rx side of the connection using one EDR channel and in passive mode two channels are required to record both sides of the X253 or lap B connection Therefore you need to connect the data by means of a double Y connector see below and configure the EDR recording software as Double channel Passive In this case two paired EDR channels are used to record data of one communication channel RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 ihiiaselt cledkonies ame zi RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 5 2 1 3 EDR Connections The complete setup for this purpose is described in Chapter IV of this volume The user needs to make the required connections for the X25 3 or Lap B link between the EDR and Radar plus make sure the EDR is connected to the GPS in the proper way The EDR can be used in passive or active recording mode One to Six Serial channels can be connected to the EDR input channels Use the supplied dB25 cable
72. from the list to add a new Z axis definition or click on the P button to edit a item of the list The editing loading and saving is similar to the X Y axis definition used in the Data Display tool Automatically the corresponding data is loaded into the tool and displayed as a colour scale The progress of the loading is displayed in a progress bar LI E The full range of the colour scale is visible in the colour ramp The colours go from black over blue green and yellow to red It introduces a feeling from cold to hot or from low to high The first time that the data is presented the colour scale is auto scaled this means that the highest value is represented in red and the lowest value is represented in black In between there is a linear distribution of the values according to the corresponding colour The colours can not be changed only their corresponding values can be changed RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 z nask cladrenes_ voume4 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 43 Color scale l A a By changing the high or low colour values the colour scale can be redistributed over a limited range All values above the highest are represented by red all values below the lowest are represented by black Auto scaling for the colour axis is similar to the auto scaling of the XY axis by using the Il button The precision of the colour axis can be cho
73. miss bit and Flag2 acquire bit in the scenario data this indicates the Acquire misses The search is simplified by using an index table of all ModeS A boundaries This way the search is simplified to a small section of the array 5 Once all reference entries have been searched the reference array Flag1 field will flag the misses since no corresponding Asterix field was ever found the Flag2 flag will flag the acquisition misses misses in the first N plots of a track and the asterix array Flag1 field will flag the false targets since no corresponding Reference field was ever found 6 The result of the search is presented to the user using a table see 5 6 above Several cases are counted P total number of scenario reference plots Qz Total number of Misses fields with Flag1 field set to true in reference array RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 inset cadvenies Volume 1V RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VL34 R Total number of acquisition misses fields with Flag2 field set to true in reference array T Total Number of Mode S targets 7 The Theoretical Indication of Average Mode S Acquisition reports is calculated as Acq ModeS R T The Theoretical Indication of Mode S Probability of Detection is determined by the ratio of the number of target reports with measured position P Q including and not including acquisition target
74. o aja ojo The tool mainly consists of a graph and a tabular display representing the results of the calculation according to the selected analysis type To select a specific analysis use the Analysis types selector in the upper right corner of the window v AC AS RA Status Cat 18 activity Comm D Status Failurez Link Count This list contains all theanalysis types which are at that moment present in the CAMPAIGN GENRAL TEMPLATES directory An individual analysis type from the list can be edited by clicking the button The following window will appear with a different contents because the selected analysis type is displayed by default Define TRD Counters vi B Be 4 Analysis ACAS RA Status Counter Description List e ounter name yp nterva Z ACASRAA ACAS RA O 1 0000 ACAS R S C Counter Contents acas kA 2c CALC ACAS RAO ACAS RA C Click the button to load another analysis type The following dialog will appear RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 intiaselt dadventies_Vvoume z RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 25 File Dialog TEMPLATES mre O ACAS RA Status cnt O CatO18 activity cnt O Comm D Status cnt Failures cnt D Link Count cnt Please enter a Caunters Template filename View All Click the LE button to clear the display and start from scratch to buid a new an
75. the algoritm also includes the relative distance between two adjacent targets in the X and Y fields of the Result Asterix file allowing resolution analysis Calculations use the standard RASS S4 plot data fields as available in PTE P1 See PTE P1 2 ICD version 3 1 chapter IV 3 3 3 Time stamp Mode S address Mode A code Altitude Scan number Range Azimuth Velocity Heading Delta Azimuth Delta Range Delta time Status bits DRange DAzimuth Optional fields not present in the original P1 S4 format X value in Result Asterix file was renamed towards DRange Y Value in Result Asterix file was renamed towards DAzimuth to allow resolution analysis RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 a biegen Gladvonties VolumelV S RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI3 The output results of range time and azimuth errors and biases are provided in two separate result files witch contain the same data as the two input files but including the accuracy and resolution figures and corresponding flags set or reset The proposed method of calculation of Pd and Accuracy of EC were used Details are described in 4 and further on this document 3 0 Summary of Pd Calculation steps The Pd and Accuracy tool requires two input files both in the 54 format In order to obtain these two files several important steps must be performed The PTE P1 inventory is used to l
76. the last 24 bits of the reply are taken from the Modes address stored in the interrogation In case of a long reply the missing 56 bits are determined from the result log and the data link scenario files This depends on the type of data link transactions AICB GICB Broadcasts ELMs The range and azimuth values of the replies are determined from the scenario S4EV or SAT file correlated with the target list a Huse Gaines oume S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 11 Trajectory Scenario Generatio XXXX SATJ UU Nem KC S4 datafile Event Scenario Generator Ce S E Scenario Result cenario Folder POLIS Transponder TI Interrogation File Initialisation file XXXX INT Target position jdn stream file TP DRIVER C ee EN Result Log File S4 plot datafile Tm RLG S4EV Including events eS Transponder data XXXX stream file TD T Nm Broadcast Comm B OK stream file DLBR o NER AICB t fil XXXX stream file Ee Raw EDR folder Ne Downlink Comm D xxx ane i stream file DLCD a NS Transponder m as E EDR NE recorder chi cm2 gppa The process of linking all data seems complex but in fact the user only needs to specify the different folders containing the data The ones written in red above Finally an IRD record is created containing the following data fie
77. 0 1 00 Hits z 000 20 Low 4 0 High 35 0 25 0 20 0 Comment 15 0 10 0 50 25 299 QFE Levent pm m w M TERE I I 1 0 0 1 i i l Comm B The histogram function also allows us to calculate all statistical values mean Max STD etc but this time only for one of the six activity selections The histogram allows you to switch between the six graphs without going back to the original graph by using the selection menu rilal 11 The cursor can be used to query on specific points in the graph The information on these points is provided in the right bottom side of the window Corso EA Comm E Scan S address Run x zD o RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 z R Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 32 5 3 2 Data Link Exchange Analysis The PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis calculates the number of data link exchanges during each beam dwell i e for a single target reference point TRD per target and per radar beam classified according to the following definitions Exchange classification A S C S NCO C a Broadcast Comm B Y Y Yo Y Y b GICB BDS gt 4 0 Mt END ES E c AICB X Y Y Y Y Y d Comm A single segment Y Y MEET NN e ACAS RA extraction YO Y Y or h LEY uo f Comm A multi segment Y Y Y i g Comm C UELM
78. 0 5 0 2 5 0 2 0 0 5 0 D 5 0 2 5 02 5 0 5 5 D 2 5 85 0 85 0 979 972 59 979 5089 0 970 990 9709 709 97 99 9494 tt FSFE FSS SSE SSE StS SESS SSE SSE SEE AME Se OES 409 994 9949 4 9 1 800 1 600 D Azimuth deg m BackGround m Map 2 zone 1 dem TE No Math HL No Math Ty No Math Ip Pj 4 44 The resolution diagram should be viewed ina third dimension namely color Therefore we will select the Third View window using the 3D button on the inventory menu var The Third View vi must also be set to represent a calculated error vaule in its third axis A Range or A Time J AAzimuth so select J x z gt A Azimuth deg 1 zone demo S4RS Color scale Custom Legend a ACode 1146 Nj 100 FL s 30 34 1 00 Range Nm Azimuth deg D J3 ara D Azimuth deg m BackGround m Map Volume IV nasci Gedcrenies RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 31 Once this is done you can use the histogram on this window to calculate histogram data on the error value Multiline Histogram vi a Range tml e r Histogram Hits r Settings r Statistics Q Absolute 24 903 Total e Relative 0 011 Mean J Cumulative 0 009 0 001 Bin size 0 0
79. 02 2002 Use the red slider to mark the beginning of the section to be retrieved and use the blue slider to mark the ending of the section to be retrieved The corresponding start and end time of the section to be retrieved are displayed in the red and blue boxes below the sliders The amount of data that is selected is displayed in MegaBytes 0 420 Mb By clicking the button the save procedure is initiated see 8 The Custom Save as naak dadene m4 3 RUM4 Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 14 function runs in parallel with the EDR recording tool and has no influence on the performance of the EDR recording tool The Custom Save function can be opened used and closed using the button without interrupting the EDR recording 11 The Auto Save function allows the user to automatically save files during a longer period of recording Launch the Auto Save function from the EDR recording tool user interface Settings Infa 05 02 2002 Date iene Last recording wd Mest Sheduled O0 00 00 D 01 01 2040 Auto Save Earliest Entry 05 02 2002 Current Size Mb Free HD Space oo Mb Destination Folder Just like the Custom Save function the Auto Save function runs in parallel with the EDR recording tool and has no influence on the performance of the EDR recording tool The Auto Save function can be opened used and closed
80. 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder II 27 View site file vi Gite Info Data 1 2 Data z 4 Identification Localisation Shu CEDE Latitude 50 50 04 dd mm z Station identifier BERT Longitude 4 50 00 dd imm 5z Altitude m mst Radar type Comb ww Operation Comment Conv Frot Revolution time s a Data 1 PSR Max range Mm 3 Data 2 MISSR Max range Nm 3 Data Z acFR 12 bit rey O Data 4 Cancel The top row buttons operate the Site tool Toggle Help window On Off a Load site file from disk Save site file to disk Empty site file e Display map Cancel Ignore settings tool and return to Convert Radar Data tool Save settings and return to Convert Radar Data tool The following information can be stored in the site file Station name Station identifier Radar type PSR M SSR COMD Revolution time Max range ACPR Latitude longitude altitude time zone Comment to be included with the site information In the Define protocol panel one of the maximum four protocols can be chosen Def Prot a Data 1 3 Data 2 C3 Data 3 3 Data 4 It is this selected protocol that will be used in the conversion The protocol parameters can be entered in their respective panels using the tabs at the top of the window nask dadn Voume zi RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder 11 28
81. 1 if evnte exchngs x Min of Succesfull GICEs run 20 0 PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis separately counts the number of the following types of data link exchanges which were failed e a announcement of a Mode A code change without any change in the Mode A code reported in an ASTERIX Cat 048 target report for that target during the N1 scans following the announcement e b announcement of an ACAS RA without any output through an ASTERIX Cat 046 message for that target during the N2 scans following the announcement e c announcement of an AICB without any output through an ASTERIX Cat 018 message for that target during the N2 scans following the announcement e d announcement of a broadcast Comm B without any output through an ASTERIX Cat 018 message for that target during the N2 scans following the announcement e e announcement of a Comm D without any output through an ASTERIX Cat 016 message for that target during the N4 scans following the announcement e f invalid sequence of multi segment Comm A interrogations eg transmission of a COMM C reservation by the station without transmission of the close out acknowledgement or technical acknowledge reply provided by the transponder during the N3 scans following the reservation zu Huse uns oume RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 23 Max Comm A duration 3 0 This parameter N1 determines the maximum duration that is allowed for a Comm A transac
82. 10 X25 Channel Select P5 vi SVC In Y SVC Out Current Selection List EDR hardware channel 1 Called Address List J Calling Address List Calling Address None Call User Data 8 U HDLC is the Unnumbered HDLC protocol It is a limited subset of LAP B it is merely a one directional streaming of the data without any checking of the protocol using the unnumbered information frame format of the HDLC protocol It is typically used for PSR Scenario Generation by the PTE system It can be used to supply a transmission clock for U HDLC outputs of the POEMS Click to save these settings or click to discard them and return to the recording tool 3 Now check the Recording panel Recording HD size 8958120 kb HD pos Kb Time EDF Status EDF OF EDE serial Nr EDR 267017017 The Recording panel displays the hard disk size in Kb the current hard disk recording position should read zero at start in Kb the EDR serial number and the EDR status The EDR status indicator can have 4 different values EDR OK ready to start recording EDR NOT FOUND check if EDR is turned on check SCSI No disk Inserted insert a pack for EDR with JAZZ drive only Disk is write protected unlock the pack for EDR with JAZZ drive only 4 A recording will always start at HD position 0 Beware a new recording will overwrite the data stored o
83. 2002 The window should now contain the cluster information data for all Nodes in the Cluster i IBBILLLLGG CGGGGEIGCBGGGR CLLLCLLGGAGGOALREUCLE 2 E Fz Nodel Node2 NodeS Node4 Node5 Node amp r Station Mode Identification Localisation Activity Name ORLY Latitude 48 42 12 420 dd mm ss Active Identifier ORLY Longitude 02 20 09 250 dd mm ss FPE Altitude m msl SAC SIC Type yp eT 8 4 ze r Operation Comment Revolution time 6 000000 s 1010 M SSR Max range 256 0 Nm ACPR 14 bit FY rey Cancel Click the OK button to confirm 5 Now select the Map for Node 1 For this select Node 1 in the Node Selection slider and select the SMGET Exported Map folder for that Node SelectFolder vi Please select the folder containing the System Maps Info recording for Node 1 ORLY System Map Folder Macintosh AV C AMF amp IGN 24 F3 TESTING AV DATA MAPS 250nm Cancel ORLY250 Select 15 09 35 Orly 06 02 2002 6 Next select the EDR recording folder for the first Node click the Folder Select next to the EDR recording RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 E Ee Aadria Volume4 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 19 SelectFolder vi Please select the folder containing the edr rec
84. 4 3 14 11 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X47 18 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 3 14 11 02 By entering a window size the amount of information displayed in the window can be changed A window of 5 means two positions to the left and positions to the right with the selected target in the middle All means that the complete trajectory is displayed Display S all C Include DD Filter Show Scan Number If you select Include DD Filter the filtered data is also shown but in grey The Window Position slider can be used to scroll through the complete trajectory of the selected target This manipulation is actually the same as moving the query cursor in the Data Display tool across the selected trajectory There are two timing cursors available t1 and t2 grey lines in the display Both display the UTC time stamp of the transaction that they are locked on At displays the difference in seconds between the two timers This time difference is also display at the bottom of the data link Status Display in between the two cursor lines Use the X button next to the UTC time to centre the respective cursors Timing Info Source Detection gt 1 H Hoz7 48 085 sza t2 10 27 48 085 938 X t t1 nonna non s The Source determines the time source This can be time of detection only for cat 48 and some cat 17 messages or time of recording En
85. 4 recordings Last 5 recordings Last 10 recordings Last 13 recordings Last 20 recordings Last 20 recordings All recording An archive size of 3 means that at all times the three most recent saved files are present on the computer hard disk An Info panel at the right hand side displays the current time the next scheduled auto save time the earliest entry of data in the current file the size of the current file and the free hard disk space left on the computer disk When a GPS is used all these time are UTC otherwise the computer time is used Info Current Time 13 25 20 9 Date 057 0272002 Next Sheduled 13 30 00 0 Auto Save 0570272002 Earliest Entry 12 51 28 1 0502r 200z Current Size Mb Free HD Space 2047 Mb By clicking the button the current archive is displayed a inmaak clem Volumes RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 16 Auto save from EDR vi Settings Info Period Current Time 13 29 45 1 05702 2002 Date Archive Last recording ww Nest Sheduled TEn Auto Save 0170172040 Earliest Entry 12 51 25 1 0502 r 200z Current Size b Free HD Space 2047 Mb Destination Folder nr Name Size Mb Time Date 0270118_1436 0 126 13 38 01 18 01 2002 0201181445 0 126 14 40 02 18 01 2002 02701181440 0 141 14 42 02 18 01 2002 0270118_1442 0 126 14 44 01 18 01 2002 0270118_1444 0 126 14 46 01 18 01 2002 12 Clic
86. 5000 09 07 44 00 1 47 z385 OO 5000 09 07 48 000 1 50 40 18 OO 5000 09 07 48 00 1 47 4008 OO M 5000 09 07 5200 1 50 4040 OO 5000 09 07 52 00 1 45 40 30 OO Once the table is created it is presented to the user The user can not edit this table The table consists of two lists On the right hand side data from the asterix is presented On the left hand side the data of the scenario is presented Each list contains the following fields Link nr Link to the record in the other table The link number can be entered in the A code or S address The A code or S address used for the linking process UTC time The UTC timestamp of the reference or asterix plot Azimuth The reference or detected azimuth of the target Range The reference or detected range of the target Miss The miss flag determined as a result of the linking process Acquired The acquired flag as a result of the linking process False The false flag determined as a result of the linking process A code Error The A code error flag determined as a result of the linking process The user can scroll trough these listings using the scroll bars or can use the two index controls on top of the scroll bars marked in the circles below to find corresponding data items If the Lock symbol in the top bar is enabled the linking between the two lists is automatically This means that if the user browses through the scenario data the
87. A code detection shall be determined by the ratio of the number of target reports with correct and validated Mode A code data to the number of target reports with Mode A capability in transponder used to calculate the target position detection m No of SSR with Correct amp Validated Mode A Code Pssrcaa No of Linked SSR Target Reports The probability of Mode C code detection shall be determined by the ratio of the number of target reports with correct and validated Mode C code data to the number of target reports with Mode C capability in transponder used to calculate the target position detection z RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 ak 1 fi rers ciertas Volume IV RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 38 P5ssn E No of SSR with Correct amp Validated Mode C Code T No of Linked SSR Target Reports The probability of incorrect but validated Mode A shall be determined by the ratio of the number of target reports with incorrect and validated Mode A code data to the number of target reports with Mode A capability in transponder used to calculate the target position detection Poca n No of SSH with Incorrect amp Validated Mode A Code adim No of Linked SSR Target Reports The probability of incorrect but validated Mode C shall be determined by the ratio of the number of target reports with incorrect and validated Mode C code data to the number of target reports with Mode C capability in transpon
88. AAzimuth gs Ag In the created result file the AAzimuthg and ARange g valuesare entered in the 54 field A Azimuth and A Range They can be visualised in the inventory tool a biegen Gladvonties VolumelV S z RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 40 6 6 SSR Time Bias and enor Calculation The Mode A Time bias is calculated as follows 1 Using the Mode A calculated reference and asterix arrays see 4 2 all targets having a valid link index all non missed or false plots in the reference array are used to calculate the time error Including the Swap flagged data as The Link index is used to locate the corresponding record in the asterix array AT A Time q Time y 2 The time Bias is defined as TA 1 N XAT A N Total number of non missed Mode A reference plots 3 From this also the standard deviation is calculated as STD V 1 N X AT A T A In the created result file the AT A value is entered in the S4 field A time 6 7 SSR Range and Azimuth enor The time stamp of the target report and reference can differ not only due to the bias but also because the scenario reference positions and time stamps are always related to the moment the target is at bore sight while the radar target reports are based on detection time 1 Because the scenario reference also contains speed and heading the reference position at a time indicated b
89. ACP ARD can be integrated in the analysis A GPS UTC time can be used for time stamping the LAP B X25 ASTERIX serial communication protocol Not used in case of UDP IP Protocol Viewer vi V 1 DE J JL 5 Data so Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 PS TESTING amp V DAT A R Aw RDR 6 NODES 6 NODES N3 6_T1 urce Comm Layer LAPB OW PASTEPLILAP ie Tx analysis Msg Mr 85585 Time 16 28 13 938908 Size 14 Line 6 Status Not av Level LAP B CRC Not av P F 11 aa ac ES 84 1B 08 26 17 OG 88 16 Frame Information Response Format n Ro 3 N S 2 User data Status Not av Level LRP B Size 2 Line 6 Msg Nr 85583 Time 15 28 13 864158 CRC Not av P F ES Frame Supervisory Command Format RR NR 3 N S Msg Nr 8556 Time 16 28 13 863656 Size 39 Line 5 Status Not av Level AP B CRC Not av P F 8 User data 38 66 25 FF D6 68 26 73 CE EE AB D4 SB 49 2E 82 1A 81 96 26 66 OG G 1B 41 41 76 CB 70 66 66 1A GE 34 46 66 40 Frame Information Command Format nig 2 N amp Sdr 2 Size 2 Status n iis linens L3 bol Msg Mr 85499 Tima 1 amp 20 17 3OO fa a History Length Q Relative 2 absolute On Off Im loi Time Apperance Break mode ER T zn Read position 2380 _ kb Rx analysis Msg Nr 85504 Size 4 Status OK T
90. Batch Process nr Source Destination Lines Protocol Export Start scan End scan ESEEIDLI Exporting data can be a time consuming process especially for large files Therefore if you want tot run several exports in a row you may wish to put them in a batch process The following buttons are used to operate the batch export process Copy the single export selected by the green rectangle in the Batch List to the controls in the single process panel s Add a single export at the position of the green rectangle to the Batch list Remove a single export at the position of the green rectangle from the Batch list gt Run the batch this will successively starts the specified export LI Abort a running batch procedure To build a batch list fill in the single process parameters as for a sigle export process Make sure all needed parameters are accounted for Then click the button to add the single export to the batch conversion list To change an export from the batch list select it with the green rectangle and copy it up to the single process display using the button Change the parameteres and add the new parameteres again to the batch list by clicking the button 3 Before proceeding make sure you have the necessary files available PTE P1 EDR recording folders as herent dadene oiumes RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 zl VIIL7 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export 4 Firs
91. Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 a niet dedens Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 18 EDR OK EDR NOT FOUND No Disk Inserted Disk is write protected when something is wrong with the extended data recorder or it is not connected all the functions regarding the data recorder are disabled greyed out 4 Progress bar and PPI indicator If applicable the progress bar will indicate the progress Progress 20 40 60 au 100 If applicable the PPI indicator will indicate the radar turning information during the recording 5 Following Control buttons determine the operation of the Convert program F View Set conversion preferences Start a conversion Stop a process Pause a process Step a process Stop the Covert Radar Data tool This button will close every window that was used by the radar data convertor tool 6 View options Display LJ FFI L Format Stats Info bd Hex d 6 1 Hex a inmaak dadene Volumes zl RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 19 Check this box to enable a window which shows a hexadecimal display of the current conversion 6 2 PPI Check this box to open a window which shows a PPI Plan Position Indicator display of the current conversion SS PP IMonitor vi M R 63 7 Ac 280 7 amp
92. Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE NEM _ a l 4 B B BB jut nell Merrill eee RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 5 Tx amp Rx Ext Signal Element timing DCE RS422 amp RS485 RS232 Gnd In TxD TxD Out RxD RxD In RIS RTS Out CTS CTS Gnd Gnd RxC TrxC TxC CTS TxD Out TxC TxC RxD Out RxC RxC In via 100O to 12V via 1000 to 12V RTS In DTR DTR In via 100Q2 to 12V via 100 to 12V DTR In TrxC TrxC RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 E Aahh i M il i Volume t RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 6 4 0 Making a Recording Checklist 4 1 Procedure The extended data recording will be set up in several discrete steps a Hardware connections b Making a recording c Converting data into a convenient format Corresponding to each step one or more tools will be used a amp b UDR Control vi This tool controls the recording d Convert vi This program converts the recorded data into a DCP MUX or RASS S5 format Before attempting to perform a recording first very the correct detection of the device by the OS This can be easily done by selecting Change Settings from the miscellaneous menu from the RASS 5 Toolbox The UDR LED should be highlighted NE Settings vi IN Available Hardware RVI bal RDR 3 PDP fF EDR d GPS GPS 450 1 UDR s
93. Connections For details on the connections of the RES generation tool we refer to Volume 5 chapter III of the RASS 5 User manual The user has the option of choosing between the FAT or SAT setup or opting for FRUIT injection or no FRUIT injection The Pd and Accuracy tool performs in any setup as long as the EDR ACP and ARP input is connected to the ACP ARP output of the RES This output can be found on several places but the best location is to tap it from the AFU unit If the AFU is not used you can use the ACP ARP output of the RES directly 4 2 EDR Connections The EDR can be used in passive or active recording mode One to Six Serial channels can be connected to the EDR input channels Use the supplied dB25 cables or build your own matching connector For details on the serial pins see Volume 4 Chapter IV Connect the EDR ACP and ARP input to the RIU ACP ARP output Preferable use the AFU in between Use a High Density dB15 extension cable Male to Male to perform this action An other possibility is to use a High Density dB15 to five BNC video cable In that case use the Red ARP and Green ACP cable 4 3 GPS Connections Connect the GPS according to the drawing made on the next page If for any reason you can not use the GPS make sure that the computers connected to the simulation RES and the recording EDR have the correct UTC time set try to sync them to whithin one second The results will not be tha
94. Duss Gatwick PVC DB15HDm DYNATECH Figure 5 Y connector for passive connections for Gatwick RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 nask cladkonies oume zi RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 14 Y connection passive Cat 17 data wa local CAT48 SVC local Cat 48 PVC aa emote CAT48 SVC oam k COMMUNICATON PORT orkstation rrr an an n n n a CAT17 CHB CAT48PVC Duss DB15HDm Toa am am am am Gr m ae Ge Gr Gm Gr Gr Gr Gr Gr Gr Gr Gr Gr Gr Gr GG Go A a Orly Gatwick SVC Modem OOOOOOOOOOO X21 Figure 6 Connections for Dusseldorf RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 IM s niis Gadvenies__voume X 15 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis Y connection passive Cat 17 amp Cat48 data local CAT48 SVC local CAT17 SVC mixed signal Line CAT48 CATI7 tg CHA SIR Orly Toulouse Oc0O000000000 Oo 000 0900 00F NE to Dusseldorf Oc0O0O0000o0O0O00Q OO O Q0 0O00 000 SIR DB15HDm to Gatwick OG O00000 00 0 OO 0 00000000 ISDN ISDN modem modem Gatwick Dusseldorf Figure 7 Connections for Toulouse lis inact cilzduemitas Volume 4 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysi
95. EDR Export P5 vi Single Process Source Folder Selection Start scan La End scan Destination falder Display L1 Format _ Stats Line selection Export L1 02 Cs DI Os Os MU 2 Run the EDR Data Export tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window The user interface of the EDR Data Export tool is divided into several functional panels At the top of the window there is a row of buttons to operate the tool Toggle Help window on off Which lines were used during the recording Start export ee U step export View EDR settings used during the recording 3 RUM4 Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 az inmaak dadene olume 5 VIIL3 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export pe Pic 2 Maa a a a n n n n an Error display with detail button The EDR Data Export tool user interface is divided into three parts The first part is the input panel for the single process export parameters Single Process Source Folder Selection Start scan End scan Destination folder Display Format _ Stats Export Line selection Oh Cle O80 Os D In this panel the Source folder containing the EDR recording can be selected Source Folder The destination folder to store the exported data can be selected Destination folder Ry Which line to exporte can be selected Line selection Li D2 Uz 4 Us Ce The start and end scan of the
96. Export RFS Data Export Make histogram form current display Third View display J Add label to display Remove label from display Stop the Inventory tool II 3 Most of the left side is occupied by the display At the right side we can find target information l 150 l 200 l zu l 300 4 Codes o Jaler Target Info C A Code FL 5 Range Nm 0 00 amp zimuth deg 0 00 ME Type Track Power dBm 0 0 Rec Time O0 00 700 00 Rec Date 01 701 1904 Scan T The bottom part is reserved for the layer manipulation see later aa ij m Pe E no matn ff C Mo Math ff No Math fi 2 Click the LabVIEW Run button in the upper left corner of the window to start the Inventory tool 3 The first thing to do is to load a site file This file contains information needed for some of the functions in the Inventory tool Background map display vertical display RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 E i All i77 audl p unes RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis II 4 max range display Click the Site button to load a site file Site Yiew site file vi Identification Localisation Station name Intersoft Electronics Latitude 20 00 00 dd mm s amp Seim enirir E Longitude 4 00 00 dd ram 22 Altitude m msi Operation Comment Cony Prot Revolution time 3 Data 1 a Data z MISSE Max range 150 0 Nr
97. IF Sre Address 192 168 60 36 IF Ost Address 192 168 89 93 Options User data BF Hi BF Hi 12 54 mb B2 ua BA Ds 14 C2 81 4A E D9 Meg Hr 1 Size BB Status Time i3 42 81 8178 amp 88 Line 1 Level version 4 Header Length 28 TUS H Total Length 42 Identification 55A Flags Fragment Offset i B TIL amp 295 Protocol 17 UDF IF Sec Address 192 168 80 30 aom ae mm 2 6 3 UDP Displaying Mode UDP is the third layer The Source and destination ports and data length are indicated Also the user data are shown Comm Lawer UDP Ex analysis Hag Hri 2 Size Status 0K Time 13142161 956006 Line Level Transport 4001 4001 18 B uda BA Da i4 4A E Da i Size Tima i13 42 81 817ma88 Line Level Transport Src Port 4861 Dst Port 2 4881 Length 22 83 86 BE C1 CH FE 4H E 09 23 oo 5 Mur ante Line Level Transport Sec Port 4881 Dst Port 4861 Length 21 User data 88 66 aD Ci 96 FF 4H E 09 66 a pl RUM4 Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 Mak dachonies_Yome RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 13 2 6 4 Data Displaying Mode Comm Layer The data displaying mode shows the ASTERIX RDIF DDE data translated into a readable text according the the EUROCONTROL or AENA standards Ex analysis Rx analysis Hsg Hr 3 Size BH Status Time 13 42 82 2738BBH Line 2 Level ODE CatB48 Length BB46 818 Data Sou
98. III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH E j anf js li 7 mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 17 Multiline Histogram vi Range tw fa r Histogram r Settings 4 r Statistics Absolute 115414 347 Total Relative 52 342 Mean J Cumulative 21 554 STD 6 998 Bin size 59 152 RMS lower Inclusion 135 436 Max Bins 2491 2 m Population r Statistics non zero 2205 Count 52 242 Mean m Population non zero 27 554 STD 2205 Count 59 152 Cursor 125 436 2 481 i 30 5 37 5 m Comment Jj es 553 EAE Legend pm m m megla x D O O O O DS O O A ma ma 0 60 0 80 0 100 0 120 0 135 4 Range Nm One of the two axis can be selected using the selector Range Mm in the top right corner of the window The following settings can be done in the histogram function Relative or absolute value representing e Absolute e Relative Cumulative value representing _ Cumulative Bin size value The Bins indicator is directly coupled with the Bin size value 10 000 Bin size 70 Bins Boundary inclusion lower Incluzian These parameters can be altered at any time and this will result in an immediate recalculation and redisplaying of the histogram Some statistics are automatically calculated on the selected dat
99. Kb Tx analysis r Rx analysis r Search Q Msg Nr 6162 Size 21 Status OK Scan o Time 18 12 27 588808080 Line 4 Level ASTERIX Azimuth oo dea Display 4 Timing messages a185 Data Source Identifier SIC 852 SAC ax62 812 Data Destination Identifier ae DAC 6x34 DIC 161 E PPI picture d 00G Message Type 666 Network information 350 Cluster Station Node List 1 SAC 6x62 SIC 652 8x34 SIC 10 12 27 5089 22 327 37 a RUM4 Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 3 14 11 02 E EE a Volume IV m E deett eeditentes RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 21 3 0 Troubleshooting Messages can appear in a message window when something is wrong Under normal circumstances the box is not highlighted Dialog boxes with error messages already existed but they interrupted or ended the program These messages only indicate less critical errors These errors will NOT interrupt the program and will only alert the user that something is wrong e g Now the question mark is highlighted i e more information can be given related to the error By clicking on the Question Mark button a a more detailed information window will appear MSGsDetailWindow vi Kis GsDetail Windaw vi Click Browse button to select and load an EDR recording file 3 RUM4 Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 3 14 11 02 nask cladrentte
100. Mode A code change without any change in the Mode A code reported in an ASTERIX Cat 048 target report for that target during the N1 user selectable value scans following the announcement e b announcement of an ACAS RA without any output through an ASTERIX Cat 046 message for that target during the N2 user selectable value scans following the announcement e c announcement of an AICB without any output through an ASTERIX Cat 018 message for that target during the N2 user selectable value scans following the announcement e d announcement of a broadcast Comm B without any output through an ASTERIX Cat 018 message for that target during the N2 user selectable value scans following the announcement e e announcement of a Comm D without any output through an ASTERIX Cat 016 message for that target during the N4 user selectable value scans following the announcement ef invalid sequence of multi segment Comm A interrogations e 2 transmission of a COMM C reservation by the station without transmission of the close out acknowledgement or technical acknowledge Defined by user reply provided by the transponder by PTE 1 The data link failure result can be viewed by clicking the Data link Failure Data Link Failure button Following window will appear Li Result Viewer vi E Les iJ ESI le we a Mode change failure 5M ACAS RA failure vd AICE failure gt vd Broadcast Comm B failure 5 M
101. Overlap Set 1 Code 2 Code Z Code S Address Tee Cancel The user can select a number of items to be listed from the Export Selection List at the left side of the window by double clicking the item of interest or by selecting it and clicking the button There are seven sources of information Each source has its own specific list with export fields The export selection list is automatically adjusted according to the selected source The selected item is transferred to the Export List and a check mark is added to the corresponding item in the Export Selection list At startup the default Export List is loaded from disk This default list is called DefaultTabularView The default list like any other list can be edited loaded and saved according to the needs of the user A selected item in the Export list can be shifted up Lor down Use the LLL button to delete the selected item from the Export list An Item can be selected by clicking it in the list Once the contents of the Export list is defined it can be saved format to disk Use the Ey button to load format an earlier saved Export list To display the list in tabular view click on the _ button To leave the Data f e Export window and return to the Data Display click the 1 button Depending on the selected items the following window will appear notice the the data is sorted in ascen
102. P5 vi FastFilter r Data Display Layer im iC iX r SCF Analysis Filter a __ None v ORLY v None wv GATW v None 9 au Bete Active X A EA W puss v None e EE F3 NeNe Noo S Address A code and Track Nb can be specified to reduce the amount of data drawn in the graph The user also has to specify on which layers the action has to be performed By clicking the Apply button the fast filter in then executed on the selected layers By clicking the button a more elaborate filter can be composed The last specified fast filter remains active even when the fast filter window is closed Fast Filter TRD P5 vi SCF Analysis Filter 4 r Data Display Layer Worry Kf None v GATw v None pas _ Active XA B In vf DUSS v None O Custom 7 A tind 55 tir 75 Estept ClearAll ClearOne v Alphabetical Field List 10 By loading filtering zooming and selecting custom X Y axis a specific data set can be displayed on in the Data Display tool This data set can be displayed as a histogram by clicking the histogram button Histogram The following window will appear RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 36 Multiline Histogram vi E 2 Eu Tmb Stmtvimm v A Histogr
103. RE C Show Linking Window 0 000 P SSRivC i NaN PIZ MSivC O SSR analysis only 2 725 PSSR Ft NaN PSSRFtS Max Acquisition 4 D 4 q 5 SSR Targets 20 ModeS Targets J Include All Call Targets in Pd 195 883 Time bias ms 55 85 Time bias ms Resolution analysis 0 0523 Range bias Nm 0 0201 Range bias Nm T Nm 5 00 deg 97 Range bias m 37 Range bias m Progress 0 006 Azimuth bias deg 0 034 STD Azimuth bias deg T RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 intact dadon VelumelV RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 19 Next you need to define a time range and Azimuth window for the correlation or linking process In some cases a fixed time bias between the scenario and the recorded data is present The cause for such differences can be multiple Errors in Asterix time stamping of the radar s UTC Bad time stamping recording by the EDR e g recordings without GPS Recordings by EDR without UTC timesync Recording with ACPR ARP of EDR tapped from radar in stead of RIU when scenario in slaved mode In most cases the difference can be found easily using the inventory tool typically range versus radar time graphs will present the difference in a visible way Range Nm Not defined Range Nm f Radar w 21 50 21 40 21 30 21 20 21 10 21 00 P d s
104. Sector 0 as scan boundaries New since release 4 4 3 3 Specify the conversion parameters Click the E4 button to open the conversion preferences The following window will appear RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 3 14 11 02 mask deadmonis Yume RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 24 View EDR Preferences vi Format Scan boundar ies ASTERIX ww On ARP ASTERI Parameters Data Source Identifier SIC a a SAC o 001 042 quantisation factor n Only the convert tab is editable All the other parameters were stored during the recording process and are not to be changed for the conversion process Enter the format to be used for the conversion ASTERIX or RDIF In case of ASTERIX enter the correct SIC and SAC code to be used during the conversion process In case of ASTERIX cat001 002 conversion also enter the 1001 42 quantification factor for the X and Y range 4 Line selection en To find out which lines where used during a recording use the 4 button The boxes of the used line will turn green line sel You need to specify which serial lines are included in the conversion by checking their respective boxes 5 Start conversion Click the Start button to start the conversion While the convertor is running five features can be used to observe the data being converted Hex PPI Info format and stats The conversion process can be stopped at a
105. These data files contain exact copies of the original input data sets with the addition of some accuracy values in the data The A azimuth A Range and A time values Accuracy figures are entered in both the scenario and asterix data files If Resolution analysis was enabled the DAzimuth Azimuth distance to the nearest target in scenario and the DRange values are entered in stead of the X DAz and Y DRange values already present in the S4 file Beware in using the XY display on result data files It will show you DRange f Azimuth in stead Some extra flags have been added in the status1 and status 2 fields Scenario data S4RS contains following extra flags The miss flag as resulted from the linking process is copied inverted into the SSR detect flag of the Scenario data set If data is Mode S additionally the Roll Call detect bit is set in the status field of the Scenario data set if no miss is found The acquisition flag as resulted from the linking process is copied into the Acquisition flag of the Scenario data set if data for Mode S and SSR The A and C code Validated and A and C code Correct flags are added in status 2 field of the Scenario data SARS Asterix data S4RA contains following extra flags The False flag as resulted from the linking process is copied into the False flag of the Asterix data set The A code error flag as resulted from the linking process is copied into th
106. This causes the tool to create the link tables and set the required False Miss and Code Swap bits in this table RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 mack cadvenies Volume 1V RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 21 Depending on the fact whetter Mode S data is present in the data set the Mode S linking window will pop up and or the Mode A linking list will pop up If the linking is successful most miss and false flags will be cleared If almost all miss and false flags are set check the window settings Try to manually link one target and verify the time range and azimuth differences Use these findings to tune the Input Analysis Parameters Show Mode A list vi g 2 x Edit Scenario list r Edit ASTERIX list xcd UTC Ti Bee T False ACodel No Links code UTC Time Azimuth Range Miss Acq wg lt Lin S ne Oem 9s Error ss 123 sooo 09 07 1602 150 3840 OO ez 5000 09 07 1602 1 47 3831 OO 5000 09 07 2002 150 38 62 OO 5000 09 07 20 02 147 38 54 ODO 5000 09 07 24 02 1 50 z385 OO 5000 09 07 24 02 1 47 33 75 OO 5000 09 07 28 02 1 50 zoo OUO 5000 09 07 28 02 1 45 33 98 OO 5000 09 07 32 01 1 50 2929 OUO 5000 09 07 32 02 1 47 z319 OO 5000 09 07 36 01 1 50 2951 OUO 5000 09 07 26 01 1 45 zo41 OO 5000 09 07 40 001 1 50 29 74 OO 5000 09 07 40 00 1 47 z363 OO 5000 09 07 44 00 1 50 z996 OO
107. This event is written to disk along with the exact timing information The edges are sampled with ous interval For a single 9600 baud line this will result in 419200 events s Multiple lines will increase this number depending on the synchronisation of the different clocks Maximum 4 unsynchronised lines will result in a data rate of 80000 events s which corresponds to 320 Kb s one event is 4 bytes This high data rate will prevent this type of data logging to be used for large recordings but it is very suitable for line quality detection 1 Load the Data Analyser vi program from the RASS S toolbox EDE Data analyser EDE Bit recorder EDFE Convert Bit Recording EDR Replay data 2 Now insert a blank disk in the data recorder BEWARE This disk will be overwritten so every data present on it will be lost 3 Start the program using the start arrow in the top left corner of the window Two indicators will tell you if the RDR hardware is working properly The first one displays the RDR status which should read RDR OK the second one displays the RDR serial number RDF Status RDF OF RDF serial Nr RDR_OS 01 036 4 Click the Record button The slider will show the progress of the logging in of Shien llis Volume S RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder ILIO the total disk space The total disk space is shown in an indicator along with an i
108. This is saved to a file in the GENERAL Templates folder so it can be used in all campaigns Allows to add a new custom graph type You can add as many custom graphs as you want and save them together into one file Delete a custom graph Please not that the default graphs cannot be deleted Use this button to rename the selected graph type Select an X and an Y axis data and click OK to continue The selected data is displayed in the graph and the custom display type is added to the list for this choice to PSR SSR elev deg f elevation deg PPI XY Planar vertical Mode 4 code firec time Flight Levelefirec time R Fleleyation R Flrec tire Az firec Eimg Track Flrec time lt PSR SSR elev deg FiElevation deg Define Custom The new custom display types are added after the previous ones They can always be recalled in a later stage of the analysis Restarting the Inventory tool will erase the custom display type items from the list Use the Define Custom selection and the Load function to reload your custom graph types 7 Zooming and panning in the display can be done using the graph palette Ma n I y 7 521 st x IPA auto scale X axis y z auto scale Y axis di X axis settings EE Y axis settings E Zoom tool sm Pan tool Select cursor X Centre cursor RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 a li i Asl i li T il C In E oe Teh o
109. X Centre cursor Enlarging or shrinking the Data Display tool can be done by clicking and dragging the lower right corner of the window Click the HI button in the upper right corner to expand the Data Display tool to full screen size Click the m button in the lower right corner of the window to square the display of the Data Display tool 8 To get more information on a specific point position the red cross cursor on that point and observe the target information panel Remember that only the active layer can be accessed Click X to centre the cursor Click ES to select the cursor This target information can be queried in every display type Target Info Y G 1006 W FL a S 13 PTEQO Range Mm 12 28 Azimuth deg 65 00 Scan 14 4 Code If detailed information about the selected target is needed click the a button next to the target info field This button will launch a Data Display Info window displaying all available information for the selected target The Info window runs in parallel with the Data Display tool and is updated every time the cursor is moved to another target In total there are six different views each displaying information belonging to a specific source TRD S4 TRD Ext 548 518 IRD and Analysis fhiaset cedeniesane zi RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis Time of Ge
110. Y Y Y Y h Comm D DELM Y Y Y x Y Y The definitions of the abbreviations for exchange classification used in the table are e A the exchange was announced during the beam dwell e 5 C the exchange was started and completed during the beam dwell e S NC the exchange was started but not completed during the beam dwell e O the exchange was ongoing neither started nor completed during the beam dwell e C the exchange was completed during the beam dwell but not started ea Y in any column of the table indicates that an individual counter for that exchange classification is required The definitions of the above exchanges are e Broadcast Comm B between the corresponding announcement and reply corresponding to the Comm B e GICB BDS gt 4 0 between the interrogation requesting the BDS and the reply containing the BDS e AICB between the corresponding reservation and close out e Comm A single segment between the single segment interrogation and the reply to the single segment interrogation e ACAS RA between the corresponding announcement reply and reply corresponding to the BDS 3 0 e Comm A multi segment between the first segment interrogation and the reply to the last segment interrogation e Comm C UELM between the corresponding reservation interrogation and close out interrogation default e Comm C UELM between the corresponding reservation and technical acknowledge reply alternative selectabl
111. You can load the Convert UDR Data tool from the RASS S toolbox from the EDR button EDR Data Analyser EDR Bit Recorder EDR Convert Bik Recording EDR Serial Recorder EDR Convert Serial Recording DLP Protocol Viewer EDP Replay EDR Export UDR Serial Recorder UDR Convert Serial Recording The standard convert program for EDR UDR and LAN convert will appear on the screen 1 Convert vi El E FEW Conversion Source Selection Start scan 5 End scan Destination CJ re E Format L1 Stats Line selection i 2 3 L1 4 Os Ce Please consult section 4 3 2 EDR Convert Serial Recording vi in chapter IV of this volume for more information Volume 4 RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE B odes de lu E i Aul i dh mill 7 E
112. a scan based time interval in the Mode A code list The cursor and therefore the target information panel can be locked to a specific target by selecting it in the A code list and clicking the LE button to lock it The cursor is now locked to that specific target and the target information panel is X updated every scan By clicking the a button a label is attached to the target The position and the contents of the label is updated every scan Make sure the label option dynamic is turned on in the preferences of the active layer Click the E button to remove the label RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH a hr j anf js l mil n Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 20 display the labels Click the button to remove the labels button The report window is evoked First you are able to enter some comment and select a figure number to be printed along with the page Change any appearance according to your personal taste and click the print button to create a report or to print the data 13 To print the displayed data click the e 14 Click the button to make a Custom Data Export RFS Data Export by selecting the corresponding item in the pop up menu 5 List Data RFS Export If you select RFS Export a spreadsheet formatted file containing the current displayed targets including filter and zoom will be saved to disk The layout of thi
113. acknowledge closes the transaction for the data link analysis This has an influence on the calculated fields related to the Comm C This parameter determines how the 518 data link commands are linked to the TRD In logic 1 any cat 18 message containing a Mode S address and sent to the POEMS DLF Uplink is linked to the next TRD Any cat 18 message containing a Mode S address coming from POEMS DLF with DI 000 equal to 22h uplink packet acknowledge or 42h GICB extraction acknowledge and with DI 001 D Result Cause equal to Accepted 0h or Rejected 1h is linked to the next TRD with the same Mode 5 address Any other cat 18 message containing a Mode S address and coming from POEMS DLF is linked to the previous TRD This is the most practical way to link the 518 In the second case logic 2 all messages up and down link are linked to the next beam dwell In practise the default parameter settings as shown in the above screen shot work best 8 Once the data is linked six new files have been created in the LINKED DATA folder The names and contents of these files are in fact completely irrelevant to the user since he will only deal with FOLDER names The newly created LINKED DATA folder containing all TRD data can immediately be loaded in the data display see 6 0 further In that case no calculated fields such as data link activity data link delays etc are available yet but the display of the data RUM4 Ch IX Dat
114. and RDR a File DCF RDR 2 If we want to convert data directly from the data recorder and you do not know where and how much data is written on the datarecorder s hard disk you have the possibility to scan the RDR removable disk for recordings First make sure the RDR is connected and a disk is inserted The Main control bar will show following message 2 3 amp v o Scanning of the RDR can be done as follows lie maok Gladventtes _Youme4 zi RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder I 21 1 Select step size The size of the steps which the scanning will take to probe for data The scanning can take a while since all blocks are read This scanning method depends on the step size you specify If the step size is smaller than 64 Kb a slow scan method will be used reading every N kb of data and comparring the timestamp with the previous one the same method as the RASS S v 3 6 5 If the step size is 64 or larger a faster but less accurate method is used using a succesive aproximation algoritme same as all v 4 0 x versions zla Step Size Kb Next click the scan button The progress bar will show the progress of the scanning process The scanning process can be stopped at all times by clicking the Halt EY button The information already gathered is displayed Small recordings might require a small Step Size to be found by the Scan RDR f
115. and step through the export process When not in step mode it is possible that not each individual record is displayed 9 The EDR Data export tool can be quited by clicking the Halt button ry Q intacot cedcvenizs_ome RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 zi RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 9 3 0 Data Import Export The TRD Import Export vi tool allows the conversion between the TSF spreadsheet format and the DSS internal PTE format and vice versa 1 Load the TRD Import Export tool from the RASS S toolbox Inventory Statistics Tabular Pd 3D Pd Scenario Time Merger Pd amp Accuracy eee Data Import Expart 262 Data Linker 2B27 DataLink Analyzer C2EZ Data Display CTED Interrogation Feply LIRE Analyser GDLP DLF 515 4nalyser Asterix Cat048 S48 Analyser The following window will appear TRD Import Export vi Export Folder TSF txt format Result Folder DSS PTE internal format 4 TSF Files found DSS Files found 2 Run the TRD Import Export tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window 3 The TRD Import Export vi tool allows the selection of a Source folder containing one LO or more TSF files by clicking the button in the Export Folder panel SelectFolder vi S Please select an Export folder containing or to contain TSF data E
116. are normally not used Lines are software switchable to RS422 RS485 and RS232 For passive recording only connect the inputs of the EDR mask deadmonis Yume RUM4 Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 3 Tips on connecting the RDR339 DIE RDR connector DB25 Male DTE lt gt DCE DTE lt gt DCE 1 lt gt 1 lt gt f 2 gt 3 3 lt 2 15 lt 24 17 lt 24 24 gt 15 24 gt 17 RDR is changed to DCE with this connection DB25 Female DTE RDR connector DB25 Male SGR lt gt RJ45 2 gt 3 TxC 3 lt 1 RxD 15 lt 8 RxC 14 gt 16 17 lt 8 RxC 16 lt 14 12 lt 11 9 lt 11 11 gt 12 11 29 24 gt 5 TxC 18 gt 4 12V 21 gt 6 12V 7 lt gt 2 Gnd to RS232 Probe box or extension lead The Extended Data Recorder can handle two serial communication protocols LAP B and X25 Both protocols are implemented according to the ITU T Recommendation X25 03 93 For the moment no X25 facility registration is supported Furthermore only incomming SVC calls listed in the preferences are accepted by the system In addition to the six DB25 serial data connectors there is also a SCSI connector a RVI connector and an event input connector foreseen on the back panel of the EDR The SCSI connecter is intended to connect the workstation with the EDR using a standard SCSI connection cable The DB 15 HD RVI con
117. c 20 90 XA E o Pi Le ao 20 80 ET o 20 70 di i FL o9 E o 2 nan f d oo Time Calculator vi at ge 20 60 PM 900 oo o o oo o 20 50 gt oo o ae 2 boo o time scenario 20 40 5t o c 4 m o Qe zj 14 90 45 820 time difference M RON o 3 m cS E time asterix 46187 7053 o o 20 20 02 00 58 117 t o 20 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 im 13 10 34 13 10 29 13 10 42 13 10 45 13 10 48 13 10 51 13 10 54 13 10 Once the bias is found if any is present enter it in the Time bias input in seconds You can also use the Time difference calculation feature by clicking the calc Enter the scenario and asterix start time in the two input controls and the tool will calculate the difference Beware The Time calculation vi can not handle times lower than T hours T being the time difference between UTC and Local time If your file contains times at lower than 02 00 00 h add 2 hours to both times before calculating Next enter the time window in ms This is the maximum time difference between a reference plot as generated by the RES and a detected plot asterix of the same A code or S address which is tolerated for a correct linking of the two plots typ 500ms Then enter the range and azimuth window in degrees typ 0 5 deg and Nm typ 0 5Nm This is the maximum positional difference between a reference plot as generated by th
118. cade 225 AIt 25000 The positions of the aircraft can be viewed in the PPI graph The history length of the track is fixed at 5 scans 2114 IC ID T In the right hand side of this window a list is presented with the A codes of all the aircraft present on the PPI By double clicking one of these items in the list a query is performed on this particular aircraft The data Range Azimuth A code Altitude Track number etc is presented in a text field in the right upper corner of the PPI graph Also the red cursor will be positioned on the current position of this aircraft The selected A code will be copied in the AC ID field The code present in this field will be tracked continuously by the red cursor if the lock selector is set The user can also enter manually a particular A code to be searched for in this field d RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 a inmaak dadene Volumes RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 20 If a specific target is selected and the lock is set the targets range and azimuth is displayed in a comment field and is also transmitted serially trough the modem port of the computer running the convert program ASCII data 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity This data can be fed to an other computer running for example the window based video recording or the target injection Using this it is possible to slave the video recorder to any t
119. can saved to disk with the button or recalled from disk by Load clicking the button SCITEETEDA Clicking the See button will clear the selected line from the filter setting Clear All clicking the button will clear the complete filter setting The t we button will close the window and ignore all changes and the __ button will close the window and implement the current selected filter Click the 5e J button to load the filtered TRD data set into the selected layer A progress indicator will appear The loading may take some time depending on the az intasert dadene oume4 3 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 28 amount of data selected The loading process can be stopped at all times by clicking the cel button The records already loaded will be used for displaying Loading records 0 12704 d 9 In the case that a cluster SCF TRD data set is selected the ster button will automatically be enabled When a cluster load is selected the different nodes of the cluster will automatically be split up in the respective layers taking into account the original selected layer e g if layer 3 was selected for loading data a cluster with nodes 1 2 and 4 present will be split up automatically and the data related to node 1 will be loaded in layer 1 the data of node 2 will be loaded in layer 2
120. conditions can be set Specific A codes can be selected range or azimuthal filters can be set 1 Load the Inventory tool from the RASS S toolbox Inventory Statistics Tabular Pd 5b Pd Scenario Time Merger Pd amp Accuracy Calculation RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH a hr j anf js li 2 mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis Inventorvy vi M y H eS i m x x 4 Codes o Target Info amp A Code FL 5 oO Range Nm nnn Azimuth deq 0 00 MB O000 0000 0o00 na Type Mo detect l Track Power dBm 0 0 Rec Time O0 00 0 00 Rec Date 01701 71904 IIL 2 In the Inventory tool user interface we can distinguish several functional blocks First there is the top row buttons to operate the tool Toggle Help window On Off Save RASS S data to disk ey Load RASS S data from disk Filter RASS S data dynamic or live layers only gt Start dynamic layer Pause dynamic layer Ll Stop dynamic layer Step backward in dynamic layer Step forward in dynamic layer Show preferences window S Load create Site file Print current display RUM6 Ch IIT RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE rial l li n il 7 inn dE Ten Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis EE Multi Level Linking Custom Data
121. cursor This target information can be queried in every display type 6 Use the P button to change the type of display or to change specific cursor types of the current display type Alternatively select Define Custom from the display selection list to add a new display type to the list OOO Message Type f Time of Recording h m s Azimuth of Recording deg J 1 O12 DAC f Time of Recording h Interarrival Time of Recording s Define Custom In both cases the following window will appear and allows the user to define change a specific display type and or cursors types Define 517 Graphs vi Upper Graph s Tine ofRecoraina hms v y Reith of Recording ea 7 Metwork Information F To define the X Y and Z color axis select one of the possible items from the list for each of the axes The items on the list are automatically adjusted according to the selected S File type The user can select from the following list of possible axis types 517 518 and 548 az inmaak dadene olume 5 3 RUM4 Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 19 Time of Recording Time of Recording Relative Time of Recording Relative Time of Recording Interarrival Time
122. data to be exported can be selected Selection Start scan End scan Two types of visual feedback during the export can be selected Volume 5 3 mnam aedrenics RUM4 Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII A Display L1 Format _ Stats By checking the View box 4 the data being exported is translated into readable text and displayed in a separate window Yiew Data Format vi G1G Data Source Identifier SAC mxamm3 SIC B32 G88 Message Type Bz Sector crossing message G26 Sector Number Hre 184 G38 Time of Dau Time 69 81 235 6859 By checking the View box H during the exported statistics about the export are shown in a separate window View Statistics vi LAP B Statistics Frames o 1 Not ackinf o Size 0 000 Kb UserData 0 000 _ kb LAP B Frame Status Overflow Error LAP B Abort LAP B Frame Type I naak dodini volume RUMA Ch VII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIILS The format of the exported files can be selected TSF v DSS TSF Tab Separated File spreadsheet format DSS S File format PTE internal format for analysis PTE P2B2 or PTE P5 Detailed information about these file formats can be found in the PTE ICD The second part of the user interface is used to display information for the user during the e
123. directory An individual analysis type from the list can be edited by clicking the button The following window will appear with a different contents because the selected analysis type is displayed by default z RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 3 14 11 02 mask dadon em RASS S User Manual Define TRD Counters vi Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis eee Counter name Counter Contents CALC ACAS RAO TEMPLATES on O ACAS RA Status cnt O CatO18 activity cnt Comm D Status cnt Failures cnt Link Count cnt Analysis ACAS RA Status type ACAS RA O 1 0000 r Counter Description List Interval DA J ACAS R A Please enter a Caunters Template filename View All Select the prefered analysis type to be edited V ACAS R S C v ACAS R S NC V ACAS RAO V ACAS RA C X 49 Click the button to clear the display and start from scratch to buid a new analysis Type in a new name for the new analysis type Analysis Mew Analysis Type Click the button to add a counter definition to the analysis type The counter definition window to define the first counter is enabled Counter name Counter 0 Counter Contents type Interval QQ Counter 0 r Counter Description List Type in the counter name and decide the interval for which the counter has to be calculated C
124. exchngs CD err ModB compl o BERE 2 ng 1A n 0 2 0 I 1 I 400000 400040 400050 400060 400070 Uo oe OF EMDE x soale Cursor m el jate are 7904 00 19 000 o 000 19 000 0 000 19 000 19 000 19 000 85 10 _ ate fare rose afao 702 see e 702 ossa srono sronosrenn 3 e 64 000 o154 0 361 1 000 o 000 1 000 0 000 1 000 95 19 Santee Wai 44 44000 o 106 os08 1 000 p oo0 1 000 foooo 1 000 xo r exchanges E je ooo osse joser 1o00 ooo 1 000 onoo 1 000 forze Es sso o r27 ozs roo osoo 1 000 foso ioo fit noo ooz o16o roo oooo 1 000 foso oo Lo o S d S S Lf t e j 2 This diagram shows 9 different graphs The contents of the 9 graphs depends on the selected Model B logic see above and the Type selector The later selects whether the data is shown per target or per run In case Target is selected one point in the graph is the sum of all counters for that 5 address or target in one run In case run in selected all counters are added per run for all targets in the run Logic 1 a GICB commands The number of beam dwells per target or run that contain one or more GICB extractions b GICB extractions The total real number of GICB extractions performed by the radar per target or run c GICB errors The number of beam dwells where the number of real extracted GICBs is less than th
125. gaspoo A500loo 77 o l r Target InfoQ 4 Code 6005 FL 350 S Address D Range Nm 55 61 Azimuth deg 54 98 Me 0000 0000 0000 Do Type SSR Track Power dBm 50 0 Rec Time 15 21 50 7 Rec Date 02 01 1904 m BackGround m Map x Nm Scan 56 sarete sil s7 8n eng uror eee The number of plots to be handled is guaranteed to be 50 000 per layer on a 128Mb G3 computer If sufficient memory is installed in the PTE Platform computers tests have shown that a higher load is possible a E E HO 5 6 Pd and Accuracy calculation The Pd Acc tool automatically recognises that the two layers are filled and also reads the data loaded by the user The data is present in two temporary files Layer1 54 and Layer2 54 This presence is detected Pd amp Acc vi PIG r Input Analysis Parameters Analysis Results SSR r Analysis Results mode S 98 186 Pd Incl Acq 2205 NaN Pd 98 Incl Acq S 500 00 Time window ms 100 00C Pd 96 Excl Acq 2165 NaN Pd 96 Excl Acq S sos Range window Nm 0 500 Azimuth window deg 0 50000 Time bias input s 200 Ay Acq scans NaN Ay Acq scans S 0 0000 Range bias input Nm 100 00C PIZ SSRevA 2165 NaN PIZ MScv 0 0000 Azimuth bias input deg 95 427 P SSRevC NaN PIZ MScvC iv Time error compensation 0 000 P SSRivA Af NaN P MSiv A 4p 40 46
126. histogram window Statistics nan zero Statistics 2 549 Mean 8191 645 Total 15 724 15 223 15 724 S4 r4 15 2229 3477 34 650 34 650 Use the graph palette to zoom and pan in the data centre and select the cursor Mae e EARE RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 pi naxs dackoniesYome RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 37 11 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 Use the legend palette to change the appearance of the histogram Legend Point Style Line Style Line Width Bar Plots Fill Baseline Interpolation PET TE a Te o c FETT TT TT TT ae aaa aaa Color PET TTT EE ET ET Oe ee BEHNHHEENHHENS NSS so BS BEHHHEENHHENES NSS so PELE OL S S a EBEN BH TEBNENENS LILILTLIE TC IL IPTE TP TL IPTE IPTE TE TE IE TC IE TE ETE TET Foreground E Background ij All for both Other keys toggle The cursor display shows the value the upper and lower boundary of the selected histogram bin A bin can be selected by dragging the cross cursor to it The cursor will automatically be placed in the centre of the bin and the cursor display will be updated at the same time Cursor 0 00 Hits 250 000 Low 223 000 High The histogram can be printed by clicking the print button The RASS S reporting function is enabled which allows you to store or print the histogram Information about the histog
127. in blue and the north message delay in red This can be achieved by using multiple layers and filters in the Inventory tool Inventory2B vi Il e y aE yi 9521 s x x 25755520 2 v 1182 Codes CTS Rf de T ROOM LENS ome EE EIU MONA S C IB E is r rg tte ee 0 600 9 s PAM t N M M sees DET dd i v ACode o C 0 500 FL 0 s o Range Nm 0 00 Azimuth deg 0 00 MB l Type ai Track 0 Power dBm 0 0 0 100 e i L 0 055 as l Rec Time 00 00 00 00 09 38 40 09 42 00 09 44 00 09 46 00 09 48 00 Rec Date 01 01 1904 m BackGround m Map Recording Time H M S Sean o 1 opportunit J 2 opportunit 3 opportunit J p an m o m NeMat fg m No Math f m No Math fi 0 400 0 300 RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE ill p lj j _ Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 1 Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAB B X25 RDR 339 1 0 Introduction The final stage in the radar chain is the data processor and the corresponding data transmission elements data lines modems telephone or dedicated data lines More and more this radar data is shared by multiple users distributed over a wide area For efficient transportation of this data via private or public networks high speed se
128. indicate whether a polt has already been linked Flag1 True AND ModeAy ModeAg AND Time f t window gt Time gt Time r t t window AND Ranger Rwindow gt Rangeg gt Range y R window AND Azimuth r AZwindow gt Azimuthg gt Azimuth r t A window If a corresponding record is found the associated Flag1 and Flag2 bits in each of the 2 arrays are cleared The array index of the reference array is copied in the Link field of the corresponding asterix data entry and the the array index of the asterix array is copied in the Link field of the corresponding reference data filed If a corresponding link can not be found and the mode A code has not changed from previous link leave the flag1 miss flag in the scenario data but clear the Flag2 acquire bit this indicates the Real misses If a corresponding link can not be found and the mode A code has changed from previous link or previous link also had the acquire bit set leave the flag1 miss bit and Flag2 acquire bit in the scenario data this indicates the Acquire misses The search is simplified by using an index table of all ModeA entry boundaries This way the search is simplified to a small section of the array RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 mack cadvenies Volume 1V RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 36 5 A second pass is initiated to determi
129. j e e D a qn oo Ex 29 E 86 6 38 39 4200 aoo 1999 4200 4200 aoo 4100 e I T D D D o D A a T o Fo ul nm eo eoe pesse o pe fioro nn eo erzerpesez o pe fioro e I T D D D o D A e b o T D mn D m D EIs oe AIR D ceo o The top row buttons operate the window Toggle Help window On Off Save list to disk RASS S file Load list from disk RASS S file Import list from spreadsheet Export list to spreadsheet Cut item from list Copy item from list paste item in list Empty list Undo last delete Select all Print list Close window oe saz esses o see 1111 LL be III 22 The following data is listed for the default list Date Time Scan no S Address A Code Height Range Azimuth Track no Type SSR PSR COMB Quality A valid A garble C valid C garbled 15 Click the button to open the Third View tool This tool allows to add a third RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 dimension to the display The third dimension is displayed as a colour scale The Fi F s coll ill aul i Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 23 Third View tool will take the active layer as a starting point to represent the same data as the Inventory but with the possibility to add a third colour axis The following window will appear if PPI view was chosen in the Inventory tool
130. layers Stop dynamic layers Step forward in dynamic layers Step backward in dynamic layers Set filter for active dynamic layer Once a dynamic run is started by clicking the gt button it keeps on running even if the end of the file is reached A dynamic run always has to be stopped manually by clicking the button 13 To print the displayed data click the button The report window is evoked First you are able to enter some comment and select a figure number to be printed along with the page Change any appearance according to your personal taste and click the print button to create a report or to print the data 14 Click the button to make a Tabular View Data Export from the selected data shown in the geographical display The following window will appear RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 as iaa Gledventes__voumes 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 39 TRD Export List P5 vi B Export Selection List Export List acada Index Time of Generation h m s TRD Index Scan TRD Time of Generation h m s Fractional scan TRD 2 Code Range gs TRD Range Nm Range Nm TRD Azimuth deg Azimuth deg TRD Longitude deg X Nm Y Nm Longitude deg Latitude deg Altitude ft Speed Mm h Heading dea Flight Level FL Power dBm Elevation deg Relative Heading deg Target ID Target Generator
131. less than the maximum duration N4 1 20 1 in scan numbers default 1 specified by the user started announced and completed close out in less than a user defined number of beam dwells N4 1 20 1 Model logic V error 21 if evntt exchngs error events exchanges Model B logic This parameter determines the way the Model B is assessed In order to determine the Model B By default the logic is set to error 1 if events z exchanges a Huse Gaines oume S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 25 logic 1 error 1 if events z exchanges In this case an error for GICB for one beam dwell is counted if the number of GICB extractions does not match the number of programmed GICBs in that beam dwell The number of errors is counted and the number of beam dwells where one or more extractions were programmed are counted for each beam dwell and each target in the run The number of errors per run is divided by the number scans where one or more extractions were programmed This number is recalculated towards a Pd Pd GICB 100 1 errors events If Pd GICB i gt Min of Successful GICBs run the run is declared successful for GICB logic 2 error events exchanges In this case the number of errors is counted individually and not per beam dwell The number of errors per run is determined as the number of programmed GI
132. of hits in an bin the 2D histogram uses a color to represent the number of hits in a cell 10 Use the button to activate the Multi Level Link with the Protocol Viewer tool Notice that the corresponding EDR raw recording Protocol Viewer needs to be load in the respective tools in order to use the Multi Level Link The principle of Multi Level Linking used in the S File Viewer is similar to the one used in the Inventory tool Select a point of interest using the query cursor red cross then activate the Multi level Link The corresponding information will be displayed in the respective tool Protocol Viewer For more information about Multi Level Linking please consult the user manual Volume 4 Chapter V 11 Click the LEU button to open the Counter window This tool allows the calculation of certain user defined parameters per scan or part of a scan The following window will appear with a different contents RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 Sg Q Volume 5 L easel didseniias ume RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 24 ri TRD Counter vi E occurances of ACAS RA Status ACAS RA A Ii 1 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 Peale C ao IL 9000 Img ACAS R S C ACAS R S NC ACAS RAO ACAS RAC F 1 1I 80 0 90 0 101 0 Scan nr Tabular result NINE p IPIE ojo IP n
133. off Status Click Start to turn on program linking This allows other users to link to shared programs Name each computer differently and use names that remind you of the configuration 1 1 4 Data Recording Software Manipulation Now start the data recording software as described in chapter IV of this volume EDR Control vi Recording H size 825811353 HD pos 0 0 Kb Kb Time EDR Status EDR OF EDR serial Mr EDR z6 01 O17 HD usage 1 s l l l 0 Connect ion Timing 2 Mo connection established Make sure the GPS is working properly and ACP and ARP information is correctly recorded After the scenario has completed save the data into a RDR recording folder This can be directly over the network onto the RES computer or can be on the EDR controlling computer In the last case you will need to transfer the data manually onto the other computer over the network 2 1 1 5 General Connection Overview Data Link Analysis v4 3 3 05 10 01 Volume 4 pdssoxelie aedrontes S RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis RJA5 Ethernet RJA5 I Passive Ethernet hes 12V OWER SUPPLY Ethernet Yellow VI Black Clk Red Vr 85 to 264 VAC 20 to 370 VDC 85 to 264 VAC 20to 370 VDC Aud olo dB15HDm dB9 or dB37 RUM4 ChIX Data Link Analysis v4 3 3 05 10 01
134. on LAP B X25 IV 2 EDR RDR 339 back panel view 3 0 Extended Data Recorder Connections The extended data recorder has six high speed serial communication channels Each of the channels can be configured individually see later They can handle transmission speeds up to 128 Kb s and two electrical standards are supported RS 232 and RS 422 The serial data is fed to the recorder by six DB25 connectors two on the front panel and four on the back panel The following list describes the pin layout of these connectors RDR339 connection diagram Interface Pin Assignment on the RDR339 DB25 connector Ch1 6 Pin Signal RS530A standard DTE EDR DCE RS422 amp RS485 RS232 1 Shield Gnd 2 Transmit Data Out In TxD TxD 3 Receive Data In Out RxD RxD 4 Request To Send Out In RTS RTS 5 Clear To Send In Out CTS CTS 7 Signal Ground Gnd Gnd 9 Rirn Receive Sig Elmnt Timing RxC 11 Htrn Tx amp Rx Ext Sig Elmnt Tim TrxC 12 Rtrn Transmit Sig Elmnt Timing TxC 13 Rtm CTS CTS 14 Rtrn TxD TxD 15 Transmit Signal Element Timing In Out TxC TxC 16 Htrn RxD RxD 17 Receive Signal Element Timing In Out RxC RxC 18 Local Loopback Out In via 100Q to 12V via 100Q to 12V 19 Rtrn RTS RTS 20 Data Terminal Ready Out In DTR DTR 21 Remote Loopback Out In via 1002 to 12V via 100Q to 12V 23 RtrnDTR DTR 24 Tx amp Rx Ext Signal Element timing Out In TrxC TrxC Handshake lines
135. only analysis option must be enabled Else the tool will consider all Mode S targets as missed since no Mode S data is available in the Asterix data and all asterix data found on these targets as False yd Max Acquisition Ts The Pd and Accuracy tool denotes the first N misses of every tracjectory as an acquisition target These targets are separately flagged and are eliminated from the Pd calculation The user can limit the maximum number of scans allowed for acquisition using the Max Acquisition parameter L1 Include All Call Targets in Pd Since v4 4 0 the user can select an option Include All Call Targets in Pd Default the selection is OFF so all Early detection All call reports present in the radar asterix data will not be used for the calculation of the code validation If you check the option the all call detections will not be filtered for the Pd calculations and therefore will decrease the Pd of Correct or Valid Code m Resolution analysis 2 00 INm 5 00 deg If you want the result data to include Resolution data check the Resolution analysis checkbox Beware This will create a result file with no X or Y data as derived from Asterix Cat 48 042 Calculated position in Cartesian Coordinates present The inventory XY display will then also show the DRange versus D Azimuth data in stead of Y vs Y After settting the parameters click the Run button on the Pd_Acc tool
136. paragraphs will explain you how to use the P2B2 Data Display tool This tool allows the visualisation of the results of the Data Linker Data Link Analyser The Data Display tool has the same look and feel as the Inventory tool Therefore users that are familiar with the Inventory tool will have no difficulties in using the Data display tool Please be advised that an improved version of this tool exists named the PTE P5 Data Display This tool has the same performance but adds multi radar displays and SCF analysis results Please consult chapter X of this volume for details on this tool The Data display tool uses a TRD data set as the source of information A TRD Data set is the result of the Data Linker or and the Data Link Analyser tool For more information about these tools please consult Volume 4 chapter IX paragraph 2 and 3 The TRD Data set can be found in the LINKED DATA folder of the selected campaign folder b C3 rDssR E p C3 DATA p Sj EXPORTS b gt C3 INTERROGATIONS b C3 LINKED DATA Data TE p Sj NETWORK gt Data p Sy PREFS p j PSR T Nm Y b Cj RECORDINGS Statistics b C REPORT Tabular Fd Datalink p C3 RESULTS 3D Pd atalin Data gt Cj SCENARIO Analyser Displa Time Ierger amp Linker P2BZ play D Ch VIDEO Pd af Comm B Analysis P26 Data Import Export Interragation Reply Viewer TRD SFile Viewer Data Data Display for Datalink P2BZ Cluster Stability Analyser Time Merger amp Linker PS Data Dis
137. propagation delays TASP durations Cluster acquisition times etc 1 3 Data Displaying The results of these analysis are included as calculated fields in the TRD data set itself using a separate SCF file This allows the user to visualise the calculated data link fields such as delays durations etc as a function of a recorded or other calculated field in the data display tool The P5 Data Display tool is derived from the PTE P2B data display tool hereby adding a number of extra features and possibilities Any field in each of the related data items Radar Data Interrogation and reply data Analysis results can be visualised in relation to any other field Sometimes this leads to 1 N relations These are shown in a scatter diagram as N points The data display allows the printing of data histogram calculations 3D views etc as herent Gledventes__voumes 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis XA 2 Data Recording The assessment of the data link performance of the radar will for obvious reasons require some input data This data needs to be recorded in some way The recording of surveillance asterix cat 34 48 and Surveillance Coordination function data asterix cat 17 is straight forward and was already discussed in previous chapters of this manual A new feature on this subject is the Endless Loop recording function adding posibilities to record data in an en
138. r Timing Info t1 15 59 10 375 712 xi 1215 59 10 275 712 X 4t 0 000 000 s Target Info Q y The Window Position slider can be used to scroll through the complete trajectory of the selected target This manipulation is actually the same as moving the query cursor in the Data Display tool across the selected trajectory There are two timing cursors available t1 and t2 grey lines in the display Both display the UTC time stamp of the transaction that they are locked on At displays the difference in seconds between the two timers This time difference is also display at the bottom of the data link Status Display in between the two cursor lines Use the X button next to the UTC time to centre the respective cursors Timing Info t 16 01 16 026 739 X t2 16 01 16 960 850 X At 0 834111 s Enlarging or shrinking the Data Link Status Display can be done by clicking and button in the upper right corner to expand the Data Link Status Display tool to full screen size Click the button in the lower right corner of the window to square the display of the Data Link dragging the lower right corner of the window Click the Status Display tool Click the c button to close Data Link Status Display window ii RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 3 14 11 02 mask deckonies Loume RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 46 y DLF Status D
139. reject 0 Lac reject 0 Rem reset 0 Loc reset D D1 P4 FRI 0 PES 0 Rem reset D Loc reset D Line 1 SVC IM 123456 gt FAIL Tx Frames 52 Rx Good 51 Bad 0 gt Information Rem reject O Lac reject 0 Rem reset 0 Loc reset 0 F1 PERD 0 PES B Rem reset 0 Loc reset 0 By clicking and dragging the lower right corner of the window the EDR Serial recording tool can be resized to fit the complete list of status reports 8 At any time when the save I button is enabled a copy of the raw data file can be made to an image file on the computer disk This file will contain a bit copy of the specified Kbytes up to that moment on the EDR hard disk Click the Save button to initiate the copy tool The following window will appear 5electFolder vi Please specify the EDR recording destination RAW RDR ES Cw LJ 07 00 00 01701 1904 This window allows the user to browse for a destination folder on the computer hard disk Once a destination is selected the tool will automatically generate the appropriate files The following window illustrates the progress of the saving process a inmaak clem Volumes 3 RUM4 Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 13 EDR result files P5 vi Saving data Progress ST Building image file Cancel The copying may take a while
140. scan 10 and scan 30 select 10 as minimum x scale and 50 as maximum x scale in the result viewer graph this can be done by over typing the x or y scales or by using the zoom tool It is also always a good idea to determine the correct Y scale e g by auto scaling because otherwise you will have a a misrepresentation in the histogram The histogram is build using N bins N is user parameter in histogram window between Y min and Y max Y min and Max are the scale boundaries of the original graph containing the data RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 ES Volume 4 piasek aadrentes RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 31 a s Comm LJ zs Comm C1 p LJ Comm c2 O 30 CommD a o o 25 Cursor Sumh mi o d 20 o o aM o o 15 lt M o S o oo A o gt M uai o S o o xe o Urin eei 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a a l eben een eee eta 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 E eF m Wy vg sy XJ Multiline Histogram vi E Histogram Hits r Settings r Statistics pod absolute 455 000 Total Q Relative 4 550 Mean 60 0 J Cumulative 8 052 STD Bin size 2248 Inclusion 40 000 Max 50 0 Bins 0 000 Min 45 0 r Population m Statistics non zero 100 Count 14 219 Mean 40 0 Population non zero 8 069 32 Count 16 249 Cursor 40 000 i Hi z0
141. sends a NIM containing its own SIC SAC code thus state 1 while GATW sends a NIM containing the SIC SAC of GATW and DUSS state 2 3 The tool also allows to load a multi site file This is required to provide the correct decoding of the SIC SAC codes into station names Click the Multi site button to evoke the window S View Multi site file vi 2 I Hodei Node2 Nodes Node4 NodeS Station Node Identification ______________ r Localisation Activity T ORLY Latitude 48 42 12 420 dd mm ss Active Mal identifier ORLY Longitude 02 20 09 250 dd mm ss Type raq yP O Time zone C o LT UTC SAC ECEN Address r Operation r Comment Revolution time 6 000000 E 1010 PSR Max range M SSR Maxrange 256 0 Nm AcPR 14 bit Nue Cancel Import the cluster dat file if required using the import button Read an existing multi site file should be created during time merging see chapter XI using the read button Use the Tabs to select al the nodes in the cluster Click OK to close the window To check on the cluster stability statistics use the histogram function This can be evoked using the histogram button Following window will appear 3 5 iizcot clsdienfias Volume RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 31 Multiline Histog
142. serial replay can replay a specific channel with a arbitrary baud rate Baud rate 3600 F Channel 2 Y The data can be found on the Ch 1 2 connector on the front panel of the RDR on pins 12 clock and 14 data NOT on the radar data recorder interface box 4 4 Recording the Data Bit Recorder Since the event mode recording requires too much disk space a more suitable memory saving method for long term data recording will be used In this method the DSP is triggered using the clock edges and writes the data to disk in blocks of one Kb In this way a 9600 baud data line only requires 1200 bytes of disk space per second or 4 1 Mb hour Using this calculation a 1 Gb cartridge can contain up to 240 hours of recording for a single 9600 baud line or 60 hours for 4 lines Using 4800 baud lines doubles the recording time Since all data bits are written to disk this recording is independent from the data format Byte synchronisation can be done after the recording A recording of an unknown format will not be doomed to fail The decoding of this unknown data format can always be performed afterwards The tool also provides a copy function to transfer the recorded data from the hard disk cartridge to an image file for a back up in its raw format E fiasco cllsrdienifias Volume RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder ILI5 1 Load the Bit Recording tool from the RASS
143. setting become available C Mode S _ Power _ FL Stat Sum L1 Overlap L1 Target Gen L1 Set _ Identity Dynamic mode Start Scan Scan history Step size Refresh rate Start Scan start position of this dynamical layer Scan history number of plot visible during the dynamic run Step size step size between two consecutive plots during the dynamic run Refresh rate Update rate of the display during the dynamic run Live live layer see later Layer settings Settings Labels L Dynamic m Ma Math i Start Scan 3 Max Tupe O Target io O velocity LJ Time Track Wr C Heading Min LJ xv C Scan We FSR Ren RMS Dy namic Scan history Step size Refresh rate Track OFF an Plot Flot urs _ Position 1 Code j Mode A _ 2 Code LJ Mode Elevation C Mode L Power C SSR Refl L Com Cap L acas _ FL Stat C Overlap L Target Gen L set _ Identity Mean Delta Sum Delta amp Only the Scan history setting is editable The other parameters are dictated by the live updating of the data Click the button to activate the settings or the button to ignore the settings RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 E i All il 77 audl gt p unes RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis IIL 12 6 Other display types can be selected using the display type selector in the upper right co
144. the IRDV data is generated it can be used in the next step allong with the Time merger generated S4RD 548 and S18 data 4 0 Data Linker The Data Linker has been integrated in the Time Merger vi tool and can no longer be used as an independant tool RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 E piace ceckenies Youme RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 21 5 0 Analyser 5 1 General One of the most important tools in this chain of tools of PTE P2B2 is the data link Analyser This tool calculates from the linked TRD data a whole set of calculated fields These fields are defined in the PTE P2B2 requirements and are detailed in the PTE Reference manual The complete list of calculated fields can also be found in this document Since version 4 3 3 The Data Analyser is included in the Time merger You can skip this stage unless you specifically want to view or re do the analysis with different parameters without prior merging or linking For the analysis of Large Model B scenarios it is advisable that the Background targets are split and only the sector targets are analysed using the DataLink Analyser See S 3 1 3 for details on setting up the linker and merger for this subject A separate Analysis tool named Pd of CommB Analysis can be used to determine the probability of correct Comm b extraction for the background targets 5 2 Datalink Analyser Software 1 Load the Data Analyser t
145. the analysis To page 1 step backward To page 1 step forward Filter the data for displaying purposes clicking this button activates a filter search editor function To view the EDR settings used during the recording Clicking the Export button activates a standard print table View a detailed explanation for the displayed message next to this button Halts the program completely without closing the window iak dadon ome lv zi RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer VA 2 3 Running the Software E Proto col Viewer vi Se Format Decode delay r History Time Apperance Break mode r Read position Logged in DCE mode W on off 4 bur Ca nana SN Search lt 4 Sen o Ji Azimuth oo deg Timing messages ES E c e c T on Eu j j wu 174 117 95 deg Fig 2 Protocol Viewer vi front panel 4 Now select the Format of the input data Format EDE File Format v wf EDR File Format Iss File Format EDF Live Format The default file format is the EDR serial recording file format but the DCP MUX RASS C file format is also available for the analysis The protocol viewer also allows you to select a live input stream Che 5 Click the Browse button to select a an EDR recording folder file Data source HD irk EDF Raw EDIF AND ASTER A
146. the recording EDR have the correct UTC time set try to sync them to within one second The results will not be that accurate as when GPS recording is provided The GPS antenna must be put outside such that it has free sight of the sky Connect the serial port directly or using the RJA5 extension cable plus the RJ 45 to PPS breakout box The serial cable is a dB25 male to mini din male cable In order to operate correctly the mini din connector must be plugged into your computers serial port Or if your PC only has USB bus plug the serial port into the USB to serial convertor Next plug the dB25 into the female dB25 to RJ45 convertor This item also serves as breakout box to supply the PPS pulse to the EDR and to feed the GPS permanently with 12 V power Now plug the RJ45 extension cable 5 m or 50 m in the breakout box and connect the other side to the male RJA5 to dB25 convertor Finally this connects to the dB25 input of the GPS Also connect the PPS pulse provided by the breakout box to the event input of the EDR ANTENNA INPUT GPS251 GPS RECEIVER me COMMUNICATION PORT RJ45 5 or 50m cable PPS pulse Fig 2 Connections for GPS recording Once the EDR recording is started a dialog will appear controlling the GPS Make sure the GPS is UTC sync before proceeding because otherwise no proper UTC data is provided by the tool This can be verified by checking the colour of the dialog te
147. then activate the Multi level Link The corresponding information will be displayed in the respective tool Protocol Viewer or Analyse Pulse Recordings For more information about Multi Level Linking please consult the user manual Volume 3 Chapter III Video and Volume 4 Chapter V Data 17 Click the button to open the TRD Counter window This tool allows the calculation of certain user defined parameters per scan or part of a scan The following window will appear with a different contents Li TRD Counter vi E aara aan OT Ai EE f ACAS RA Status ACAS R Eu ACAS R S C ACAS R S NC ACASRAO gt ACAS RAC E r b ie l i d 0 M Nd 0 0 0 80 0 n 10 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 101 0 E 3 000 ooo jJmj fij Scan nr ON OWN OW N Tp WOW CU Ur ACASRAA Jior ss iz2000 i376 3 658 1 807 4 000 0 000 2 000 ACAS RA S C TN NN 31 000 0 307 3 444 0 992 4 000 0 000 3 000 The tool mainly consists of a graph and a tabular display representing the results of the calculation according to the selected analysis type To select a specific analysis use the Analysis types selector in the upper right corner of the window V AC AS R Status Cat 18 activity Comm D Status Failurez Link Count This list contains all the TRD analysis types which are at that moment present in the CAMPAIGN GENRAL TEMPLATES
148. to image file OF stop the TCP_IP Recording tool Some of these buttons can be disabled according to circumstances Under the command button row you can find the list of Filter information each filter is defined separately by its Source and destination IP addresses and port number Furthermore each filter needs a definition of the protocol used DDE Asterix The window shows the number of packets and bytes recorded for each filter Multiple filters can apply to one stream A stream can be seen as the equivalent to a ihtiasalt cadvanties_ cume 3 RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP recording line on the EDR XL8 Format Server Client foackets bytes status B1 ASTERIX 192 158 888 877 1888 1802 168 888 8077 28858 B B T IMIMHIT B2 ASTERIX 182 158 888 877 1881 1a32 168 8088 077 2881 B B T HIMHIBHIT B3 ASTERIX 182 168 m88 877 1882 192 168 88 877 2882 B B T LUMIBHIT Finally the tool has an indication of the recording time beware is computer time so make sure the computer clock is set correct before launching LabVIEW and the Buffering 2 Now Run the TCP IP Recording tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window Now setup the filter parameters This can be done by clicking the preferences button Setup TCP IP parameters vi
149. tool RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 lie incre Gladventtes _Youme V_ zi RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 15 2 7 Multi level Linking with Protocol Viewer The Protocol Viewer allows you to examine recorded data in great detail but is not very simple to find specific data like a plot or a specific Asterix message To simplify this the tool is foreseen of a method called multi level linking This method allows the user to select a specific target e g in the Inventory tool or a specific Asterix message e g from the S file viewer and view in the protocol viewer the full frame contents of the data the plot originated from New since version 4 4 3 PTE CP 56 is the fact that the selection of the original file where the data came from plus the line number is no longer performed manually from the protocol viewer but is performed automatically 2 6 1 Inventory Mult level Linking 1 Convert the recorded EDR data into an S4RD file Convertvi BILD _ Conversion lt r Selection Info hi Stas EE d ieszage o Ju End scan Time 10 29 01 124 3060 07B4 NM 29222 Date 13 08 2002 B89F 4ACE Current Kb cid Source Epi 3449 B648 Macintosh AV CAMP amp IGN 54 Gites e ACCEPT ANCE Y 442 RESULTS Progress SCFI 203 1 90802 E FFI Line selection J ona Ed Ue Ua 4 Ls Lie L Stats ka o Protocol Viewer
150. using a table see 5 6 above Several cases are counted X total number of scenario reference plots Y Total number of Misses fields with Flag field set to true in reference array Z Total number of acquisition misses fields with Flag2 field set to true in reference array T Total Number of SSR targets LA Total Number of Mode A equiped Target plots non missed LC Total Number of Mode C equiped Target plots non missed 8 Theoretical Indication of Average Mode S Acquisition Reports is determined by the ratio of the number of declared acquisition target reports R to the total number of Mode S trajectories i e aircraft It is calculated as Acq SSR Z T The Theoretical Indication of SSR Probability of Detection is determined by the ratio of the number of target reports with measured position X Y including and not including acquisition target reports Z to the number of total expected reports X PdSSR X Y X 100 including acquisition target reports PdSSR X Z Y Z X Z 100 not including acquisition target reports RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 mack cadvenies Volume 1V RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 37 6 3 Theoretical Indication of SSR and Mode S Code Perfomance The subsequent set of equations are used to determine a theoretical indication of code performance using the data already derived from the algorithms defined previously These calcul
151. using the KI button without interrupting the EDR recording The Auto Save function allows the user to keep an archive of a predefined number of files with a specific length on the computer disk Use the 1L button to browse for a destination folder to store the archive The files are automatically named using the following convention DDMMYY HHMM being the day month year hour and minute of the starting time for a particular file The length of the stored files is defined in time The user can choose from the folllowing possibilities RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 ihiiaselt cledkornties Woume zi RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 15 v Mane 1 4 hour 1 2 hour 1 hour 2 hours 3 hours 1 4 day 142 day 1 day 2 days 3 days 4 days a2 days 10 days 15 days z days 1 month E g if the user would select 2 hours as period the first file is saved when the first even hour is reached From that moment on every two hours a new save procedure is executed So if the recording is started at 08 25 00 the first file is saved at 10 00 00 The next scheduled auto save will be at 12 00 00 and so on This means that only the first file will not cover the complete selected period This procedure allows the user to make synchonous recording at different sites The user can select between the following archive sizes v Last recording Last 2 recordings Last 4 recordings Last
152. v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 74 chronological Time order or in logical order interrogation and replies are correlated in pairs When an interrogation transaction green line is not touching the previous reply transaction blue line or the next interrogation transaction green line it means that the both interrogations were send in different roll call slots When they are touching it means that they were send in the same roll call slot Just like for the Data Display tool by clicking the button select query cursor and X button centre query cursor the query cursor T can be dragged to a specific target and the corresponding target information will be displayed in the target info panel and the Data Display Info Window will switch automatically to the corresponding tab see Data Display tool for more information about the Data Display Info Window Target Info CQ amp Code 625 FL 430 5 Range Nm 61 28 Azimuth deg 222 89 Scan 13 By entering a window size the amount of information displayed in the window can be changed A window of 5 means two positions to the left and positions to the right with the selected target in the middle All means that the complete trajectory is displayed Window Size an is IN IE Datalink Status Display vi AB ICT ES re xi r Window Size 11 15 59 10 275 712 X
153. vi E MSG 1 1 No data source file selected ol Format Decode delay History Time R On Off Delay s On Off Length Q Relative ile Forma Ree D s reson Appearance Break mode m Read position Logged in DCE mode W LJ onzo 3 i E 6 Search amp Sen o Ji Azimuth 0 0 _ deg r Display Timing messages r PPI picture M e 3 Load the Inventory tool and run it Load an S4RD file created using the EDR Convert tool version 4 4 3 or later RUM4 Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 3 14 11 02 nak dadon Volume IV d RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 16 Inventory2B vi mansai T Not defined O P R M w xau Bit x 152592 H v 109275 El amp Codes l i RAN XN L j Leier r Target Info Q ACode 2770 m FL 360 m S 45cCAz Range Nm 185 15 Azimuth deg 55 72 MB 0000 0000 0000 oo Type Roll Call Track 256 Power dBm 72 0 S H A m um ou Rec Time 10 17 57 12 200 150 100 Rec Date 19 08 2002 x Nm Scan 78 1 scfi 203 1 Te No Math gg C No Math ff No Math fj button The protocol viewer will show the recorded frame data in hex decoded Lap B or X5 3 frame or the decoded ASTERIX RDIF o
154. window Flot Flot kx Fue i po Shared Axis limit 5 Filter nd E TRO Scan nd E TRO Scan The preferences window is automatically opened with the active layer on top The other layers are also accessible through the tabs By selecting a layer its settings become zs hiss linus olume4 RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 zi RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 61 visible Select a layer by clicking the respective tab A layer has one of two possible basic configuration static and dynamic Off static On dynamic Depending on the selected configuration other settings become available Off static layer Laver settings Dynamic Connect Mathematics mode mode No Math Window X P E rop G Max lot i Sean history Flot E ss Q Min 3 RMS Step size Shared Axis 3 Mean i Refresh rate EH Wales Delta Up limit zB Filter C3 Sum B And TRE Scan And C TRD Sean EAE EAR EAE In the plot panel the settings for displaying the data can be edited by clicking the legend E E e 550000 BEBEEEEEEEEENEEESESEENESCOEEESO 0 EENEEEEEEEEENEEEESSEEEES CEEER O C0 0 BEBEEEEEEEEENEEESSEESS BD 0 00 0 BEHHEEHEEEEZEEHESCOHEESO BEO 000 Plot 2 EHHNHEESNHEHEHHS HSC SO 5 TERAHAN OOOO Common Plots P Point 5tyle Line Style Line Width Bar Plats Fill BaseLin Foreground B Background ij All for bot
155. window may appear depends on the selected geographical display RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 mask deckonies oume RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 42 oO DD Third View P5 vi E u CALC Activity Brce a a TRD Slant Y Nm o re Jl es p STE j j e um TERME A EERO 106 144 EH 164 834 E 0 000 zl 0 8 06 0 4 0 2 0 0 Cursor Legend DLF BrCB S C BrCB S NC BrCB 0 BrCB C BrCB l Target Info vB Code 1000 m FL 100 m S 1 PTEOO1 Range Nm 248 67 Azimuth deg 325 42 RE Scan 28 cipi 300 Source Orly 325 350 375 400 7 T T T T T T T T T 1 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 WA BackGround TRD Slant X Nm E 1 The look and feel of the Third View tool is similar to the Data Display tool Things like Background SL e Square graph E Toggle aP D Histogram w xx Data Link Status Display Print al Target info lathe XY Multilevel lin zooming and panning Meg 8410 XII win react in the same way as for the Data Display The top right selector allows to select the data for the colour scale in this case TRD range Nm TED Range Hm wr To edit this list of possible Z Axis definitions choose define custom
156. window shows the number of packets and bytes recorded for each filter Multiple filters can apply to one stream A stream can be seen as the equivalent to a recording line on the EDR Format Server Client foackets bytes status B1 ASTERIX 192 158 888 877 1888 1802 168 888 8077 28858 B B T IMIMHIT B2 ASTERIX 122 158 888 877 1881 1a32 168 80a88 8077 2881 B B T HIMHIBHIT BS ASTERIX 182 168 m88 877 1882 192 168 888 877 2882 B B T UMIBHIT Finally the tool has an indication of the recording time beware is computer time so make sure the computer clock is set correct before launching LabVIEW and the Buffering 2 Now Run the TCP IP Recording tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window Now setup the filter parameters This can be done by clicking the preferences button Setup TCP IP parameters vi Format Server Client ai ASTERIX 192 168 666 877 1000 192 168 0060 077 2a az ASTERIX 192 165 0606 077 1001 192 168 608 877 2881 HS ASTERIX 192 168 6668 077 1002 192 168 000 6077 2882 Now define the first filter This is done by clicking the Add button A filter definition window will appear as iens dadia oume S RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI13 TCP IP filter parameters vi Format Server Client Eres aema 160606 192 168 668 877 Z OBH Error Walid filter 171 Cancel Predefined Servers
157. you want to make your own custom connection cables you can use the table below It lists the pin connections on the DB15 chassis connector of the UDR Pin Signal Description Direction Direction Signal Name Signal Name UDR RS530A standard UDR Radar RS 422A RS232 _ BS d e 2 Transmit Data Out In TxD TxD o _ 4 Receive Data 2T1 In i Out X RxD RxD O NC Request To Send Out In RTS RTS m NC Clear To Send J 2 B OME CTS LETS VS ol mE 1 Signal Ground GK Ls 13 Rtrn Receive Sig Elmnt Timing RRCH ZJ 4Z i Ob b j 14 Rtrn Tx amp Rx Ext Sig Elmnt Tim TrxCe Z S Lad NC Rtrn Transmit Sig Elmnt Timing A PRCE JG U Jl l 0 NC ROOM CUS ee OTS E 9 Rtrn TxD EDF _ NC Transmit Signal Element Timing In Out TxC TKO 11 Rtrn RXD o 220202 REDE s 6 Receive Signal Element Timing In Out amp RxC RKO NC Rtrn RTS RS 00 0 0 0 E NC Data Terminal Ready Out In DTR TRE a NC Rtrn DTR TR 7 Tx amp Rx Ext Signal Element timir Out ln TrxC TrxC Interface Pin Assignment on the UDR600 DB15 connector Ch1 2 Also the typical pin assignment for a DB25 connector for different standards is listed below Using this information you can build your own connection cable RUM6 Ch XII Serial
158. z 09 30 22 8 09 31 40 0 09 32 30 0 09 33 20 0 09 34 0 Recording time H M S nstability Assessment Number Time H M S GaTw ORLY None None Q 3 09 30 58 278 400 2 Autonomous None None Q 10 09 20 59 278 400 2 Q 11 09 31 00 278 400 2 Q 12 03 31 02 278 400 2 Autonomous None None Q 13 09 31 03 278 400 2 Q 14 09 31 04 278 400 2 Autonomous None None Autonomous None None Autonomous None None Autonomous None None The graph represents using color the cluster state or the number of nodes seen by each station versus time You can use three cursors to retreive information from the graph The first cursor is the query cursor Use the center cursor X button in the zoom palette to retreive it By moving the cursor over the graph you can see the last NIMs in the sliding window that caused the state represented by the colour under the cursor in the right hand side of the window Used NIMs window The next two cursors are time lines Using these cursors you can calculate the time between two points in the graph e g the time between two cluster instable periods Locate the cursors using the center cursor X buttons in the Timing palette Timing ti nsz256278 X t2 09 1 44 278 X At 00 01 12 000 Another way of searching problems or cluster instabilities is by using the Cluster Stability Assesment table This shows in a tabular format the time
159. 0 8 000 7 000 6 000 5 000 4 000 i i 225 011 230 000 235 000 RES Int Rec Prefs vi RIU Serial Nb 25 1 13 ESG Serial Nb 24 1 13 RES Settings Coupler Loss dB Aeg Trigger dBm Insertion Loss dB Mode S DAC v acer 12 Bit v Next select the recording Mode Stand Alone The recording starts and stops using the Record buttons of the tool Slaved EDR The Recording starts and stops simultaneously with the EDR given that the EDR computer and the RES computer are linked using the network Auto Save EDR Sync The recording starts simultaneously with the EDR and creates interrogation files every N minutes as set in the EDR recording software Then start the recording using the record button RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 st ES mM dados Volume RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 12 The RES will create interrogation files every period defined by the EDR recording software 2 1 7 3 RFIS Connections The RFTS needs to be connected to the radar see Volume 6 Chapter V for details and the ACP ARP pulses need to be distributed in the correct way This means that the ACP ARP is connected to the RFTS output through a RVI or ACP ARP Fan in unit DB 15 HD Female Digital am Output Conn l Conn 2 O O
160. 0 00 00 Recording Scan O Recording Date 01 01 1904 Recording Azimuth 0 00 deq The message contents panel displays the contents of the message that is selected by the user with the cursor Message Contents At last the major part of the display is occupied by the graph that displays the scatter diagram with the selected data 0 0 r mA s 03 Sa EU 5 ET 0 8 0 9 I I I I I I 1 000 0 900 0 800 0 700 0 600 0 500 0 400 0 300 0 200 0 100 0 000 3 The first thing to to is to select a specific S File format The user can choose between 517 S18 and S48 file format The default value is S48 file format V S48 File Format 518 File Format 517 File Format 4 Next browse for a source folder containing the data to be viewed by clicking the az intense dadene ms 3 RUM4 Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 16 button The following window allows the user to browse and select a source folder SelectFolder vi Please select afolder containing the 517 Format file RESULTS pon 2T I 51 010521 TO1 F3 CAT 17 SAMPLE2 F3 CAT17 RECI E GDLP INT E GDLP INT 2409 18 14 31 23 25 09 2001 After the loading process the info panel will display more details about the data loaded into the S File Viewer S File infa Rey start 1 i Entire file HD irk C AMP AlGH S4 P5 TESTING 288 Rev
161. 0 01 2002 Orly 7 YG ACode 1000 m FL 100 m Roll Call Plot Track Track Scan 28 Track 0 PSR hits RCbfr SSR hits RC 31 24 23 Status 1 b 11011000 b 1 24 23 2486719 MBFields Range zs 3072 394 ACAS Azimuth deg 325 421 FLSTAT Height ft 10000 Com Cap Range Nm Aircraft ID PTE001 Target ID Velocity Nm h 549 32 Set Heading deg 135 000 Target Gen Rel Heading deg 10 421 Power dBm 0 0 Elevation deg 0 38 Overlap X Nm 164 829 Range Nm 0 000000 4 Az deg 0 000000 aTime s 0 000000 106 140 1 475 52069 Y Nm Longitude deg Latitude deg Datalink events 16 15 r Ob Ob 10 16 15 n RA Status 2 b 100b Roll Call detect Start of Track TRD GICB AICB Comm Comm C Comm D A Code Change olb olb 0 Brdcst Comm B O Cat018 Datalink Activity CA UPacket CC Upacket Cancel UPacket UPacket Ack Data Link Messages Data Link State L0 DDPaket OF GICB 0 0 SCF 48 Interrogation Datalink Activity 0 A DPacket Beast CB D Beast AICB GICB Ext R 0 0 Datalink State x is Data Link Type Datalink Type a CA segm CCI segm CCL segm CD segm Interrogation Counter UF4 UF S UF 20 UF21 UF 24U UF24D 0 UFi1 0 n 0 0 0 0 Re interrogation Ni RC perf Nei RC exp
162. 00 Track Velocity in Polar Coordinates 210 Mode Address List 220 Aircraft Address 221 Duplicate Address Reference Number 240 Transponder Capability 240 Track Status 350 Cluster Station Mode List 360 Cluster Controller Command State Special Purpose Indicator Duplicate Messages None Associate Request Associate Response Release Request Release Response Abort Keep Alive Aircraft report Aircraft Command I Code Change Uplink Packet Cancel uplink Packet Uplink Packet Ack Downlink Packet Data XON Data XOFF Uplink Broadcast Cancel Uplink Broadcast Uplink broadcast Ack Downlink Broadcast GICB Extraction Cancel GICB Extraction GICB Extraction Ack GICB Response Accepted Re jected Cancelled Finished Delayed In Progress Invalid Result Message Type Result Time of Day Il Code Mode S Address Mode S Address List Aircraft Data Link Command Aircraft Data Link Status Aircraft Data Link report Request Transponder Communications Capability Capability Report Aircraft COF Aircraft CQF Method Aircraft Polar Coordinates Aircraft Cartesian coordinates Packet Number Packet Number List Mode S Packet Properties Mode S Packet Broadcast Number Broadcast Properties Broadcast Prefix U D broadcast GICB Number BDS Code GICB Extraction Periodicity GICB Extracted GICB Properties Aircraft Identity Aircraft Mode 4 Code Aircraft Height Aircraft Speed Aircraft Heading Data Sour
163. 00954 x4aa7FC E x4CA177 p amp x40041B po 10 12 18 4612 xRR3aOSF pus 8x44CCD1 pr 257 70 0x400795 E deg amp x461F97 BE 0x400417 ax3aaaoc AA fA ACC In this example you can see that this is a good method to see a full NNCOP message 2 6 4 Data Display Multi level Linking 1 Perform a P5 Time Merger and Linker procedure on the recorded EDR file s 2 Load the Cluster Stability vi Load a dataset Perform the Cluster stability analysis Select a section using the vertical cursor Ex RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 3 14 11 02 EET EE pts eisdtenfias Volume TV RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 20 Cluster Stability vi H 2 exl Jo SRL CS Node Nb aix T Window 3 000 s Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 ACCEPTANCE 443 RESULTS SCFI_203_1 90802 NODE2 step 1000 s eens r Display 4 eters _ File Pathname Available Nodes w ASTERIX Cat817 record 1 1 Time 10 12 27 509 900 H M S 19 08 2002 Azimuth 327 371 deg Timing I t 10 12 10 510 K G16 Data Source Identifier SAC 8x62 SIC 852 DUSS 12 10 12 10 510 x 812 Data Destination Identifier DAC 8x34 DIC 181 GRTH At 00 00 00 000 00G Message Type 604 Network information Legend 35 Clust
164. 1 AETA C E CC ln E HHH i ii EH 4 Code FL s Range Nm 80 24 Azimuth deg 1 00 Scan 5 sey Sada RUE 32 E A h 30 4 28 RB COP UN EAE ERU RU CN I I ssec poeni 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 355 m BackGround m Map Azimuth Deg RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 mias dadon Yume RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 32 6 0 Theoretical Background on Pd and Accuracy Calculations 6 1 Mode S Pd Calculation The Mode S Pd is calculated using the following method 1 All Mode S elements are filtered from the input Scenario file and the Asterix input files Both files should be in the 54 data format The criteria for this filter is S address 0 Two arrays are created Each array contains a cluster with the following data items ModeS A 132 S address or A code Link 132 Link index to other file 99999 if no link present et Time Dbl UTC timestamp input record Flag1 Boolean True if Missed or False Range Dbl Range of input record Azimuth Dbl Azimuth of input record Velocity Dbl Velocity of input record Heading Dbl Heading of input record Index 132 Link index to own file Flag2 Boolean True if Acquire or Code error detected Range error Sgl Range error after linking Azimuth error Sgl Azimuth error after linking Time error Sgl Time error after linkin
165. 14 Inclusion 0 011 Bins 1 m Population Statistics non zero 2204 Count 0 012 Mean r Population non zero 0 008 STD 2152 Count 0 014 RMS Cursor 0 011 Max 0 36 Hits 0 0310 Low 0 0300 High 0 035 r Comment FARSE AF Legend m_m o MR MRL 1a 1 0 0350 0 0200 0 0100 0 0000 0 0100 0 0200 4 Range Nm This allows you to evaluate the statistical errors in the data The same procedure can be used to evaluate Range and Time errors in the data In our second example we want to verify radar quality and check on false target reports in target data For this make a section of radar data using the result asterix data xx S4RA e g in planar R f az display and present this data in the Third view display In this example ARange is used in the color scale Next select a small point style for the default points a cross for the GarbledA amp C targets and a square for the False targets Li 3D View vi E Bem euer a __2 res stow 5 tracks sra Y MEE E E iaa TEE EENE PEH HE El E E lsali ili iR ig iig MEER r Color scale 0 2 cf ost des Foils ss is z0 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 48 T 03 O EEIT EHE soii ipi Epig ile ili itt E custom Legend PPh uu E iji Fg Garbled A amp C W E H HEER HEEL ele ele els E lin False Plot W q2 e M
166. 2 25 07 02 a inmaak dadene Volumes 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 17 EDR Data Analyser EDR Bit Recorder EDR Convert Bit Recording EDR Serial Recorder EGR Convert Serial Recording GOLF Protocol Viewer EDR Replay EDR Export Le m jn on Conversion Selection Source Start scan 5 End scan 99999 Destination RASS S Ww Line selection g PET O1 I2 O3 4 Os Le O stats ww Run the EDR Convert tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window First we determine the source of the data recording We can convert data either directly from a data recorder connected to the computer at that time from a IOSS file e g from a RASS C recording or from an EDR raw file This can be selected using the Source selector There are 3 possibilities File IOSS and EDR Source V Recording loss EDR 2 All recordings start at the beginning of the hard disk Each time a new recording is started the contents of the disk is overwritten Therefore it is necessary to save each recording before a new one is started 3 When in live mode EDR is selected as source the EDR Status is shown in the Main control bar A gt n Radar Data Recorder OK The indicator returns the status of the Extended Data Recorder EDE Status Radar Data Recorder OK Several messages can be displayed RUMA
167. 200 0 Bins ae A r Population r Statistics non zero 2214 Count 2549 Mean 160 0 r Population non zero 15 724 2214 Count Tu 15 929 Cursor 4 774 WEIT 120 0 101 00 Hits 34 650 20 9 Low 100 0 2 vs soin Comment 60 0 40 0 Sia li ba Bj Legend M 9921 XJ 0 07 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 20 10 0 0 0 10 0 34 7 20 0 20 0 30 0 34 8 TRD Slant Y Nm TRD Slant X Hm One of the two axis can be selected using the selector in the top right corner of the window The following settings can be done in the histogram function Relative or absolute value representing RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 3 E fiasco cedvenies Youme RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 66 e Absolute Relative Cumulative value representing Cumulative Bin size value The Bins indicator is directly coupled with the Bin size value and the respective boundaries of the geographical display of the Data Display tool 10 000 Bin size 70 Bins Boundary inclusion lower Incluzian These parameters can be altered at any time and this will result in an immediate recalculation and redisplaying of the histogram Some statistics are automatically calculated on the selected data set and are displayed at the right hand side of the histogram window Statistics nan zero Statistics 2 549 Mean 15 724 15 929 z4 7
168. 25 connector The selection between the two depends on the setting of the switches on the RS232 probe module If data or clock does not show on either of these pins use the adjustable db25 connectors delivered with the RDR for rewiring the connection and pass on this connection to Intersoft Electronics We will supply you with a suitable transition cable for this station enon rT i La 0 0 0 0 0 0 It is important to know that the data recorder has six input channels from which two are dedicated to a Serial Communication Controller SCC for asynchronous or network communications The other four channels are directly connected to the input of a Digital Signal Processor DSP which will handle all synchronous data manipulation and recording Channel 1 and 3 are the SCC channels and Channel 2 4 5 and 6 are the DSP channels So any synchronous data lines should be connected to one of these 4 lines Channels 1 through 4 are also fed to the front panel of the data recorder for network functions The following table shows the connections for these connectors dioere ft dadon Volume zi RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder II 7 1 Gnd 14 Data out Ch 2 1 Gnd 14 Data out Ch 4 2 Data Out Ch1 15 Clock out Ch1 2 Data Out Ch3 15 Clock out Ch3 3 Data In Chi 16 Data in Ch2 3 Data In Ch3 16 Data in Ch4 4 NC 17 Clock in Ch1 4 NC 17 Clock in Ch3 5 NC 18 NC 5 NC 18 NC 6 NC 19 NC 6 N
169. 29 5 8 2 Using the v4 1 1 Third View feature of the inventory tool In order to use this feature load the scenario result file xxx S4RS in one layer of the inventory Depending on the type of analysis you want to perform select a proper X and Y scale using the Custom graph feature In our first example we want to evaluate the azimuthal accuracy of the radar in a resolution case The data presented is taken from a scenario that was constructed to make targets pass completely through the Zone 1 area of the resolution diagram Therefore the relative distance in range between two targets in the scenario will range from 2 Nm to 2 Nm and from 5 degrees to 5 degrees excluding the area between 5 and 0 5 degrees Inventorvy vi 20 i ace E 40 y i P Em r Target InfoQ hd T 60 X hou s 5 oot j DAE FL 5 PTEOTS E Range Nm 40 10 120 s Rs l Ven a Azimuth deg 180 90 l s MB 00D0 0000 0000 00 sas nr 140 160 T 180 E Falc di s Power dBm 43 4 i i Rec Time 09 28 48 40 208 d l i T T 210 150 100 150 205 Rec Date 1971171999 m BackGround m Map x Nm Scan 1 E TE 1 zone demo 2 zone 1 dem MJ RI H b E No Math fi No Math fi No Math fy The Pd and Accuracy module has addded the DRange and D Azimuth values automatically in the d
170. 391000 11 17 33 358 0x391000 11 17 39 371 0x391000 11 17 45 383 0x391000 11 17 51 394 Ox391000 11 17 57 406 0x391000 11 18 03 417 Ox391000 11 18 09 429 325 948 326 556 327 149 327 73 328 299 228 855 229 298 229 93 330 451 330 96 331 458 331 946 332 423 332 89 333 348 333 795 334 233 334 662 Ox391000 11 16 47 289 47 734 224 69 47 727 224 69 450 10 48 258 225 225 450 10 48 794 225 948 450 10 0x391000 17 03 273 49 336 326 556 450 10 0x391000 17 09 281 49 885 327 149 450 10 0x391000 17 15 305 50 438 327 73 450 10 0x391000 17 21 312 50 996 228 299 450 10 0x391000 17 27 320 51 559 228 855 450 10 0x391000 17 33 336 52 127 229 298 450 10 0x391000 17 39 352 52 699 329 93 450 10 Ox391000 17 45 359 53 277 330 451 450 10 Ox391000 17 51 375 53 858 330 96 450 10 0x391000 17 57 383 54 443 331 458 450 10 0x391000 118 02 398 55 033 331 946 450 10 0x391000 18 09 406 0x391000 11 18 15 440 0x391000 11 18 21 451 0x391000 11 18 27 461 0x391000 11 18 33 472 0x391000 11 18 39 482 Ox 91000 11 18 45 493 0x391000 11 18 51 503 55 626 332 423 450 10 0x391000 118 15 422 56 223 332 89 450 10 0x391000 118 21 430 56 823 333 348 450 10 0x391000 118 27 438 57 428 333 795 450 10 0x391000 18 33 453 58 036 334 233 450 10 0x391000 118 39 461 58 647 334 662 450 10 Ox391000 18 45 477 59 261 335 083 450 10 0x391000 18 51 484 59 879 335 494 450 10 0x391000 118 57 500 60 499 335 897 450 10 0x391000 119 02 508 61 122 336 292 4
171. 4 11 02 EE mites aacvanies Yume RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 18 Now select the target or message of interest using the red cursor and click the Multi mim level link button Fi The protocol viewer will show the recorded frame data in hex decoded Lap B or X5 3 frame or the decoded ASTERIX data 2 6 3 Data Display Multi level Linking 1 Perform a P2B2 or P5 Time Merger and Linker procedure on the recorded EDR file s Time Merger amp Linker P5 vi r Result Folder Macintosh AV CAMPAIGN S4 peed ar c T Y e ACCEPTANCE V 443 RESULTS ireje s Ep Re Bare i Ngee i Nadu SCFI 202 190802 m Dusseldorf System Map Folder EDR Recording Folder L Macintosh AY C AMP AIGN S4 Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 ACCEPTANCE 442 DATA MAPs ACCEPTANCE V 443 DAT A R A Linked Data TRD Folder Macintosh AV CAMPAIGN SA RR Cluster DUSSELDORF RDR DUSS SCFI 202 190802 02 ACCEPTANCE Y 443 LINKED_D AT A SCFI_203_1 90802 Ra Interrogation Recording Folder Line selection cat34 48 start Make Sxx Message piede agensi ake current Kb Line selection cat17 scans Make Map fuf D Link TRD A Error ra LL EI20 s 3L 15 DL e Analyse fif In sac x o Sica4 o Date Action r Progress
172. 4 4 0 06 03 02 a Huse Gaines oume S RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 26 Progress Result data found View data or reprocess data Warning Filter included 6 Now click on the Start button of the data Analyser The progress bar will allow you to follow the process of analysis Progress Processing TED data Please wait EI 1 H Process time no 00 1 7 Once the data is analysed the result data is written back into the TRD data file and the globalised results are written in a result file DLAN file in LINKED DATA This result file can be consulted by using the Result viewing buttons View Datalink Results Activ ity Exchange Delay Data Link Failure Pd Camm B Comm C D reTx Model B compliance D E d i o al ad Individual results are available for Data Link Activity Data link exchange Data link Delay Data link Failure Pd Comm B Comm C D reTx and Model B compliance 5 3 Data link Analysis Result Viewers 5 3 1 Data Link Activity The PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis assesses the instantaneous data link activity derived from interrogations by computing the following information per radar scans eA number of extracted COMM B eB number of transmitted COMM A segments e C number of transmitted initial or intermediate COMM C segments eD number of transmitted final COMM C segments eE number of requested COMM D derived from the content of the interrogatio
173. 4 4 2 25 07 02 mack cadvenies Volume 1V RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 35 bit 19 Track bit 18 Plot bit 17 PSR detect bit 16 SSH detect For the Mode A extraction ModeS A is filled with the A code All Flag1 and Flag2 fields are set Each array is filled with the correct data extracted from the temporary files in the inventory directories corresponding to the layers 1 and 2 2 The two arrays are sorted In LabVIEW arrays of clusters are sorted using the items in the cluster in descending order ModeS A Link Time etc Since the Link filed is set to 9999 for all fields data is sorted by Mode A code and further sorted by time 3 In the data arrays the Flag1 bits are used as Miss indicator in the scenario data array and as a False bit indicator in the Asterix data array The Flag 2 flag is used as Acquisition indicator in the scenario data and as A code error bit in the Asterix data set All are set to true to start with 4 For each entry in the reference array a search is performed in the Asterix array using the following criteria The user defines an input time window t window 0 100 1 50 ms The user defines an input range window R window 0 2 0 1 0 5 Nm The user defines an input azimuth window Az window 0 2 0 1 0 5 deg In the formulas the suffix r stands for reference and the suffix a stands for asterix data Flag1 is used to
174. 50 10 0x391000 19 09 516 61 748 336 679 450 10 O0x391000 19 15 523 62 368 337 07 18 506 0x391000 119 21 531 62 782 337 636 48 569 0x391000 19 27 547 62 839 338 311 78 641 62 539 338 935 100 62 154 239 528 100 61 777 240 129 100 1 A07 FAN TZO eTa a e 335 083 335 494 335 897 336 292 336 679 337 07 337 636 0x391 000 11 18 57 513 10x391 000 11 19 03 522 0x391 000 11 19 09 532 0x391 000 11 19 15 542 0x391000 11 19 21 551 0x391000 11 19 27 564 cOoooooooooooooooooooooooo 0x391000 11 19 33 578 H Ox391000 11 19 39 592 0x391000 11 19 45 605 0x391000 11 19 51 618 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pioij oeojiojojojoeojojojojos nOojojjioejojiojojojojisoolojoj d AA 10s zo1600n 11 10 5 amp 7 271 I4 4 b bl ACCPTANCE P1 4 TAKE2MS txt Using both tables the user can continue to create multiple graphs representing Accuracy figures and other relevant data It is beyond the scope of this document to elaborate on these possibilities RUMA RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 E Q o nfo v442 E Bis dadina oume RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI25 5 8 Viewing Result Data If you should prefer not to use external spreadsheet applications for data analysis you can use the output S4RS and S4RA files and view them in the inventory tool The scenario result file xx S4RS and the asterix result file xx S4RA are saved in the RESULT folder
175. 5n EDS scan p 3 Data Import Export gt gt o BOS NH scan Interrogation Reply Viewer Progress S File Viewer Flease select a RESULT folder containing So BOS f scan Data Display for Datalink P2BZ S48 data Max acquisition scans GICB z zn scans Cluster Stability Analyser Time Merger amp Linker P5 Data Display for Cluster Pa 2 Select the RESULT folder containing the 548 file A folder dialog will appear 3 Enter the Analysis Parameters For details see above 4 Start the analysis using the start button gt The progress bar will show the loading and processing of the data After analysis the results are shown in the following window The window contains a list of all targets found in the file with the calculated Pd of correct Comm B See above for definition The first lines in the table show the average values of the Pd for each BDS register The second line shows the average values excluding all targets with no extraction at all Zero Pd a Huse Gaines oume S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 44 H PrintTables vi B 27 85 EE ES Bele eee Pd of CommB for model b1 backgr only 548 1G rei Address Pd Pd 56 Pd Pd BDS x40 N Pd BDS x50 N Pal x 5 All 1230548 98 19 1229787 1230548 99 61 1229787
176. 6 2003 S Fr roll ll tani 75 Volume t RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis IIL 16 Inventory Preferences vi er MIT TET CN CR Layer zettings Settings Labels L1 Dynamic m n 1 L Type C Target it velocity n n eos Time Track Me _ Heading Start Scan ip Step size v SeanMr FSR Ren fic i Refresh rate LJ Position 1 Code SSR Ren ej Mode A 2 Code L Com Cap J Mode c J Elevation LJ acas C Mode S Power L FL Stat C Overlap L Target Gen set _ Identity The labelling function can be turned On Off by checking the v on box In the same way a list of data fields can be selected to be displayed as a label Notice that every layer can have its own label definition Click OK to return to the Inventory tool To add a label on a specific plot position the red cross cursor on that plot and click the add label 13575 button A label will appear on the screen To remove a label from a plot position the red cross cursor on that plot and click the remove label button PREGE 1 31 FH x 35 41 052 53 F045 12 a 04 63 A 410TL 329 AA 000000 10 By loading filtering zooming and selecting custom X Y axis a specific data set can be displayed on in the Inventory tool This data set can be displayed as a histogram by clicking the histogram button Histogram The following window will appear Histogram is not available in PPI View RUM6 Ch
177. 74 8191 645 Total 2 549 Mean 15 724 15 929 34 650 34 704 34 650 Use the graph palette to zoom and pan in the data centre and select the cursor Mas E lj es 4 x Use the legend palette to change the appearance of the histogram Legend Point Style Line Style Line Width Bar Plots Fill Baseline SESS terpolation EENHHEEHNHEEEEENHEHEEESEEEHESSEEEESCEESS Color BEENHEEEENEEENENEESEEEESSONESO 7o BNEEHEENHENEEENENHESSENSES HO BEENEEENENEEEENENHESCHESESO B BEEHEENHENEEENEHESSZESESSO S0 THERES Oooooooooooooooooooooood Foreground E Background ij All for both Other keys toggle The cursor display shows the value the upper and lower boundary of the selected histogram bin A bin can be selected by dragging the cross cursor to it The cursor will automatically be placed in the centre of the bin and the cursor display will be updated at the same time e ase Glidventas__voume t zi RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 67 Cursor 0 00 Hits 250 000 Low 2235 000 High The histogram can be printed by clicking the print button The RASS S reporting function is enabled which allows you to store or print the histogram Information about the histogram can be entered in the comment field This field will be printed together with the histogram Comment a Click the return button to close t
178. B amp CA single el Target R amp CA multi el Target Comm C amp Comm D Target type This menu also allows the selection of the X axis differentiation Exchanges can be counted per Scans or per Target This will change the appearance of the graph In the first 4 selections Exchange scan the X axis contains the scan numbers In the second 4 selections Exchange Target the X axis can contain one of 4 different values S address Target ID combination of S address or target ID and Run nr Use the X scale menu to select one A scale 5 address lt 5 address Target ID 5 address Run nr Target ID Run nr In case S address or S address Run nr is selected you can modify the X scale format into hex representation by using the graph s pallet Format gt Decimal 5 Precision gt Scientific Mapping Mode gt Tabular resu P Binary 2 v Hexadecimal Relative Time Absolute Time 4 The viewer has a number of buttons to call special functions Call The help window Printout the tabular result Printout the graph E RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 E ES N Volume 4 Peso cadrentes RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 34 Printout the contents of the graph as a table Call the histogram function Call The online reference pdf files Close the window 5 The user can also enable or disable one of the graphs by using the check boxes nea
179. C 19 NC 7 Gnd 20 NC 7 Gnd 20 NC 8 NC 21 NC 8 NC 21 NC 9 Clock in Ch2 99 NC 9 Clock in Ch4 22 NC 10 NC 23 NC 10 NC 23 NC 11 NC 24 NC 11 NC 24 NC 12 Clock out Ch225 NC 12 Clock out Ch425 NC 13 NC 13 NC The input levels of the recorder are defined as in the RS 232 standards logical 0 3 to 20 V logical 1 0 to 20V After wiring up all the equipment as shown in the diagram switch on the power of your recorder and watch the LEDs on the connection box The data line should flicker slightly and the clock line should illuminate continuously If this is not the case set the corresponding switch in the other position and check again If there is still no activity on the lines use a breakout box or oscilloscope along with detailed schematics of the communication device to locate the correct lines containing the clock and data as hee ellipsis oume S RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder IL8 4 0 Making a Recording Checklist 4 1 Procedure The radar data recording will be set up in several discrete steps a Hardware connections b Analysis of signal quality C Start of serial recording d Converting data into a convenient format Corresponding to each step one or more tools virtual instruments will be used a amp b Data Analyser vi This tool analyses the data signals using an oscilloscope type of display C Serial recorder vi This tool controls t
180. C Elevation acas C Modes Power O FL Stat L Overlap L1 Target Gen L Set _ Identity When track information is available in the data consecutive plots are connected with a line if the track option is switched on If no track information is available be sure to switch this option always off Track OFF ON Some statistical functions can be applied on the data of the selected layer The selected statistical function is applied on the Y axis data over a period Delta X of the X axis The following list of mathematical functions is available Math Mo Math C Max Min RMS Cy Mean Delta C3 Sum Delta X If for example Max is chosen with a delta X of 2 then the maximum Y axis value is used in each X axis period of delta X RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH E j anf js l mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis On dynamic layer see later Settings Dy namic orf Y Layer settings i Start Scan Scan history Step size Refresh rate Labels Emme L Dynamic m n LJ Tupe L Target ID _ Time _ Track Nr C sY L Scan Nr _ Position 1 1 Code yw Mode A _ 2 Code J Mode Elevation L1 Velocity L1 Heading C PSR Refl _ SSR Ren L1 Com Cap L acas MI 11 Mo Math Max Itin RMS Mean Delta Track _ OFF an Plot Flot Te On top of the previous settings some additional
181. C our Ls us Notice that the layers need not to be loaded in a specific order Layers are automatically named according to their filename upon loading The active layer can always be renamed by clicking the Label Layer button A dialog box to enter the layer name will appear Label Layer RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 E fiasco cedvenies Youme 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 60 Label dialog Please Enter a layer name C A layer can be made visible or invisible with the m button underneath the layer tab The data is still present in the layer but and all actions will be executed on the data but it will not be visible A layer can be emptied by clicking the button underneath the layer tab All data for that layer is removed including filename and filter settings A layer can be copied into another layer by using the I button to layer 2 to layer 3 to layer 4 to layer 5 to layer 6 to layer 7 to layer 3 to layer 3 to layer 10 The source layer is checked by the program with a sign and the destination layer is selected by the user Each layer has its own specific settings These can be edited in the preferences window Click the Preferences button to open the preferences window The following window will appear Data Display Preferences vi eer cmon aren ava ca Layer settings Dynamic Connect Mathematics mode i Ma Math
182. C3 IRD TESTDATASET C3 LARGE MODELB TEST3 C3 LARGE MODELB TEST3 2 RADIAL 36 SCENI T6 13 12 33 14 11 2000 RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 iniacot cledvenfzs Youme gt zi RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 1O TRD Import Export vi Importing radial 36 scendi t amp IES txt Flease wait PlayStation Alain C AMF AIGN S4 PTE PlayStation lain C AMF IGM 54 PTE PzBz TESTING EXPORTS RADIAL 36 sa PzBz TESTING RESULTS RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T amp SCEM1 T amp IMPORT TSF Files found DSS Files found radial 36 sceni t6_RFS txt v radial 36 sceni t amp import S4lf4 radial 36 sceni t amp A48 txt v radial 36 scent t6 import 548 radial 36 scent t amp A18 txt radial Z amp sceni t import EDS radial 36 scent t amp IRS txt v radial Z amp sceni t amp import 518 v radial Z amp sceni t amp import P AC The tool automatically reads all files in the folder and presents them in a list The user can select one or more of these files to be imported The tool will import the RFS A48 A18 and IRS IVS files separately one by one or in batch if this option is checked Eatch B The TRD Import Export vi tool allows the selection of a Destination folder to contain the import results by clicking the button in the Result Folder panel The data is in the DSS format ready to be read by the data linker tool SelectFolder vi F3 Please select the RESULT
183. CB extractions minus the number of real GICB extractions The number of errors per run is divided by the number scans where one or more extractions were programmed This number is recalculated towards a Pd Pd GICB 100 1 errors events If Pd GICB i Min of Successful GICBs run the run is declared successful for GICB Min of Successful GICBs run 100 This parameter determines the minimum percentage of successful GICB extraction per run In practise the default parameter settings as shown in the above screen shot work best 5 It is possible for the user to define a filter prior to processing the data This way he can select one or more targets and re process the data link parameters This can be handy if your data set is large and you only need a new figure for a limited set of data To do this click the filter button Following dialog will pop up SearchEditor TRD Analysis vi TRD Filter S address is equal to Or CJ Except This dialog is the standard RASS S filter dialog known to most of you so we wont waste to much time in explaining this dialog Use the menu and selections to specify a target by its S address Other selections e g on scan number are not allowed because this could interfere with the data link analysis results Close the dialog using the OK button If a filter is used the data link analyser tool will warn you with the following message RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v
184. Cat048 If one of the ASTERIX Cats is not found during the export process the corresponding spreadsheet format file will only contain the header with the names of the collums and the corresponding S File will be empty There is no limit on the size of the exported files Note For exporting a 54 format file into a RFS format spreadsheet file please consult Volume 4 chapter III paragraph 2 1 bullet 14 For exporting an IVS format spreadsheet file please consult Volume 3 chapter IV For exporting an IRS format spreadsheet file please consult Volume 5 chapter X EDR EDR Data Analyzer EDR Bit Recorder EDR Convert Bit Recording EDR Serial Recorder EDR Convert Serial Recording GOLF Protocal Viewer EDR Replay EDR Export a Name B p Qj MssR vC pata jp oce EXPORT Serial EDR Spreadsheet y SITES Records 1 Export B gt Cat017 Ji d ed p RASDATA nq Cat048 COT apike b p Cj SCENARIO p Qj vipeo Kim ihitaselt cleckonies ame 3 RUM4 Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 2 2 0 Performing a data export 1 Load the EDR Data Export tool from the RASS S toolbox EDR Data Analyser EDR Bit Recorder EDR Convert Bit Recording EDRF Serial Recorder EDRF Convert Serial Recording GDLP Protocol Viewer EDR Fepla EDR Export The following window will appear on the screen
185. CatO17 Size bytes 011 Capability Report 090 Flight Level ft ASTERIE CatD17 Present nee MEE 013 CQF method im iue E role ode onfidence 000 Message Type gale 110 3D Height ft 014 THETA e 1 a AC D15X 120 Item Present oid sic 015 Y 130 SRL Present 130 SRR Present 016 Packet Number 130 SAM Pl 012 DAC 017 Repetition 130 PRL Present 012 DIC 017 Packet Number 130 PAM Present E 018 PR 130 RDP Present O45 Latitude WGS 84 deg O18 PT 130 ADP Present i 019 Length 130 SRL Value 045 Longitude WGS 84 deg cb bic ip M ISO ORR Vilig nan Flight Level V 020 Broadcast Number bn ME x alue O50 Flight Level G O21 DOMUM Priority 130 PAM Value d 021 Broadcast Power 130 RDP Value O50 Flight Level ft 021 Broadcast Duration 120 ADP Value O70 Mode 2 4 Cade V 021 Broadcast Coverage 140 Time of Day 022 Broadcast Prefix 161 Track Number OTO Mode 3 4 Code G 023 U D Broadcast 170 CNF 025 GICB Number 170 RAD OTO Mode 3 4 Cade L 027 BDS Cone srs Qao made 3 4 Code 028 GICB Periodicity 170 MAH PT 029 GICB 170 CDM 14D Time of Day HM A 030 GICB Priority 170 TRE 200 Track Velocity Mm h oca n Hise 200 Heading deg 020 GEB NE 170 TCC 200 GroundSpeed Nm h 710 FEF 030 GICB RD 200 Heading deg ee 031 Aircraft Identit i 210 Number in List tl ddp entity 210 Signa In 210 Mode 5 Address 032 Mode AG 210 Sigma V Nm h 032 Mode AL 210 Sigma H deg 220 Mode Address 032 Mode amp Code 220 Aircraft Address 221 DRM 033 Aircraft Height V 230 COM 033 Aircra
186. Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 as naak dadene Volumes 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 21 6 5 Stats Check this box to open a window which shows all kinds of statistical values during the conversion process See Vi cw Statistics vi Boma r LAP B Statistics Frames Not Ack Inf o Size 0 000 Kb User Data 0 000 Kb r LAP B Frame Status r LAP B Frame Type 7 Option buttons Scans a few blocks from the data source and colours the line check boxes green if the recording holds data from that line Scanning for lines starts at the beginning of a file or at offset for a EDR removable disk Line selection CI Die Os O Os De _ Line selection im Oz Os l4 Us Le 8 Start Stop Selection When ACP ARP signals were connected during the recording the Start Scan and End Scan control will automatically be filled with their respecteive values Start scan End scan If no a ACP ARP signals were connected during the recording the controls will automatically be filled with respective 0 and 99999 These values can be changed at any time before converting the recorded data i RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 m e Vol 4 D ees Sl Gadrenies
187. Closeout required E Time error compensation 5158 link logic Time window Time between Runs Time error Compensation Comm C Closeout required S18 linking logic Logici Dwn to prev Up ta next T Logici D wn to Logic Dwn Up to next ey Up ta next This parameter determines the size of the search window to link scenario reference data with asterix surveillance messages and interrogation reply data If the difference between time of detection of the 548 record and the time of generation of the scenario reference data is smaller than this value the two data items are linked given that their 5 address is the same This parameter is used in case of Model B scenario generation A run number is added to the TRD data This run number is incremented each time a period of misses or non presence of reference plots of the same target is detected that supersedes the time period provided in this parameter This flag is used to determine whether the real offset in time between asterix TOD and scenario Time of generation is used to recalculate the positional error between the two from the speed vector provided in the reference data See Chapter VI volume 4 for details This flag is used to determine the data link state of the Comm C after a technical acknowledge reply In case the flag is checked default the state remains intermediate until a closeout is encountered In case the flag is not checked the technical
188. E EE ES EL EL CC 2 This diagram shows the data link delays as defined above split into 4 sets of graphs Throughput delays Processing delays Delivery delays and duration delays The user can select 1 out of these four sets This can be done by using the menu in the control bar Processing delays Delivery delays Duration delays The X axis is always a fractional scan number 3 The Y scale of the graph can be switched between a delay or a leap The delay is expressed in seconds and a leap is expressed in degrees Delay zec 0 800 Delay sec Leap degreez v scale N he viewer has a number of buttons to call special functions Call The help window Printout the tabular result Printout the graph Printout the contents of the graph as a table Call the histogram function Call The online reference pdf files Et E 3 E i e Close the window 5 The user can also enable or disable one of the graphs by using the check boxes near the graphs legends This improves the readability of the curves n RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 E ES N Volume 4 miseret cadrentes RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis Delay sec wW y scale Code Chng throughput b LJ 0 800 o ACAS throughput L 0 750 AICB throughput delay p Lj posl BrCB A18 throughput v BrCB A48 throughput a nep 8 M Comm D throughput delay amp Li o
189. EE A CE EE EE EE EE prg 010 Data Source Identifier 205 MAE dil x SAC 8x62 SIC 852 DUSS t2 09 21 44 278 xX 812 Data Destination Identifier 18 DAC 8x34 DIC 181 GATH At 00 01 12 000 888 eros Tupe 1 6 666 Network information Legend 358 Cluster Station Node list 1 4 Node 1 re EE numinis Node 2 ASTERIX Cat817 record t 1 13 Time 09 31 20 770 258 H M S Date 19 06 2002 Node 3 Azimuth 636 365 deg Scan 010 ic 6 3 3 e e e 9 9e e 49 9 A MID 0 UI 3 M Node 4 iiid Source Identifier 08 SAC 8x34 SIC 181 GRTH Node 5 1012 Data Destination Identifier Node 6 DAC 8x52 DIC 852 DUSS nee eas aaa Message Type e 666 Network information 0 4 r Graph 1090p tustar Station Node list PEA sas B SAC 8x34 SIC 181 GRTH 0 2 2 SRC 8x62 SIC 852 DUSS Ji 9931 X 0 07 i i EH EE 09 ET 09 3 09 31 15 0 09 31 20 0 09 31 25 0 Ossi Recording time H M 3 Cluster Instability Assessment Number Time H M S Autonomous None 09 31 20 278 400 3 Autonomous 09 31 21 278 400 Autonomous 09 31 22 278 400 Autonomous 09 31 45 278 400 Autonomous 09 31 46 278 400 Autonomous The example simulated dataset shows an unstable cluster with 3 Nodes Node ORLY is autonomous No NIMs available while DUSS is in state 1 and GATW is in state 3 This is caused by the fact that DUSS only
190. EF bel Hex Rev coa4o oo Time 11 26 35 706 EDR m x x e Ae Date 2570572000 Destination LJ Format Current Eb pcP Fror 3 e Mane Progress Line selection Li Jz Oz U4 Us Ce M 3 Load the converted data in the Inventory tool for analysis like any other converted surveillance radar data Use a combination of sector message north message and azimuth value filters to acquire the desired data for analysis These filters are incorporated into the Inventory filter set The following filter set is available for Sector Message Delay Analysis RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH E j anf js li 2 mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 32 LoadNewRassDataFile 2B vi Please select the data for layer x 1 File pathname HD irk C AMP amp IGN S4 TMD TEST RESULTS lapb S4RD Scan select _ l 3 i io 2 z 40 12 53 0z 27 04 00 Start Time Sector Message is equal to Sector message is true only sector and north messages will pass the filter North message is true only north messages will pass the filter Any combination of the above filters together with the already existing set of filters can be used to acquire a specific set of data Next step is to choose the Custom Menu and choose Processing delay for time based delay analysis or Processing leap for azimuth based delay analysis
191. I RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder 11 29 6 Running a batch of multiple conversions Press the button in the lower left corner to show or hide the Batch Process ConvertRadarData vi gt n Radar Data Recorder OF za Functions EDR Scanning AE VEN s 7 97 9 29 04 C3 File 57857 Offset kB 57857 Offset kB C DCP x Hex les7 o7 13 49 46 1148 Length kE ror APP a 7 97 13 58 10 1148 Length kB BST lay Start date Destination L Info Macintosh HD Rass 13 49 48 Start time CAMP AIGN E4 EEG F1 A faa DEP Ee ee 3 n me Progress whe Batch Process ne site Source destination i1E14 04 1998 site RDR o 20000 1 372937 1 4 3 6 RASS S test 54 1 IE1 4 04 1998 site RDR o 37837 11148 1 4 3 6 RASS S itest2 s4 i Jii Joe Jom e Running a conversion can be a time consuming process therefore if you want to run several conversions in a row you may wish to put them in a batch process Copy the single conversion selected by the green rectangle in the Batch List to the controls in the RDR functions section Add a single conversion at the position of the green rectangle to the Batch list Remove a single conversion at the position of the green rectangle from the Batch list Save the Batch list to disk for later use or reference m 8 Load a Batch list from disk B Run the batch this will successivel
192. IP XI 2 3 0 Making a Recording Chec klist 3 1 Procedure The network recording will be set up in several discrete steps a Hardware connections b Making a recording c verification of data and protocol optional d Converting data into a convenient format Corresponding to each step one or more tools will be used b UDP IP recorder vi Active TCP IP recorder or Passive TCP IP recorder vi These tool control the recording C Protocol Viewer vi d EDR Convert vi 3 2 Connections Always connect the recording computer to you radar local network using a Hub The data must be recorded in a position where the data Passes This means that you must tap into your LAN using a dedicated HUB or using a separate connection Console 1 Console N Console N 1 Client Client Client Ethernet Switch HUB Router SASS S running LAN recording LED eniin RE TES lt RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 E haek dachenies Volume 4 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP X13 The connection point can NOT be a switch since in that case the data is not always passed to your connection port 3 2 Recording the Data UDP IP Recorder 1 Load the UDP IP Recording tool from the RASS S toolbox EDR Data Analyser EDR Bit Recorder EDR Convert Bit Recording EDR Serial Recorder EDF Convert Serial Recording GDLP Protocol
193. IV Serial Communication on Lap B X25 RDR 339 1 0 Introduction 2 0 Extended Data Recorder RDR 339 Hardware Requirements 3 0 Extended Data Recorder Connections 4 0 Making a Recording Checklist 4 1 Procedure 4 2 Recording the Data EDR Serial Recorder 4 3 EDR Convert Plot Data 4 3 1 Introduction 4 3 2 EDR ConvertPlotData vi 4 3 3 Conversion of Data Recorder Data for RASS S Analysis RUM6 Table of Contents v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE h reas A OE OO el tel cl II II II II II II II II II 19 II II II II III III III III III III IV IV IV IV IV IV IV IV IV IV IV I a nil ED Em Emo mM Eom E mwWN RRR COON FF 12 14 19 20 25 26 28 Hm RA NR rR 12 12 12 17 Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Table of Contents 2 Chapter V LAP B X25 ASTERIX Analyser V 1 1 0 Introduction V 1 1 1 Using the analyser V 1 1 1 1 Loading the Software V 1 1 1 2 Overview of the buttons V 3 1 1 3 Running the Software V 4 1 1 3 1 Filtering Scenario Data V 7 1 1 4 Displaying amp Analysis of the Data V 8 1 1 4 1 Hex Displaying Mode V 8 1 1 4 2 LapB Displaying Mode Vid 1 1 4 3 X 25 Displaying Mode V 9 1 1 4 4 Data Displaying Mode V 10 2 0 Troubleshooting V 12 Chapter VI Using PTE P1 for the calc of Theor Ind of SSR Pd and Accuracy VI 1 1 0 General VI 1 2 0 Calculation Methods VI 1 3 0 Summary of Pd Calculation steps VI 3 4 0 Connect
194. M for each pair of SIC SAC and DIC DAC values encountered in the window is used to establish a network topology If all nodes report the same topology within the window the cluster is declared stable in all other cases the cluster is declared unstable The Cluser Stability Analyser tool automatically reports and displays the possible cluster instabilities found during the analysis The tool also displays in a textual way the NIMs used to calculate the cluster stability in a specific time window This way the user can identify the station causing the unstability 1 Load the Cluster Stability Analyser tool from the RASS S toolbox Inventors Statistics Tabular Fd 30 Fd Time Merger amp Linker P2B2 Pd amp Accuracy Calculation Datalink Analyser P2BZ Data Inport Export Interragatian Reply Viewer SFile Viewer Data Display for Datalink P2B2 Cluster Stability Analyser Time Merger amp Linker PS Data Display for Cluster PS The following window will appear Bee EALEN PI as Node Nb peame p eae Cluster Stability vi 2 Run the Cluster Stability Analyser tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window RA 3 Browse for a source folder containing a S17 format file by clicking the L5 button The following dialog will appear az in
195. MUX or RASS 5 format 4 2 Recording the Data EDR Senal Recorder 1 Load the Serial Recording tool from the RASS S toolbox EDR Ds n 325 DR Data Analyser EDR Bit Recorder EDR Convert Bit Recording EDR Serial Recorder EDR Convert Serial Recording GDLP Protocol Viewer EDR Replay EDR Export UDP IP Recorder Convert Network Recording The following window will appear on the screen EDR Control P5 vi Recording HD size 8958120 Kb HD paz Kb Time 0 0 EDR Status EDR OF EGR serial Nr EDR 26 01 017 a un 2 a a Connect ion GPS ge 12g 24b zum 4 igs qm 6 id No connection established The user interface of the EDR Serial Recording tool is divided into several functional blocks At the top there is a row of buttons to operate the tool RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 a inmaak dadene Volumes 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 5 Toggle Help window on off Start the recording Stop the recording Show the preferences window Copy data to image file Program clock LAP B disconnection _ Recover data from EDR 3 Auto save Custom save function AJ Stop the EDR Serial Recording tool Some of these buttons can be disabled according to circumstances At the bottom there is a Connection panel which indicates the integrity of the recording for each of the ch
196. Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 26 2 2 Analysing the Data Statistics tool An other way of examining the data s quality is by counting the number of plots with specific conditions These conditions can be determined as A code valid A code Invalid A code Garbled A code Absent A code zero amp invalid C code Valid C code Invalid C code Absent C code garbled C code out of range For each of these conditions and their combinations the number of plots are counted and presented in a table format 1 Load the Statistics tool from the RASS S toolbox Statistics Tabular Pd 2D Pd Interrogationyiewer Statistics on Plot data vi s E RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE j anf js I oe mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 27 2 Run the program by clicking the start button If you want to export the results to a spreadsheet file check the Export check box Export L before running the tool 3 A file dialog will pop up to allow you to select a file LoadNewRassDatatile vi File pathname geschrewen C AMF amp IGN S4 DEMO D AT amp cR ASDAT D Data S2 54 54 N Scan select D J N B 2 IW 135 20 25 S30 35 40 46 13 20 24 13 39 25 11 01 95 Start Time 11 01 95 End Time is equal to The File pathname indicator will show the name of the file currently present in m
197. Mode 3 A Code in Octal Representation lv a b aB L Mode 3 A 6217 Use the D button and m button to view individual records and step through the conversion process Use the scroll bars to view the remainder of the record view Pe ALAS no ALAS operating E is Alc 6 Bla 1 1 1 A A B Special Purpose Information Size 17 Bytes ADS Time of Output Time 14 37 43 855 ADAS Target Report Tagged Tag False ADS Chain Identifier Identifier ADZ2 Date of Output Date 14 12 1999 A024 Mode A Code Changed during P4 Session Click the button to close the viewwing window The P1 P4 conversion will be a lot RUM4 Ch VII P1 P4 interface v4 4 2 25 07 02 nize cladvonies oume zi RASS S User Manual Chapter VII P1 P4 interface faster when the viewing window is closed VILS 10 After the conversion process a status window is presented to the user This window contains information about the number of messages that were converted and whether or not messages were removed Exporting EDR format ta P4 ONOT aknow ledged LAFE I frames removed ONOT aknow ledged Xz9 Data Packets removed 674 ASTERIX Cat0S4 records exported 0 ASTERI Cat lz records removed Done 11 The P1 P4 convert tool can be stopped by clicking the Halt button Remarks 1 Time stamp insertion Whenever in ASTERIX Cat001 messages there is no time of day item present 1001 141 the time of day item of t
198. N ES z ENEN e erepererTererejejeTe eTe ejeTejeTe eTe eTeTe e e e Tu 8 BIS x x 5 ays z z blolelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelele k b 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 E 2 E 2 gggggggggggggggggggggggggggdd E Sis 9o x x Au E z z sSjejejejejejejsjejejejsjejseje jsejeje e s e e 2e 2 k o e e s e e a aj aej ao a la ala la ala a aja amp a amp 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 The data link Comm C D segment retransmission result can be viewed by clicking the Comm C D reTx eP rer bal button Following window will appear m Result Viewer vi EH Comm C amp D Re Int Rate Exchange v a Comm D Re Int Rate M L1 e Li Jm O gt r Cursor bo B a I 1 1 1 I I I 1 1 1 10 80 85 90 95 100 Wel 3 eF pz engl xi iion Cursor m E or Scan nr 2 This diagram shows the number of retransmitted segments per Comm C or Comm D transaction The number of retransmitted Comm C segments is defined as the difference between the number of real send Comm C segments and the number of segments of the packet The number of retransmitted Comm D segments is defined as the difference between the number of announced segments and the number of real extracted segments 3 The user can select the segment retransmission versus target or scan number type lt Comm C amp D Re Int Rate E
199. Network Connections The two PC systems running both the EDR and the RES must be put into a local area Network This can be done using a simple twisted RJ 45 cable network using two computers or using a simple Hub Once the ethernet connections are present put both PCs in sharing mode This can be done by using the File Sharing control panel RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 E intieselt cdadvonies_ Volume IV RASS S User Manual Control Panels Appearance f Favorites Apple Menu Options Graphing Calculator AppleTalk Cy HANDY gt Capture Cj Internet Access pera Configuration Manager Key Caps Control Strip Network Browser Date amp Time Note Pad DialAssist gj Procalc Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Exchange File Sharing General Controls Internet G Recent Applications gt Q RecentDocuments E3 Recent Servers gt c Remote Access Status Name each computer differently and use names that remind you of the configuration Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation File Sharing Start Stop V Activity Monitor de Network Identity PTE 1 RES Owner Name Owner Peswr 1 Computer Name PTE 1 RES File Sharing on Status Click Stop to turn off file sharing This prevents other users from accessing shared folders Program Linking off Status Start Click Start to turn on program linking This allow
200. O18 activity cnt O Comm D Status cnt Failures cnt D Link Count cnt Please enter a Caunters Template filename View All Click the LE button to clear the display and start from scratch to buid a new analysis Type in a new name for the new analysis type Analysis Mew Analysis Type Click the button to add a counter definition to the analysis type The counter definition window to define the first counter is enabled r Counter Description List Counter name type Interval Counter 0 Counter 0 1 0000 i Counter Contents Type in the counter name and decide the interval for which the counter has to be calculated Counter name type Inter wal Click the button to define the contents of the counter or doubleclick the name of another counter in the counter description list Counter Description List Test counter The following window will appear y ak dedna Velume RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 78 SeParchEditor TRD vi Data Displav Filter Bad This is in fact the same window as the filter definition window in the Data Display tool For more information about theis window please consult the user manual on this topic Use this wndow to define a specific counting function and click the OK button to add this new counting function to the new mr type r Counter Description List
201. Off On and live Off static On dynamic Live Data is inputted live on a scan to scan base RDR convert tool or RE tool Depending on the selected configuration other settings become available Off static layer Layer settings Settings Dy namic Labels _ Dy namic m n t l Type C Target ip L velocity ee MeRa Time C Track Mr L Heading i Start Scan Step size O Y Sceanmr O PSR Ren i Refresh rate J Position 1 Code SSR Reni e Mode A 2 Code Com Cap Ud AUD J Pede c I Elevation J acas Mode S FJ Power J FL Stat Plot C Overlap L Target Gen L Set Flat 1 T de C Identitu Mo Math Max Hin RMS Mean Delta Sum In the plot panel the settings for displaying the data can be edited by clicking the legend RUM6 Ch IMI RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE j anf js li 7 mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis IIL10 Flot FT Common Plots Point Style Line Style Line Width Bar Plots Fill BaseLin Interpolati Color d See LabVIEW user manual for more details The selection of the data fields for labelling can also be done in this window see later Labels L1 Dynamic _ on C Tupe U Target ip velocity LJ Time Track wr O Heading L v C Scanner O PSR Ren O Position 1 Code SSR Ren Mode 2 Code LJ Com Cap Made
202. PS ACP ARP there is a LED display that indicates the general status of the recording for that particular channel Grey meaning hardware channel NOT IN USE red meaning all logical channels NOT OK yellow meaning at least one logical channel is NOT OK green meaning all logical channels OK Notice that a red or yellow LED does not necessarily means that the recording has failed A poor line quality also results in a temporary red yellow light A green light indicates that the recording is functioning in an optimal way for the respective hardware channel The synoptic text displays more details of the current status of the recording Only the active passive or Y passive See preferences channels are displayed There are three levels of reporting 1 Rx Tx level monitoring of the number of transmitted frames good and bad received frames 2 LAP B level monitoring of the LAP B state number of rejects and resets 3 X25 level monitoring of the X25 state Tx and Rx number and number of resets These counters are updated continuously during the recording a inmaak dadene Volumes RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 zl RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 12 GPS E 24s sue 4 ae 5196562 Timing OF ARF 00113 ACF 6330 PRS 00000 GPS timing not used Mo GFS time correction done Line 1 PVC 100 gt DK Tx Frames 52 Rx Good 51 Bad 0 Information Rem
203. Protocol Viewer v4 4 3 14 11 02 zl RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 19 D EIIE CFI Status Display vi B S Address 6A019 CatO17 Display Tx Only Tx Only F a FH HF SFH r re i x atd Node Selection e B Dusseldorf POEMS e Bl Gatwick 9 2 r Display E Qa Lu COP Fi O Include DD Filter C Show Scan Number r Window Position 4 R gt POEMS B r Timing Info Source Detection Detection 3 H 10 11 42 843 750 t2 10 11 42 843 750 t2 t1 0 000 000 E Data source Decode delay Histor Time Macintosh AY CAMPAIGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE V 443 DATA RAWRDR 7 errr On Off abel s enon BEM Q Relative DUSS SCFI 202 190802 02 rS i oon mi 2 absolute Comm Layer selec Appearance Break mode g sition Lj i 12 73 Lia fis Cie eA Logged in DCE mode w in DCE mode Logged in DCE mode w L onor s sso Ikb Tx analysis Rx analysis Search Q Msg Nr 211 Size 129 Status OK S a Time 18 12 18 461250 3 RSTERIX san af Line Level Azimuth oo deg A Display Timing messages 010 Data Source Identifier SIC 652 SAC x62 812 Data Destination Identifier DA f C 8x34 DIC 1681 00G Message Type 1 New node Change over final or only message segment 210 Mode S Address list amp x45ACF4 0x4006C7 xA173A8 0x300043 6x484155 0x4
204. RES recording folder in the middle section of the tool This step is optional but we advise that you always perform this action If this folder is selected three additional fields in the S4SC file are filled Interrogation power Number of roll call interrogations per target Number of Roll Calls before first reply This is only of relevance if the scenario is used with Mode S roll calls SelectFolder vi POEMS EXAMPLES 5 Please select the RES recording folder E DATALINK 1 DATALINK 2 T1 DATALINK MERGE TEST3 MODEL B 1 C3 MODEL B 2 C3 MODEL B 3 C1 SHAW MODES TAKE2 RES Recording Folder PlayStation Alain C AMP amp IGN S4 PTE a P2B1 FAT RESULTS SHa w MODES ay TAKE zcan 13 22 30 SHAW MODES TAKE2 21 02 2001 Next select the EDR recording folder in the lower section of the tool RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 E sitsers ft clecvenies Volume IV RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 16 SelectFolder vi Please select an EDR folder ee Cj ACCURACY C3 PERF TOU1 12 1 SSR 1 MODES C3 RES SLOW 1 C3 RES SLOW 3 C3 RES SLOW 4 RES SLOW 5 EGR Folder Playstation Alain C AMF AIGM S4 TRSU CAMPAIGN DATA F Aw RDE FES SLOW S RES SLOW S arp RES SLOW 5 Next select a result folder Preferably the result folder should be the same as the RES recording folde
205. S User Manual Target Info Window Time of recording Date of recording Scan of recording Azimuth of recording Detection Time amp Code FL S Address Type Plot Track Chapter III Radar Data Analysis Infowindow 2B vi 09 44 55 0504 18 11 1229 0 0000 0 0000 09 44 54 2724 b ELE HH Range Mm Range es Az imuth deg Height ft Aircraft ID 375 velocity Mm h 271 m Heading deg D Fel Heading deg SSR Power dBm Flot Elevation deg 46 4453 ofS 84 23 2178 27100 0 00 0 000 253 216 32 0 T 22 Mm 0 00 Y Nm 0 00 1 Code 2 Code Scan zz Track PSE hitz RCbfr SSF hitz RC MB Fields AC AS FL STAT Com Cap Datalink events Erdost Comm B mR 5ICB AICE Comm Target ID Set O Target Gen 0 Overlap Datalink Results BCCB closeout E AICE closeout Comm Ack Comm C Comm C Ack Coram D n Comm D closeout Detail a1 zd 23 16 15 Status 6 11000011 b 101 b S i1 2 22 16 15 S S Status Datalink type Status 2 b Ob b a1 240 23 16 15 b Datalink Status b Ob 9 Labels can be added to specific plots A label can contain different data fields The user can select which items appear on the screen using the preferences window Click the Preferences button to open the preferences window Preferences The following window will appear RUM6 Ch IIT RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 0
206. S toolbox A F EDE Data analyser EDR Eit recorder RDR Convert Bit Recording RDF Replay data ROR Bit Recordinug vi HD Start Position O kb HD Size O kb HD Wrap around On Off HD Position 0 Kb Carseio ideinBrifinei FOF serial Mr RDR n8 01 025 HD usage NN EDR Status l l l 20 4 60 g0 i0 NoDisk Inserted Disk Inzerted In the user interface of the Bit Recording tool there are several functional subdivisions At the top there is a row of buttons to operate the tool Toggle Help window on off Start the bit recording Stop the bit recording Show the preferences window i data to image file Stop the Bit Recording tool At the left side there is a Set up panel to set up the RDR Set Up HD Start Position O Kb HD wrap around L On Off Timed recording _ On off At the right side there is a Info panel to monitor the functioning of the RDR as hee ellipsis oume zi RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder IL16 Info HD Size O kb HD Position O Kb EDE serial Mr EDE Status Finally there is a progress bar to indicate the usage of the hard disk HD usage LL O Oo 20 40 60 80 100 Make sure all connections are made properly and the data and clock lines are producing data This can be checked using the data analyser see above 2 Run the Bit Recording
207. Shared Slant Y Hm f Shared Slant X Mm Shared Rho Mm fiShared Theta deg Define Custom y Z naek dadon eet RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 80 eSumarise the data per scan Open Preferences For Layer 1 Set Math to Sum window size to 1 and Step to 1 Select proper color and symbol Remark Although the Math function is Sum a special feature is added for the calculation of the Reinterrogation Rate Sum XNi XNei in stead of M Ni Nei Data Display Preferences vi ET IR uec ues ue ee Layer settings Dynamic Mathematics Q No Math Window Start Scan Q Max i Scan history Q Min Q RMS Shared Axis Q PERS 3 Refresh rate Type Q Delta Filter And C TRD Scan And TRD Scan 2 258 CALC Rr Ni Nei CALC Rr Mi Ne TRD Scan vA snp ere WS 9 2 X 2 240 x Y fel Legend 2 220 2 200 BackGr Map 2 180 Layer 1 2 160 Layer 2 Layer 3 2 140 Layer 4 2 120 Layer 5 Layer 6 2 100 Layer F 2 080 Layer 8 Layer 9 2 060 Layer 10 2 040 MD Flag x 2 020 Man Designation r Target Info z 2 000 1 980 L BackGround wm 1 RECLIVE MJ RI D D m Sum fg NeMahfg Mo Math f 6 2 1 3 Display of roll call re interrogation rate per Range Window Create a new Graph type in the data display Rr f Range P
208. Sum 3 J x z RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 inak cedens lume zi RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 82 6 2 1 4 Display of Overall Roll call re interrogation rate e Re use the Rr f Range display defined above eSumarise the data over the complete set Open Preferences For Layer 1 Set Math to Sum window size to 256 Nm and Step to 256 Nm Select proper color and symbol Mathematics Sees ceneseneceneseneceneeenneen C3 Mo Math window Q ves Step 5 Min Ni Low limit Mean Ji sx 3 Delta eThe data display should show one dot in the center Put the cursor on this dot to determine the overall re interrogation Rate En E e les n QF Jj 9 3 y x x 128000 Y 2 111 ol r Legend BackGr Ei Data Display vi PSF CALC Rr Ni Nei CALC Rr N NeD f TRD Range qos vj 2 3222 2 300 2 280 2 260 2 240 Ma 2 220 x Layer 1 2 200 Layer 2 2 180 Layer 3 Gu Layer 4 2 140 Layer 5 2 120 Layer 6 2 100 Layer 7 2 080 Layer 8 2 060 Layer 9 2 040 Layer 10 2 020 r MD Flag 2 000 Man Designation 1 980 r Target Info 4 1 960 1 940 1 920 1 900 s 1 1 I I Az 124 126 128 130 132 134 136 138 ET L BackGround TRD Range Nm E aa 1 RECLIYE J v 83
209. The active layer can always be renamed by clicking the Label Layer button A dialog box to enter the layer name will appear Label Layer Label dialog Please Enter a layer name COo 3 A layer can be made visible or invisible with the M button underneath the layer tab The data is still present in the layer but and all actions will be executed on the data but it will not be visible in the graph A layer can be emptied by clicking the 9 button underneath the layer tab All data for that layer is removed including filename and filtrer settings A row of layers or all the layers can be empties by selecting the appropriate function Delete Layer 14 to 1F Delete Layer 25 to 2F Delete Layer 34 to 3F Delete All Layers Ep A layer can be copied into another layer by using the button Copy Lawer E Copy Layer 1 into Layer 1C Copy Layer 1A into LayeriD Copy Layer 14 inta Layer iE Copy Layer 1 inta Layer 1F Copy Layer 1A into Layerz Copy Layer 14 into Layer 2E Copy Layer 14 inta Layer zc Copy Layer 14 inta Layer zD Copy Layer 14 into Layer 2E Copy Layer 14 inta Layer zF Copy Layer 14 inta Layer A Copy Layer 1 amp inta Layer 3B Copy Layer 1A inta Layer 3c Copy Layer 14 inta Layer 3D Copy Layer 14 inta Layer 3E Copy Layer 14 inta Layer SF The source layer is checked by the program with a sign and the destination layer is selected by the user Each layer has its own specific settings These ca
210. The main objective of the convertor program is to convert the serial recorder data blocks into a file format which can be read by the RASS 5 or RASS C analysis programs lie maok Gladventtes _Youme4 zi RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder 11 20 4 5 2 ConvertRadarData vi 1 Load the Convert Radar Data tool from the RASS S toolbox Data analyser Serial recarder ConvertEadarData Replay data After serial recording or even while the serial recording is being performed you can convert the recorded data into a DCP MUX format or into a RASS S format other formats may be foreseen in the future Madrec etc The convertor program also allows you to see the data in a PPI format or a Hex format This comes in handy to check the recording process while it is being performed ConvertRadarData vi gt Fadar Data Recorder OK ose nurce Mi sd Ciffset kE amp File T Hex O RDR LI PFI Start dat Destination L1 Info SUE Scanning 3 Rass Start time faa Q DCF End date e amp Mone 8 Step Size Kb End time Progress Line selection bd First we determine the source of the data recording We can convert data either directly from a data recorder connected to the computer at that time from a DCP file e g from a RASS C recording or from a file This can be selected using the Source selector There are 3 possibilities File DCP
211. The new type of analysis will be added to the Analysis types list and will appear from now on each time that the TRD Counting window is opened Click the button to close the TRD Counting window and return to the Data Display tool ihitaselt cledkonties ame 5i RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI 1 Chapter XI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP 1 0 Introduction The final stage in the radar chain is the data processor and the corresponding data transmission elements data lines modems telephone or dedicated data lines More and more this radar data is shared by multiple users distributed over a wide area For efficient transportation of this data via private or public networks high speed serial communication protocols such as LAP B X25 are commonly used Alternatively the radar data is distributed from Radar to Centre or between Centres using IP based protocols IE has developed two types of dedicated recorder tools to record such data if it is present on a local network One of these protocols is UDP IP User Datagram Protocol Internet Protocol the other is TCP IP Transport Control Protocol Internet protocol The tools enclosed in this version of software records UDP IP formats as specified by the AENA Spanish administration and TCP IP data as defined by the EADS radar development group If the user want to record other p
212. Third view vi e NHH TNE Polen TERRE Il 23 lzi e Calor scale gt 140 0 100 0 75 0 50 0 Custom Legend Range Mm a na amp zimuth deg 0 00 E BackGround m Map X Nm The look and feel of the Third View tool are similar to the Inventory tool Things like Background lBlBaskereund Map il Ma Square graph E Toggle help o Histogram w mm Multilevel link J Print E Target info 7 4 Xy zooming and panning ERE Ws sg gO XII win react in the same way as for the Inventory tool The top right selector allows to select the data for the colour scale in this case range Range Hm Automatically the corresponding data is loaded into the tool and displayed as a colour scale The progress of the loading is displayed in a progress bar LI The full range of the colour scale is visible in the colour ramp The colours go from black over blue green and yellow to red It introduces a feeling from cold to hot or from low to high The first time that the data is presented the colour scale is auto scaled this means that the highest value is represented in red and the lowest value is represented in black In between there is a linear distribution of the values according to the corresponding RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH E j anf js li 2 mil n Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 24 colour The colours can not be changed only their corr
213. Use the Site information window for this purpose Identification Ststioncnane Latitude 46 43 01 99 dd mm 35 Station identifier Longitude 02 2000 89 dd mm 55 Radar type Mode 5 red Operation Comment Revolution time MISSE Max range 256 0 Mm ACPR 14bit mp Cancel Then enter the site s coordinates and close the window using the OK button 11 Click the start button and wait until the end of the process gt The Progress bar will indicate the processed part of the file while the UTC time and Day indicators show the UTC time as derived from the UTC file a Huse Gaines oume y RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 18 Progress Pr ric time Message Time 10 50 26 870 Ray X Date 0210 2001 Current Eb 408 0 3 607 total Error o oo 00 00 000 11 Once the file is completely processed the different files can be viewed with their relevant viewers or the next step data linking can be taken if the TRD checkbox was not checked 3 1 3 Special Attention for Model B Linking For the analysis of Large Model B scenarios it is advisable that the Background targets are split and only the sector targets are analysed using the DataLink Analyser The Background targets should be put in a separate RESULTs folder and NOT Linked This separate folder can then contain the background targets in an 548 file This me
214. Use the X scale menu to select one 5 scale 5 address Target ID 5 address Run nr Target ID Run nr In case S address or S address Run nr is selected you can modify the X scale format into hex representation by using the graph s pallet Format d Decimal Mapping Mode gt Engineering Tabular resu Pep Pope Binary Call The help window Printout the tabular result Printout the graph Printout the contents of the graph as a table Call the histogram function Call The online reference pdf files Close the window 5 The user can also enable or disable one of the graphs by using the check boxes near the graphs legends This improves the readability of the curves y scale Mode change failure PLI us ACAS R failure LJ 2 AICE failure L 8 Broadcast Comm B failure 5 Bl 7 Comm D failure a Comm invalid sequence m L1 Comm C failure n m 5 Sump LJ 4 Z 3 M 2 nu 1 7ksor z 0 hian rran rrn i roren a nn ww mn I I I I I I I I I 0 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 70 0 30 0 30 0 100 0 1100 120 0 E vns QF TERE x soale 6 The general results of the delays are shown in the tabular display under the graph EA o p y y y f ACASRA Tire az fe eoo Jones oza ooo onoo roo poen ros ics feiure fee fa eso nerz zis7 Jesoo osos roo ooo soo Brosdcasitonm fais fa ooo fosr2 pses soo osos sooo poo zoo
215. VE sasc sis s4s A saro Mf Ania kal IRD N Rcony MW TRD W EDR Recording Folder Progress Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE e 432 DATA RAW RDR REC LIVE IM 0 O EAEE Rey Date Eaa 30 000 Line selection Current Kb 2574 0 total H 02030140506 Errr o 00 00 00 000 s Process time Next run the Time merger just as in scenario mode The required files will be created 3 3 Life data Merging including Replies For some additional data link analysis we need the reply data This can only be generated by means of the the pulse recording of Mode S reply data This data can be extracted from the recorded pulse data This process is explained in detail in volume 3 Chapter IV IVS Data export 4 0 and further Select the proper RESULT folder containing pls file and select the EDR recording with the UTC timestamping Then create the IRD file Analyse Pulse RecordingP2B vi BHEE H el LESER Input folder Search PlayStation Alain C APP A4lGH S4 p PTE P2B2 TESTING RESULTS REC aean uS LIVE rec live pls Az imuth Range 200 Progress PlayStation Alain C AMP lGN S4 UTC PTE P2B2 TESTING D AT R Aw x ROR REC LIVE REC LIVE arp Processed szi26 93172 33 Eb Output Offset SARE File LJ LI Senne Bz 65 Ant File FJ i 2 IRDFile A type RC ACreplied cw 0 Imih 230 46 Process time 00 00 12 00 00 12 Once
216. Viewer EDR Replay EDR Export EE 9 A A Ao LUDP IP Recorder Convert Metwork Recording The following window will appear on the screen UPD IP Recorder vi Format Stream Port Destination IF Source F packets bytes Recording Information Buffering 7 Recording Time na 00 00 The user interface of the UDP IP Recording tool is divided into several functional blocks At the top there is a row of buttons to operate the tool EJ Toggle Help window on off 2 Show the preferences window Start the recording Stop the recording Ed Copy data to image file v stop the UDP IP Recording tool Some of these buttons can be disabled according to circumstances Under the command button row you can find the list of Filter information each filter is rdizgers fi cadvanties_ otume 2 RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI 4 defined separately by its Source and destination IP addresses and port number Furthermore each filter needs a definition of the protocol used DDE Asterix The window shows the number of packets and bytes recorded for each filter Multiple filters can apply to one stream A stream can be seen as the equivalent to a recording line on the EDR Format Stream Port Destination IP Source IF Foackets bytes EB HSTERIX Bl 1234 BE Bm a ai Ba 6i 681 eS B B B DOE B Bagi maj 681 B81 Ba
217. a Analyser DCP MUX Serial Recorder B Raw data P Raw Data gt j RASS S Site Info Sa RDF Data analyser RDF Bit recorder RDF Convert Bit Recording RDF Re I 3 DEMO El Ei 20 items 245 8 MB availa p Cj MSSR v G pata ho DCP dp EXPORT d FILTERS Ni GPS Ni MAPs b b b b b b RASDATA gt gt RAW RDR b b b b b b b i a RESULTS p Q SCENARIO b Cl YIDEO For more detailed information about the recording tools consult the RASS 54 User Manual Volume 4 Chapter II Radar Data Recording Fe talil p cote mil Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter I Introduction I4 3 2 Radar Data Analysing RASS S e RASS S A DEMO BE 20 items 245 8 MB availaj b Cj DSSR al Au C oce Export B 3 export d FILTERS d GPs Export Inventory Statistics Tabular Pd 3D Fd Scenario Time Merger Pd amp Accuracy Calculation Tabular Pd Export a MAPs a RASDATA a RAW RDR a SITES tm INTERROGATIONS NETWORK REPORT Export REPORTS RESULTS SCENARIO VIDEO XXXX gt Report vi gt REP lt gt Reporting gt in UO K Report Hardcopy Report File different measurements For more detailed information about the analysing tools consult the RASS S4 User Manual Volume 4 Chapter II Radar Data Analysing FE AM 4all n li 4
218. a T Data 3 acPR l4 bit w rev O Data4 The max range fields determine the X Y axis range for displaying purposes The latitude and longitude fields are used to calculate the vertical graph display and a background map For more information about the Site tool consult the RASS S user manual volume 4 Chapter 2 Radar Data Recording 4 Use the Load button to load a RASS S data file The following dialog will pop up and allows you to select a file Load LoadNewHRassDataFile vi Please select the data for layer x 1 File pathname Hb irk CAMP AIGN S4 TREO CAMPAIGN RESULTS rez z 10 1 09 01 36 a 04 16 24 02 r00 Start T ime 24 02 00 End Time Sector Message if equal to The File pathname indicator will show the name of the file currently present in memory for the selected layer In case you have just performed a Time merger Scenario generation or Pd and Accuracy calculation the last generated file will be automatically selected In that case you can skip the next step RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 E j anf js li mil Pa Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis IIL5 File pathname geschreven C AMP amp IGN 54 PEMO D ATA RASDATA D Data 52 54 54 N Type in a new file path name or click the Find File button to select a new RASS S data file Find File The slider control will automatically alter its maximum value to the total number of r
219. a Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 can be useful to evaluate the linking prodest e edrentes Volume 4 zi RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 17 and recording prior to analysis 9 Filtering An important new feature since v 4 4 0 is the inclusion of a pre filter This pre filter allows the user to filter out specific targets for the analysis The feature is very valuable for analysis of large Model B scenarios of several thousands scans and milions of plots To call the filter click the filter button Following window will appear Define Linker Filter vi Filter S address min xf S address Max x 200000 Use Filter f 7 238 Cancel OK The filter is based on mode 5 address only Therefore the user can remove e g the Background targets of a large Model B scenario By default the filter function is off To define a filter enter the start and end 5 address range and check the Use filter button Then click the Ok button to confirm If you are dealing with data of more then 1 mio plots it is advisable to analyse it in smaller parts e g by using this filter 10 Define the Site info Since the inclusion of PTE P5 in the SASS Se release the tool also calculates the longitude and lattitude position of every plot This is done using very precise transformation algoritms These algoritms require the input of the coordinates of the site in longitude and lattitude
220. a Recorder RDR 184 The RDR 184 equipment includes the following hardware Radar Data Recorder RDR184 Power supply cable Portable workstation with power supply SCSI connection cable Interface kit containing 1x2m 37 p shielded cable for connection box 4 x 3m25 p flat cable for data connections data recorder connection box Custom made connection cables option breakout boxes for custom adaptation of connectors option 1 Gb 2 Gb Iomega JAZZ drive cartridges Aluminium packing case RUM4 ChI Introduction v4 4 4 14 02 2003 EET B 4 4 wee ic tale ill 77 2l 5 ome 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter I Introduction I2 2 2 Extended Data Recorder RDR 339 The RDR 339 equipment includes the following hardware Extended Data Recorder RDR 339 Power supply cable Portable workstation with power supply SCSI connection cable Interface kit containing 6 DB25 connection cables 1 DB15HD to DB15HD RVI connection cable Custom made connection cables breakout boxes for custom adaptation of connectors Internal 9 or 36 Gb SCSI harddisk Aluminium case EDR RDR 339 back panel view RUM4 ChI Introduction v4 4 4 14 02 2003 Fy E l aaas Ei ii fall 74 mil paz Volume 4 RASS S User Manual RUM4 ChI Introduction v4 4 4 14 02 2003 Chapter I Introduction 3 0 Software tools and related files 3 1 Radar Data Recording Radar Data Recorder MARDOGA vf Dat
221. a set and are displayed at the right hand side of the histogram window Statistics Statistics nan zero 20 034 43 550 94 2859 52242 Mean 27 554 STD 59 152 RMS 125 436 Population 2205 Count 2 451 Population non zero 2205 Count Use the graph palette to zoom and pan in the data centre and select the cursor 200 453 1 341 RUM6 Ch II RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 EFE j anf js li 7 mil Pa Volume 4 RASS S User Manual 11 12 Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 18 Ie CR e Ete Use the legend palette to change the appearance of the histogram Legend Point Style Line Style Line Width Bar Plots Fill Baseline SESS ete polation CCECCECCCCEETEEeee eee Color sn HEC 7 BHENHEEEEENHEEESNEHES CHES O C BENEESHENEES S BEA BE Pt EE EN THREES LIE TL YE TE TE IE E IE YE TE JE TE TE TE IE YE TE TE TE IE IE TE TE Foreground E Background ij All for both Other keys toggle The cursor display shows the value the upper and lower boundary of the selected histogram bin A bin can be selected by dragging the cross cursor to it The cursor will automatically be placed in the centre of the bin and the cursor display will be updated at the same time Cursor 0 00 Hits 250 000 Low 223 000 High The histogram can be printed by clicking the print button The RASS S reporting function is enabled which allows you to store or print the his
222. a will turn green Line selection pJi L I2 Ls 4 Cls Le If the file is a UDP_IP recording file the stream selection menu will apear select one of the streams for analysis Line selection 8 Dependent of the settings of the EDR during the recording the Appearance function can be set in the DCE or DTE mode The function is used to interpret the protocol and assign the correct labels during the analysis amp pperance Logged in DTE mode v Logged in DCE mode 9 The Decode delay function provides the possibility to delay the visualisation and the processing of the following message during the operation of the program The delay is given in seconds The function can be selected by clicking the On Off button and the delay can be entered in seconds Decade delau On Off Delay s 10 The Break mode is used in combination with a filter function When the mode is On the first value corresponding to the filter which was set shall be shown As long as no message is found equal to the filter settings the led will be red Once a message is found it will become green and the processing will be halted hae Gadvanies Volume IV y RUM4 Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 6 Break mode On Off 11 The History function provides the user with a history of the messages Depending on the number filled in this is the amount of
223. ach entry in the reference array a search is performed in the Asterix array using the following criteria The user defines an input time window t window 0 100 1 50 ms The user defines an input range window R window 0 2 0 1 0 5 Nm The user defines an input azimuth window Az window 0 2 0 1 0 5 deg In the formulas the suffix r stands for reference and the suffix a stands for asterix data Flag is used to indicate whether a plot has already been linked Flag1 True AND ModeS 2ModeSg AND Time fU window gt Time q gt Time r t t window AND Ranger Rwindow gt Rangeg gt Range y R window AND Azimuth r7 Azwindow gt Azimuthg gt Azimuth r t AZ window If a corresponding record is found the associated Flag1 and Flag2 bits in each of the 2 arrays are cleared The array index of the reference array is copied in the Link field of the corresponding asterix data entry and the the array index of the asterix array is copied in the Link field of the corresponding reference data filed If a corresponding link can not be found and the mode S address has not changed from previous link leave the flag1 miss flag in the scenario data but clear the Flag2 acquire bit this indicates the Real misses If a corresponding link can not be found and the mode S address has changed from previous link or previous link also had the acquire bit set leave the flag1
224. ade CALC Rr Mil Mei f TRD Range Mm TRE Latitude deg fL TRE Longitude deg Define Cuztom Use the P button edit the list or use the Define Custom item to add a new item to the list The following window will appear Define XY Axis P5 vi E n hxis Tro Slant Nm T xiz TR Pam Slant Y Nm Cancel This window allows the editing loading and saving of the display type list load list from disk save list to disk add display type lo list remove display type from list d N rename display type in list The default list is called DefaultDDGraphsP5 grph This list can also be changed to the needs of the user Displays list should be saved in the Campaign General Templates folder There are eigth possible sources to define an axis Shared v TRD 248 518 IED DLF S17 SCF The Shared source is somewhat special because it uses the layer preferences setting to decide the actual source of the axis see preferences later This way it is possible to display a common axis in several layers and use for each layer a different source for the common axis Each source has its own list of possible axis Therefore there are eigth different lists available The list of possible axis is automatically adjusted corresponding to the selected source Click the OK button to activate the new edited list and to return to the selected display Click the cancel button to ignore the change
225. aining an interrogation requesting that BDS and the time of the first cat 048 for that target supplemented by a user defined maximum delay This delay is determined from a user input number of scans Max acquisition scans GICB recalculated towards time using calculated rotation speed TGICB is the ordered periodicity of Comm B BDS extraction input by the user The parameters is only calculated for targets with at least 1 GICB extraction found for that track This parameter can also be calculated seperately for large datasets starting from the S48 datafile In that case no linking is required No Graphs are presented eigher 1 The data link Pd CommB result can be viewed by clicking the Pd CommB memm button Following window will appear Li Result Viewer vi E BSE m Lacs Wy soate VERI 100 00 we Pd GICB EDS x50 d 20 00 Pd GICB BDS x60 b v 80 00 Pd GICB BDS x70 b LJ 70 00 PLI 0O aM 50 00 iz 40 00 z0 00 a 60 00 20 00 10 00 0 00 he RR rule x x soale S address S address Run 4 7 ZI RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 iniacatt dadose RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 42 2 This diagram shows the Pd in of successful Comm B delivery per target and per BDS register Non extracted BDSes are not taken into account 3 The user sees the Pds per t
226. ajectory scenario Generator or the Event scenario generator The scenario file is UTC time stamp corrected after playback of the scenario by the RES The second one is the result of the conversion process of a prerecorded EDR data file containing Asterix Cat 48 and Cat 34 data using the PTE P1 EDR Convert tool All results are based on reference scenarios containing Mode S and Mode A codes Dupliacte Mode S addresses are flagged in the scenario generation tool and can therefore be threated seperately Pd figures are calculated as double precession floating point numbers and are presented to the users as a percentage with two decimal places Target range errors are calculated as double precession floating point numbers and are only limited by the Asterix cat 48 resolution of 1 256 Nm Target azimuth errors are calculated as double precession floating point numbers and are only limited by the Asterix cat 48 resolution of 1 16 bit ACP 0 0055 deg Separate Pd are calculated for Mode S and Mode A target reports The user can select a section of data using a limited set of PTE P1 filtering namely only on scen number and or UTC time A linking algorithm described hereafter labels the different plots as missed missed but in acquisition False or Code Swap The last two are exclusive conditions meaning that a code swapped target is not declared as false or a false target can not be declared as code swapped Finaly
227. al Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X22 Data Display P5 vi m l I2 TRD Slant Y Nm o TRD Slant Nm TRD Slant x Nm A 14 None 1B None 1C None 1D None 1E None 1F None 24 None 2B None 2C None 2D None 2E None 2F None 34 None 3B None 3C None SD None SE None SF None r MD Flag 1 I 1 v s Bs n None 2 None J None 4 None DEES f No Math ij No Math fij No Math fij No Math fij KJ In the Data Display P5 tool user interface we can distinguish several functional blocks First there is the top row buttons to operate the tool Some of these buttons can be greyed out at startup of the tool Toggle Help window On Off Load TRD data from disk Save TRD sub set to disk Fast Filter TRD data Quick Find TRD data BH Start dynamic layer m Pause dynamic layer m Stop dynamic layer a Step backward in dynamic layer Step forward in dynamic layer Show preferences window S Show Multi Site window 157 Show Label window 3 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 nask dadon ee RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 23 Print current display AY Multi Level Linking Tabular TRD Data View Export 1D 2D Histogram Display Third View Display Data Link SCF 1 SCF 2 Status Display Counting Func
228. alk can remain active a biegen Gladvonties VolumelV S z RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VL12 RASS S User Manual O S Chooser Select a file server ls J DJ 800 Series LaserWriter 300 LS LaserWriter 8 p MN Server IP Address OK Stylewriter 1200 AppleTalk o ACTIVE amp Inactive 761 Use the EDR software as described in volume 4 chapter IV Make sure the EDR preferences are set to use the GPS UTC time stamping EDR Preferences vi ACP Input Q 12 bit ACP 14bit ACP Q 16 bit ACP Host Settings Line None v Number bud Now start the recording tool by clicking the record button EDR Cantrnl vi Recording HD size HD pos Time EDE Status puj Wri Ill 1 l EDF serial Mr HD usage T 3 l T I au 100 Connection Timing 1 2 F 2 2 The tool will produce a dialog window showing the GPS timestamp messages Volume IV RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 13 EDR GPS init vi Serial Fort Printer Port USE b ul ane Stat UTC Time of Day 00 00 16 ae s GPS to UTC Time Offset O 000000000 s Time Mark NOT valid GPS Sync Cancel The message shall first show the several satellites the GPS receiver sees Next watch the GPS sync and UTC sync messages Once the GPS
229. alysis IX 50 5 3 8 Data Link Roll Call Re interrogation Rate Calculation 5 3 8 1 General In the context of POEMS evaluation the Mode S detection performance of the POEMS ground stations will be measured by means of the performance parameter Probability of Detection However to minimise the RF pollution this probability of detection shall be achieved by minimising the number of Roll Call interrogations while extracting from the aircraft all the requested information The performance parameter that indicates how well the radar succeeded in minimising this number of roll call interrogations is the roll call re interrogation rate The radar can perform more interrogations than expected because of the following reasons the reply was received to early in the beam where the accuracy is not sufficient the interrogation was sent before the beam was eliciting the target no reply was sent by the transponder the reply could not be successfully decoded due to garbling by fruit The Roll Call Interrogation Rate data is evaluated using the PTE P2B2 Data Analyser tool and the result data is included in the TRD data The results can only be viewed in the Data Display tool 5 3 8 2 Definition The Roll Call re interrogation rate RR is defined as the ratio between the number of Roll Call interrogations actually performed Ni and the number of expected Roll Call interrogations Nei 5 3 8 3 TRD data structure The analysis starts f
230. alysis Type in a new name for the new analysis type Analysis Mew Analysis Type Click the button to add a counter definition to the analysis type The counter definition window to define the first counter is enabled r Counter Description List Counter name type Interval Counter 0 Counter 0 1 0000 i Counter Contents Type in the counter name and decide the interval for which the counter has to be calculated Counter name type Inter wal Click the button to define the contents of the counter or doubleclick the name of another counter in the counter description list Counter Description List Test counter The following window will appear az inmaak dadene ms d RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 26 SeParcheEditor TRDvi Data Displav Filter Bad This is in fact the same window as the filter definition window in the Data Display tool For more information about theis window please consult the user manual on this topic Use this wndow to define a specific counting function and click the OK button to add this new counting function to the new mr type r Counter Description List Test counter Counter name type Interval Counter Contents CALC Linked S48 In Indiessmeussmulttleccubteimcan bended oa same way multiple counters can be added to a single type of Analy
231. am Hits r Settings r Statistics 274 0 absolute 8191 645 Total 260 0 Q Relative 2 549 Mean EOS J Cumulative 15 724 STD 3 471 Bin size 15 329 RMS Inclusion 34 774 Max 200 0 Bins 34 650 Min 180 0 r Population r Statistics non zero 2214 Count 220 0 2 549 Mean 160 0 r Population non zero 15 724 STD 2214 Count 140 0 15 929 RMS ea 24 774 Max 120 0 101 00 Hits 20 9 Low 24 4 High 34 650 Min 100 0 80 0 r Comment 60 0 40 0 20 0 M e a I RE Legend m M 9 921 gl X 0 0 1 1 1 34 7 20 10 D i i 30 0 34 8 TRD Slant Y Nm TRE Slant X Nm One of the two axis can be selected using the selector in the top right corner of the window The following settings can be done in the histogram function Relative or absolute value representing e Absolute G Relative Cumulative value representing _ Cumulative Bin size value The Bins indicator is directly coupled with the Bin size value and the respective boundaries of the geographical display of the Data Display tool 10 000 Bin size 20 Bins Boundary inclusion lower Incluzian These parameters can be altered at any time and this will result in an immediate recalculation and redisplaying of the histogram Some statistics are automatically calculated on the selected data set and are displayed at the right hand side of the
232. and states of all nodes as seen in the node of the assesment at the time of a cluster instability The user can automatically position the query cursor on such an instability by selecting the line of interest and clicking the a 73 Find button This will move the cursor and show the related NIM messages in the Used NIMs window The color display can represent the number of Nodes seen by the cluster or the state seen by the cluster This can be selected using following menu Display Hode State b al Available Modes V Mode State The display can eighter be a color chart default or a scatter plot This can be selected using following menu Hode State Ww Scatter diagram lt Intensity chart RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 intaeett dedna Volume 5 zi RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 30 RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 In scatter mode the following graph is available x r Parameters r File Pathname Node State 3 0 window 3 000 s Macintosh AY C AMP AIGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE 442 RESULTS DUSS GATW 1906 NODE1 nodel S17 28 Step 1000 s Display m Used NIMs zem Mash F p 24 ASTERIX Cat 1 record t1 1 Scatter diagram w Time 09 31 20 765 350 H h S Date 19 06 2002 Azimuth 835 879 deg Scan 818 a EV MU ic pe comode o gc ppp a mes GE E E MC E
233. and the Analyser tool The Data Display P5 tool can display PTE P2B2 Data link files as well as PTE P5 SCF files For more information about these tools please consult Volume 4 chapter IX paragraph 2 and 3 The TRD Data set can be found in the LINKED DATA folder of the selected campaign folder Inventors Statistics Tabular Fd 40 Fd Data Import Export 5 File Viewer Time Merger amp Linker P2B2 Pd amp Accuracy Calculation Datalink Analyser P2EZ Interragatian Reply Viewer Data Display for Datalink PZBZ Time llerger amp Linker PS Data Display for Cluster F5 Linker amp TRD Fa d Data Display TRD Data TU Nem 3 1 Using the Data Display P5 tool 1 Load the Data Display P5 tool from the RASS S toolbox Inventory Statistics Tabular Pd 3D Pd Time Merger amp Linker P2b2 Pd amp Accuracy Calculation DataLink Analyser P2B2 Data Import Export Interrogation Reply Viewer 5 File Viewer Data Display for Datalink PZBZ Time Merger amp Linker P5 Data Display for Cluster PS The following window will appear on the screen RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 13 items 6 44 GB available b C3 rDS5R B i PTEP2B2TESTING P EH p C3 DATA p Cg EXPORTS b C3 INTERROGATIONS b Sj LINKED DATA b gt C3 NETWORK p Sy PREFS p j PSR p Cj RECORDINGS b Cj REPORT p C3 RESULTS p C3 SCENARIO p C3 vipeo Volume 4 riisoexefite aedrenics RASS S User Manu
234. and the data of node 4 will be loaded in layer 4 Layers 3 5 and 6 will be empty After loading the data the Data Display P5 will calculate the appropriate display type This will take a few seconds a progress indicator will appear in the lower right corner 9 TRD Latitude deg TRD Latitude deg f TRD Longitude deg 7 Md 45 i I I i I I 1 I I l I I I I I I I 4 3 Ss 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 wv BackGround TRD Longitude deg a 5 The Data Display tool is build up with layers of data At all times six layers are always directly accessible with the tabs at the bottom of the window Click one of the tabs to make that layer active 1A ORLY B GaTw 1C DUSS i 1D None J 1E None J 1F None J A No Math fy N No Math fy V No Math ff V No Math A V No Math tit IE No Math f Ri Paging through all the layers Max 18 can be done using the Tal button at the lower left side of the window The layers are organised in three rows of six layers The red dot RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 pi mask dadon em RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 29 corresponds with the selected row at that moment It is very important to realise that all actions are executed on the active layer Notice that the layers need not to be loaded in a specific order Layers are automatically named according to their filename upon loading
235. ange Data Link Delay Data Link Failure Data Link GICB Pd Data Link Comm C D segment retransmission Data Link model B compliance All preseding actions merging conversion linking and analysis are performed by one single HMI the Time Merger vi zu Huse uns oume S RUMA Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 3 05 10 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 3 1 4 Data Displaying The results of these analysis can be viewer immediately in the Result Viewer tool in a number of graphs or tables but are also included as calculated fields in the TRD data set itself This allows the user to visualise the calculated data link fields such as delays activity as a function of a recorded or other calculated field in the data display tool This tool is derived from the PTE P1 inventory tool but allows the loading of TRD data which has a lot more fields available than the original inventory tool Any field in each of the related data items Scenario data Radar Data Interrogation and reply data can be visualised in relation to any other field Sometimes this leads to 1 N relations These are shown in a scatter diagram as N points The data display allows the printing of data histogram calculations 3D views etc zu Huse uns oume RUMA Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 3 05 10 01 S RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 4 2 0 Data Recording The assessment of
236. annels and for the GPS information Connection GPS E i zi sq 4i 5g amp ag No connection established p At the left hand side there is a Recording panel to monitor the proper functioning of the EDR Recording HD size 8958120 Kb HD pos Kb Time n EDR Status EDR OK EDF serial Mr EDR_26 01 017 At the right hand side there is a PPI panel to monitor the radar turning ACP ARP information If no radar timing signals are connected this panel will not be updated and the dial will not turn Notice that it is not mandatory to have the radar timing signals connected to make an EDR Serial recording However some analysis features are not available when ACP ARP signals are not connected to the EDR RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 ihiiaselt cledkornties Woume zi RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 6 A 0 00 deg Make sure all the neccesary hardware connections including the SCSI connection between the EDR and the workstation are made properly before proceeding 2 Run the EDR Serial Recording tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window The first time the tool is run the preferences window will automatically pop up This window can also be called by clicking the preferences button EDR Preferences vi ACP Input Address List SVC r LCN List PVC amp 12 bit ACPR 4096
237. ans that the Time merger should be Run Twice 1 st setup Only sectors Time Merger P2B vi ra Result data saved Define Linker Filter vi Scenario Folder Result Folder Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 RCEL TR408 Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 RCEL TR408 RESULTS MODEL B1_SECTORS ONLY 1l scan SCENARIO MODEL B 1 model b 1 S4EV Output s4sc WH s18 548 A sar a IRD N RConly A tro W 5i wu eo tv Filter S address min 400000 5 address Max 500000 Use Filter f RES Recording Folder Analyse vf TRD NM Ww eo tv EDR Recording Folder Progress Process time Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 RCEL TR408 DAT A RAW RDR MODELBI TO1 Message Time 13 07 22 009 Rey o Date 12 02 2001 14 137 s Line selection Current Kb total 31092 L 1s C14 DI5 Le Eror o 00 01 24 788 s er 2nd setup Only Background Time Merger P2B vi raa Result data saved E 2 5 S Le JL Ready for viewing Scenario Folder Result Folder Macintosh AV CAMPAIGN S4 RCEL TR408 Macintosh AY CAMPAIGN S4 RCEL TR408 RESULTS Q SCENARIO MODEL B 1 model b 1 S4EV MODEL B1 B ACKGR ONLY Define Linker Filter vi x scan Filter k 5 address min 0 RES Recording Folder Output r1 S address Max y x 200000 S4SC S18 s48 KA S4RD Use Filter ff IRD 3 862 TRO O EDR Recording Folder r
238. arget and per BDS in a different colour The X axis can contain one of 4 different values 5 address Target ID combination of S address or target ID and Run nr Use the X scale menu to select one 5t address 5 address Target ID 5 address Run nr Target ID Run nr 5 scale In case S address or S address Run nr is selected you can modify the X scale format into hex representation by using the graph s pallet IS HET M Decimal Mapping Mode gt Engineering Tabular resu P c Binary Ez fe octal zz a v Hexadecimal ze Relative Time 2 7 Absolute Time iN d he viewer has a number of buttons to call special functions Call The help window Printout the tabular result Printout the graph Printout the contents of the graph as a table Call the histogram function Call The online reference pdf files Close the window 5 The user can also enable or disable one of the graphs by using the check boxes near the graphs legends This improves the readability of the curves Pd 9 w y scale Pd GICB BDS x40 b vd TRUM 7 ions iis xix xx Pd GICB BDS x50 LJ 90 00 Pd GICB BDS x60 LJ 80 00 Pd GICB BDS x70 J 70 00 LI O 60 00 5 54 50 00 La 40 00 MM 30 00 B4 20 00 10 00 0 007 I I I I 1 I I I I I I I 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 x nn fA TL x soske IS 9921 4 X 6 The general results of the delays a
239. arget produced by the radar If a target is missed for any reason no position update is transmitted AT26BFLS24 A second blue cursor can be moved by the user using the cursor mouse pointer Upon clicking the question mark button a label showing the A code and Flight level of that particular plot will appear on the PPI The label will remain in that position until the user clicks the question mark button a second time The label will then be updated By clicking the Pause button LY the PPI screen will be frozen 6 3 Info Check this box to enable a display which shows additional information about the current conversion Into Message 417 Rev 9 Date 24 02 2000 Current Eb Error o Message will show the number of messages counted Plot Track EMM etc messages Rev will show the current detected revolution counted North messages current Kb indicator shows the of Kb which have already been processed Time shows the absolute time of the recording Data error shows the number of errors counted 6 4 Format Check this box to open a window which shows the current hex data formatted into a readable string according to the data format View Data Format vi SSS H 818 Data Source Identifier AC 6x63 SIC 832 G86 Message T s ype Sector crossing message 828 Sector Number Nr 184 u a3a Time of Da Time 69 61 35 6859 RUMA
240. assive recordings the number of transmitted frames good and bad received frames is counted These counters are updated continuously during the recording ACP 00000 PPS 00001 GPS timing nok used o GFS time correction done Passive Rx Good 118 Bad 0 During the recording the raw data as logged to disk is displayed and updated in the UDR Acquisition window indicating that data is logged RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 F n 3 i i l 4 TTT A sena Communication DOA vers eee at il r l an Ye 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 12 E UDR Acquisition vi 02 42 55 PM timestamp o6f24 2003 0001 0073 OODB aono BEID FCF O21 0303 0100 DFFF 5406 OF 42 0080 3573 4600 1414 F446 0018 093E 4C3E 5900 B740 FFS4 0607 4201 9432 F348 0018 E2FA 6600 1306 3700 30599 DOBS 40FF 0406 0740 0196 3204 43831 18GEA FAED 046E EESG 4146 41560 59CF BD40 FFO4 0607 4001 Fes 1546 6414 78F8 6407 95569 7B46 4044 6059 DEBS 40FF D406 0740 0044 3408 4405 1001 Fae6A 0891 Cee ODES SF 5904 B440 FFD4 0607 BOO1 1517 OF 49 5306 S8FD 5F 4 Fee D542 Brc 8C59 DIC 40FF D406 OFA0 DUD3 21C1 4445 1058 FBCB 0539 B97C 42B2 4168 59D4 BB40 FFD4 0607 A001 F321 C644 4010 SAFB CBOS 4466 0003 7101 6859 D464 4057 BADO 9 At any time when the save button is enabled a copy of the raw data file can be made to an image file on the computer disk This file will contain a bit copy of the specified Kbytes up to t
241. at 048 An 5 3 6 Data Link Comm C and D Segment Retransmission Analysis 5 3 7 Data Link Model B compliance Analysis 5 3 8 Data Link Roll Call Re interrogation Rate Calculation 5 3 8 1 General 5 3 8 2 Definition 5 3 8 3 TRD data structure 5 3 8 4 Assumptions 5 3 8 5 Results 6 0 Data Display tool 6 1 Using the Data Display tool 6 2 Some application examples 6 2 1 Display of re interrogation Rate 6 2 1 1 Preparations 6 2 1 2 Display of roll call re interrogation rate per scan 6 2 1 3 Display of roll call re interrog rate per Range Window 6 2 1 4 Display of Overall Roll call re interrogation rate 6 2 1 5 Disp of the roll call re int rate for a sel set of target rep 6 2 1 6 Display of the roll call re int rate in a color display Chapter X Data Link Analysis 1 0 Introduction X 1 1 Data Input 1 2 Data Analysis 1 8 Data Displaying 2 0 Data Recording 2 1 Recording in Local Mode 2 1 1 Surveillance Data Recording 2 1 2 Surveillance Coordination function Data Recording 2 1 3 EDR Connections 2 1 4 GPS Connections 2 1 5 Network Connections 2 1 6 Data Recording Software Manipulation 2 1 7 Interrogation Recording 2 1 7 1 RES Connections 2 1 7 2 RES Software 2 1 7 3 RFTS Connections 2 2 Recording in Central mode 2 2 1 Individual Connections 3 Data Conversion and Merging 3 1 Time Merging and Linking 3 1 2 Software Manipulations 4 0 Data Display tool 4 1 Using the Data Display tool IX IX IX
242. at the recording performed on any of the N nodes connected to this Network will contain the radar and SCF data of the other Nodes as well In this case only the interrogations of the station at which the recording took place will be recorded Typically multiple lines of the EDR will be used to record the data from several stations The global recording of all data are converted into individual 48 and S17 files by means of the Data Convert module Data in the global EDR recording is split per Node by using the SIC and SAC codes This converted data is linked into one global linked dataset also called TRD which can then be loaded into the data display ry z iniiacalt cladzones Voume RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X3 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 C A Data Merger hb Data Linker Ints Replies Radar n 1 Data Display Data Linker Results v IRD Data Analyser UC 17 Figure 2 SCF Analysis local Central mode Overview picture 1 2 Data Analysis Once the data has been recorded linked and merged it is stored in a proper format for further processing This processing is performed by means of the Analysis module Also part of the same HMI as the conversion linking and merging process This analysis module shall add a number of calculated fields to the data such as network
243. ataset D range was put in the Y value of the S4RS file and D Azimuth in the X value of the S4RS file Beware The Pd and Accuracy module always uses the distance to the closest_ target in planar range and puts this in the datafield This requires some care when using the data on cases of more than double overlap or resolution Therefore we will select DRange for the Y axis and DAzimuth for the X axis of the inventory graph This will show the Resolution diagram E naak cdackonies Volume IV RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 V1 30 Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation RASS S User Manual gt e _ B ET z D Range Nm f b Not defined D Range Nm 40 10 180 90 MB 0000 0000 0000 00 Target InfoQ Range Nm Azimuth deg Scan SB HEHE SEES FES FF SEE SEES FEE EEE Et ee EHH HEH EES dM RU oe EHH EES O SHED Se 4 8 FF SEF Ee tt ee He EHH EH HEH Ee EE o SHH O Ee HHH H SOF OES EEE E HOt EE E EE EEE E He OE OE H E EE SHEE EE E e SHED DD ee SHEED Oe e e ee Hee OF H OE E E O S SE SEE SS 4H Oe Ht GA ttt o EET ES StS SES SES SESE SSE SEES EE ESE EES SEE SS SHS Se OH OO ete dtt EE EEE EEE EEE ES FEE FEES EE SEES EE SEE EEE EE SEES MEO TAE EE Ee ee He He Ee He ee W tt 9 AH EE SEE SEE EEE HR E HH HH HE 70H E HH AH HI HB HH HH HH tt 160 04 0b 6 04 6 05 0
244. ations are applied both to SSR and Mode S data since version 4 1 2 The following definitions shall apply a Correct is defined as expected Mode A Mode C is available and Mode A Mode C of the target report is present and is equal to the expected Mode A Mode C b Incorrect is defined as expected Mode A Mode C is available and Mode A Mode C of the target report is present and is not equal to the expected Mode A Mode C c Validated is defined as the Mode A Mode C validation bit is set to 0 ASTERIX 1048 070 Bit 16 amp 1048 090 Bit 16 respectively d Non validated is defined as the Mode A Mode C validation bit is set to 1 ASTERIX 1048 070 Bit 16 amp 1048 090 Bit 16 respectively e False Plot is defined as those declared as such as a result of applying the linking algorithms f The equation denominator shall equal the total target reports linked as a result of the previous algorithms This shall therefore include those target reports declared as Code Swaps g Cat048 target reports declared as False shall only be included in the numerator calculation of the probability of false target reports The probability of code detection is defined as at each scan for a given target a radar target report with correct and validated code data corresponding to the interrogation modes is produced Targets with non existing capabilities e g Mode A only transponders are filtered out Since version 4 1 2 The probability of Mode
245. be selected The corresponding start and end times are displayed in the respective boxes Click to load the selected data or click to load the entire source file RUMA Ch VII P1 P4 interface v4 4 2 25 07 02 Q q Volume 4 ee eee nn Jimtersolgelectromics m RASS S User Manual Chapter VII P1 P4 interface VILIA 6 Select a destination file by clicking the LINT 7 The P1 P4 convert tool is now ready to start a conversion process Click the LH button to initiate the conversion process The conversion process can be stopped at all times by clicking the m button All the data already converted will be saved into the destination file without any loss of data The conversion process can be paused at all times by clicking the button In Pause mode the conversion process can be stepped through by clicking the m button Releasing the button will relaunch the conversion process at full speed 8 During the conversion process the progress indicator and P4 file size indicator are updated Progress F4 22 9 Kb ro 9 By clicking the button at lower left side of the window the converted data is displayed in a readable format View Pe giasData Source Identifier SAC BHxBBH SIC 255 tldsTime of Day UTC Time 14 37 42 414 826 Target Report Descriptor TYP Pu us T RAB Fx ifla ila lil lalala un 846 Measured Position in Slant Polar Coordinates RHO 28 23 Nm THETA 248 82 1 te 878
246. be simple straight forward scenarios First we want to asses the radar performance versus range and azimuth Therefore simple radial flights over several radials are a good example These scenarios must contain sufficient targets to create statistical correct values for Pd and Accuracy at least 1000 plots 10 targets Next we want to create typical resolution scenarios where several trajectories are in resolution A good example is the resolution slow scenario included in the 3 RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 E nak dadventes Velume IV RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 11 example scenarios An important factor is the fact that all A codes and 5 addresses in the scenario must be Unique This is an implicit requirement of the procedure used for this tool Create the scenario using the Trajectory scenario generator We do not advise the use of the event scenario generator since this will make analysis interpretation harder An exception to this rule is the test of A code changes This will require the use of the event scenario generator and the code change event The tool will allow you to access the time required for tracks and plots to change code Once the scenario is created make sure it is compiled in a correct scenario folder The scenario folder will hold multiple files required by the RES see volume 5 but will also contain an S4 version of the scenario S4TJ
247. bular display under the graph In order to provide you with the correct values of Model B compliance according to the definitions of PTE P2B2 you must put the Type selector in Model B compliance per Run This will provide you with the following table showing the Model B compliance status E Je Fete cee cco m 00 ossoorocoo seenorssso ses 0d ron 00 E Je rsza ofzaze s021 260 zaze 521 260 esar odzsrrodzsrrod e sszooosr soo p aeo av soo 21 260 ss 000 75 000 22 000 E eoo s500 rive eso 1118 e000 4000 006 z poo soo rne 2087 pes oco noco 206 7 e sso eezs Joss eszs ossr e000 soco 5000 zoe rss jose eem 072 sooo ooo i006 e i _fronoad i2 00 ssoz2 reooroon ionooroooo roooecprzso The Model B compliance status is determined individual for GICB Comm C and CommD and as a general figure the AND function of the three RUMA Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 as A Volume d nask dedonga 22me RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 49 An alternative look at the matter can be provided if you put the graph in the other mode Model B Target e2 pezeoocse sez sass e792 recon noon roo ea eoo ossa joser 1000 poco reco occ roo eis a faa 000 osse josos r000 poco reco loco o ea eeoo0 forse loser Es se000 oiz7 loses roo hr roo onze peo E In this case the the compliance is not determined per Run a
248. can is greater than or equal to And Slant s Nm is less than or equal ta 4 836326 And Slant 4 Mra is greater than or equal to 0 088515 And f Slant Y Hr iz lezs than or equal to 24774303 And Slant Y Nm is greater than or equal to 34 650257 It is possible to filter the TRD data set to limit the amount of data or to zoom in on a specific problem The filter display shows the current filter for the selected layer E liso deckonies_Yame RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 57 Filter TRO Range Mm is greater than 50 000000 Click the Filter button to define a new filter setting The following window will appear Filter searchEditor TRD vi Data Display Filter A filter consists of five functional blocks The first block is the source of the object o filtering Choose a source of the list The chosen item is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the object is enabled The contents of the second block depends on the chosen value of the source Because there are five different sources of objects available there are five different lists with objects Choose an object of the list Use the scroll bars to page through the list and click the wanted item Date Time Target ID Track Mr Scan Mr 1 Cade Z Code The chosen item is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the condit
249. case you will need to transfer the data manually onto the other computer over the network 2 1 7 Interrogation Recording In order to record the interrogations we need the RES or RFIS to make an interrogation recording This can only be done in local mode NOT in central mode This is performed using the RES Interrogation recording software or the RFTS interrogation recording software 2 1 7 1 RES Connections The RES needs to be connected to the radar see Volume 5 for details and the ACP ARP pulses need to be distributed in the correct way This means that the ACP ARP is connected to the RIU input through a RVI or ACP ARP Fan in unit For details on the connections of the RES generation tool we refer to Volume 5 chapter III of the RASS S User manual A general overview of the connections are shown in the figure on the next page 3 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 as iaa dadene Volume4 RASS S User Manual RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 10 RJ45 l Ethernet Passive ANTENNA RJ45 x Ethernet Te gt Hub RECEIVER RJ45 T OWER Ethernet me RERUMS Yellow VI Soto 390 VOC Black _ Clk ET Red Vr 5 A RJ455or 50 m cable O Z a dB25f Serial port e SS dB15HDm dB15HDm dB15HDm Alternatively to RVI Use APM For APM connections see Vol 5 Chapter VIII
250. cati F scans 2 Run the Time merger and Linker P5 tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window The user interface of the tool is divided into several functional panels At the top of the window there is a row of buttons to operate the tool Toggle Help window on off A Open the Multi site window Select a filter for the Time merger ak dadose zi RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 17 Start merging Stop process S Ly 2x Opens the EDR recording and Conversion Parameter or SCF parameter window ni Opens the conversion information window during converts 5x select one of the source or destination folders for the process e b Stop the tool 3 a First select the RESULT folder The Result folder is going to contain all converted and intermediate datafiles IRD 548 and S18 For more details see Volume 8 Chapter III SelectFoalder vi Please select a Result folder RESULTS Result Folder Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 P5 a TESTING AV RESULTS P5 TEST ud F4 P5 TEST SCENARIO 1 13 19 5z P5 TEST NNCOP T5 ru If the folder already contains a setup file the following warning will be issued You have selected a result folder containing a setup file Do you want to load this setup The tool will automatically propose a LINKED data folder This folder contains all the linked TRD data rea
251. ccuracy Calculation VI 24 Following data is present in the list for Mode S Ref S address Reference Mode S address Ref Time Reference Time stamp Miss Miss flag 0 or 1 Acquire Acquire Flag Range Nm Range of reference after eventual correction Azimuth deg Azimuth of reference after eventual correction Speed Nm h Speed of Reference Headingldeg Heading of reference Cat 48 S address Mode S address of Asterix plot Cat48 Time UTC timestamp as output by radar Cat 48 or 1 False T False flag Range Nm Range of detected target Azimuth deg Azimuth of detected target Rng Error Nm Range error reference detected Az Error deg Azimuth error reference detected Time Error ms Time error reference detected 1 ACCPTANCE P1 4 TAKE2MS txt B Reference scenario file Testi S4 Asterix recorded file Test Take2 S4 E Filter Scan Nr is less than 270 And Z A Code is not equal to 7607 Time window ms 50 Range window Nm 1 Azimuth window deg 1 UTC Timestamp offset sec 0 2 Time error compensation Enabled Ref S address Ref Time Miss Acquire Range Mm Azimuth deg Speed Nm h Heading deg Cat 48 S addr Cat48 Time False T Range Mm Azimuth deg Rng Error rM DSE HE Boa 1 0 Ox291000 11 16 51 267 0xz91000 11 16 57 281 0x391000 11 17 03 295 0x391000 11 17 09 308 0x391000 11 17 15 321 0x391000 11 17 21 334 0x391000 11 17 27 346 0x
252. ce Mode S and SSR accuracy in terms of declared range and azimuth on recorded SSR Mode S and SSR based data on a limited and defined set of rules specified in the EC document stated above SSR performance analysis in resolution cases 2 0 Calculation Methods All calculations are based on off line recorded S4 data files Note An S4 file is a file used in the RASS S4 software to contain all plot and track related positional and status data such as range azimuth 5 address A code etc Details on this filetype can be found in the RASS S4 PTE P1 P2 ICD v 3 1 The ICD is added in the softcopy of this manual pdf version Several sources of 54 Data exist Depending on the data source the extension of the file is slightly changed This allows you to distuinguish between the different files Scenario files generated by Trajectory scenario generator xxx S4T Scenario files generated by Event Scenario Generator xxx S4EV Time merged scenario files UTC time stamped xxx S45C Converted Radar Data files Asterix xxx S4RD Scenario Result data after Pd and Accuracy xxx S4RS Asterix Result data After Pd and Accuray xxx S4RA The comparison of two data sets is based on two separate input 54 data files z RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 iniaset cedvenies Volume RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI2 Scenario data S4TJ and Asterix Cat48 SARD The first is the result of the PTE P1 Tr
253. ce Identifier Data Destination Identifier v None 010 Data Source Identifier 020 Target Report Descriptor 030 Warning Error Descriptor 040 Measured Position 042 Calculated Position 050 Mode 2 Code O55 Mode 1 Code 060 Mode 2 Code Confidence 065 Mode 1 Code Confidence 070 Mode 3 4 Code 080 Mode Z Code Confidence 090 Flight Level 100 Mode C Code amd Confidence 110 height Measured By 3D Radar 120 Radial Doppler Speed 130 Radar Plot Characteristics 140 Time of Day 161 Track Plot Number 170 Track Status 200 Calculated Track Velocity 210 Track Quality 220 Aircraft Address 230 Com ACAS Cap FL Status 240 Aircraft Identification 250 Mode S MB data 260 ACAS Resolution Advisory 020 TYP No Detection 020 TYP Single PSR 020 TYP Single SSR 020 TYP PSR SSR 020 TYP Mode S All Call 020 TYP Mode S Roll Call 020 TYP Mode S All Call PSR 020 TYP Mode S Roll Call PSR 020 SIM 020 RDP 020 SPI 020 RAB 020 TST 020 ME 020 MI 020 FOE FRI No Mode 4 Int 020 FOE FRI friendly 020 FOE FRI Unknown 020 FOE FRI No reply 050 Mode 2 V 050 Mode 2 G 050 Mode 2 L O55 Mode 1 V 055 Mode 1 G 055 Mode 1 L O70 Mode 3 4 V O70 Mode 3 4 G O70 Mode 3 AL 090 Flight Level 090 Flight Level G 100 Mode C V 100 Mode C G 130 SRL Present 130 SRR Present 130 SAM Present 130 PRL Present 130 PAM Present 130 RDP Present 130 ADP Present 170 CNF 170 RAD Combined Track 170 RAD PSR Tra
254. ck 170 RAD SSR Mode S Track 170 RAD Invalid Track 170 DOU 170 MAH 170 CDM Maintaining 170 CDM Climbing 170 CDM Descending 170 CDM Invalid 170 TRE 170 GHO 170 SUP 170 TCC VIII 20 Use the button to save and the E button load a predefined list of display cursor types for a specific type of S File format Display type lists should be saved in the Campaign General Tempates folder Use the button to delete the current selected display type from a list Once the display type list is configured use the Lo J button to apply the current display selection and return to the main window Use the button to ignore the changes made and return to the main window 7 It is possible to import export TSF format A Files file types from the S File Viewer Select the appropriate function from the list For more details about the TSF file format please consult the PTE ICD AL Import Aly Export Custom List Ex ort More details about TSF import export can be found in paragraph 3 0 of this volume 8 By loading filtering zooming and selecting custom X Y Z axis a specific data set can be displayed on in the S File Viewer tool This data set can be displayed as a 1D RUM4 Ch VII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 Volume 5 niansalt adrentes zi RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIIL 21 histogram by clicking the histogram button 1D Histogram The following window will appear
255. computer and the RES computer are linked using the network Auto Save EDR Sync The recording starts simultaneously with the EDR and creates interrogation files every N minutes as set in the EDR recording software Then start the recording using the record button RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 zu Huse uns oume S RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 9 2 1 3 Order of Launching the Tools It is very important that the tools RES main and EDR control are launched in the proper order First load the scenario folder select a RES recording folder but do not start the RES main yet Next start the EDR control tool Click the Start button wait until the GPS is synchronised and click OK in the GPS window Next wait until the X25 3 or Lap B connection is properly established unless your radar needs ACP ARP s in that case you can proceed immediately and then start the scenario Never start the scenario first and then the EDR since this will result in a one scan offset between asterix data and interrogation reply data 2 2 Recording in LIFE case In the life case the data recording is performed by means of the EDR and GPS and the interrogations and replies are recorded by means of the RVR and RVI It is also vital to recognise that the RVR has no mode 5 decoder build in so we will use a RFTS or RES to decode and or record the Mode S interrogations 2 2 1 Data Recording
256. d disk 1 Gb Removable Hard disk Ch1 2 Ch3 4 Cc CC 37p flat cable SENNA Radar data Tx rack Ta SATA TAS aon mm db25 25p flat cable 71 db25 The data recorder s clock and data inputs are wired from db25 connectors common for most serial communications The recorder only uses the clock and data line for data acquisition so no special handshake lines are required If such lines were needed to be recorded along with the data and clock a second and or third channel might be used for this purpose RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 nask dadn Voume RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder IL3 Front Panel Back Panel Radar Data Recorder Interface DTE BIS CE ee C DCE CH2 DSP pP DCE DTE C H3 SCC DCE DE _CH4 DSP C S Q DCE DE CH5 DSP CS Se DCE DTE CH6 DSP Clock DCE Data Intersoft Electronics The previous figure shows the connections of the dB 37 connector on the back panel of the data recorder As can be seen from this schematic all input lines have their own ground line used for screening and have a representative output line In fact the recorder can also be used to play back data previously recorded From this db37 connector the lines are split in the interface box into 6 input channels Depending on the setting of the switches Data is read from pin 2 o
257. der used to calculate the target position detection Pssn us No of SSH with Incorrect amp Validated Mode C Code No of Linked SSR Target Reports The probability of false target report shall be determined by the ratio of the number of false target reports in relation to the number of detected target reports Poon No of SSR amp Modes False Target Reports No of Linked SSR amp ModeS Target Reports The same formulae are used for Mode S but PSSR is replaced by Ps 6 4 Mode S Time Bias and enor Calculation The Mode S Time bias is calculated as follows 1 Using the Mode 6 calculated reference and asterix arrays see 4 1 all targets having a valid link index all non missed or false plots in the reference array are used to calculate the time error as The Link index is used to locate the corresponding record in the asterix array AT s Time q Time y 2 The time Bias is defined as Theoretical ModeS Time Stamp Bias Mean Ub us 2 PD PN Ne N Total number of non missed Mode 5 reference plots 3 From this also the standard deviation is calculated as 1 i i Theoretical ModeS Time Stamp Standard Deviation 7 eo prm A y U In the created result file the AT s value is entered in the S4 field A time RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 mack cadvenies Volume 1V RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 39 6 5 Mode S Range and Azimuth enor The
258. ding order according to the consecutive selected items RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 mask deckonies oume RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 40 PrintTables vi oO Bomy Ress eee Data Display listing Layer name 1 RADIAL 36 SCEN1 DFS Window x max 09 09 TRD Slant X Nm x min 10 74 TRD Slant X Nm v max 18 98 TRD Slant Y Nm v min 22 55 TRD Slant Y TRO Index _ TRD Time of RD addres TRO Range IM TRD azimuth reos aims fy oO wemeazzxs pun psom p 1 T T 1 peseaesmps asn psoxw _ T z exozema z220 fso b To T z 7 h ce e e e o PININ nh ro io u P et Ao o Ni NMP Np ra n2 iN O4 O4 O4 l RARI NS A G NINJ i Cen e to t9 R R NIE 0 a The top row buttons operate the window Toggle Help window On Off Save list contents to disk Internal format Load list contents from disk Internal format Import list from spreadsheet Tab Separated format Ei Export list to spreadsheet Tab Separated format Cut item from list Ep Copy item from list paste item in list Empty list em Undo last Select all Print list Sort list according to sort key Close window 15 Click the button to open the Third View tool This tool allow
259. dless loop method and retreiving data at any desired moment in time The recording of the asterix data can be performed eighter locally on site or centrally in a remote site or centre The recording of the interrogation data on the other hand needs to be recorded at the radar site itself since a connection of the RF channel of the radar is required 2 1 Recording in Local Mode In the local mode the data recording is performed by means of N EDR and GPS systems each distributed over the N nodes of the cluster One RES or RFTS per Node performs the task of recording the interrogations 2 1 1 Surveillance Data Recording The Recording functionality of data for SCF analysis purposes consists of the recording of Radar Surveillance Data asterix cat 48 on Lap B or X253 level Surveillance Coordination messages asterix cat 17 on Lap B or X25 3 level and UTC time They are recorded by means of an EDR and GPS unit For surveillance data there are two methods of getting the data Active or Passive In case a separate data channel for PTE recordings is foreseen the EDR can be connected to this channel The EDR can then be put in active mode and make recordings of the active data retreived from the radar on this single channel This active channel can eighter have one PVC or single multiple SVCs The methods of making an active recording are explained in Chapter IV of this volume In case you want to use the EDR as a spy
260. dy for loading in the Data Display tool Linked Data ZTRDJ Folder Macintosh Aw C AMF amp IGN 24 ACCEPT ANCE 342 LINKED D AT 4 LIFE RE RLUM Rr Depending on the setting of the parameter Link single station the LINKED_DATA folder will also contain TRD datasets per individual Node SCF linking window D longitude 2 0 200 deg D latitude 0 200 deg Link Single station data f 4 Next select the Multi Site file This file should be imported from the SMGET tool export file named cluster dat which should be present in each Map Export folder provided by that tool Click the Multi site button K RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 as iaa dadene Volume4 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 18 Following window will be evoked View Multi site filevi Station Node Identification r Localisation Activity Name 1 Latitude 1 dd mm ss None ma Meter YO tmo liim pares Amude oo J Immsi SAC Type i PSR PY sine zone dd ure o Lo Operation r Comment Revolution time 0 000000 s PSR Max range Nm acPR 12 bit I lperev cancel In that window click the import button and select the MAP folder containing the cluster dat file Please select the Map folder containing the cluster definition file 15 09 35 06 02
261. e A code error bit of the status field of the Asterix data set a biegen Gladvonties VolumelV S z RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 26 Inventoary vi Jj ej 3 Ji 7 9381 tl x arz H v 1564 m 4 Codes o fg none v Target Info C Y G A Code 3011 E FL 2950 E S Address 0 Range Mm 27 77 Azimuth deg 92 27 Me 0000 0000 0000 00 Type SSF Track n Power dBm 46 0 Rec Time 15 16 08 2 Rec Date 02 01 1904 Scan 29 Load layer 1 of the inventory with the result scenario data xxxS4RS and load layer 2 with the asterix result data set xxx S4RA This allows you to use the inventory tool s display functions to show the accuracy data versus time range azimuth etc Next load layer 3 of the inventory with the missed plots using the scenario data xxxSARS and the filter set to Miss true Load layer 4 with the false plots of the asterix result data set xxx S4RA with the filter set to False True This can be done by using the appropreate filter settings This allows you to examine in detail the causes of erroneous target detection The action is performed by simply selecting this layer loading in the same file as in layer 1 or 2 but entering a filter criteria such as miss is equal to True for layer 3 and the scenario result file and false is equal to true for layer 4 and the asterix resu
262. e RES and a detected plot asterix of the same A code only applied for SSR linking which is tolerated for a correct linking of the two plots The difference can be positive or negative If a known bias is present between the radar data and the scenario data e g a North correction or range translation a fixed Azimuth or Range bias can also be entered before the difference is calculated a biegen Gladvonties VolumelV S z RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 20 If targets fall outside the defined window they are not linked and as such decrease the Pd Therefore it is important to position the window as good as possible The result files S4RA and S4RS are saved automatically after processing This can no longer be disabled Other Pd and Accuracy Parameters and Options bed Time error compensation Determine whether the calculated time bias between reference and asterix plot must be used for positional correction using target speed and heading see further for formulas mi Show Link ing window The linking process can be checked by the user if the Show Linking Window option is enabled This feature takes up some additional memory so it may be skipped if memory is running low y SSR analysis only If you have defined a scenario wich contains Mode S targets Mode S transponders but the scenario was run in a SSR only mode the SSR
263. e by the operator e Comm D DELM between the corresponding announcement reply and close out interrogation 1 The data link exchange result can be viewed by clicking the Exchange Exonanoe n button Following window will appear zu Huse uns oume S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 33 1 Result Viewer vi BE type Broadcast CB amp GICB scan v BRCB S C BRCB S NC BRCB 0 BR CB C GICB S C GICB S NC GICS 0 GICB C l I I l 1 l I l l l I 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 ls esp QF y sj vos e xi EE oom ov Cursor Ola eo fsa zezooo2620 zs s a852 2214 12000 ooo so hoo rs e2006 oezo 1837 4 769 2 485 12 000 oooo 2000 100 00 S address Run Je exchanges bo 2 This diagram shows the data link exchanges for AICB Broadcast CommB ACAS RA GICB Comm A single segment Comm A multiple segment Comm C and Comm D Since we are dealing with 36 counters the values are split into 4 sets of 9 counters The user can select 9 out of 36 values This can be done by using the menu in the control bar Broadcast CB amp GICB 7scan Broadcast CB amp GICE scan AICB amp CA single el scan R amp CA multi el zcan Comm C amp Comm D scan Broadcast CE amp GICB Target AIC
264. e format used in all RASS S analysis tools DCP is a format used for the input of a RASS C analysis i Fass 3 DCF L 3 Mone 2 1 If RASS or DCP is chosen you need to specify the full path name which describes the location of the file which should hold the result of the selected conversion You can either type in the path name or use the button to select or create a file Destination a Rass ge T Mone A file dialog will appear for you to enter the filename zs hisses ellipsis peA zi RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder 11 26 If RASS is Selected data will be saved in RASS S format This data type is not a sequential data type as with other Radar data types but is record oriented It is dedicated toward the LabVIEW programming environment and is chosen for maximum performance in this environment If DCP is chosen data will be saved in DCP MUX format The data type inside the DCP MUX format is the data as recorded on the recorder disk but stripped from synchronisation and filter characters 2 2 If None is chosen no file will be created use this option if you only want to view the data This can be useful for a checkup or to use the system as a PPI during radar testing 3 Specify the site You can either type in the path name or use the button to select or create a site file Site E The following window will appear lie maok daher eae S RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15
265. e number of requested GICB extractions from the Model B definitions d Comm C commands The number of requested Comm C events per target or run by the Model B scenario e Comm C exchanges The real number of Comm C exchanges performed by the radar f Comm C errors The number of Comm C events that were requested but not completed within the time limits of the analysis g Comm D commands The number of requested Comm D events per target or run by the Model B scenario h Comm D exchanges The real number of Comm D exchanges performed by the radar i Comm D errors The number of Comm D events that were requested but not completed within the time limits of the analysis In logic 2 only the first three curves get a new meaning a GICB commands The number of requested GICB extractions by the Model B scenario b GICB extractions The total real number of GICB extractions performed by the radar per target or run c GICB errors The number of requested GICB extractions from the Model B scenario that were not executed by the radar 3 The user can select to show the data versus target or Run nr RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 nask dadn et pI RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 48 type Model E compliancy Target lt Model BE compliancy Target In case the user selects Target the X axis can contain one of 4 different values S address Target ID combination
266. e other side to the male RJA5 to dB25 convertor Finally this connects to the dB25 input of the GPS E inizsett decvonies Youme RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 8 Also connect the PPS pulse provided by the breakout box to the event input of the EDR ANTENNA INPUT GPS251 GPS REC EIVER ine COMMUNICATION PORT RJ45 5 or 50m cable PPS pulse Fig 2 Connections for GPS recording Once the EDR recording is started a dialog will appear controlling the GPS Make sure the GPS is UTC sync before proceeding because otherwise no proper UTC data is provided by the tool This can be verified by checking the colour of the dialog text if itis red the GPS is not time sync ed 2 1 5 Network Connections The two PC systems running both the EDR and the RES must be put into a local area Network This can be done using a simple twisted RJ 45 cable network using two computers or using a simple Hub Once the ethernet connections are present put both PCs in sharing mode This can be done by using the File Sharing control panel o B File Sharing Start Stop V Activity Monitor de Network Identity wner Name PTE 1 RES Control Panels Appearance Owner Password E Favorites eae E Computer Name 4 Graphing Calculator bi
267. e query cursor in the Data Display tool or in the Third View tool The following window with a different contents will appear 16 Click the Dx Liz Datalink Status Display vi EIB es ee EARE r Windo osition UF4 y GICB x40 UF4 UFS z GICB Ext x40 GICB Ekt x5 DF20 DF21 1 15 59 10 375 712 XX ra pues GIVE Bep x350 t2 15 59 10 375 712 X lat o o00000 s r Target Info Q Range Nm Azimuth deg 15 00 22 0 000 00 s The Data Link Status Display shows all the available information belonging to the selected target TRD record in a graphical way with different levels and lines representing transactions for a specific target TRD record between the levels There are five different levels ADLP Airborne Data Link Processor TP Transponder POEMS Pre Operational Mode S Station DLF Data Link Function GDLP Ground Data Link Processor and ATC Air Traffic Control If there is more information available kind of transaction contents of the transaction this is also displayed on top of the transaction coloured line At the top of the window TRD xx is displayed when there is a TRD record present for scan number xx even if there are no transaction linked to the TRD record The ordering parameter decides whether the transactions within one scan are drawn in Shien lines Volume4 y RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis
268. e the Delete button to clear a filter from the definition window Close both windows after defining all required filters 3 Now start the recording by clicking on the Record button e nask dadn Voume S RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI 10 Active TCP IP Recorder vi Spacketz bytes status Bi ASTERIX 192 168 608 677 1888 182 168 8g88 877 2888 TE 34631 T_OATASFER Recording Information Recording Time Inn 00 02 The byte and packet counters will increment and will show the number of packets and bytes recorded so far The data is recorded into a temporary file on the hard disk of the SASS S computer 4 The save button saves the recorded data to a user defined folder Click the Save button to initiate the copy tool The following windows will appear UDP IP result files vi Progress Building index file followed by electFoldervi Please specify the UDP IP recording destination 17 29 09 na 01 2002 This window allows the user to browse for a destination folder on the computer hard disk Once a destination is selected the tool will automatically generate the appropriate files The following window illustrates the progress of the saving process The copying may take a while The progress can be monitored in the progress bar After copying the window will close automatically RUMA Ch XI networ
269. e4 S RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder IL5 connectors Front Panel Back Panel CON3 Ch 1 2 OUT6 TD IN4 RD 9 RS232 BUS IN1 RCLK OUT1 TCLK RS232 BUS IN3 RCLK OUT3 TCLK The previous figure shows the connections of the dB 37 connector on the back panel of the data recorder As can be seen from this schematic all input lines have their own ground line used for screening and have a representative output line In fact the recorder can also be used to play back data previously recorded Using the RJ45 cables the RDR interface module can be attached to the RS232 probe modules which in their turn can be inserted in radar data transmission circuit The RS232 probe modules are buffered and do not load the communication lines Depending on the setting of the switches Data is read from pin 2 or 3 and clock is taken from pin 17 or 24 RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 dispersi dacdieanigs_Yoeme y RASS S User Manual 1 Gnd 4 NC 14 2 Data In DTE 15 NC 3 Data In DCE 16 NC 4 NC 5 NC 6 NC 7 Gnd 8 NC 9 NC 17 Clock in DCE 18 NC 19 NC 20 NC 21 NC 22 NC Chapter II Radar Data Recorder II 6 10 NC 11 NC 12 NC 13 NC 23 NC 24 Clock in DTE 25 NC Any input channel receives its data from pin 2 or 3 Rxd or Txd and its clock from pin 17 or 24 RxC or TxC on the db
270. ecording amp Analysis Volume 4 Data Recording amp Analysis PTE Volume 5 Radar Environment Simulation amp Target Injection PTE Volume 6 RF Test Set amp Special Tools Volume 7 Transmitter Test Tool PTE This volume you are now in is Volume 4 Data Recording amp Analysis Gives a short introduction on the Data Recording amp Analysis in general Introduces the Radar Data Recorder RDR 184 used for the recording of the serial radar data outputs Introduces the software available for the analysis of the serial radar data outputs Introduces the Extended Data Recorder RDR 339 used for the recording of the high speed LAP B X25 serial radar data ASTERIX outputs Describes the analysis of LAP B X25 ASTERIX Describes the Pd and Accuracy Tool PTE P2 Describes the PTE P1 to PTE P4 format convertion tool Describes the PTE export tools Describes the DLF Analysis tools PTE P2B2 Describes the SCF Analysis tools PTE P5 Describes the LAN UDP IP recording tools inak clsdvonies ume zi RASS S User Manual RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S4 Information 2 Disc laimer Notice Information rendered by PDP RASS S SASS Se and PTE is believed to be accurate and reliable On no account Intersoft Electronics will be liable for direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect or malfunction Intersoft disclaims any responsibility for its usage
271. ej ut LA 75 i i k E i mE d of n set Yee eo wa wr 7 r E Fi n n z 0 n g Ll g P EN s TN Target Info Q 1252 ox i ict um EM o v o o Code 1006 m 175 s Y E EE CN d FL 0 m u uu d ow 2 18 PTEO07 250 A d CP ees s Range Mm 12 28 275 300 l l Mum E ess amp zimuth deg 65 00 200 290 200 150 100 30 50 100 150 200 250 300 5 z m BackGround TRD Slant X Nm Sali 14 The bottom part is reserved for the layer manipulation see later ll all i Ph No Math fit No Math fij Ma Math Tij 2 Click the LabVIEW Run button in the upper left corner of the window to start the Data display tool 3 The Data Display tool will automatically load the default geographical display list and the first geographical display type from this list is selected as default display type s TRD Slant Nm TRE Slant Nra TRE Y Nm ETRO 3 Mm TRE Range Mm TRD Azimuth deq TROD Range Nm IRD Azimuth Reply deg CALC GICE delivery delay s TRD Fractional scan CALC GICB processing delay s TED Fractional scan TRE Broadcast Comm B events TRED Fractional scan CALC GICE delivery delay s TRED Fractional scan TED Range Mm TRD Azimuth deg IRD Azimuth Int deg TED 3 4 Code Define Custom
272. elect the EDR recording folder This folder contains the EDR data recording of the scenario you selected This folder also contains the ARP file and UTC file which are used to time stamp the IRD data Make sure you always name these folders correct since they often will reside on different computers Typically the EDR folder will reside on the computer driving the EDR whereas the two folders above reside on the RES computer Use your LAN to transfer data between systems See item below for details on this SelectFolder vi Please select an EDR folder C3 CAT17 RECI C CAT17 REC2 CAT17 REC3 C CAT18 RECI EDR Recording Folder CAT18 REC2 C DATALINK 2 T1 C DATALINK MERGE TEST3 C SHAW MODE S DL RCEL 2 scan SHAW MODE S DL RCEL 2 Next select the proper lines for the EDR recording The lines which have been recorded have a green color non used lines have black color Line selection Dd LIsLlIsLlaL1IsL e After selection of the EDR data you should open the EDR preferences and select the Convert Tab This allows you to select the proper recording format RDIF ASTERIX and the SIC SAC code of the radar Also select the proper Scan Boundary parameter Typically use On ARP This works always since ARP ACP must be recorded in this configuration View EDR Preferences vi r Format Scan ASTERIX v
273. emory File pathname geschreven C AMP amp IGN S4 DEPTO D AT A RASDAT A D Data 52 54 54 N Type in a new file path name or click the button to select a new RASS S data file The slider control will automatically alter its maximum value to the total number of revolutions present in the selected file Use the two sliders to select a portion of the file for processing Scan select b He N 2 10 159 20 25 30 25 40 46 13 30 24 13 53 28 11 01 95 Start Time 01 01 95 End Time It is possible to filter the RASS S data to limit the amount of data or to zoom in on a specific problem The Filter display shows the current filter RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE j anf js li 7 mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 28 Filter is equal to For more details about the Filter tool please consult the RASS 5 User Manual Volume 4 Chapter 3 Radar Data Analysis Inventory tool 4 After pressing the OK button the VI will start reading the RASS S data and count the different plots and their validation bits A progress indicator will appear The counting may take some time depending on the number of revolutions selected p After this counting process the program will stop automatically Statistics on Plot data vi L0 po o o jo ee wee o L5 L9 aos or arr _ C o res es ares E E Rare 9 2 s E E aite coral 78
274. entory Statistics Tabular Pd zb Pd Time Merger amp Linker P2B2 Pd amp Accuracy Calculation Datalink Analyser PZEZ Data Import Export Interragation Reply viewer 5 File Viewer Data Display for Datalink P2B2 Cluster Stability Analyser Time Merger amp Linker PS Data Display for Cluster P3 The following window will appear on the screen RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 a Huse Gaines oume S RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 13 Time Merger P2B vi a gt m SCENARIO Please select the input data Scenario Folder Result Folder Not Path scan RES Recording Folder Output s4sc W 518 548 N saRD 7 Analyse W TRD IRD N Rconly MW TTR W o EDR Recording Folder Progress Process time fo e f Cate Feyen iD 30 000 000 Line selection xou Led total LI1 L 2 034056 rear E O0 00 00 00 000 s 2 Run the Time merger tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window The user interface of the tool is divided into several functional panels At the top of the window there is a row of buttons to operate the tool SCENAPIN WwW lt SCENARIO LIVE Pd AE Menu to switch between LIFE SCENARIO and Pd amp Acc operation Toggle Help window on off Start merging Stop process Open the EDR recording and Conversion Parameter window
275. er Station Node List Available Nodes 1 SAC 8x62 SIC 852 DUSS 2 SAC 8x34 SIC 181 GATH 6 00 ASTERIX Cat817 record 1 1 Time 10 12 26 513 200 H M S 19 08 2002 Azimuth 267 869 deg 818 Data Source Identifier SAC 8x34 SIC 181 GATW 8012 Data Destination Identifier 0 00 DAC 8x62 DIC 852 DUSS 000 Message Type r Srapn 888 Network Aij eig p the PETS 356 Cluster Station Node List x Alt 1 SAC Bx34 SIC 181 GATH et 923 f em xX 2 SAC 8x62 SIC 852 DUSS 07 x 10 12 26010 10 12 10 5 10 14 00 0 10 16 00 0 10 18 00 0 10 20 0 Y 2 Recording time H M S r Cluster Instability Assessment Number Time H M S None 1 10 12 11 010 550 None Link to aul 1 Link 2 Select a NIM message to link to The numbers corelate to the messages on the left hand display 1 Protocol Viewer vi ES CaCO CS es cae Format 4 r Decode delay 4 p History Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE V 443 DATA RAW RDR Il SDR Fle Fanat v OnOfr Delay s On Off Length Q Relative GATWICK SCFI 203 180802 at oi Mw Absolute Line selectior Appearance r Break mode Read position Comm Layer ce ASTERIX X25 W i L 2 L s ls Os Ce Logged in DCE mode W on ort 4
276. ero value in the data set Remark If the population is zero no statistical values are calculated 7 If the user clicks the button the table is printed 8 If the user wishes to print the graph he has to click the I button l 9 Use the tabular output to create a table from the graph data zu Huse uns oume RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 S IX 35 Chapter IX Data Link Analysis B PrintTables vi RASS S User Manual o BRCB Announce BRCB S C BRCB S NC BRcB 0 BR CB C GICB S C GICBS NC foice o GICB C e BRCB Announce BRCB S C BRCBS NC BRcB 0 BR CBC GICB S C GIcBS NC foice o GICB C p b b p p b bpb w lg C E E 10 The data can also be passed to a histogram function by clicking the button 11 The cursor can be used to query on specific points in the graph TEN lie naai dadien oume4 m RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 36 5 3 3 Data Link Delay Analysis The PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis separately calculates the throughput delay that the following types of data link exchanges took to complete ea announcement of a Mode A code change and the actual change in the Mode A code reported in an ASTERIX Cat 048 target report for that target e b announcement of an ACAS RA and its output through an ASTERIX Cat 048 message for that target e c
277. esponding values Color scale A a ce 100 0 cn ol u eu 25 0 l a By changing the high or low colour values the colour scale can be redistributed over a limited range All values above the highest are represented by red all values below the lowest are represented by black Auto scaling for the colour axis is similar to the auto scaling of the XY axis by using the Il 23 button The precision of the colour axis can be chosen with the button ES Clicking the Il button will display the third axis in absolute values The default representation of the dot the point style can be chosen from a picture list by clicking the button The graph is redrawn with the point style of your choice This does not change anything for the colour scaling or XY scaling The selector just on top of the graph displays the current Inventory layer which is represented in the Third view tool 1 opportunity raw 5S4RD The user can select on of the 10 layers of the Inventory tool and the corresponding data will be loaded in to the Third View tool with the third axis as a colour scale Inventory layers with no data are listed as None opportunity raw 54ED Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone By clicking the Fl button select query cursor and X button centre query cursor the RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 E j anf js l inil m Volume 4 RASS S U
278. essa e0000 focoo roof z2 fa soon pers reor psooo loco sooo ocoo zooo 76 000 14 675 pss eemon i152 ro con noon sooo NEN This table shows Population Total number of sample points in the x scale e g nr of targets in the data set Population NZ The number of sample points with a non zero value Total The sum of all data points gt Y scales Mean The average value of all data points Total Population STD Standard deviation of all data points Mean NZ The average value of all non zero values Total NZ population NZ STD NZ The standard deviation of all non zero data points Max The maximum value in the data set Min The minimum value in the data set Min NZ The minimum Non Zero value in the data set 7 If the user clicks the 2 button the table is printed A new print preview window is opened This window allows some additional manipulations with the data a Huse Gaines oume S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 29 PrintTables vi IE i i lL iso es 7 eI Activity Target a RN peso eis es peus fressa pons pae quae 2000 em reor seo ooo proe poe fzo sers pene sez noooo foomo fezo pns pss ese pee poo 1L L L Comme faz Comm C2 CommD Pop JPepN2 T p2 e p Comm C2 Commo qd T qm Lo LL 2 L 1
279. evolutions present in the selected file Use the two sliders to select a portion of the file for processing Scan select p_a a Me l NE 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 46 13 20 24 13 22 78 11 01 95 Start Time 11701795 End Time It is possible to filter the RASS S data to limit the amount of data or to zoom in on a specific problem The Filter display shows the current filter for the selected layer Filter is equal to Click the Filter button to define a new filter setting The following window will appear Filter earchEditar2 vi Search Editor is equal to OUr O Except C Search in selection Clear All A filter consists of four functional blocks The first block is the object of filtering Choose an object of the list Use the scroll bars to page through the list and click the wanted item RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH E j anf js li 2 mil n Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis IIL 6 Date Time Target ID Track Mr Scan Mr 1 Cade z Code The chosen item is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the condition is enabled In the same way select a condition from the list is equal to is nat equal to is greater than is greater than or equal to is less than is less than or equal to contains The chosen item is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the value i
280. file This scenario is relatively time stamped meaning that the time field of all records in the file is timed starting from 0 seconds which stands for the time of the first generated North or the first North to which the scenario was linked This scenario file shall later be imported into the Scenario Time Merger tool which replaces the relative time stamping by absolute UTC time stamping as recorded by the EDR and GPS 5 2 Data Recording of Scenario Once the scenario is compiled and ready make sure the EDR is ready to record the output Asterix data For this one or more EDR serial channel must be connected to the radar asterix cat 048 034 or 001 002 It is advisable to record at multiple levels e g plots correlated plots tracks such that Pd and accuracy can be verified at multiple levels The EDR must also be connected to an ACP ARP source preferably the output ACP ARP of the RIU The connection can be made using a one to one High density db15 connector cable of 2 m Next make sure the GPS is connected has a proper antenna connection and is linked to the EDR with its PPS pulse The GPS transfers transfers the serial data messages using a 115 kbs serial link which must be connected to the Modem or Printer port of the EDR portable computer In order to operate correctly the apple talk connection must be switched off if ethernet is not active If the apple talk connection is switched to the ethernet apple t
281. folder containing or to contain DSS Info files C3 LARGE MODELB TEST3 EXPORTS RADIAL 36 SCENI T1 RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T2 C3 RADIAL 36 SCENI T3 C3 RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T4 C3 RADIAL 36 SCENI TS C3 RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T6 C RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T6 IMPORT RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T6 IMPORT 14 11 2000 The tool automatically reads all files already present in the RESULT folder to avoid unwanted overwriting Once the import is in progress the original files found in the RESULT folder will be overwritten if a specific import calls for it The conversion process from TSF to DSS can be started by clicking the button RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 nese dadien Volume 5 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export m Import RFS Data vi Importing Please wait Destination Folder PlayStation Alain C AMP AIGN S4 PTE P2B2 q TESTING RESULTS RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T6 IMPORT Header Data and Destination fields v Index lt gt Index Recording Time lt gt Recording Time Recording Date lt gt Recording Date Target ID lt gt Target ID V Track Nr lt gt Track Nr Scan lt gt Scan v Mode 1 lt gt Mode 1 v Mode 2 lt gt Mode 2 v Mode 3 4 lt gt Mode 3 4 Altitude lt gt Altitude Detection Time lt gt Detection Time v Range lt gt Range v Delta Range lt gt Delta Range m Import A18Data vi
282. folder dialog will appear Select a folder containing and EDR format dataset Can be found in CAMPAIGN S4 YOUR_CAMPAIGN DATA RAW RDR 6 The first thing that the Protocol Viewer tool does is to look for the EDR preferences used during the recording This file contains information needed for some of the functions in the Protocol Viewer tool mainly the number of ACP pulses per revolution If no EDR preferences are available the user is warned and promted to enter them immediately RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 nask dedna VoEmelv RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 5 View EDR Preferences vi General ACP Input CE Inpu Address List SVC LCN List PVC 12 bit ACPR 4096 14 bit ACPR 16284 16 bit ACPR 65526 r Host Settings Line AN None wi View EDR Recording Settings Number E Ma EDR Recorder settings available for this recording Please enter the correct value for the ACP parameter GPS Timing L use GPS Timing UTC Maxten o Enter at least the ACPR value and click the OK button if this happens 7 If the file is an file recorded using the Extended Data Recorder RDR339 the line selection will appear Make a line selection by checking one or more of the check boxes If you do not know which lines were used during the recording click the 4 button to find out The line which contain dat
283. for that layer is removed including filename and filter settings 52 A layer can be copied into another layer by using the button to layer z to layer 4 to layer 5 to layer 6 to layer 7 to layer 3 to layer 9 to laver 10 The source layer is checked by the program with a sign and the destination layer is selected by the user Each layer has its own specific settings These can be edited in the preferences window Click the Preferences button to open the preferences window The following window will appear RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH E j anf js l mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis Inventory Preferences vi Laver 1 Layer settings Settings Dynamic Labels Li Dynamic e on L1 Tupe L1 Target ID L1 Velocity Time Track Wr Heading L sY LJ sean Mr O PSR Ren LJ Position LJ 1 Code SSR Ren w Mode 2 Code L Cor Cap LJ Mode J Elevation J acas J Mode S Power LJ FL Stat L1 Overlap L1 Target Gen L1 Set _ Identity Cancel HIO Math Wo Math C Max CO Min CO RMS Cy Mean 3 Delta C Sum Delta X The preferences window is automatically opened with the active layer as top layer The other layers are also accessible By selecting a layer its settings become visible Select a layer by clicking the respective tab A layer has one of three possible basic configuration
284. ft Height G 230 STAT 230 C4 230 ES 033 Aircraft Height FL 230 ARC 240 CST 034 Aircraft Speed 230 Alc 240 FLT 035 Aircraft Heading 230 B1A 036 SAC 230 BIB 330 REP oze e 240 Aircraft Identification 37 DA 250 Repetition 360 CCC State P 027 DIC v Next define a cursor type to identify a spefic type of information There can be upto six different cursor types They are individually exclusive and have an increasing priority from bottom to top This means that information that complies with more than one cursor type will be drawn in the top most cursor type The following list of cursor shapes is available for the user Just like for the axis type the cursor type list is adjusted according to the selected S File format S17 S18 and S48 RUM4 Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 nese dadien volumes RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export v Network Information Track Data Track Data Request Track Data Stop Cancel Track Data Request Track Data Stop Acknowledge New Made Change over Initial or Intermediate segment Mew Made Change over Final or Only segment Mew Made Change over Initial or Intermediate Segment Reply Mew Made Change over Final or Only Segment Reply Move Mode to Mew Cluster State Move Made to new Cluster Acknowledge O00 Message Type 010 Data Source Identifier 012 Data Destination Identifier O45 Calculated Position in wGS 84 O50 Flight Level OTO Mode 2 Code 140 Time of Day 2
285. functions The following table shows the connections for these connectors 1 Gnd 14 Data out Ch 2 1 Gnd 14 Data out Ch 4 2 Data Out Chl 15 Clock out Ch1 2 Data Out Ch3 15 Clock out Ch3 3 Data In Chl 16 Data in Ch2 3 Data In Ch3 16 Data in Ch4 4 NC 17 Clock in Ch1 4 NC 17 Clock in Ch3 5 NC 18 NC 5 NC 18 NC 6 NC 19 NC 6 NC 19 NC 7 Gnd 20 NC 7 Gnd 20 NC 8 NC 21 NC 8 NC 21 NC 9 Clock in Ch2 99 NC 9 Clock in Ch4 99 NC 10 NC 23 NC 10 NC 23 NC 11 NC 24 NC 11 NC 24 NC 12 Clock out Ch225 NC 12 Clock out Ch425 NC 13 NC 13 NC The input levels of the recorder are defined as in the RS 232 standards logical 0 3 to 20 V logical 1 0 to 20V After wiring up all the equipment as shown in the diagram switch on the power of your recorder and watch the LEDs on the connection box The data line should flicker slightly and the clock line should illuminate continuously If this is not the case set the corresponding switch in the other position and check again If there is still no activity on the lines use a breakout box or oscilloscope along with detailed schematics of the communication device to locate the correct lines containing the clock and data 2 RDR hardware configuration with RDR interface module and RS232 probe module Attache the RDR interface module to the db37 bus1 connector located on the back side of the RDR This RDR interface module distributes the db37 pin layout of the RDR towards 6 RJ45 as hie ellipsis V olum
286. g A code U16 A code of target report C code 132 Altitude of target report Status U16 copy of upper 16 bits of S4 status fields bit 31 Valid A bit 30 Valid C bit 29 Valid 3D bit 28 Valid 1 bit 27 Valid 2 bit 26 Valid S bit 25 Garbled A bit 24 Garbled C bit 23 Garbled 3D bit 22 X Garbled 1 bit 21 Garbled 2 bit 20 Garbled S bit 19 Track bit 18 Plot bit 17 PSR detect bit 16 SSR detect For the Mode 5 extraction ModeS A is filled with the S address All Flag bits are set Each array is filled with the correct data extracted from the temporary files in the inventory directories corresponding to the layers 1 and 2 RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 z A naek ddoe Volume RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 33 2 The two arrays are sorted In LabVIEW arrays of clusters are sorted using the items in the cluster in descending order ModeS A Link Time etc Since the Link filed is set to 9999 for all fields data is sorted by Mode S address and further sorted by time 3 In the data arrays the Flag1 bits are used as Miss indicator in the scenario data array and as a False bit indicator in the Asterix data array Both are set to start with In the data arrays the Flag2 bits are used as Acquire indicator in the scenario data array and as a A code error bit indicator in the Asterix data array Both are set to start with 4 For e
287. g can be made for a prolonged period of time This recording can then be decoded into a suitable data format for further evaluation this can be the RASS C compatible DCP MUX format a time code enhanced DCP MUX format or the RASS S data format LabVIEW oriented These software tool are discussed in chapter II of this volume RASS S4 User Manual Volume 4 Chapter II Radar Data Recording After converting the raw recorded data to the RASS 5 format it can be used by several programs for analysis This can be done by inventory analysis statistical analysis or Pd calculation Corresponding to each analysis one or more tools are used These software tools are discussed in chapter III of this volume RASS 54 User Manual Volume 4 Chapter III Radar Data Analysis The Extended Data Recorder RDR 339 is developed to support the high speed LAP B X25 serial communication protocols used to transport the radar data over a wide area network More details about this hardware and the corresponding software tools can be found in chapter IV of this volume RASS S4 User Manual Volume 4 Chapter IV Serial communication on LAP B X25 Finaly a third way of recording was added to SASS S namely the LAN recording An ECP was raised on SASS S allowing the recording of UDP IP protocol data sent over a LAN Version 4 4 0 includes this functionality for ASTERIX and DDE on UDP IP Specifications were provided by AENA 2 0 Radar Data Recording Hardware 2 1 Radar Dat
288. g on the way we want to record data Several setups are possible but the basic principle is given hereunder 1 1 Data Input PTE P5 requires three sets of input data Asterix Cat 48 radar data Asterix Cat 17 SCN data Interrogation data from radars optional Each of these three set need to be gathered for every node Radar of the cluster This can be done in two ways Local recording Central recording In Local recording mode the Asterix and Interrogations are recorded at N nodes and data is centralised by means of email CD RW or other mobile media The individual recordings are converted into 548 and 517 files interrogations in IRD by means of the Data Convert module This converted data is linked locally into TRD datasets Target Reference data This type of data can already be visualised in the data display Once all data has been centralised the linker tool can create one global linked dataset also called TRD which can then be loaded into the data display ihiiaselt cledkonies ame zi RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 2 Repeat N times for each station Ints Replies RES or RFTS Data Display Data Analyser Figure 1 SCF Analysis local recording mode Overview picture In Central recording mode the asterix data of all N nodes has been brought together by means of a Network This means th
289. g out the sector messages and by selecting the proper X and Y axis units The following steps demonstrate a complete Sector Message Delay Analysis 1 Take or make an EDR recording of surveillance radar data with ARP ACP and or GPS signals connected to the recording set up ARP ACP signals allows an analysis based on azimuth GPS signals allow an analysis based on time RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH E j anf js li 2 mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 31 EDR Control vi BFE Recording HD size 8958119 Kb HD pos Kb Time 0 0 EDR Status EDR OF EDR serial Mr EDR z6 01 017 HD usage os I I l 50 Connect ion Timing 2 Mo connection established 2 Convert this recording with the EDR Conversion tool like any other recording Sector messages and North messages are flagged with a special Sector message flag during the conversion process This way they can be distinguished from regular targets More in detail north messages get an azimuth value of zero and an range value of zero Sector messages get a range value of 512 Nm and an azimuth value corresponding their sector number The sector messages and north messages are interleaved with other regular targets during the conversion process EDR Convert B vi Le Jim Jin Joe Conversion Display Info Salaa amp ri v info Message 9694 2200 OFFS OOFF i in ile 0250 75D3 6884 D
290. gress bar will indicate the progress Progress 20 40 eu 20 100 5 Following Control buttons determine the operation of the Convert program gt Start a conversion Stop a process Pause a process Stop the Convert Radar Data tool This button will close every window that was used by the radar data convertor tool Toggles Help window On Off 6 View options M ew L1 Into 6 1 Hex Check this box to show the hexadecimal display of the current conversion Data in Hex Format zs hese elis olume4 RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 5i RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder II 23 6 2 PPI Check this box to open a window which shows a PPI Plan Position Indicator display of the current conversion SS PP Monittorvi us Jazsiz L z90 T n R 51 2 Mm Az 354 6 A ie aS Ia E quet Ag E cag pe sU Et e bie ATZZO APAE E Satie as sige uam Hin d Z QUE fX o Is eed D BES Ue ws Syl j 150 100 The positions of the aircraft can be viewed in the PPI graph The history length of the track is fixed at 5 scans A small checkbox in the upper right corner of the window default True enables labeling on all tracks 2114 In the right hand side of this window a list is presented with the A codes of all the aircraft present on the PPI By clicking one of these items in the list a query is performed on this particular aircraf
291. gures will be calculated The figures can be visualised individually or as a whole using the data display tool see 86 0 e The number of performed roll call re interrogations Pu Ney AN N Nmg e The number of expected roll call interrogations e The difference between performed and expected These calculations will form the basis for the following output of results AN Ep l i LN e The overall roll call re interrogation rate e The roll call re interrogation rate for a selected set of target reports parametric filtering e The roll call re interrogation rate per scan which will consist of a graph with on the horizontal axis the scan number and on the vertical the re interrogation rate e The roll call re interrogation rate per range window as a sliding window result window size and step size are user defined The result will consist of a graph with on the horizontal axis the range and on the vertical axis the re interrogation rate e The display of all target reports in the inventory display the targets with AN gt will be displayed in a different color This will allow investigation when re interrogation happens because the target reports can not only be display on a polar display but any to any e g heading against range RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 lie nase Gladventies _Volume4 S RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 52 6 0 Data Display tool These
292. h Other keys toggle The currently active filter for the selected layer is displayed not editable from this window And E TRD Sean And TED Scan The shared axis type for the selected can be chosen The shared axis type defines the source of a common geographical display type for the selected layer This way it is possible to display a common shared axis type in different layers but with the data originating from different sources for each layer Shared Axis ncm The connection mode can be chosen between none target and track Connect zs siters nb elsi Volume y RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 62 None No interconnection Target Multiple points belonging to one TRD record are interconnected Track All points belonging to a target are interconnected Some statistical functions can be applied on the data of the selected layer The selected statistical function is applied on the Y axis data over a sliding window over the X axis The sliding window is defined by an X window size and x step The following list of mathematical functions is available Y 5 Y 4 Y 3 Mathematics No Math window X Q Max Min Step 5 AS Low limit amp P Mean oO sususaum RRR susuan Delta URN PUNCH WITH ESETET ETETETT Tunnnsananssuusauuuaauuuaa na If for example Sum is chosen with a window size X of 2 then the Sum of all p
293. hat moment on the EDR hard disk Click the Save button to initiate the copy tool The following window will appear iE SslectFolder vi Please specify theUDR recording destination RAW ROR 16 48 49 09 04 2003 This window allows the user to browse for a destination folder on the computer hard disk Once a destination is selected the tool will automatically generate the appropriate files The following window illustrates the progress of the saving process i gt UDR result files vi i Saving daka Progress E ong ARP fle Cancel The copying may take a while The progress can be monitored in the progress bar After copying the window will close automatically The saving process can be stopped at all times by clicking the cancel button Notice that in total four different kind of files are saved to disk sequentially This means that whenever a saving process is cancelled the remaining files are not saved and the corresponding information will not be available RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE 2 n i sd fall 4H mil Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 13 4 3 UDR Convert Plot Data The UDR recording is made file format compatible with EDR recordings In this way all the software as available for the EDR can be used for UDR data recordings
294. he CASTERIX Cat002 is used to recontruct the tine of day item using interpollation If this is not possible the messages are removed from the converted file 2 North Marker insertion If there is no North marker message present in ASTERIX Cat002 messages The tool will insert dummy North marker messages derived from sector message 0 To allow this feature the user needs to enable it This can be done by using the Add North checkbox Beware this only works for cat 002 not cat 34 Format 54 File Format EDF File RUM4 Ch VII P1 P4 interface v4 4 2 25 07 02 Ji 2 s 15 amp fe add North 3 mamik dedenie Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII I Chapter VIII Data Export 1 0 Introduction This chapter will explain you how to export a PTE P1 EDR recording file into a spreadsheet format file that can be read by commercially available software packages or into a S File format that can be used for Data link analysis PTE P2B2 or SCF analysis PTE P5 The data that is supported to be exported is ASTERIX Cat017 018 034 048 on LAP B or X25 communication protocol The contents and format of the exported spreadsheet file or S File format is according to the PTE ICD Eachof the ASTERIX categories that is encountered during the export process is put in a separate file in a destination folder Therefore there will be a separate file for Cat017 Cat018 Cat034 No S File format and
295. he histogram function and return to the Data Display tool 11 The background range circles can be turned On Off by checking the E Backeround pox 12 When a layer is set to dynamic mode it can be manipulated by some of the top row buttons Notice that all the dynamic layers present in the Data Display tool are affected by these buttons Start dynamic layers Pause dynamic layers Li Stop dynamic layers Step forward in dynamic layers The Set Filter button affects only the active layer For each dynamic layers an individual filter can be set Once a dynamic run is started by clicking the button it keeps on running even if the end of the file is reached A dynamic run always has to be stopped manually by clicking the button 13 To print the displayed data click the button The report window is evoked First you are able to enter some comment and select a figure number to be printed along with the page Change any appearance according to your personal taste and click the print button to create a report or to print the data 14 Click the button to make a Tabular View Data Export from the selected data shown in the geographical display The following window will appear Shes elsi Volume zi RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 68 TRD Export List vi B Export Selection List Export List m ZGA
296. he output of the plot by the radar This data can be found in the 548 file Depending on the data link activity to the target the TRD can also have one or more Asterix Cat 18 messages related to it These can be found in the S18 file Finally each plot has one or more Interrogations and Replies related to it This information can be found in the IRD file The Data Linker searches all converted data files 545C 548 S18 IRD for related data records and reconstructs a new logical file named TRD which holds records of all related plot data for each target The TRD file allows the simple loading of all related data per target This allows simple and straight forward analysis The new logical data file is in fact a combination of 6 physical files TRD 548 S18 IRD pac BDS which are all stored in a single new Folder which is put under the LINKED DATA three of the Campaign structure The LINKED DATA files further references to as TRD files although we actually mean the combination of the six files we will only refer to the TRD file can be displayed in the Data Display tool or can be further processed in the Data Link Analyser 1 3 Data Analysis The TRD file forms the basis of the data link analysis Since the TRD data is created target based the tool actually loads all related data target per target and calculates a number of important parameters for the data link assessment Data Link Activity Data Link Exch
297. he serial recording d Convert vi This program converts data recorder data into a DCP MUX or RASS 5 format 4 2 Checking the Data Data Analyser After connecting all signals according to the specifications given above it is time to load the Data Analyser vi program from the radar toolbox RE FE Data Analyser yi e EN Analysis HD Size Kb HD Position Kb CHE Fun time 00 200 04 12 Clock B RDR Status RDR serial Mr RDR n8 01 036 9 HD Usage Data OQ S Format Analysis CH 4 Clock B EH Channel Channel Z Y 0 000 o 010 0 020 0 030 0 040 0 050 0 06 ee Corso IY Os gt time s pasoa Comms i 0 oe 4 This tool has three functions RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 ES N Q Volume 4 Mak aadrentes RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder II 9 Record serial data in event mode Show this data in scope display Convert this data into readable hex data stripping sync chars parity bits etc for early data checking The tool uses the event mode for data logging Event mode is a very crude way to record data but it has the advantage of showing all glitches and spikes which might occur in the data stream a LE LILI L Data pli lj AAA AAA events In event mode the digital signal processor detects all rising or falling edges on any of the eight 4 data and 4 clock lines and declares this edge as an event
298. hee ellipsis oume zi RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder 11 18 Set timer for recording vi Timer Settings Start Time 10 33 07 AMI Date 14 05 1998 Format Time HH MM 55 Date OD MM Y Y Stop Time 11 35 07 AM Date 12 05 1998 Click the button to close the window and return to the Serial Recording tool If the timer is set recording will start when the programmed time is reached Otherwise recording can be started immediately by pressing the record button 7 While recording HD position indicator will count the Kilobytes disk space used The HD usage progress indicator will show the total amount of free disk space left Recording will cease Automatically upon reaching the end of the disk unless the Wrap around option is selected which allows endless loop recording When the Stop Ll button is clicked When the timer reaches the end time 8 At any time while recording or even when no recording is performed a copy of the raw data file can be made to an image file This file will contain a bit copy of the specified Kbytes on the data recorder hard disk pack Click the Save button to initiate the copy tool The following window will appear Save Copy datarecorder files vi 2j Copy data fram EDR to file Start position o Eb Position o kb Kb tepracess 50000 Eb Progress Now enter the start positi
299. hit None RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 as cites b ellipsis VelumelV RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 11 2 5 4 Data Displaying Mode Comm Layer DATA WF ASTERIS LAP E wr E ASTERIM LAP B ASTER A29 RDIF LAP E The data displaying mode shows the ASTERIX RDIF data translated into a readable text according the the EUROCONTROL standards Ex analysis 818 Data Source Identifier SAC xB SIC 834 146 Time of Day UTC Time 14 66 58627 1172 G26 Target Report Descriptor E TYP TIE ae RAB Fx 1 B 1 B 1 A A B HEE 846 Measured Position in Slant Folar Coordinates RHO 34 88 Nm THETA 144 57 B Hade 3 h Code in Octal Representation a G alL 1 Mode 3 A 1815 8968 Hode Code in Binary Representation B G Haode C 1775 ft 1130 Radar Plot Characteristics Primary Subfield is ies PRL PAN RPO APO Fx H 1 1 B Hn A A B Humber of received replies for HISSA SRR 2 Amplitude of MSSR reply SAM 59 dBm 228 Aireratt address S980 2465Aireraftt Identification FTEH1 3 18615 Track Number He 15 _ 2 6 Displaying amp Analysis of UDP IP recorded Data If the file is a UDP IP recording following options can be selected 2 6 1 LAN Displaying Mode TheLAN displaying mode displays the data in Hex format This is the lowest level The number of messages the size the status the timestamp in ms the line and the level as
300. i PENI LET S address y zi vos ami flo feursor roo aeg eo 2o Tae LT Click the print button to transfer the graph to paper All items in the window written in blue can be modified before printing 9 Use the tabular output to create a table from the graph data m PrintTables vi B Activity Target Comm B Comm Comm C1 Comm C2 o i um D o t m ro m en en en PJN JAJ NINSA ojoj o oj ojJojJo ojojo ojojo o o NIN aa A apr oa A ojojo lafaa Nj j j nN ojo oj oj o ojojo ojo l o m NIo iN o N 5 o o o o oJjoj t t iN N o o o o ojo o ojo ojojo ojojo ol o blo plofo ofo o I o oo RO The same Print tables window will appear In most cases you may want to use this table as an input for further processing e g in COTS spreadsheet applications This can be done by clicking the export button in this window This will allow you to create a Tab Separated text File TSF which can be imported into any spreadsheet application 10 The data can also be passed to a histogram function by clicking the button Prior to doing this select one of the graphs using the cursor or by disabling the other curves and make sure you select the correct boundaries e g if you want to make a histogram of the Comm B activity for all targets between
301. ical display 4 Use the Load button to load a TRD data set The following dialog will pop up and allows you to select a file Load zs siters nb elsi Volume y RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 56 LaadTRDDatatromFaoalder vi Please select the data for layer x 1 TRE Folder pathname HE irk C AMP AIGN 24 PTE PZBE2 TESTIMG LIMEED D AT A RADIAL 36 SCENT TRE Sean select O Q I I I I I I I I I 1 10 20 30 40 a0 eu T eu 30 100 The TRD Folder path name indicator will show the name of the file currently present in memory for the selected layer TRE Folder pathnarne HD irk C AMP AIGN 24 FTE PZE2 TESTING LINKEDDAT A RADIAL 36 SCEMI Typeinanew path name or click the Find folder button to select a new TRD data set Find Folder The slider control will automatically alter its maximum value to the total number of revolutions present in the selected file Use the two sliders to select a portion of the file for loading TED Scan select I 1 1 i Click the button to view more details of the selected TRD Data set The following window will appear Eu view TRD Attributes vi File Mame User Comment TRD SUBSET testing subset with user info Time Date of Recording na 30 50 0 10 11 2000 Time Date of Saving 10 35 30 0 12 11 2000 Filter And Scan is less than or equal to And S
302. ication since all data is available from the exported data Results can also be printed from LabVIEW Step 8 Load the Result file s in layer 3 and optionally layer 4 of the inventory tool and show the result fields using the Custom Inventory settings e g Delta Range versus Relative time Accuracy can be calculated from the inventory tool s histogram function Averages can be calculated per scan using the inventory mathematical functions Resolution and accuracy diagrams can be created using the inventory Third View option Step 9 Use the Histogram function of the inventory to show Histogram of range time or azimuth errors All data can be printed using the standard RASS S print features This implies that the user can edit scales axis titles etc and add notes to the printouts All data can be exported into a tab separated text file ready for Excel import Phase 2 only development z Volume IV ilas eadroenies RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 6 The data configuration is all contained in the two initial 54 data sets and are inherently saved for result reproduction 4 0 Connections required for Closed Loop Measurements The Pd and Accuracy tool requires two input files both in the 54 format In order to obtain these two files two separate branches of the PTE system must run simultaneously The RES generation section The EDR recording section 4 1 ESG
303. ime 16 28 13 864366 Line 5 Level LRP B Ra 57 P F Frame Supervisory Response CRC Format RR N amp R 3 N S Size 41 Line 6 Status Level Msg Mr 85582 Time 16 28 13 963758 CRC Frame Information Response P F 8 User data 38 66 25 FF 06 68 26 73 CE EE AG D4 SB 49 2E 82 1A 81 96 26 66 BG G 1B 41 41 76 CB 76 66 Ba 1A GE 34 48 66 46 Format NERO 2 m s 2 Size 4 Line 5 Status Level Msg Nr 35500 Time 16 28 13 788358 Frame Supervisory Response CRC Format RR nip 2 N S Msg Nr 85498 Size 41 Status The protocol viewer is an investigation tool only and is not validated by EC RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 j ET risoexetie aadrentes r Search Q e Azimuth deg r Display Bd Timing messages z en Monj i p M Ze m BU E wu w 16 28 13 9389 174 117 95 Volume IV RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer 2 Using the analyser 2 1 Loading the Software The Protocol Viewer is an off line analysis tool It uses a recording made by the EDR serial recording tool or the UDP IP recorder as input More information about making a EDR serial recording can be found in the RASS S User Manual Volume 4 chapter IV LAP B X25 Serial Communication The UDP IP recorder is described in Chapter XI Make sure you have an Extended Data Recordi
304. ime of Day 1927 30 GFS En UTC Time Offset oO 000000000 s me Mark MOT valid GPS Sync 6 While recording the HD position indicator will count the Kilobytes file size used A time indication shows the current time If GPS is used this time is UTC otherwise computer time settings are used Time 14 40 47 5 24 2003 7 The PPI indicator will show the radar timing information ACP ARP during the recording if connected This timing information is also recorded together with the serial data and can be used for analysing the data in a later stage PFI z Dm z 5 bI 71 10 deg 8 The Connection panel indicates the integrity of the recording for each of the channels and the GPS information individually GPs dw 1 8 For each hardware channel and for the timing information GPS ACP ARP there is a LED display that indicates the general status of the recording for that particular channel Grey meaning hardware channel NOT IN USE red meaning all logical channels NOT OK yellow meaning at least one logical channel is NOT OK green meaning all logical channels OK Notice that a red or yellow LED does not necessarily means that the recording has failed A poor line quality also results in a temporary red yellow light A green light indicates that the recording is functioning in an optimal way for the respective hardware channel The synoptic text displays more details of the current status of the recording For p
305. imes three layers are always directly accessible with the tabs at the bottom of the window Click one of the tabs to make that layer active this means not necessary visible 1 Mode AC our m oF fW fu Paging through all the layers max 10 can be done using the buttons at the lower left side of the window 44 Shift layers one position to the left T Shift layers three positions to the left IP Shift layers three positions to the right PP Shift layers one position to the right It is very important to realise that all actions are executed on the active layer The active layer is selected with the tabs at the bottom of the display window 1 Mode AC our m wo I t t Notice that the layers need not to be loaded in a specific order Layers are automatically named according to their filename upon loading The active layer can always be renamed by clicking the Label Layer button A dialog box to enter the layer name will appear Label Layer RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE ill p lj j _ Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis II 8 Label dialog Please Enter a layer name C A layer can be made visible or invisible with the m button underneath the layer tab The data is still present in the layer but and all actions will be executed on the data but it will not be visible A layer can be emptied by clicking the button underneath the layer tab All data
306. indow size and step size are user defined The result will consist of a graph with on the horizontal axis the range and on the vertical axis the re interrogation rate XN AN p e The overall roll call re interrogation rate e The roll call re interrogation rate for a selected set of target reports parametric filtering e The display of all target reports in the inventory display the targets with AN gt 0 will be displayed in a different color This will allow investigation when re interrogation happens because the target reports can not only be display on a polar display but any to any e g heading against range 6 2 1 1 Preparations Record Asterix data EDR and Interrogation data RFTS or RES e Time Merge the data Time Merger vi eLink the data Data Linker vi e Analyse the data Data Link Analyser vi eLoad data in Data Display using a parametric filter Datalink False to exclude all datalink transaction This does not exclude GICBs SearchEditor TRD vi Rriot Data Display Filter CALC Datalink transaction is equal to False Manual Designation Flag 8 3 nd ig ir gt L GERCER 6 2 1 2 Display of roll call re interogation rate per scan Create a new Graph type in the data display Rr f Scan nr P Define XY Axis wi mywi ez CALC Rr Mi Mei TRO Scan Bo xix Y AXIS cac w rme O CALC Rr Mi Nei TRED Range Mm
307. indows of the protocol viewer depend on the setting of the Comm Layer selector and on the type of file selected If the file is a serial EDR recording following options can be selected 2 5 1 Hex Displaying Mode The Hex displaying mode displays the data in Hex format This is the lowest level The number of messages the size the status the timestamp in ms the line and the level as well as the user data are shown Comm Layer HEX w J STERIS LAP BE wr Meg Hr 5 Size Status Hot aw Time mz 1 4851 55 Line Level Hex User data 03 00 30 00 31 01 04 00 FF 40 64 FO ac CO O02 SB 01 90 60 00 05 FO 75 CF Fr 00 1B CC Co 44 10 41 FC 03 00 00 00 OF r 01 01 00 00 OU Status Hot aw Level Hex User data 01 73 Meg M Status Hot aw ps a Time ma 14 55 i Hex Meg Me Status Mot ay Time ms1 3 70 ine Hex 2 5 2 LapB Displaying Mode The LAP B layer is the second layer The number of messages the size the status the time in ms the line and the level are indicated Also the kind of frame the CRC bytes the format byte and the user data are shown iak dadon ome lv zi RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 10 Comm Layer Tx analysis Msg Hr 5 Size 51 Status Hot au Time mz1 4851 65 Line 1 Level Frame Information Command CRC Hot au Format niR5 0 Hesa af User data 30 00 31 BF iF 1
308. ing ael RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 as naak dadene Volumes 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 27 button Click the button to remove the selected green rectangle conversion from the batch list Click the button to start the batch convert The batch convert can be stopped at any time by clicking the m button Close the batch conversion window afterwards by clicking the button Once the required data is converted in to the same format it can be used for comparison or analysis in the selected radar analysis tool a inmaak dadene Volumes RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 zl RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer Chapter V Protocol Viewer 1 0 Introduction The Protocol Viewer was especially developed to investigate the LAP B X25 serial communication protocol which is used to transport ASTERIX data Later the tool was enhanced to include also UDP IP recording viewing In the OSI model this represents the lowest three levels respectively for the serial communication level 1 the LAP B level 2 X25 level 3 and the application layer level 6 for the ASTERIX or RDIF data For ethernet recording it represents the lowest three levels respectively for the physical LAN level 1 the IP level 2 UDP level 3 and the application layer level 6 for the ASTERIX RDIF or DDE data Furthermore radar timing signals
309. ing to do is to select a P1 format to be converted by using the format selector radio buttons a 54 File Format J EDR File Format Depending on the choice different selectors will be presented to the user S4 File format V Scenario GFS VRE Use Lag amp Chain to select the origin of the S4 file format E 2 sp Use H5 Os Histor t6 select on of the lines used during the EDR recording Click the C button to chech which lines were used during the recording the Boxes corresponding to the used lines become green Format 54 File Format a EDR File eJ J2L Is a Jsi e Ladd North 5 Browse for a source folder by clicking the button in the source panel The software will automatically guide the user to the appropriate folder according to the selected format For EDR format this is Campaign Data Raw RDR and for S4 format this is Campaign Results New since this release PTE CP 54 The source can now also be a folder containing multiple EDR recording folders The tool will convert all recordings one by one After the selection of the source folder the tool presents a dialog the user that allows a part of the source to be loaded into the P1 P4 convert tool P4 Time Window Selector vi H File pathname HDirk C AMP amp IBN E4 CE V AP D AT AR AW ROR CEY AP L AD 1 Time window Select The selection is done using time By moving the red and blue slider a specific part of the source file can
310. inished The Analyse TRD selection automatically calls the SCF Analyser The Map creation reads the Map files and created a file to be input in the data Display Action Progress Make Sxx al Message Make IRDA Fev Make Map al Current Kb Link TRO fof Analyse al i rh Error 8 Click the Start button Enter the SCF analysis parameters in the folowing window This window can also be evoked before starting using the E Parameters button in the top button bar After clicking OK s process will start Edit SCF Parameters vi Program status window vi zi Starting PTE PS Time Merger Converting Radar Data for Ner Conver ted 9388 messages 1660 Kb 207 scans D errors occure d Converting Radar Data for NODE2 SCF linking window D longitude 0 200 deg D latitude gt 0 200 deg Link Single station data fVf r nalysis Parameters max chain drop time 20 00 sec TRD window 1 00 sec a 4 L Cancel OK Following parameters can be entered D longitude D latitude These parameters form a window that is used to determine the correct matching target reports and Track Data Cat 17 messages in case of duplicate 5 addresses Link Single Station Data This checkbox allows the Linker to create individual TRD dataset per Node plus a cluster level dataset Max Chai
311. ink Messages 4 code swap Aircraft Identification Data Link State Datalink State x 0 Data Display Info vi Data Link Type Datalink Type x aj Interrogation Counter UF 4 UFS ur 20 UF 21 UF 24 U UF 24 D UF 11 Re interrogation Ni CRC perf 2 Nei RC exp 1 AN Ni Nei 1 Rr Ni Nei 2 00 Link Info Index TRD Count S48 Count 18 Count IRD ASTERIX Cat 48 record 1 1 Time 16 10 25 062 H M S Azimuth 679 541 deg 818 Data Source Identifier SAC 6x666 SIC 255 148 Time of Day UTC Time 15 18 24 4688 a28 Target Report Descriptor wal SIM ROP set en RHO 22 27 Mm THETA G alL 1 G a Mode C Primary Subfield beaks anrr RPD SAM 44 dBm 2280 Rircraft address 11 248 Rircraft Identification PTEGAa 151 Track Number Nr 77 Ground Speed Heading 43 84 178 Track Status 79 a l a e o 238 Comm RCRS Capability and STAT No alert no SPI 7 12 88 RAB FX a 846 Measured Position in d ae Coordinates 44 98 9 078 de R Code in beta Representation Mode 3 A 1004 aaa Nub Code in Binary Representation O Cft 138 Radar Plot Characteristics rem Amplitude of M SSR UR 200 Calculated Track veloci ty 158 84 kt ee Flight Status COM Comm A B
312. into one file for each ASTERIX category Enter the start and end scan number to be exported The start and end scan values are automatically updated when a EDR source folder is selected To limited the export to a specific part of the recording specify the corresponding start and end scan number Start scan End scan If no start and end scan are available the start scan will be set to 0 and the end scan will be set to 99999 Start scan End scan Select the format of the exported data To choose the spreadsheet format select TSF Tab Separated File The DSS format is an internal PTE format that allows more compact files and faster file handling and is used for further analysis amp TSF D55 7 The EDR Data Export tool is now ready to start an export process Click the p to initiate the export process The conversion process can be stopped at all times by clicking the n button All the data already exported will be saved into the destination file without any loss of data The export process can be paused at all times by clicking the button In Pause mode the export process can be stepped through by clicking the n button Releasing the button will relaunch the export process at full speed 8 During the conversion process all kinds of information can be displayed by checking the corresponding boxes The displaying of information will lower to speed of the export process Use the button and button to view individual records
313. ion is enabled In the same way select a condition from the list Notice that the conditions contain and does not contain are only available for string type objects 1s equal ta is nat equal to is greater than is greater than ar equal to is less than is less than or equal to contains RUMA Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 S aca dackeniesYoume RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 58 The chosen item is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the value is enabled Type in the desired value and hit the return key Notice that the format of the value field is automatically adjusted corresponding to the selected object value 02 00 00 The chosen value is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the logical connection is enabled Select a logical operator from the list And Dr Except The chosen value is automatically transferred to the filter This process is repeated until the filter setting is complete A filter setting can saved to disk with the Save Load button or recalled from disk by clicking the button Clicking the button will clear the selected line from the filter setting clicking the button will clear the complete filter setting The button will close the window and ignore all changes Click the button to load the filtered TRD data set A progress indicator will appear The loading may take some time dependi
314. ion List Index 1 Recording Time 3 V Recording Date 3 Target ID 2 Recording Date 3 v Track 1 Rec Time H 5 3 Scan d Sean 1 Mode 1 2 S Address 2 Mode z Mode Z 2 v Mode Z 2 Altitude 2 v Altitude 2 an Fange 2 Detection Time 3 i Azimuth 2 V Range 2 Hu Track 1 Delta Range 2 iii Type 2 f Azimuth 2 Hn AV AGCVCG 3 Delta Azimuth 2 Bu Plot Quality 2 Power 2 Sector Message 2 koll Call 2 AllCall 2 A Code Swap 2 False Plat 2 Reflection 2 Hil Emergency Z2 Milldent 2 Mode S Data 1 RFR 1 Simulated 2 Cancel The user can select a number of items to be listed from the Export Selection List at the left side of the window by double clicking the item of interest or by selecting it and clicking the gt button The selected item is transferred to the Export List and a check mark is added to the corresponding item in the Export Selection list A predefined number of items is by default enabled to be exported This list corresponds with the Export function in previous software version A selected item in the Export list can be shifted up or down s Use the LU button to delete the selected item from the Export list An Item can be selected by clicking it in the list Once the contents of the Export list is defined it can be saved to disk Use the button to load an earlier saved Export list The current width of the list is calculated and displayed L
315. ions required for Closed Loop Measurements VI 6 4 1 ESG Connections VI 6 4 2 EDR Connections VI 6 4 3 GPS Connections VI 6 4 4 Network Connections VI 7 4 5 Date and Time considerations VI 8 4 6 Overview of Connections VI 8 5 0 User Interface VI 10 5 1 Generation of Scenario VI 10 5 2 Data Recording of Scenario VI 11 5 3 Scenario time merging VI 14 5 4 Asterix Conversion VI 16 5 5 Inventory Data Loading VI 16 5 6 Pd and Accuracy calculation VI 18 5 7 Exporting Result data VI 22 5 8 Viewing Result Data VI 25 6 0 Theoretical Background on Pd and Accuracy Calculations VI 32 6 1 Mode S Pd Calculation VI 32 6 2 Mode A Pd Calculation VI 34 6 3 Theoretical Indication of Code Performance VI 37 6 4 Mode S Time Bias and error Calculation VI 38 6 5 Mode S Range and Azimuth error VI 40 6 6 SSR Time Bias and error Calculation VI 41 6 7 SSR Range and Azimuth error VI 41 RUM6 Table of Contents v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE i 7 2 Eee i fall 44 mil Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Table of Contents Chapter VII P1 P4 interface 1 0 Introduction 2 0 Making a P1 P4 file format conversion Chapter VIII Data Export 1 0 Introduction 2 0 Performing a data export Chapter IX Data Link Analysis 1 0 Introduction 1 1 Data Recording 1 2 Data Conversion and Merging 1 3 Data Linking 1 3 Data Analysis 1 4 Data Displaying 2 0 Data Recording 2 1 Recording in SCENARIO case 2 1 1 Data Recording 2 1 1 1 EDR Co
316. is a apture Cj HANDY 4 ColorSynt eX File Sharing on Q Internet Access Configuration Manager Status Key Caps Control Strip Click Stop to turn off file sharing This prevents other Network Browser Date amp Time users from accessing shared folders Note Pad DialAssist i ProCalc Energy Saver Program Linking off RecentApplications p Extensions Manager _ Status al Recent Documents be Ble Exchange Click Start to turn on program linking This allows other E Recent Servers gt File Sharing users to link to shared programs General Controls cir Remote Access Status Internet RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 iniacot cladkonies oume RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X9 Name each computer differently and use names that remind you of the configuration 2 1 6 Data Recording Software Manipulation Now start the data recording software as described in chapter IV of this volume Recording HD size 398958119 Kb HD pos Kb Time 0 0 EDR Status EDR OF EDR serial Mr EDR z6 01 7 017 HD usage D Connect ion Timing 2 Mo connection established Make sure the GPS is working properly and ACP and ARP information is correctly recorded After the scenario has completed save the data into a RDR recording folder This can be directly over the network onto the RES computer or can be on the EDR controlling computer In the last
317. is sync ed the colour of the message will turn from red to black and the OK button will become available EDR GPS init vi Serial Port Printer Port USE b ud Palas Seats GPS to UTC Time Offset 12 999999971 z Cancel Now the GPS is synchronised with the EDR recorder and the setup is ready to record the radar messages Next start the RES main control on the second computer and start the scenario playback It is of mayor importance that the EDR recording is started prior to the start of the RES since otherwise the time merging will not correctly link the scenario to the recorded data Make sure the scenario runs smooth and data is recorded by the EDR This can be checked by watching the frame counters on the EDR Control window The EDR will record its data ACP ARP information and PPS timestamp information on the removable hard disk in the EDR and the EDR control software will record the GPS messages in a temporary file on the PC running the software It is a good practice to always select a Scenario Result folder in the RES Main tool and record the interrogations and Datalink result log file This data can later be used by other analysis tools PTE P2B Once the scenario is finished stop the EDR recorder manually and save the data The EDR data must be put in the RAW RDR section of the CAMPAIGN folder After clicking the save button a dialog will appear asking you to select a folder Make sure you name this folder ap
318. ispla SCF 1 Status Display 17 Click the ES sceaststusdiply menu to open the SCF Status Display window or 2 These two windows have the same functionality and can display data from 2 different nodes at the same time The information displayed in these windows are linked to the target selected by the query cursor in the Data Display tool or in the Third View tool E CF1 Status Display vi e S Address 4004EB CatO17 Display Tx Only gt a mrri P at a a a a Itfiss a soo At Dusseldo ser AL 3 POEMS A gt 1 POEMS B Gatwick kal z a x TFA E a x Cat x M S nce inc lude iter 0 TP a a r Windo osition a x a x O E E iming Info E POEMS B 9 f 3 etection gt X 2 a a a a a at 48 Cat 48 Cat 48 Cat 48 Cat048 Cat 48 i 10 27 48 085 938 E t2 10 27 48 085 938 X ATCB k t2 t 0000000 s 0 L 00 s The SCF Status Display shows the Cat 48 Cat 17 and IRD Interrogations data belonging to the selected target TRD record in a graphical way with different levels and lines representing transactions There are five different levels ATC A POEMS A TP Transponder POEMS B and ATC B Typically a Transponder is interrogated by two or more POEMS interrogators This is represented by green or blue arrows between POEMS and TP These interrogations cause the POEMS stations to send Cat 48 data to ATC centres This data is shown as orange arr
319. isplayed Use the pause button and step g button to step through the recorded data as hee electi onica peA S RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder 11 12 The data conversion here is only done for first checking up of the signals As was already said before the event mode consumes too much disk space for permanent logging 9 Click the stop v button to end the program and close the window 4 3 Replaying the Data Replaying vi The recorded data event mode or serial mode can be replayed using the replaying tool load this tool from the Radar toolbox EDFE Data analyser EDR Eit recorder ROR Convert Bit Recording RDF ETT data The tool in now loaded Replaving vi EET Source Info Event recording HD Size Kb Serial recording HB Pos Kb HD start O Kb HD stop ke Runtime 02 00 00 00 Frogress Serial Mr Click the run button to start the replaying tool The RDR hardware status and serial RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 ihtiacalt cadvanties_Youme 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder IL 13 are displayed RDF Status Serial Mr Radar Data Recorder FOUND 08 071 036 There are two operation modes for this tool Event recording replay and serial recording replay For event recording replay choose event recording as source a Event recording Serial recording E nter a pac
320. ists to operate the tool Toggle Help window on off Import Export TSF 1D Histogram 2D Histogram Multi Level link Protocol viewer Counter Cluster Stability Print Display _o a a f Edit Display type Browse Source folder S File type selection Filter Data Step Back Step Further Stop S file Viewer tool The S File Viewer tool user interface is divided into five basic parts The first part is the S File Info panel This panel allows the user to limit the amount of data to be loaded by selecting a limited number of revolutions 5 File ne iRey start 1 v Entire file Seer CC Revolutions Messages in file Messages loaded The second part is the display panel This panel shows the user the contents of the axes and the legend used to display the information in the scatter diagram It also allows the user to zoom pan and center cursor We ee oes ooo IOl lE axjes eX Q F alzel Color Scale Display zl 0 000 RUM4 Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 ihitaselt cleckonies ame zi RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 15 The next panel is the message info panel This panel displays extra information regarding the message that is querried with the cross cursor Message Info Record Sumber S Address x Recording Time 00 0
321. ition Y calculated position Mode 2 YGL Mode 2 code Mode 1 YGL Made 1 cade Made 2 cade confidence factor Made 1 cade confidence factor Mode Z A VGL Cancel RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 EE nak eadera Volume 5 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIIL 12 The conversion process from DSS to TSF can be started by clicking the button The contents of the DSS files is converted in the templates required in standard RFS A48 A18 or IRS IVS data as specified in the PTE P2B1 ICD The user can choose not to export a specific field by double clicking it in the list The chaeckmark will disapper and the field will not be exported to the TSF format file 1 Export RFS Data vi Export A48 Data vi SENS GENUS SS ceno mme cm T NER Please define RESULT folder Exporting large mode Ib testZ 548 to Destination Folder gt Destination Folder lt Not Path cal a Time format E em Time format Header Data and Destination fields Index Recording Time Recording Date Target ID Track Nr Scan v Mode 1 Mode 2 filter Header Data and Destination fields v Index Recording Time Recording Date Azimuth ACP Progress Progress Record nr 16 of Record nr of Lines Written 3138 Scan nr Lines Written 112 Scan nr
322. itude Here selection is not made toward A or C code validity but according to position The radar coverage is split into boxes each with a given range azimuth and altitude size These parameters must be set before the instrument is run The user can select between Pd as a function of FL and range or azimuth and range The third dimension azimuth or FL is selected using an index 3D Pd calculation vi PATH RR amp Armnaefh Fi FOP fo 3507 the as A urs syle 100 5 Index 85 f Fligth level Azimuth sectors Range cel size Nm Heigth cel size FL 350 Maximum FL Radar Bertem Recorded from D Prox S2 84 S54 N I I I I T I I I I I I I 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 Azimuth deg 2 4 Analysing the Data Sector message delay analysis Sector Message Delay Analysis is done using the Inventory tool Any EDR recording containing surveillance radar data made with ARP ACP and or GPS signals connected see chapter VI of Volume 4 Data Recording amp Analysis Chapter VI Pd amp Accuracy for more details on this set up can be used for Sector Message Delay Analysis In fact the complete procedure is transparent for the user Any 54 format file resulting from an EDR conversion contains automatically the necessary information for delay analysis The actual analysis is made in the Inventory tool by filterin
323. ity 1 Load the S File Viewer tool from the RASS S toolbox Inventory Statistics Tabular Pd 3b Fd Time Merger amp Linker P2B2 Pd amp Accuracy Calculation Datalink Analyser P2B2 Data Import Export Interroqation Eeplwy viewer S File Viewer Data Display for Datalink P2B2 Time Merger amp Linker PS Data Display for Cluster P5 The following window will appear on the screen oO S File Analyser vi Is 25 Jf Es z E i f 0 0 5 ee v Entire file Revolutions Messages in file Messages loaded ls Se TERE ACO 0 0 000 L LI III Message Info Record Number 0 S Addressx 0 Tu Recording Time 00 00 00 00 Recording Scan 0 Recording Date 01 01 1904 Recording Azimuth 0 00 deg r Message Contents OS I I I 1 I I I I I 1 000 0 900 0 800 0 700 0 600 0 500 0 400 0 300 0 200 0 100 0 000 No Math 2 Run the S File Viewer tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window RUM4 Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 dioses cledvenfzs Youme gt 5l RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 14 The user interface of the S File Viewer tool is divided into several functional panels At the top of the window there is a row of buttons and selection l
324. k channels ADLP Transponder Radar DLF GDLP are assessed in this section You will learn how to operate the different tools designed for this assessment A special section in the PTE Reference manual is dedicated to the details and theoretical background of the calculations of the data link analysis parameter Five steps are required to perform the data complete link analysis 1 Data Recording 2 Data Conversion and Merging 3 Data Linking 4 Data Analysis 5 Data Displaying A scenario Linked_Dat C S4EV MOUSE Data Display Results Results S4SC b int IRD IRD S48 S18 bds pac K v ARD A EDR P w y P Data Merger A Data Analyser UT A S48 bc gt CJ y Time Merger vi raw rdr A Figure 1 Data Link Analysis Overview picture 1 1 Data Recording In the first step all required data for a data link analysis is recorded Typically this step requires the running of a RES scenario containing the data link events An alternative is the recording of life data but in most cases life data will not contain a lot of data link activity in order to allow a proper analysis of the radar performance This step involves the recording of at least the radar surveillance output asterix cat 048 Preferably the radar data link output asterix cat 18 will also be recorded Both these data sets are recorded by means of the RASS EDR and GPS A second important source of data are the Mode S roll cal
325. k in the RDR containing the event recording Now enter the start and stop position of the portion to be replayed Hpstart O kb HD stop Kb Next click the start button to start the replaying of the recorded event data The data will be replayed like it was recorded including spikes and glitches on all lines The data can be found on the bus 1 output pins see above NOT on the radar data recorder interface box Click the stop button to halt the replaying The info panel will display information about the replay like current hard disk position and elapsed time since the beginning of the replay Info HD Size 1045524 Kb HD Pos 29496729 kb Eun time 00 00 OCD OC Progress LC For event recording replay choose event recording as source C Event recording a Serial recording Any serial recording previously made can be transferred to the pack in the RDR by clicking the copy button You can browse for the file and copy it onto the pack as hee ellipsis oume zi RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder IIL 14 File Dialog RAW RDR s Obirkmb TS D error raw D err r2 raw Please specify the filename for the raw datarecording image file C Cem View All E1998 Transfering Data To EDR Current o kE C Size o kE Next select the channel and the baud rate to be replayed Unlike the event replay the
326. k recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 nask dadn Voume pI RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XL11 3 4 Recording the Data Passive ICP IP Recorder 1 Load the Passive TCP IP Recording tool from the RASS S toolbox Active TCP LIP Recording Passive TCP_IP Recording Multi TCP_IP Replay Multi Radar Event Scenario Gen Multi Fadar Traj Scen Gen Proximity Test Resolution Viewer The following window will appear on the screen TCP IP Recorder vi Format Server Client packets bytes Recording Information Buffering E Recording Time The user interface of the TCP IP Recording tool is divided into several functional blocks At the top there is a row of buttons to operate the tool a Toggle Help window on off 2 Show the preferences window e Start the recording Ll Stop the recording E Copy data to image file OF stop the TCP_IP Recording tool Some of these buttons can be disabled according to circumstances Under the command button row you can find the list of Filter information each filter is defined separately by its Source and destination IP addresses and port number ihiiaselt ciliis Wms S RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XL12 RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 Furthermore each filter needs a definition of the protocol used DDE Asterix The
327. k the Stop button to stop the EDR Serial Recording tool 4 3 EDR Convert Plot Data 4 3 1 Introduction The Extended Data Recorder RDR 339 is connected to one or more serial communication lines and records the serial data independent of the format as long as it is transmitted using the LAP B or X25 protocol The main objective of the convertor program is to convert the serial recorder data into a file format which can be read by the RASS S or RASS C analysis programs For the moment the following data formats are supported on the EDR convert tool ASTERIX Cat 001 ASTERIX Cat 002 ASTERIX Cat 016 ASTERIX Cat 034 ASTERIX Cat 048 and RDIF 4 3 2 EDR Convert Serial Recording vi After a serial recording or even while the serial recording is being performed you can convert the recorded data into a DCP MUX format a REDR format for replay purposes or into a RASS S format other formats may be foreseen in the future Madrec etc The convertor program also allows you to see the data in a PPI format or a Hex format This comes in handy to check the recording process while it is being performed Recordings made in active or Y passive mode pairs 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 and 5 amp 6 are cleared from retransmitted information LAP B and X25 Only confirmed information is allowed through the conversion process and used for futher processing 1 Load the Convert Radar Data tool from the RASS S toolbox RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4
328. l interrogations and replies For this purpose the RES will record all the interrogations and all its replies in a a hice usns Velume4 RUMA Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 3 05 10 01 zi RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 2 special file Alternatively the interrogations and replies can be recorded at video level by using the RVR 1 2 Data Conversion and Merging Once all data is recorded it needs to be converted into a usable format for analysis This conversion is performed by one single tool called the Time Merger vi This tool was already part of previous PTE configurations P1 and P2B1 but has been enhanced under the PTE P2B2 amendment The tool produces a S4S5C scenario data with UTC time stamping 548 asterix cat 048 518 asterix cat 18 and IRD Interrogations Replies Optionally also an S4RD file The data can be visualised immediately by means of the proper display tools Inventory GDLP DLF Viewer Asterix Cat48 viewer and Interrogation Reply viewer or can be further processed 1 3 Data Linking The merged data set resident in a RESULT folder can now be linked The term linking relates to the combination of related data items in different recorded data files A single plot return has several related data items One plot or Target Reference Data TRD item has one related Scenario position data field This can be found in the S4SC file The TRD also has one 548 record t
329. l appear UDP IP result files vi Progress Building index file followed by SelectFoalder vi Please specify the UDP IP recording destination 17 29 09 na 01 2002 This window allows the user to browse for a destination folder on the computer hard disk Once a destination is selected the tool will automatically generate the appropriate files The following window illustrates the progress of the saving process The copying may take a while The progress can be monitored in the progress bar After copying the window will close automatically y as iens dadia oume RUM4 Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI 7 3 3 Recording the Data Active TCP_ IP Recorder 1 Load the Active TCP IP Recording tool from the RASS S toolbox Active TCF LIF Fecording Passive TCP_IP Recording Multi TCP_IP Replay Multi Fadar Event Scenario Gen Multi Radar Traj Seen Gen Proximity Test Resolution Viewer The following window will appear on the screen Active TCP IP Recorder vi Server Client packets bytes status Recording Information Recording T ire The user interface of the TCP IP Recording tool is divided into several functional blocks At the top there is a row of buttons to operate the tool a Toggle Help window on off 2 Show the preferences window e Start the recording LI Stop the recording E o data
330. lable RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 nist deckonies Youme RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 32 Dynamic n rd made 8 Start Scan History Step 3 Refresh s Start Scan start position of this dynamical layer Scan history number of plot visible during the dynamic run Step size step size between two consecutive plots during the dynamic run Refresh rate Update rate of the display during the dynamic run Click the 9 button to activate the settings or the tel L button to ignore the ra settings Preferences can be saved using the V _ button and loaded using the lead button 6 Other display types can be selected using the display type selector in the upper right corner of the graph display or by clicking the f button see bullet3 7 Zooming and panning in the display can be done using the graph palette M n l y 7 992138 x ll 5 auto scale X axis auto scale Y axis dii X axis settings EE Y axis settings E Zoom tool M Pan tool Ea Select cursor X Centre cursor Enlarging or shrinking the Data Display P5 tool can be done by clicking and dragging the ET lower right corner of the window Click the Hi button in the upper right corner to expand the Data Display tool to full screen size Click the button in the lower right corner of the window to square the display of the Data Display tool 8 To get
331. larging or shrinking the SCF Status Display s can be done by clicking and dragging the lower right corner of the window Click the El button in the upper right corner to expand the SCF Status Display tool to full screen size Click the 8 patton in the lower right corner of the window to square the display of the SCF Status Display tool Click the button to close the window Use the button to activate the Multi Level Link with the Protocol Viewer tool or the Analyse Pulse Recording tool Notice that the corresponding EDR raw recording is automatically loaded in the Protocol Viewer The corresponding pulse recording file needs to be loaded in the Analyse Pulse Recording tool in order to use the Multi Level Link tool Select one of the four available links Cat048 Cat 17 Cat018 or video The principle of Multi Level Linking used in the Data Display is similar to the one used in the Inventory tool except that there is an extra link for the Cat018 data towards the Protocol Viewer tool af Link ta Cat04s Link to Cat 18 Link ta CatO1 Link to Video The same principle is also included in the SCF Status displays but here the selection between Cat 17 or Cat 48 is made automatically The DLF Status Display does not have this multi level link possibility as iaa Gledventes__voumes zl RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 48 Select a point of interest using the query cursor red cross
332. lds RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 zu Huse uns oume S RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 12 Bytes Type Contents Unit MM 8 Sg RangeRepy SS 8 DOI Azimuth ACP Interrogation deg MEN 8 Dbl UTC Time of day Int sec DM 8 Dbl Azimuth Reply ACP deg 8DbB Azimuth Target deg 1 8U16 Sean 0 00 0 0 m 1 U8 lnterrogation type List m 1U8 Reply Type J dist 4032 Saddress 3 J d 2 U16 lD SSRCode ee 4 Sgl Interrogation Power dBm 4 Sgl Repl Power 1 dBm 48g OBA Value J M E 1 U8 Reply Flag M Status field P MM 1 U8 XA SSR AIl Call Replies 1 14 032 Data link type Status field E 14 14 U8 Interrogation a 14 14 U8 Reply or Code s o oo 4 U32 1 Index 32 8 U32 Spare IRD1 IRD8 Using the same UTC time stamping file the S4TJ or S4EV file is copied into a S4SC file adding the absolute UTC time stamping to the data Finally since the Scenario time merger tool already knows the location of the raw EDR data files it is also used asa top layer interface for the 548 and S18 file conversion 3 1 2 Software Manipulations 1 Load the tool from the RASS S toolbox Analysis Inv
333. ll times by clicking the m button The data already converted converted is saved to disk The conversion process can be paused at all times by clicking the button By clicking the m button the conversion process can RUM4 Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 d intact deckonies_ Youme RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 V 25 be advanced one message at a time Each message can then be observed using one different viewing options Releasing the button will relaunch the conversion process Depending on the computer performance data format and traffic density conversion may take from 5 to 100 of the real recording time Therefore we recommend not to use the PPI display while conversion is taking place except for brief checking or for real time checking while recording is taking place If available use a fast desktop workstation instead of a portable laptop for conversion a inmaak clem Volumes RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 zl RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 26 6 Running a batch of multiple conversions Press the button in the lower left corner to show or hide the Batch Process oO SSS convert vi e RH iJ e SA gt J Um LL Conversion Selection Info m Pues Start scan z Reoxthg v surtsan Message E Macintosh AY CAMP AIGN S4 ae i ACCEPT ANCE V440 DATA RAW ROR NI ime 379999 Date Destinati
334. log will appear for you to enter the filename If RASS is Selected data will be saved in RASS S format This data type is not a sequential data type as with other Radar data types but is record oriented It is RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 ihiiaselt cledkorties D etume t zi RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 V 23 dedicated toward the LabVIEW programming environment and is chosen for maximum performance in this environment If IOSS is chosen data will be saved in Mayer IOSS format The data type inside the Mayer IOSS format is the data as recorded on the recorder disk but stripped from synchronisation and filter characters 2 2 If None is chosen no file will be created use this option if you only want to view the data This can be useful for a checkup or to use the system as a PPI during radar testing 2 3 If REDR is selected an EDR replay file is created This file can be replayed using the EDR Replay tool see Vol5 Ch IX REDR Replay Normally this tool will use the recorded ACP ARP pulses to create the timing for replay If ACP ARPs are not recorded in the original data the tool can substitute these with the sector messages in ASTERIX To do this set the correct Scan Boundaries parameter See hereunder To create an REDR file based on ACP ARP recorded use On ARP as scan boundary To create an REDR file based on Sector messages select On
335. lt file Use the labelling function to put labels on the A codes which are erroneous or false By switching the inventory display mode to Custom mode range azimuth and time errors can be shown versus any other relevant field gt RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 E nace daen volume RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VL27 Y axis 4 Range Hm wr Vertical amp code flrec tine Sa C code flrec tirme 2 axis R flelevat Range Nm T R flrec time Az flrec time Track f rec time v A Range Nm f Range Mm Hot defined amp Range Mr fiRange wr o Jaler Target Info amp VENE 4 Code 30027 W FL a S Address Range Mm 35 71 Azimuth deg 21 70 Me anno aono anon On Type SSE Track a9 Power dEm 38 0 Rec Time 02 04 45 9 Rec Date 01 01 1904 e m BackGround m Map Range Mr Scan 24 arc m Scenario aster ix misses N HH Ij 2 m No Math fi CO No Math fit _ No Math fi Furthermore you can use the histogram function to create calculate statistics on this data such as STD Mean distribution etc zi RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 ES s intselt dedna eN RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 28 SS Multiline Histo gram vi M Histogram GE Hits i Statistics ea 202 750 Total 0 092 Mean L Cumulative 0 024 Ein size 0 095 Inclusion 0 000 Population Stati
336. maak dadene ms zi RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 28 SelectFoldervi Please select a folder containing the 517 format file DUSS GATW 1906 E E dE 11 42 53 27 06 2002 Select the folder of interest This is typically a RESULT folder or a LINKED DATA folder The data is automatically be loaded into the tool If the selected folder does not contain valid 517 recording following dialog will be shown N Load S17 Format file No S17 format file found in the selected folder Beware Most of the times the 517 recordings will be found inside a RESULT FOLDER in a subfolder named NODEx x 1 6 A progress bar indicates the progress of this process The user can a all times interrupt this loading process All the data already loaded can be used for further analysis Loading records DLL 4 Next enter a value for the window size and step of the sliding window to be used during the assessment of the cluster stability Farameterz Windew 10 000 step 1 000 s Typically the window size should be three times the t2 timer The time expected between NIM messages oe 5 Click the E button to start the cluster stability assessment A progress bar indicates the progress of the process Depending on the window step size and the length of the selected file this can take several minutes gt The cluster
337. ment TRD SUESET testing subset with user info Time Date of Recording na 30 50 0 10 1 1 2000 Time Date of Saving 10 38 20 0 13 11 2000 Filter And f Scan is less than or equal to 1012 And Scan is greater than or equal to 17 And Slant s Nm is less than or equal to 24 8256226 And Slant amp Mra is greater than or equal to 0 088515 And f Slant Y Hr iz lezs than or equal to 24774303 And Slant Y Nm is greater than or equal to 34 650257 It is possible to filter the TRD data set to limit the amount of data or to zoom in on a specific problem The filter display shows the current filter for the selected layer Filter TED Range Mm is greater than 50 000000 Click the Filter button to define or change the filter setting The following window will appear Filter SearchEditor TRD PS wi Data Display Filter A C fng T gt Or 5 Essent P N ClearOne Clear All 4 canet f OK A filter consists of five functional blocks The first block is the source of the object o filtering Choose a source of the list The chosen item is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the object is enabled The contents of the second block depends on the chosen value of the source RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 zi IBl z piene elludimenifas olume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X27 Because
338. messages that are shown History On Off Length When the function is switched Off only the last message is shown 12 With the Read Position slider bar you can jump to a specific position of the file that you want to analyse When analysing a large file be cautious with this function because processing delays are possible Read Fozitian jj o tkb 13 The Time can be set to either relative or absolute The Relative Time indicates the time between the current message and the previous message in milliseconds The Absolute Time gives the time stamps starting from zero with the first message Time e Relative a Absolute 14 The PPI picture can only be used when the ACP ARP signals are included Those signals are logged together with the EDR So the PPI indicator will show the radar timing information ACP ARP during the analysis FFI picture TIT Il 2 a a e e Mi un Bu 00 00 0000 0 00 deg It is possible to switch off the PPI picture by clicking the On Off button Notice that when the PPI picture function is switched Off it is not longer possible to select the displaying of timing messages see next fha daders Volume IV 3 RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer VJ 15 When the Display function is switched Off the processing of the da
339. mic Depending on the selected configuration other settings become available Off static layer Layer settings Dynamic Connect Mathematics Info oft v M mode iStart Scan None mode No Math window x Intersoft Electronics Lamerdries 27 B 2250 Olen BELGIUM Tel 32 0 14 221811 Fax 32 0 14 221944 Plot m Shared Axis History 2 Refresh s TRD ra Type i Labels mode d info intersoft electronics com http www intersoft electronics com In the plot panel the settings for displaying the data can be edited by clicking the legend EHEHHENHEHEHSCEHHS D oo BREED SU S EHEHEENHHEHSCHNHS D oo EHHEHEHENHEHENHESSEHHSS SU SO EHEHNHENHEHHEHES CHESS 3 css 0050 O a THEEEEES OOOOOOoooooooooooooooOooOoO Foreground Background i More All for both Other keys toggle Plot Common Plots P Point 5tyle Line Style Line Width Bar Plots The shared axis type for the selected layer can be chosen The shared axis type defines the source of a common display type for the selected layer This way it is possible to display a common shared axis type in different layers but with the data originating 3 E nakk decianigs Yane RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X3l from different sources for each layer Sha
340. mil RUM4 ChI Introduction v4 4 4 14 02 2003 ___Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder IL1 Chapter Il Radar Data Recording 1 0 Introduction The final stage in the radar chain is the data processor and the corresponding data transmission elements data lines modems telephone or dedicated data lines The Radar Data Recorder RDR can be used to evaluate all these elements This equipment records the digital data coming from any synchronous or asynchronous data line regardless of the transmission protocol to its hard disk in a raw format meaning not a single bit or data corrupting spikes is lost Special software is used to evaluate the signal s quality in a first stage After quality evaluation the data is decoded to check the protocol If the data quality and protocol are correct a data recording can be made for a prolonged period of time This recording can then be decoded into a suitable data format for further evaluation this can be the RASS C compatible DCP MUX format a time code enhanced DCP MUX format or the RASS S data format LabVIEW oriented A final stage in the testing is the data analysis This stage is discussed in the next chapter Chapter III Radar Data Analysis 2 0 Radar Data Recorder Hardware Requirements The data recording measurement equipment includes the following hardware Radar Data Recorder Power supply cable Portable workstation with power supply SCSI connec
341. mm D exchanges The definition of the duration of a Comm A Comm C or Comm D exchange is the time delay between the relevant reseroation and close out interrogations performed by the POEMS SUT relevant reservation and the technical acknowledge reply provided by the transponder a Huse Gaines oume S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 37 1 The data link delay result can be viewed by clicking the Delay button Following window will appear Result Viewer vi type Throughput delays v a Delay sec w y scale Code Chng throughput 5M 4C 4S throughput i AICB throughput delay DA 32 500 30 000 z 27 500 25 000 22 500 20 000 17 500 15 000 Comm C throughput delay B vi BrCB 18 throughput b v BrCB A48 throughput b v Comm D throughput delay m I Comm A throughput delay a v 12 500 M 10 000 I 7 500 5 000 2 500 0 000 o Sa E 0 0 Cursor le e AF TEDE Cursor A by y Y v r v r r r zo feo asses loses iss loses piss zs oem peso er s fessi past poss pes poss forr oss jossz k je reos posee par pee err z187 Josee Josse pe e seesedeies meses sm sosoz osse posse neteel nirs 3 o o pezes osor ioo ose 10 far oss oss ks fes s3529 pass loose pss posa arse osar los REGES SI J
342. more information on a specific point position the red cross cursor on that point and observe the target information panel Remember that only the active layer can be accessed Click X to centre the cursor Click Ea to select the cursor This target information can be queried in every display type as iaa Gledventes__voumes 3 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual Range Mm Azimuth deg 0 00 Scan Source Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 33 If detailed information about the selected target is needed click the Lt button next to the target info field This button will launch a Data Display Info window displaying all available information for the selected target The Info window runs in parallel with the Data Display tool and is updated every time the cursor is moved to another target In total there are six different views each displaying information belonging to a specific source TRD S4 TRD Ext 548 S18 S17 IRD DLF SCF and Info Two Data Display Info windows can be opened at the same time Data Display Info P5 vi Data Display Info P5 vi y DLF f TRD 54 j TRD Ext TRD Date Source Type Status Valid 2 Valid 1 Valid C Valid A State S Address _ 1 DRN 0 TRD Time 13 07 49 284450 1
343. munication using UDR IV 2 3 0 UDR Connections SBconnections GPS Connection UDR RVR connection ront Panel ack Panel B 15 female on ase Chi bets coerce UDR600 Front panel and back panel connections The following setup explains the connection between UDR and host computer in combination with a portable GPS unit Y HD15 to 5 DC BNC power DB25 to for ARP ACP for RJ45 connections GPS to USB port computer RJ45 RJ45 GPS serial connections power connect GRT389 Power supply to UDR instead of GRT The USB Data Recorder is connected to the host computer using a standard USB cable with a type A and a type B USB connector The UDR is powered from the USB bus RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 am qq DUMP Np UM M CM XEM CCC he Pell i I7 aul Yolume 4 P RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV3 In case a GPS is used for UTC time stamping the GPS can be directly connected to the RJ45 GPS input port Since the DC Power for the GPS cannot be supplied from the USB bus it is necessary to connect the power supply to the DC power input connector This is applicable to both the GRT389 and the GPS450 You can use the standard HD15 to 5 BNC cable to connect ACP green and ARP red in case you want to record azimuth information from the encoder with your data recording This connection is optional The UDR back panel contains
344. n ala a L 1 Mode 3 A 2778 B98 Mode C Code in Binary Representation IY a G a Hode C 358880 ft 136 Radar Plot Characteristics Primary Subtield ies SSR iw RPO B B 1 B Ba Amplitude of MoSSR reply SAM 73 dBm 228 Aircraft address 45CCAS 181 Track Number hii ER ied a Fx a DATA Asterix This feature allows you to search for errors in comunications modems protocols etc 2 6 2 S Hle Viewer Multi level Linking 1 Export the recorded EDR data into an S17 or 548 file does not work with S18 EDR Export P5 vi EB single Process Start zcan Macintosh AV C AMF AIGN S4A ACCEPTANCE Y 443047 4 RAW ROR DUSS End scan r Source J EDR Recording W hH r Selection z Destination folder Macintosh AV O Format CAMP AIGN 54 4CCEFT ANCE Stats Display E Line selection Lu 2 s E Ls Os Lossy Export View Info b n Message n e Current Kb Lo r Progress Rey Time Date Error S File Analyser vi 020 TYP f Slant Y Nm Slant xX Nm Fea 2 ar m Lote m oj Slant X Nm ts 200 0 180 0 160 0 140 0 120 0 100 0 80 0 60 0 40 0 20 0 0 0 20 0 40 0
345. n e F the sum of the numbers above this data only provide an indication of the data link activity for the scan it does not have a physical meaning 1 The data link activity result can be viewed by clicking the Activity ES button Following window will appear zu Huse uns oume RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 S RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 27 1 Result Viewer vi BE BELMA Z ial Comm amp 240 s Comm C1 200 Comm C2 dile CommD 160 Sum 140 120 100 80 60 o 1 1 I I L I 1 L j I I ib 158 20 25 s0 s5 40 45 950 S5 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 TENET en TEADE O m ori Cursor Olea Heeoorjaseo 16915 xe 200 sez nzoojoooo faaoo 4 5 2 This diagram shows the data link activity for Comm B AICB Broadcast CommB ACAS RA amp GICB Comm A Comm C 1 of initial or intermediate segments commC Comm C2 of final segments and the sum of all the above 3 The user can show the activity per scan or per target by using the menu in the control bar type Activity scan ba ff Activ nt fscan This will change the appearance of the graph In the first selection Activity scan the X axis contains the scan numbers In the second selection Activity Target the X axis can contain one of 4 different values
346. n be edited in the preferences window Click the Preferences button to open the preferences window The following window will appear RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 as iaa dadene Volume4 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 30 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 Data Display Preferences P5 vi f Layer 3A Layer 3B Layer 3C Layer 3D Layer 3E Layer 3F Sa 2A Layer 2B Layer 2C Layer 2D Layer 2E Layer 2F Prem 1A Layer 1B Layer 1C Layer 1D Layer 1E Layer 1F Layer settings Dynamic Connect r Mathematics off FY mode None PE mode No Math window X i Start Scan j r Plot 3 Lv Intersoft Electronics Hister a mi pP Lamerdries 27 END j B 2250 Olen RR BELGIUM m i Tel 32 0 14 221811 1 Fax 32 0 14 221944 Refresh s Shared Axis TRD ra Type r Labels on ly ma mode info intersoft electronics com http www intersoft electronics com f Load f Save J Cancel i f OK d The preferences window is automatically opened with the active layer on top The other layers are also accessible through the tabs By selecting a layer its settings become visible Select a layer by clicking the respective tab A layer has one of two possible basic configuration static and dynamic Off static On dyna
347. n drop time The maximum time a chain track does not contain valid data before it is assigned an End of Track flag TRD window The time window used to link the TRD data to the interogation data If the time of recording of a Roll Call interrogation and its address matches the TOD of the linked asterix cat 48 within this timeframe it is linked to the TRD The Progress bar will indicate the processed part of the file while the UTC time and Day indicators show the UTC time as derived from the UTC file Progress Message 395 Rev Current Kb eror o Ti 13 06 08 677 Sac The progress and processing time is also shown in the Program status window 9 Once the file is completely processed the different files can be viewed with their relevant viewers RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 ihiiaselt cledkonies ame zi RASS S User Manual 3 0 Data Display tool Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 2 These paragraphs will explain you how to use the Data Display P5 tool This tool allows the visualisation of the results of the Linker amp Merger Analyser The Data Display P5 tool has the same look and feel as the Inventory tool Therefore users that are familiar with the Inventory tool will have no difficulties in using the Data Display P5 tool The Data Display P5 tool uses a TRD data set as the source of information A TRD Data set is the result of the Linker amp Merger or
348. n the disk from a previous recording The disks used for this logging are raw unpartitioned disks They do not contain a valid Macintosh or MS DOS partition and can not be used to store other information than EDR serial recordings To start the recording click the start button To stop a recording click the stop button This is the only way to fully terminate a recording Clicking the button will stop the EDR Serial Recording tool but will not terminate the recording itself The EDR will keep on recording until the disk is full and then restart at the beginning of the disk 5 While recording the HD position indicator will count the Kilobytes disk space used RUM4 Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 mask dedni ee 4 zi RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IV 11 A time indication shows the current time If GPS is used this time is UTC otherwise computer time settings are used Time 9 29 59 4 Local 6 The PPI indicator will show the radar timing information ACP ARP during the recording if connected This timing information is also recorded together with the serial data and can be used for analysing the data in a later stage PPI z 12 7 The Connection panel indicates the integrity of the recording for each of the channels and the GPS information individually GPS go 19b 2g SB 4 ee 555562 For each hardware channel and for the timing information G
349. n the two computers Several options exist You must first decide which computer you are going to use for the analysis The most logical selection is the EDR computer The Result files will be put on this system Make sure the sharing is switched on on the RES computer and both systems are put into the network Select the RES computer from the EDR system as a file server Use the chooser to select the RES computer Chooser Select a file server 2 LaserWriter 8 Server IP Address Q Active Stylewriter 1200 AppleTalk amp Inactive Now you can optionally copy the Scenario files and the Scenario RESULT files from the RES computer onto the EDR computer or copy the Raw EDR data from the EDR computer to the RES computer This is not required in a permanent network environment On your EDR computer you should now have a campaign containing the scenario data in the SCENARIO folder the raw EDR data in the DATA RAW RDR folder and the scenario result folder in the the RESULT folder Next open the Time Merger vi tool from the RASS S main toolbox Pd amp Accuracy Calculation Data Import duoi 2B2 The tool allows you to select four folders from which three are required for correct operation H RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 Er intaeet elacdrontas Volume IV RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 15
350. nd valid see definition below and Incorrect Range of detected target Azimuth of detected target Range error reference detected Azimuth error reference detected Time error reference detected The data can easily be imported in any spread sheet application e g Using the import wizard Special attention should be given to the two UTC timestamp columns which must be formatted in an hh mm ss 000 format 2 Asterix recorded file s Fiter Scan Nr 3 A Code 1200 11 16 48 095 1200 11 16 54 100 1200 11 17 00 105 1200 11 17 06 108 1200 11 17 12 112 1200 11 17 18 116 1200 11 17 24 119 1200 11 17 20 123 1200 11 17 26 126 1200 11 17 42 129 1200 11 17 48 133 1200 11 17 54 136 1200 11 18 00 139 1200 11 18 06 142 1200 11 18 12 146 1200 11 18 18 149 1200 11 18 24 152 1200 11 18 30 155 1200 11 18 36 158 1200 11 18 42 162 1200 11 18 48 165 1200 11 18 54 168 1200 11 19 00 171 1200 11 19 06 174 1200 11 19 12 177 1200 11 19 18 180 1200 11 19 24 184 1200 11 19 30 187 1200 11 19 36 190 1200 11 19 42 193 4 4 b b ACCPTANCE P1 4 TAKE2SSR txt RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 C test1 54 test TAKE2 S4 is less than 270 is not equal to 7607 50 1 1 Enabled Miss Acquire 1 cOocoooocoooooooooooooooooocooo cOOoOOOooococoooooooooooooooocooo Range Nm 1 3 302 4 136 4 966 5 8 6 634 7 468 8 303 9 136 9 969 10 804 11 637 12 47 13 305 14 139
351. ndicator showing the recorded data volume in Kb The time elapsed since the beginning of the recording is also shown HD Size Kb HD Usage oue HD Position Kb l l l l l 25 So 75 100 Run time 00 00 04 18 While recording the yellow data and green clock LED indicators next to the graph on the window will flicker indicating data is being detected If this is not the case check the data connections 5 Press the Halt n button next to the record button to stop the recording 6 Now recording is halted and the data can be examined in a first pass Use the slider below the graph to step through the recorded data Signal Analysis CH amp Clock Data CH 9 Clock Data CH 4 Clock Data CH 2 Clock C Data C Eo prc m 0 000 0 010 0 020 0 030 0 040 0 050 0 06 js 44 Alt cursor mE ME D O Z4 time s TEDE Cae e 7 The window will now show the recorded data in a scope type of display In the example given above channel 2 was connected to the recorder The glitches present on channel 4 are normal The data recorder s input is high impedance Use the zoom tool to examine clock and data in detail This can be done by positioning the zs hie espe Volume4 S RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder IL 1I mouse pointer on the zoom area clicking and selecting the horizontal zoom function f
352. ne the A code Errors This is only performed on the remaining missed or false codes For each record in the reference array with its missed bit Flag1 set following criteria are used to search a subset of the the asterix data array only that section with the false bit Flag2 set Flag1 y True AND Flaglg True Time y t window gt Time q gt Time y t window AND Rangey Rwindow gt Rangeg gt Range R window AND Azimuth AZwindow gt Azimuthg gt Azimuth y AZ window If a corresponding record is found the associated Flag1 bits in each of the 2 arrays miss and false is cleared and the flag 2 in the asterix set A code error is left True The array index of the reference array is copied in the Link field of the corresponding asterix data entry and the The array index of the asterix array is copied in the Link field of the corresponding reference data filed 6 Once all reference entries have been searched the reference array Flag1 field will flag the misses since no corresponding Asterix field was ever found the Flag2 flag will flag the acquisition misses misses in the first N plots of a track and the asterix array Flag1 field will flag the false targets since no corresponding Reference field was ever found and the Asterix array Flag2 field will indicate the code swaps or errors 7 The result of the search is presented to the user
353. nector is used to input the radar timing signals ACP ARP distributed by the RVI box See RASS S4 User Manual Chapter 3 The BNC TTL event input connector can be used to record an extra event e g the PPS of the GPS together with the serial data This can then be used for analysis of the recorded data in a later stage Interface Pin Assignment for Raytheon Cossor systems DB25 connector Pin Signal RS530A standard Shield Transmit Data Out TxD Receive Data In RxD Request To Send Out RTS Clear To Send In CTS Signal Ground Gnd Rirn Receive Sig Elmnt Timing RxC Htrn Tx amp Rx Ext Sig Elmnt Tim TrxC Htrn Transmit Sig Elmnt Timing TxC Rtrn CTS CTS Rirn TxD TxD Transmit Signal Element Timing In TxC Htrn RxD RxD Receive Signal Element Timing In RxC Rtrn RTS RTS Data Terminal Ready Out DTR Rtrn DTR DTR Tx amp Rx Ext Signal Element timing Out TrxC RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 Xm ens Volume4 RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication on LAP B X25 IVA 4 0 Making a Recording Checklist 4 1 Procedure The extended data recording will be set up in several discrete steps a Hardware connections b Making a recording c Converting data into a convenient format Corresponding to each step one or more tools will be used a amp b EDR Control vi This tool controls the recording d EDR Convert vi This program converts the recorded data into a DCP
354. neration 13 43 0 025210 13 11 2000 Date of Generation He G C Code 1006 IL FL 0 S Address 13 Type S Roll Call SSR Plot Track Track Velocity Scan Track PSR hits RCbfr SSR hits RC Data Display Info vi Range Nm Range 25 Azimuth deg ight ft 0 Aircraft ID Heading deg Rel Heading deg Power dBm Elevation deg IX 64 13 282443 164 107422 65 0000 PTEQOF 150 00 65 000 180 000 36 8 0 00 Target ID Set Target Gen Overlap Nm h X Nm Y Nm 1 Code 2 Code 12 04 5 61 amp Range Nm 0 001193 0 000618 amp Az deg Time s 0 009585 Datalink events Status 31 24 23 16 15 Brdest Comm B Status 1 b 11000100 b 1001 1 24 23 16 FRA Status 2 b 11000001 b 0 GICB Roll Call detect Simulated SSR detect Track Valid S Valid C Valid A man amim am oa AICB Comm A Comm C Comm D Data Display Info vi CatO18 Datalink Activity 4 DPacket Beast CB D DPacket GICB D Beast AICB GICB Ext RA CA UPacket CC Upacket Cancel UPacket 0 UPacket Ack Interrogation Datalink Activity CA segm CCI segm CCL segm CD segm Data L
355. network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 S RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI 16 E Convert vi g m Conversion Selection Source Start scan o End scan Destination RASS S Ww Display O Pei Line selection L Format O1 I2 O3 4 Os Le O stats bd 2 Run the Convert tool using the button in the upper left corner of the window First we determine the source of the data recording We can convert data either directly from a recordinge from a IOSS file e g from a SASS C recording or from the Extended Data Recorder EDR connected to the computer at that time This mode is called Live mode This mode is not applicable for LAN recording This can be selected using the Source selector There are 3 possibilities Recording File IOSS and EDR Source V Recording Iss EEUU EDR 3 Progress bar and PPI indicator If applicable the progress bar will indicate the progress Progress 20 40 60 au 100 If applicable the PPI indicator will indicate the radar turning information during the recording 4 Following Control buttons determine the operation of the Convert program gt Start a conversion s otop a process Pause a process View Set conversion preferences RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 nask dadn Voume S RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network reco
356. nformation displayed in these windows are linked to the target selected by the query cursor in the Data Display tool or in the Third View tool we will start with the DLF DataLink Status Display Oo Datalink Status Display vi E ES Timing Info 11 15 59 10 375 712 x 2 15 59 10 375 712 X t 0 000000 s r Target InfoQ Azimuth deg 15 00 22 0 0007500 s The Data Link Status Display shows all the available information belonging to the selected target TRD record in a graphical way with different levels and lines representing transactions for a specific target TRD record between the levels There are five different levels ADLP Airborne Data Link Processor TP Transponder POEMS Pre Operational Mode S Station DLF Data Link Function GDLP Ground Data Link Processor and ATC Air Traffic Control If there is more information available kind of transaction contents of the transaction this is also displayed on top of the transaction coloured line At the top of the window TRD xx is displayed when there is a TRD record present for scan number xx even if there are no transaction linked to the TRD record The ordering parameter decides whether the transactions within one scan are drawn in chronological Time order or in logical order interrogation and replies are correlated in pairs When an interrogation tra
357. ng file available before the analysis tool is started 1 To load the tool select Protocol Viewer from the toolbox EDR Data Analyzer EDF Bit Recorder EDR Convert Bit Recording EDR Serial Recorder EDF Convert Serial Recording GELF Frotocol Viewer EDR Replay EDR Export UDF IP Recorder Convert Network Recording 2 Now the tool is loaded and the following window will appear 20x Protocol Viewer vi Tii MSG 1 1 No data source file selected lo ata source Format Decode delay On Off Delay s 4 History Time On Off Length Q Relative 4 e Absolute Azimuth dea r Display T Timing messages r PPI picture 4 SL te D l E vi 174 117 95 deg r Progress C 3 Click the LabVIEW Run button in the upper left corner of the window to start the tool RUM4 Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 zi masc dedre Volume IV RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V3 2 2 Overview of the buttons The following list explains the function of the top row buttons on the front panel of the tool Help Start m Pause Stop Filter Export Question Done RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 Toggles the Help window On and Off To start the analysis To pause the analysis To stop
358. ng on the amount of data selected The loading process can be stopped at all times by clicking the cancels iion The records already loaded will be used for further analysis Loading records Le Cancel After the loading the program will calculate the selected display This will take a few seconds a progress indicator will appear in the lower left corner EI 1 zs siters nb elsi Volume zi RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 59 TRD Slant Y Nm a EE Si VP 30 Peal 20 isi K _ S t See 4 pas NE 3 I i 3 5 10 15 20 3 30 5 BackGround TRD Slant X Nm 5 The Data Display tool is build up with layers of data At all times three layers are always directly accessible with the tabs at the bottom of the window Click one of the tabs to make that layer active this means not necessary visible il 1 Mode AC our m ij tu M Paging through all the layers Max 10 can be done using the buttons at the lower left side of the window 44 Shift layers one position to the left Af Shift layers three positions to the left L Shift layers three positions to the right PP Shift layers one position to the right It is very important to realise that all actions are executed on the active layer The active layer is selected with the tabs at the bottom of the display window 1 Mode A
359. nnections 2 1 1 2 GPS Connections 2 1 1 3 Network Connections 2 1 1 4 Data Recording Software Manipulation 2 1 1 5 General Connection Overview 2 1 2 Interrogation and Reply Recording 2 1 2 1 RES Connections 2 1 2 2 RES Software 2 1 3 Order of Launching the Tools 2 2 Recording in LIFE case 2 2 1 Data Recording 2 1 2 Interrogation and Reply Recording 2 1 3 Order of Launching the Tools 3 Data Conversion and Merging 3 1 Time Merging 3 1 1 Operation for SCENARIO 3 1 2 Software Manipulations 3 2 Life data Merging without reply data 3 2 1 DOperation for LIFE 3 3 Life data Merging including Replies 4 Data Linker 4 1 General 4 2 Software Manipulations 5 0 Analyser 5 1 General 5 2 Software Manipulations 5 3 Data link Analysis Result Viewers 5 3 1 Data Link Activity 5 3 2 Data Link Exchange Analysis RUM6 Table of Contents v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE 7 nau erreeseuwueeE E _ C um 89 eb Il VII VII VII VIII VIII VIII IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX IX L Th mil dms OOO o A AOAONADAKFKHKRKFKBRWNNN FF WNNNNNRR RR RRR rr er O NONWNDWRrRrF OO ON VIVIN cc Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Table of Contents 5 3 3 Data Link Delay Analysis 5 3 4 Data Link Failure Analysis 5 3 5 Data Link Prob of Suc Comm B Del Through C
360. nsaction green line is not touching the previous reply transaction blue line or the next interrogation transaction green line it means that the both interrogations were send in different roll call slots When they are touching it means that they were send in the same roll call slot Just like for the Data Display tool by clicking the button select query cursor and X button centre query cursor the query cursor Ed can be dragged to a specific target and the corresponding target information will be displayed in the target info panel and the Data Display Info Window will switch automatically to the corresponding tab see as here dadene Volume4 3 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 3 14 11 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 45 Data Display tool for more information about the Data Display Info Window Target Info CQ Y G amp Code 62o N E FL 3a El E Range Nm 61 28 amp zimuth deg 222 89 14 Scan By entering a window size the amount of information displayed in the window can be changed A window of 5 means two positions to the left and positions to the right with the selected target in the middle All means that the complete trajectory is displayed Window Size Da is Liz Datalink Status Display vi oriri a We e el TEMRE r Window Size Oa ts Window Position 4
361. oad and visualise the two input sets of data and the two output sets of data A separate tool called Pd amp Acc vi calculates the required accuracy code performance and Pd data The procedure of performing a pd calculation using P1 is as follows Step1 Create a test scenario using P1 Scenario generation gt xxx S4T file Step2 Playback the scenario and record the asterix data simultaneously using the EDR plus GPS time synchronisation see figure 2 Step3 Use the Time Merger vi tool to import the timestamp data into the precompiled scenario gt xxx S4SC file step4 Convert the EDR raw data into S4 readable data gt xxx S4RD file This step may be combined with step 3 in case the data output of the Radar is Asterix or RDIF using the Time merger vi otherwise use EDR convert vi tool Step 5 Load The Merged scenario data file E g Test S4SC file in layer 1 of the inventory tool Load the Asterix data E g Test S4RD file in layer 2 of the inventory tool Use the inventory tool to initially compare the two files especially towards time biases and range or azimuth offsets The Filenames will be automatically attributed in the inventory tool if you use it after the time Merger Take note of eventual biases otep 6 Run the Pd and Accuracy tool Enter the correct parameters Time window Range window Azimuth window Time bias and optionally Azimuth bias Range Bias Pd is calculated Code perf
362. of Recording Interarrival Time of Recording Date of Recording Date of Recording Scan of Recording oan of Recording Fractional S f di Fractional Scan of Recording ractiona can of recording i i Azimuth of Recording Azimuth of Recording Running Azimuth of Recording Running Azimuth of Recording Slant X Nm Slant X 014 Nm Slant Y Nm Slant Y 014 Nm Processing delay Relative Heading 000 Message Type Elevation 001 Cause 001 Diagnostic 010 SAC V Time of Recording h m 5 002 Time Of Day BIDS 3 020 TYP M 4F Relative Time of Recording s 2 aid Md 020 SIM A 020 RDP Interarrival Time of Recording s 005 Mode S Address 020 SPI en 006 Repetition 020 RAB Date of Recording d m y ae Mek S Address pros Scan of Recording 007 UM 020 ME 007 DM 020 MI Fractional Scan of recording 007 UC 020 FOE FRI Azimuth of Recording deg 007 DC naa wit May 008 UDS Running Azimuth of Recording deg anti 040 THETA deg 008 ucs 042 X Nm 008 DCS 042 Y Nm Duplicate Messages 008 El dos TASP Sumber et E 050 Mode 2 L O50 Mode 2 Code Source Made 009 AR 055 Mode 1 V Destination Made 009 ER 055 Mode 1 G 009 FR 055 Mode 1 L Network Delay 009 MR 055 Mode 1 Code Delta Range Nm ciis 065 Mode 1 Confidence Delta Azimuth deg 009 ID a ase d x lode Delta Altitude ft si Bua 070 Mode 2 L O70 Mode 3 4 Code Delta Speed Nm h 009 HG 080 Mode 3 4 Confidence Delta Heading deg SEGLA 090 Flight Level V light Level ASTERI
363. of S address or target ID and Run nr Use the X scale menu to select one A seale 5 address 5 address Target ID 5 address Run nr Target ID Run nr In case S address or S address Run nr is selected you can modify the X scale format into hex representation by using the graph s pallet t Format gt Decimal Mapping Mode gt Engineering Tabular resu P Binary Comms f fe Octa z2 v Hexadecimal Relative Time Absolute Time 1 Result Viewer vi E GICB exchngs 2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 GICB err CC emds CC exchngs x 1600 CC err 1400 1200 Cursor CD exchngs 1000 4r CD err 800 ModB compl p vd 600 CD cmds 400 200 0 I ol j AF m EERE Z Tabular resutt Pop error quem STO quee Jerone rex ue rene pese zs A ocesme Je Je __ 90s 00 s69 000 0 000 se9 00ro 000 sesooiseeaa eesodoo E fe sooo ssoo rne ssoo 11e ecco sooo acon CERNI B f e000 sooo 0 000 scoo o000 soo sooo sooo frzso E sso00 e625 nssr sezs loss sooo sooo sooo je pr noo rers foss ism jos sooo ooo roo ebe vy Y ky oy d Z s giolololololiolo m e ej ejojojols 8 3 2 3 3 2 8 9 3 i 3 amp 3 5 zs 3 35 pa o 7 vi 4 The general results of the Model B compliance are shown in the ta
364. oints in an X window of 2 wide is shown on the Y axis On dynamic layer see later Layer settings Dynamic Connect Mathematics on cw mode sis NoMath Window Max a Start Scan Plot Be Step size Low limi Shared Axis C Mean PU Refresh ens Type Delta Up limit Ed t a Filter And TRO Sean And TED Sean On top of the previous settings some additional setting become available Dynamic made Start Scan Scan history Step size Refresh rate Start Scan start position of this dynamical layer Scan history number of plot visible during the dynamic run Step size step size between two consecutive plots during the dynamic run Refresh rate Update rate of the display during the dynamic run Click the button to activate the settings or the cancel button to ignore the settings Preferences can be saved using the button and loaded using the RUM4 ChIX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 E EE 5 Volume 4 ee Ee ee ee OE ital alixdaeyiias oss RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 63 button 6 Other display types can be selected using the display type selector in the upper right corner of the graph display or by clicking the P button see bullet3 7 Zooming and panning in the display can be done using the graph palette M l y 7 l 38 x Wes auto scale X axis it 34 auto scale Y axis TE X axis settings EE Y axis settings E Zoom tool Mh Pan tool Et Select cursor
365. olds data from that line Scanning for lines starts at the beginning of a file or at offset for a RDR removable disk Line zelection HE T2L Ts jap isle et te oj Line selection E I2 sp aL 15L 161 271 9 i E lie maok Gladventtes _Youme4 S RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder 11 25 4 5 3 Conversion of Data Recorder Data for RASS S Analysis RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 1 Select conversion source There are 3 possibilities file DCP and RDR i File DCP FDR 1 1 If file or DCP is chosen you need to specify the full path name which describes the location of the file which you want to convert You can either type in the path name or use the button to select a file A File dialog will appear RDF Functions Source Herwijnen 1 Herw SVE File Data 370814 raw A DCF L RDR m 1 2 If RDR is chosen the source parameters i e the offset and the length have to be defined Source Fil 20000 Offset kB C3 DCF 37857 Length KE i ROR When the Save lg button is clicked a Raw file on disk will be created which contains the data from the RDR removable disk offset and length specify the position and size of the recording which you want to copy to file A file dialog will appear requesting you to enter an appropriate filename 2 Destination of the data There are 3 possibilities RASS DCP and None RASS is th
366. olutions DDB RESULTS CAT 17 SAMPLE2 56099 Messages in file 56029 Messages loaded cat 17 samplez 517 The data to be displayed can be reduced by limiting the number of revolutions loaded into the S File Viewer Uncheck the Entire file checkbox and define a begin and end scan to be displayed Use the button to step backward and the button to step forward through the file S File infa o Rev start Rew C Entire file HDirk C AMP amp IGN 54 PS5 TEST IMG 288 Revolutions 56099 Messages in file 481 Messages loaded DDB RESULTS CAT 17 SAMPLE2 cat 17 zamplez 517 A second way to reduce the amount of data to be loaded is by filtering the data Click the button to define a parametric filter The following window allows the user to define a parametric filter according to the selected S File type 517 518 and 548 S1r 5earchEditor vi Datalink Filter i O00 Message Type is equal to Metwark Information 2 Ur CJ Except 5 Once the data is loaded and displayed use the cross cursor to querry on any point in the scatter diagram The corresponding information is displayed in the approriate RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 ihiiaselt cleckonies ame 3 RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export indicators Azimuth of Recording deg VIILIT 155 360 0 E ae a p 340 0 320 02
367. on passe w Current Kb T ERA error Macintosh AV C AMF A amp IGN 24 Display ACCEPT ANCE V440 RESULTS udpz S4RD oO ES Progress Line selection L1 Format 1 ASTERIKS E stats es Batch Frocess i Jii e J JL Jm Ju Running a conversion can be a time consuming proces s Therefore if you want tot run several conversions in a row you may wish to put them in a batch process Copy the single conversion selected by the green rectangle in the Batch List to the controls in the EDR functions section Add a single conversion at the position of the green rectangle to the Batch list Remove a single conversion at the position of the green rectangle from the Batch list Save the Batch list to disk for later use or reference Load a Batch list from disk gt Run the batch this will successively starts the specified conversion Abort a running batch procedure UL View Preferences Settings To build a batch list fill in the EDR convert parameters as for a sigle convert process Make sure all needed parameters are accounted for Including the Preferences settings like Format SIC SAC Then click the button to add the single conversion to the batch conversion list To change a conversion from the batch list select it with the green rectangle and copy it up to the single conversion display using the LJ button Change the parameteres and add the new parameteres again to the batch list by click
368. on and Kb to process in the corresponding controls in Kb Click the Save button or the Return button to return to the Bit Recording tool to select a destination file using a file dialog Store the data in the RASS S Campaigns Campaign_name DATA RAWDATA folder zs hisses ellipsis oume S RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder IL19 File Dialog eschreve x Please specify the filename far the raw datarecording image file View All E1998 The copying may take a while The progress can be monitored in the progress bar or the HD position indicator After copying the window will close automatically 9 Click the Stop button to stop the Bit Recording tool If the RDR is recording at the time it will continue until the end of the disk is reached or endless when the wrap around box was checked The timed recording function will not work any more The workstation can be removed from the RDR set up and be used elsewhere without interrupting the recording 4 5 Convert Radar Data 4 5 1 Introduction The Radar Data Recorder RDR is connected to one or more serial lines and the data on these serial lines can be recorded regardless of the protocol The purpose of the RDR is to time stamp and store all bits of data in blocks on the hard disk In order to convert the data the user will have to enter a minimum of information about the setup and protocols used
369. oo a jp freos n 230 pem hre 5 e rota jni z413 ise fizo pep mses ho fo z fie fasse paaror aoas jo _ 8 s roos jiozz 29 jnz54 59 3 hs fanz 102849 n9zn fais 1o fie 200s n 44 45 oi 04 18 270 a1 fie fz z4 no42 44 oisi 270 a2 fie sooo 2 31 56 feo n jo az fiz eose o5 fonar fesi jo aa fir 7T o2z foor jo jo ho as fiz Mon iozasi foo n jo ho ae fiz fer 0241 foo jo jo ho ar fir ferr jios za forse fo fo pz js s te dum quee ee de k H CH o pa bop Hr r3 an B on 1 Dj Eu tH a H H o ee el r2 hl cn Ba on 1 A m a H 0 on ea am a BJ an Aircraft ID number attributed by the program Track number A code Time the track was initiated Time the track existed FL the track was initiated scans the track existed plots counted in specific track missed plots in this track SRR only plots in this track PSR only plots in this track COMBined plots in this track Pd for the SSR Pd for the PSR Pd for valid A code Pd for valid C code The RASS S tools do not contain a software tracker or Object correlator so beware when interpreting these Pd values They depend on the output of the tracker RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 FE a e ee rn eee TT i 4a l n li met stil __Yolume 4 _ RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 30 2 Sorted in boxes according to postion range azimuth alt
370. ool from the Rass Toolbox Data Link Analyser vi a 2 e E LINKED D AT A Folder TED data Farameters View Datalink Resul 7 A h PlayStation Alain C AMF AIGN S4 i Max Comm duration s a scans PTE PZEZ TESTIMG LIMEED D AT A legs Cammie uretim Ea lesel RADIAL 36 SCEN1 T amp x scan Max CommC duration 4 0 scans Exchange zz4 Max Commb dur at ion 5 0 scans Max amp code Change dur 3 0 scans Comm C Closeout required v Data Link Failure Pd GCE pns Periodicity Inventory A A Fd Comm B Statistics 740 BDS 4 1 sean Tabular Fd Comm C D reTx ZD Pd 750 BS T scan z Time Merger amp Linker PZEZ xn BRS fi scan leds E compliance Pd amp Accuracy Calculation Progress i i Datalink EL a P3 i 2 2 70 BDS 1 Pd of Comm B Analysis PZB ecu ats tenn n B Eon View data or reprocess data Data Import Export Max acquisition scans GICE zn scans Interragation Reply Viewer SFile Viewer Mode B logic Data Display for Datalink PZEZ Warning Filter included error 1 if evnt exchngs 2 Cluster Stability Analyser Hin of Succesfull GICEz run z 20 0 Time Merger amp Linker PS Data Display for Cluster PS Activity Delay E ee ll oe d 2 Run the tool by using the button in the upper left corner of the window The user interface of the tool is divided into several functional panels At the top of the window there is a row of buttons to operate the tool
371. ooo mes p s eem fi lune ooo mess h 2 etj Ress poe ooo Hess s ere com o fo o ao o0 21 eF tF or oe 00 FF 4G 64 F9 Sc 00 oz se 01 90 6096 feo no os ro 75 oF F700 ve cc co 44 10 41 Fc 00 02 05 00 00 MEN 0d oo av r001 01 00 00 00 x M 0 00 07 70 01 01 00 00 DO o a p s 3g es E ssoen t1 51 jMetav com jo 2 o 300031 BF tFO O4 DO FF 40 18 FE 85 40 02 12 01 90 60 DA Lo pb b fer 0 FE 13 F2 23 00 OE 05 AO 44 1041 FC oo 00 03 00 OO L1 1 LET Beeeer 1691 01 06 0906 sess p s je Jo seras h 1 ete em Jo zo 22 000800 60 FF 02 36 szo T a ok RR Resp 5 5336 45 t 51 jMetav com jo fo 300031 BF iF O1 O4 OO FF 40 1p FE 93 D802 1401 906009 Pt ee OOo FE FB F2 BF 00 00 93 be 44 1041 FC 00 00 12 00 00 TTF 7 70 01 01 06 0906 4 do 1 J x x s Rx S Tx EE EE EE 6 Rx E NES EE 8 Rx a m MEN NN DEM N do Rx Hio Tx tH 4 x 3 RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 hae cadvenies Volume IV RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 4 The top row buttons operate the window Toggle Help window On Off Save list to disk RASS S file Load list from disk RASS S file Import list from spreadsheet Export list to spreadsheet Cut item from list Copy item from list paste item in list Empty list Undo last delete Select all Print list Close list window and return to the Protocol Viewer
372. or the run if the number of extracted GICB started and completed in 1 beam during the run times the number of targets in the peak s and in the background times the number of scans of the run is above or equal to the user defined percentage default 100 Because the targets are not moving there is always exactly one rendezvous beam target per scan The PTE P2B2 tool declares a Comm C successful if started reservation and completed close out in less than a user defined number of beams N3 1 20 1 completed reservation to close out in less than the maximum duration N3 1 20 1 in scan numbers default 1 specified by the user The PTE P2B2 tool declares a Comm D successful if completed reservation to close out in less than the maximum duration N4 1 20 1 in scan numbers default 1 specified by the user started announced and completed close out in less than a user defined number of beam dwells N4 1 20 1 1 The data link Model B compliance result can be viewed by clicking the Model B compliance Model B compliance button Following window will appear a Huse Gaines oume S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 47 1 Result Viewer vi B type Model B compliancy ZTarget v GICB exchngs 60 a GICB err 50 CC emds Eaz CC exchngs ar CC err zn CD cmds f vd CD
373. ording for Node Info 1 ORLY P5 TEST NNCOP T C3 PS TEST NNCOP N2 T4 EDR Recording Folder Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 P5 TESTING AV DATA FAW ROR PS TEST MMCDP TEST NMCDP TS M1 14 21 28 TEST NNCOP T5 NI VES Next select the proper lines for the EDR recording Separately in S17 and 548 The lines which have been recorded have a green color non used lines have black color Line selection catz4 45 start L I1E I2L sE 4 ESL e Line selection cati T scans EJ Es Ods Ae Typically we want to use the complete recording If you want a limited the conversion to a number of scans you can modify the start and scans parameters such that only a section is converted An other method to limit the LINKED data would be to use the S48 filter This method first creates all the 548 asterix cat 48 data and then filters out all the non required data before linking and merging Click the filter button to evoke the S48 filter ECS 485earchEditor vi 548 Filter Time of Recording is greater than 17 30 00 000 nd Time of Recording is less than 19 00 00 0005 And 220 Aircraft Address is greater than or equal to 380000 And 220 Aircraft Address is less than acoo00 Linked Data ZTRDJ Folder Macintosh AY CAMP AlGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE V4e42 Value sco a Clear One i Clear All ii a M M M f Load Cancel f OK A LINKED D AT 4 LIFE RE FILIIM The example above all
374. ormance is calculated Accuracy figures are calculated a biegen Gladvonties VolumelV S z RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VIA Trajectory Scenario Generation 2 Stream to RES XXXX Scenario S4TJ S4 datafile Histogram GEO Time stamped S4 Result 9 Scenario scenario S4 datafile file XXXX XXXX C m Time 9 Pd amp ACC Asterix S4 Merger Result file Asterix 8 Dra 4 E S4 datafile SARA 7 V Mode S SSR Export files XXXX txt B E K Asterix et Fig 1 Steps for Closed loop recording z Z iniaset deon me RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VLS RASS Histogram vi E Asterix cat48 file Inventory Inventory vi 4 XN A ts IEEE Do Ln S4 a M Q Relative 0288 STD I Cumulative 0 305 RMS amm 0600 Max Bin size 0 400 Min lqad layer1 aes eee 2 Bins 212 00 Hits
375. ouncement of the Code Change FS change and the actual change of the code in the Asterix Cat 48 data stream In case the delay is superseded an ACode Change failure is declared Remark These delays are expressed as Scan numbers in order to comply with the POEMS requirements In fact the delay is recalculated towards time using the calculated rotation speed of the radar Comm C Closeout required This flag is used to determine the data link state of the Comm C after a technical acknowledge reply In case the flag is checked default the state remains intermediate until a closeout is encountered In case the flag is not checked the technical acknowledge closes the transaction for the data link analysis This has an influence on the calculated fields related to the Comm C The PTE P2B2 data link performance analysis calculates from the ASTERIX Cat 048 message individually for each target the probability of successful Comm B delivery through Cat 048 This probability is defined as the ratio of the number of ASTERIX Cat 048 messages containing the user selected BDS in the Mode S MB data data item of Cat 048 compared to number of beam dwells during which the MB field was requested This number shall be calculated as follows tend tstart TGICB Tend is the time of the last TRD of that target and tgtgyt is the minimum of the time of the first TRD of that target containing an interrogation requesting that BDS and the time of the fir
376. ounter name type Interval Click the button to define the contents of the counter or doubleclick the name of another counter in the counter description list RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 3 14 11 02 nist deckonies Youme RASS S User Manual E MER X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 48 Counter Description List Test counter The window will appear m searchEditor TRI Data Displav Filter C5 Bnd This is in fact the same window as the filter definition window in the Data Display tool For more information about theis window please consult the user manual on this topic Use this wndow to define a specific counting function and click the OK button to add this new counting function to the new mr type r Counter Description List Counter name type Interval Counter Contents CALC Linked S48 Test counter In nfessmewscmullivieccuntemencbenddediom same way multiple counters can be added to a single type of Analysis Each counter is represented by a line in the graphical display or by a line in the tabular display of the main window Use the button to cut a counter from the counter definition list use the button to copy a counter from the counter definition list or use the button to paste a counter into the counter definition list Once the analysis definition is finished use the button to save the analysis in the CAMPAIGN GENRAL TEMPLATES directory
377. ows from POEMS to ATC If one of the POEMSes requires assistance using the SCF or another transaction if evoked on Cat 17 level this is shown as black or red arrows between POEMS A and POEMS B If the dataset contains more than two Nodes the user can select POEMS A and POEMS B from a menu Mode Selection Just like for the Data Display tool by clicking the button select query cursor and X button centre query cursor the query cursor can be dragged to a specific arrow and the corresponding target information will be displayed in the target info panel and the Data Display Info Window will switch automatically to the corresponding tab see Data Display tool for more information about the Data Display Info Window Normally the link between Data Display and Status display is master slave This means that the Data Display cursor determines what is shown in the Status display This relation can be inverted by locking the cursor of the status display iss e eF Ms eyi am x Mode Selection POEMS A E Dusseldorf POEMS B Ea F Gatwick pae This locking automatically causes the Node Selection lock to Unlock In this situation the cursor in the status display determines the position in the data display If you switch between POEMS A and POEMS B of the status display the layers in the P5 Data Display automatically follow mask dedne t zi RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4
378. ows you to select a limited set only Aircraft with S addresses attributed to France and limited in time but in theory any filter build on the contenst of cat 48 can be used Use the menus to define the filter Use the Load and Save buttons to save or recall the filter templates data to and from disk Use Clear or Clear All to clear lines in the filter definitions Click OK to accept the filter The fact that a filter is used is shown by a small icon in the Linked Data TRD folder indicator 6 Next select the interrogation recording folder for the first Node SelectFolder vi Please select the folder containing the interrogation recording for Node 1 ORLY RESULTS T Interrogation Recording Folder CAT17 RECI C3 DUPLICATE S ADDRESS T1 o C3 INTS NNCOP SCEN T5 C MAPMISMATCH RETEST ul INTS NNCOP SCEN T5 demens 10 01 2002 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 a naxs dackoniesYoume RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X20 7 Next select the output files and actions to be created By default 517 548 file creation IRD File creation RC only Map creation TRD Linking and Analysis of TRD is selected The IRD file is the interrogation and Reply data the 548 is the asterix surveillance data and the 517 are the asterix SCF commands The TRD selection automatically calls the Linker when the time merger has f
379. peed of Light 2007502458 00 mis RFA J REX 3 RMU 3 Configuration Level 3 PTE EX RFTS RTE 9 RES 3 RGIRTL 9 B N Cancel 4 OK 3 If not first make sure that the device is listed in the device manager before attempting to continue 4 2 Recording the Data Serial Recorder 1 Load the UDR Serial Recording tool from the RASS S toolbox EDR Ds a i ET Mya ae pe sok Pe Turm RE Pree a R3 Zaide cuam om Petree ma marin ral Parn dnm Fi Hm de bod sajim The following window will appear on the screen zhint rell Ln eani _Voume 4 RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 Za RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 7 r LITT Een udine EF PRO E 1 The user interface of the UDR Serial Recording tool is divided into several functional blocks At the top there is a row of buttons to operate the tool Toggle Help window on off Start the recording Ll Stop the recording Show the preferences window Save the data to file v Stop the EDR Serial Recording tool Some of these buttons can be disabled according to circumstances At the bottom there is a Connection panel which indicates the integrity of the recording for each of the channels and for the GPS information Connection GPS c At the left hand side there is a Recording panel to monitor the proper functioning of the EDR
380. play for Cluster PS Pd amp Accuracy Calculation Datalink Analyser PZEZ i 6 1 Using the Data Display tool RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 1 Load the Data Display tool from the RASS S toolbox Inventory Statistics Tabular Pd 3D Pd Time Merger amp Linker P2B2 Pd amp Accuracy Calculation DataLink Analyser P2B2 Pd of Comm B Analysis P2B Data Import Export Interrogation Reply Viewer SFile Viewer Data Display for Datalink P2B2 Cluster Stability Analyser Time Merger amp Linker P5 Data Display for Cluster PS The following window will appear on the screen zu Huse uns oume S RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 53 o Data Display vi E a FCF vex m 4 TRD Slant Y Nm TRDSlantY Nm f TRD Slant X Nm v F 0 Legend BackGr Map Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Layer 7 Layer 8 Layer 9 Layer 10 MD Flag Manual Designation r Target Info lt 3 1 E 0 C BackGround TRD Slant X Nm m I J ap i mj wg L No Math Gg J C no Math fg J In the Data Display tool user interface we can distinguish several functional blocks First there is the top row buttons to operate the tool Some of these buttons can be greyed out at startup of the tool Toggle Help window On Off
381. played at the right hand side of the histogram window Statistics Statistics non zero oO 034 423 8590 24 252 52242 Mean 27 554 59 152 135 436 Population 2205 Count 2 451 Population non zero 2205 Count Use the graph palette to zoom and pan in the data centre and select the cursor 200 453 1 341 RUM4 Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 ihitaselt cleckonies ame 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 22 EEEE EHE Use the legend palette to change the appearance of the histogram Point Style Line Style Line Width Bar Plots Fill Baseline ENHENENNENENENEEENSEEHEEESSENEEEEEEEErE terpulation FCCC Lc eee Color SSeS CU BNEEHEENHENENHENENHESSENES O BS o 0 BEENHEEEEEEEENENESSEEESO HO 5 7 BEEHEENHENEEENEHESSESESS B TEBEEZ LILIEIEIEIEIEIEIEJEIEIEJEIEIEJE EIEREIEIEIETEIEA Foreground Background More All for both Other keys toggle The cursor display shows the value the upper and lower boundary of the selected histogram bin A bin can be selected by dragging the cross cursor to it The cursor will automatically be placed in the center of the bin and the cursor display will be updated at the same time Cursor 0 00 Hits 250 000 Low 223 000 High The histogram can be printed by clicking the print button The RASS S reporting function is enabled which allows you to store or print the histogram Information about the his
382. proximately the same as the scenario folder which resides on the other RES computer When the same scenario is run several times a suffix number or timestamp can be added to the folder name e g RESOLUTION SLOW TAKE2 The save function of the EDR control not only creates a raw EDR recording containing the asterix data ACP ARP messages and PPS time stamping but also creates an index file x inx an UTC time stamp file and an ARP ACP versus timestamp file These later allow other tools to link each recorded scan or North zi RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 Z iniaset deon me RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 14 pulse with an absolute timestamp This procedure requires you to save or copy all EDR data after the recording The data can not be kept on the removable hard disk for later use as with standard non time stamped EDR recordings 5 3 Time merging As we discussed above the initial scenario is not absolutely time stamped but only relatively time stamped The Time Merger tool will merge the ARP ACP UTC timestamp information file with the original S4TJ scenario file and will optionally also generate the S4RD file from the recorded raw edr data The scenario time merged file will be named x S4SC where x stands for the scenario name The file will be put into a RESULT folder in the campaign It is now the moment to decide how to merge the different files o
383. puter using a USB single USB cable Since it is powered by the USB bus no extra connections to the PC are required Following types of UDRs are available UDR600 HDLC Passive recording of HDLC based protocols UDR600 SYNC13 Passive recording of most bit protocols implemented on US radars CD1 CD2 ASR9 etc UDR600 LINK1 Passive recording of LINK1 The device allows to perform a serial recording to a file on the disk of the host computer Unlike the EDR it has no internal harddisk to store the data This recording on file can then be converted into a suitable data format for further evaluation this can be the RASS C compatible DCP MUX format a time code enhanced DCP MUX format or the RASS S data format Furthermore since the full communication protocol is recorded together with the radar data an analysis of the line quality and communication protocol syntax is possible 2 0 USB Data Recorder UDR 600 Hardware Requirements The recording equipment includes the following hardware p eS NIMM 1 USB cable A to B 5 meter to connect the UDR with the host computer 1 Cable DB15 High density to 5 BNC to connect ACP ARP 2 Cables DB15 to RJ45 2 5 meter 2 adapters RJ45 to DB25 female unconnected to connect to the serial data channels Ch1 and Ch2 RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 E m f SS inr lu E TEME rll T hh mil Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Com
384. r SelectFolder vi Please select a Result folder Result Folder Playstation Alain C AMF amp IGBM 24 TREO CAMP AGN RESULTS RES SLOW TAKE 5 res slow take 3 545 Scan Each selection shows you the number of scans present in the recording or scenario A recording can be shorter than a scenario This results in a non UTC time corrected section of the scenario data The timestamping in that section remains correct but does not have the high 1s accuracy of the UTC section The UTC time and UTC day indicators on the merger show the current UTC time for the processed data If the indiocator turns red this means no more valid UTC time was found in the EDR recording for that scan number of the scenario RES SLOW TAKE 5 3 Output Selection Now select the proper output files for the Time merger Typically the Pd and Accuracy tool only needs the S4SC and S4RD files Output S4sc AM sievs4e S4RD ial fais P ARD TRE For more explanation on the IRD and 518 548 files we refer to the PTE P2B2 part of the manual 4 Specify the conversion parameters Now select the proper parameters for EDR conversion into the S4RD file This only works for ASTERIX and RDIF type of data Click the preferences button to open the conversion preferences The following window will appear zi RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 rask dedos e RASS S User Manual Chapter VI
385. r 3 and clock is taken from pin 15 or 17 1 Gnd 14 NC 2 Data In DTE 15 Clock in DTE 3 Data In DCE 16 NC 4 NC 17 Clock in DCE 5 NC 18 NC 6 NC 19 NC 7 Gnd 20 NC 8 NC 21 NC 9 NC 10 NC 11 NC 12 NC 22 NC 23 NC 24 NC 25 NC RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 13 NC Any input channel receives its data from pin 2 or 3 Rxd or Txd and its clock from pin 15 or 17 RxC or TxC on the db25 connector The selection between the two depends on the setting of the switches on the connection box front panel If data or clock does not show on either of these pins use a breakout box for rewiring the connection and pass on this connection to Intersoft Electronics We will supply you with a suitable transition cable for lie ince Gladventteas Youme4 S RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder II 4 this station It is important to know that the data recorder has six input channels from which two are dedicated to a Serial Communication Controller SCC for asynchronous or network communications The other four channels are directly connected to the input of a Digital Signal Processor DSP which will handle all synchronous data manipulation and recording Channel 1 and 3 are the SCC channels and Channel 2 4 5 and 6 are the DSP channels So any synchronous data lines should be connected to one of these 4 lines Channels 1 through 4 are also fed to the front panel of the data recorder for network
386. r ASTERIX Parameters Data Source Identifier SIC a 24 SAC X s 1001 4042 quantisation factor Nm iniacatt dadose S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 15 6 Next select the output files to be created By default in SCENARIO mode the 545C 518 548 IRD RC only TRD and Analyse TRD is selected The S4SC file is the time merged scenario file the IRD file is the interrogation and Reply data the 548 is the asterix surveillance data and the 518 are the asterix data link commands The TRD selection automatically calls the Linker see hereafter when the time merger has finished The Analyse TRD selection automatically calls the Data Analyser Output Sd4sc WA 518 548 W S4RD 7 Analyse ff TRD IRD RA RCony fe TRO fe 7 Next Select the Link and Analyse parameters and set them correctly This can be done by clicking the parameters button and selecting the Link Analse TAB View EDR Preferences vi r Link Parameters ii Time window 1000 00 Hi SPEI so Time error compensation M S d 156 x Comm C Closeout required M dud us bal Time between Runs s 18 link logic Logici Dwn to prev Up to next DataLink Analysis Parameters Max duration o Eo Pd GICB BDS Periodicity zl x30 BDS fi scan CommB o H i l Comme 4 x40
387. r and the RDR status The RDR status indicator can have 4 different values Radar Data Recorder OK ready to start recording Radar Data Recorder NOT FOUND check if RDR is turned on check SCSI No disk Inserted insert a pack Disk is write protected unlock the pack 4 Specify the position on the disk where the data may be written in 1 Kb steps Default entry for this parameter is 0 meaning at the beginning of the disk HD Start Position kb With the Convert Radar Data tool called from the RASS S toolbox a disk can be scanned for its data contents This tool will show the contents of a disk and will allow you to see where additional free space is left See 4 5 The disks used for this logging are raw unpartitioned disks They do not contain a valid Macintosh or MS DOS partition and can not be used to store other information than serial recordings 5 When the Wrap around box is checked the recording will be endless meaning that at the end of the disk the recording restarts at the start position Use this option for legal recordings If the box is not set the recording stops automatically at the end of the disk HD wrap around On Off 6 The recording can now be started by clicking the record button The recording can also be programmed in time by checking the Timed recording check box Timed recording On Off A timer setting window will appear Enter start and end time and date for the recording as
388. r and the next block the condition is enabled In the same way select a condition from the list is equal to is not equal to is greater than is greater than or equal ta is less than is less than or equal to contains The chosen item is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the value is enabled Type in the desired value and hit the return key value 02 00 00 The chosen value is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the logical connection is enabled Select a logical operator from the list And Dr i Except The chosen value is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block This process is repeated until the filter setting is complete A filter setting can saved to disk with the Save button or recalled from disk by clicking the zs uites b llis ome zi RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 9 button Clicking the button will clear the selected line from the filter setting clicking the button will clear the complete filter setting The button will close the window and ignore all changes Click the button to use the filter The combination of the history length plotting and the filter search editor function lets you zoom in in detail on a specific part of the recording 2 5 Displaying amp Analysis of Serial recorded Data The format of the data shown in the Rx and Tx w
389. r crossing message 828 Sector Number Nr 184 638 Time of Day Time 09 01 35 0859 6 5 Stats Check this box to open a window which shows all kinds of statistical values during the conversion process This is only applicable for EDR recordings at this time 7 Start Stop Selection When ACP ARP signals were connected during the recording the Start Scan and End Scan control will automatically be filled with their respective values Start scan End scan Since no a ACP ARP signals are available during the LAN recording the controls will automatically be filled with respective 0 and 99999 These values can be changed at any time before converting the recorded data 4 3 Conversion of UDP or TCP IP Recorder Data for RASS S Analysis 1 Select conversion source There are 3 possibilities Recording file IOSS and EDR Select Recording y Recording lass EDF Specify the full path name which describes the location of the file which you want to convert Use the Select Folder button to select an EDR folder containing the UDP IP recording data A Folder dialog will appear 2 Destination of the data There are 3 possibilities RASS DCP and None RASS is the format used in all RASS S analysis tools IOSS is a format used for the input of a SASS C analysis Destination HS wf RA Inss Mane RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 Volume 4 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Netwo
390. r data link analysis purposes consists of the recording of Radar Surveillance Data asterix cat 48 on X25 3 level Data link messages asterix cat 18 on Lap B or X25 3 level and Interrogations replies data The first two are recorded by means of an EDR and GPS unit 2 1 1 1 EDR Connections The complete setup for this purpose is described in Chapter IV of this volume The user needs to make the required connections for the X25 3 or Lap B link between the EDR and Radar plus make sure the EDR is connected to the GPS in the proper way The EDR can be used in passive or active recording mode One to Six Serial channels can be connected to the EDR input channels Use the supplied dB25 cables or build your own matching connector For details on the serial pins see Volume 4 Chapter IV Connect the EDR ACP and ARP input to the RIU ACP ARP output Preferable use the AFU in between Use a High Density dB15 extension cable Male to Male to perform this action An other possibility is to use a High Density dB15 to five BNC video cable In that case use the Red ARP and Green ACP cable 2 1 1 2 GPS Connections Connect the GPS according to the drawing made on the next page If for any reason you can not use the GPS make sure that the computers connected to the RUMA Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 3 05 10 01 lie intense Gladventies _Volume4 at RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 5 simulation RES and
391. r other format data This depends on the Comm Layer selector Comm Layer wf HER Ex analysis Ex analysis Msg Hr 11663 Size ll2 Status OK Msg Hr 11662 Size 112 Status Time 18 17 57 115458 Line 1 Level LAF B Time 18 17 57 115458 Line 1 Level Frame Unnumbered Response CRC User data AS Format OM 4c ja User data Hg Az HEX LAP B RUM4 Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 3 14 11 02 nak dadon e st RASS S User Manual Ex analysis Msg Hei 24958 Timaiiaii 257 145u058 T z Status Level Size Line Packet Data amp interrupt CRC aff 6 B Format DTE data PRR GFI bit Pusu LGH B 1 LEN User data 28 He C6 m2 SD Sc 62 3F AG AH BE BS Be da BE AA BE 18 228 81 BA FC 48 mg Be AF 45 FF F 12 34 65 B5 42 28 BA 46 6S Ba ma BB BB oe 10 Ba BE pa BB BB 17 FF 28 F X25 D bit H bit Le Chapter V Protocol Viewer Ok x29 zB off off 1 48 6A 43 AG QC ma ma H 8 mi aa Su BS 79 ub 55 eX Ex analysis Meg Hr 11663 Time 18 17 57 1154538 Ok ASTER IX Status Sireti 12 Level Line 1 t010 Data Source Identifier SIC Bas X SAC xB 148 Time of Day UTC Time 18 17 55 5547 B26 Target Report Descriptor Single Mode Roll Call b SIM eal RAB Fx 5 a 1 Ba a a B4m Measured Position in Slant Polar Coordinates RHO 185 15 Mm THETA 55 72 ATA Mode 3 A Code in Octal Representatio
392. r the graphs legends This improves the readability of the curves y scale BRCB Announcemen th i BRCB s cb L qud Brce S NC b CI BRCB 05 O 13 ER c Ca 10 d GICB S C h C GICB S NC 5 2 cice ok O 6 cice ck O gt M 4 Cursor 4 07 1 1 1 1 1 ical eimai 1 Ero ie Ss o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 30 100 110 120 E j AF rs ya X x scale S address v 6 The general results of the exchange data are shown in the tabular display under the graph z2 e 2sz ooole tee 15 312 16 875 19 299 52 000 0 000 2000 2 jie s2 o0 isse 5464 sere a060 12 000 0 000 1000 100 00 pucr ppm cw p m om E mw p s qe Jg p y wv y p p M f Pf e 242 0007562 e E zo000 os2s ez asss 2427 Jooo oo ro zosoonje soe zs 2ei sae ears iar oodo ooo sooo Er s feom foz fosos zooo foste anoo noco o0 This table shows Population Total number of sample points in the x scale e g nr of targets in the data set Population NZ The number of sample points with a non zero value Total The sum of all data points gt Y scales Mean The average value of all data points Total Population STD Standard deviation of all data points Mean NZ The average value of all non zero values Total NZ population NZ STD NZ The standard deviation of all non zero data points Max The maximum value in the data set Min The minimum value in the data set Min NZ The minimum Non Z
393. ram can be entered in the comment field This field will be printed together with the histogram Comment O Click the return a button to close the histogram function and return to the Data Display tool The background of the Data Display can be turned On Off by checking the box The background of the Data Display can be configured by clicking the _B kGround_ button This will open a background settings window This settings window allows the user to add grid lines range rings a coutour map of Europe cluser maps if available and station positions For all of these a specific color can be selected Depending of the type of the display some linds of background are not available and will not be drawn as iaa dadene Volume4 3 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X38 O BackGround vi B Type XY Grid Lines A Range Rings f Contour Map Relief Map 1 Surveillance Map F1 Data link Map v Lock out Map Lock out Map ff Station Position m Ra Az Cursor n Cluster Map Altitude ft State T 7 J Made Dr Ivy nl iv Merge Cluster Maps Type Cont Surf Ka 8 og v C None E catty none n cuss s None 12 When a layer is set to dynamic mode it can be manipulated by some of the top row buttons Notice that all the dynamic layers present in the Data Display tool are affected by these buttons Start dynamic layers ILL Pause dynamic
394. ram vi S BE Available nodes for Node 2 a Available nodes for Node 2 for r Settings 4 r Statistics A _ Absolute 6586 000 Total I Relative 1 778 Mean 7 Cumulative 0 543 STD Bin size 1 859 lower Inclusion 2 000 Max r Population m Statistics non zero 3704 Count 1 894 Mean m Population non zero 0 z08 STD 3477 Count 1 919 RMS Cursor 2 000 Max 6 13 Hits 1 000 Min 0 Value Comment IM 5 3 A Legend Li m m U 931 XJ Available nodes for Node 2 Beware The Bin size must be set to 1 for this to function correctly You can select the Node for which the histogram is calculated in the selection menu in the button bar Available nodes for Hode 7 2 i Available nodes for Mode E Available nodes for Node Available nodes for Mode Available nodes for Mode Available nodes for Mode Available nodes for Mode Close the window using the return J button 3 RUM4 Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 intial llantas elume RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 1 Chapter IX Data Link Analysis 1 0 Introduction This section of the PTE user manual relates to the analysis of data link activity on a Mode S station Typical parameters related to the delivery of data link packages to and from airborne equipment through the dedicated data lin
395. rce Identifier SAC BxbBe SIC 834 146 Time of Day UTC Time 14 585i82 11 72 G26 Target Report Descriptor n TYP bae T RAB Fx 1 B 1 B 1 B B B 846 Measured Position in Slant Polar Coordinates RHO 34 88 Nm THETA 144 57 Ba HMade 3 h Code in Octal Representation a G al L 1 Mode 3 A 1815 cea ee Code in Binary Representation CL HMRI RR B B HB Proc Time 6 006 Sec Range 158 47 Hm Azimuth 69 57 degrees Mode H 4547 V Mode C 32988 Vv Control de respuestas v B G a Hode C 1775 ft t 138 Radar Plot Characteristics Primary Subfield i AI FRL PRH RPD RPD FX EHHM EH1 Ert2 EH3 SF 1 B B8 B a8 B 1 1 i n A A A Humber of received replies for HISSA SRR 2 Amplitude of MSSR reply SAM 59 tdBm 226 Aircraft address 398880 246Aireraftt Identification FTEH1 3 t161 Track Number Hr 15 _ s Msg Mr 2 Size 68 Status Time 13 42 82 283888 Line 2 Level ODE DDE SSR CL HMRI RR a 19 Clicking the Export button activates a standard print table a list of the current display which contains the data displayed at that moment in the analysis tool PrintTables vi Filename al Level LAF B sa Wr Rx T Time ms Lie size tatus Fermarrame wo ert user Data Sidi o fe e p e rotavfomc oom p ue dex ee ph e ow Ree e 5 o e ass p 2 Jeeps ee p p jew
396. rding Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI 17 Step a process Stop the Covert Radar Data tool This button will close every window that was used by the radar data convertor tool 6 View options 6 1 Hex Check this box to enable a window which shows a hexadecimal display of the current conversion 6 2 PPI Check this box to open a window which shows a PPI Plan Position Indicator display of the current conversion See Chapter IV for details 6 3 Info Check this box to enable a display which shows additional information about the current conversion Infa Message 417 Rev 9 Date 24 02 2000 Current Eb Error o Message will show the number of messages counted Plot Track EMM etc messages Rev will show the current detected revolution counted North messages current Kb indicator shows the of Kb which have already been processed Time shows the absolute time of the recording Data error shows the number of errors counted 6 4 Format Check this box to open a window which shows the current hex data formatted into a readable string according to the data format a Hise usns oume at RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI 18 m View Data Format vi Cat882 Length 0011 818 Data Source Identifier SAC x 3 SIC 832 G86 Message Type 2 Secto
397. re shown in the tabular display under the graph zu Huse uns oume S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 43 E pa zea soe nare reo ezar ooorsrzso si 250 y y y p y ry b p E g 3E Ee E NEN NN up 7 If the user clicks the button the table is printed 8 If the user wishes to print the graph he has to click the 9 Use the tabular output to create a table from the graph data El 10 The data can also be passed to a histogram function by clicking the button 11 The cursor can be used to query on specific points in the graph 5 3 5 2 Probability of Successful Comm B Delivery Through Cat 048 Analysis on large datasets When using large datasets such as the Model B sets of 250 Runs it is prefarable to split the dataset in a sectors only set and a background set For analysing the background data following tool can be used 1 Load the tool from the toolbox A Analysis DO SSS Pd commB Analyser vi nventory Statistics gt m Tabular Pd 2 E oui RESULT DAT A Folder S48 data Parameters Info Pd GICE ces ac j EDS Per iadicity Time Merger amp Linker P2B2 Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN E4 eed 2750 Fd amp Accuracy Calculation TEST RESULTS x 4n EDS fi scan T T DataLink Analyser P2B2 MODEL B1 BACEBR ONLY targetz Fd of Comm B Analysis P26 madeI b1 backgr only S48 z x
398. recorded so far The data is recorded into a temporary file on the hard disk of the SASS S computer 4 The save button saves the recorded data to a user defined folder Click the Save button to initiate the copy tool The following windows will appear UDP IP result files vi Progress Building index file followed by electFoldervi Please specify the UDP IP recording destination 17 29 09 na 01 2002 This window allows the user to browse for a destination folder on the computer hard disk Once a destination is selected the tool will automatically generate the appropriate files The following window illustrates the progress of the saving process The copying may take a while The progress can be monitored in the progress bar After copying the window will close automatically RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 nask dadn Voume pI RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XL15 4 Converting and Viewing the data 4 1 Introduction The UDP IP recording tool records the Asterix or other protocol data in a specific file format namely the raw EDR format This format is the same as used when recording serial data U HDLC Lap B or X25 3 using the Extended Data Recorder The main objective of the convertor program is to convert the UDP stream data into a file format which can be read by the RASS 5 or RASS C analysis programs The EDR convert converts the ra
399. red Axis TRO Pe Type The connection mode can be chosen between none target and track Connect Mone a made None No interconnection Dots All dots are interconnected Target Multiple points belonging to one TRD record are interconnected Track All points belonging to a target are interconnected Some statistical functions can be applied on the data of the selected layer The selected statistical function is applied on the Y axis data over a sliding window over the X axis The sliding window is defined by an X window size and x step The following list of mathematical functions is available Y 5 Y 4 3 Mathematics OOOOOOC If for example Sum is chosen with a window size X of 2 then the Sum of all points in an X window of 2 wide is shown on the Y axis On dynamic layer see later Layer settings Dynamic __________ _ Connect r Mathematics 4 r Info On l l mode None P mode No Math window X o Start Scan Po i Plot Intersoft Electronics History x Min Lamerdries 27 Plot gt Step s ENS B 2250 Olen Refresh s Shared Axis BELGIUM TRO Type Tel 32 0 14 231811 r Labels On a mode 000000 Fax 32 0 14 221944 info intersoft electronics com http www intersoft electronics com On top of the previous settings some additional settings become avai
400. reports R to the number of total expected reports P PdS P Q P 100 including acquisition target reports PdS P R Q R P R 100 not including acquisition target reports 6 2 SSR Pd Calculation The SSR Pd is calculated using the following method 1 All SSR elements are filtered from the input Scenario file and the Asterix input file The criteria for this filter is S address 0 Two arrays are created Each array contains a cluster with the following data items ModeS A 132 S address or A code Link 132 Link index to other file 99999 if no link present yet Time Dbl UTC timestamp input record Flag1 Boolean True if Missed or False Range Dbl Range of input record Azimuth Dbl Azimuth of input record Velocity Dbl Velocity of input record Heading Dbl Heading of input record Index 132 Link index to own file Flag2 Boolean True if Acquire or Code error detected Range error Sgl Range error after linking Azimuth error 5gl Azimuth error after linking Time error Sel Time error after linking A code U16 A code of target report C code 1192 Altitude of target report Status U16 copy of upper 16 bits of S4 status fields bit 31 Valid A bit 30 Valid C bit 29 Valid 3D bit 28 Valid 1 bit 27 Valid 2 bit 26 Valid S bit 25 Garbled A bit 24 Garbled C bit 23 Garbled 3D bit 22 Garbled 1 bit 21 Garbled 2 bit 20 Garbled S RUM4 RASS S Info v
401. rial communication protocols are used EUROCONTROL selected LAP B X25 for this purpose The Radar Data Recorder RDR 339 can be used to support actively these two communication protocols To avoid misunderstandings the RDR 339 is called Extended Data Recorder from now on This equipment records active the serial radar data transmitted using the LAP B X25 protocol regardless of the data format to its hard disk in a raw format Every message is time stamped before it is stored on disk This recording can then be converted into a suitable data format for further evaluation this can be the RASS C compatible DCP MUX format a time code enhanced DCP MUX format or the RASS 5 data format Furthermore since the full communication protocol is recorded together with the radar data an analysis of the line quality and communication protocol syntax is possible 2 0 Extended Data Recorder RDR 339 Hardware Requirements The recording equipment includes the following hardware Extended Data Recorder RDR 339 Power supply cable Portable workstation with power supply SCSI connection cable Interface kit containing 6 DB25 connection cables 1 DB15HD to DB15HD RVI connection cable Custom made connection cables breakout boxes for custom adaptation of connectors Aluminium case EDR RDR 339 front panel view RUMA Ch IV Serial Communication v4 4 2 25 07 02 mask deadmonis Yume RASS S User Manual Chapter IV Serial Communication
402. rk recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XI 19 2 If RASS S or IOSS is chosen you need to specify the full path name which describes the location of the file which should hold the result of the selected conversion You can either type in the path name or use the button to select or create a file A file dialog will appear for you to enter the filename If RASS is Selected data will be saved in the S4RD format This data type is not a sequential data type as with other Radar data types but is record oriented It is dedicated toward the LabVIEW programming environment and is chosen for maximum performance in this environment If IOSS is chosen data will be saved in Mayer IOSS format The data type inside the Mayer IOSS format is the data as recorded on the recorder disk but stripped from synchronisation and filter characters 3 If None is chosen no file will be created use this option if you only want to view the data This can be useful for a checkup or to use the system as a PPI during radar testing The conversion parameters are automaticaly specified in case of a LAN recording No need to specify them 4 Line Stream selection For UDP IP recording you need to specify which stream or line number the two terms are used and mean the same you wish to convert For EDR serial recordings the tool requires a line selection Only ONE stream can be converted at the same time Select the stream using the Line selection menu
403. rner of the graph display Vertical A code f t C code f t E f elewvat R f t Az f t Track f t Track Hr f 5can Ar Define Custom PPI slant range versus azimuth polar view XY projected range versus azimuth Planar slant range versus azimuth X Y view Vertical Flight level versus range including earth curvature A code f t mode A code versus time C code f t mode C code versus time R f elevation range versus elevation R f t range versus time Az f t azimuth versus time Track f t track number versus time The last item is to define a custom display type The following program will appear upon selection of this item It allows to define a custom X axis and custom Y axis from a number of fields available in the 54 record structure Define XY Axis Inventory vi File Edit Operate Tools Browse Window Help if Cancel 7 Select an X and an Y axis The selected data is displayed in the graph and the custom display type name is automatically updated Define XY Axis Inventory vi File Edit Operate Tools Browse Window Help mH T EA cancel 3 RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 L E rn i i naui e _ Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 13 The following buttons are available Eg Load Allows to load a set of earlier defined custom axis display types Save Allows to save a custom defined custom axis display graph type
404. rom the pop up menu ee es TEE ooo Zoom The mouse pointer now changes to a zoom tool which can be used for zoom functions in the scope graph Position the tool on the graph and click While holding the mouse drag the mouse to the side and release the button The graph will zoom in automatically Try out the other zoom functions in the pallet if you have never used it Use the clear P button on the graph palette to empty the display Use the cursor display to examine the timing of the signals in detail Emma o The scope graph will show a portion of data which contains 2500 events Every time the slider is moved a new portion is read and displayed The time scale will increment automatically Make sure that the data line quality is ok Check for spikes on clock and data lines bouncing irregular periods in clock or data signals data changes unsynchronised to the clock etc 8 After this try to decode the data using the data decode function To do this first select a channel V Channel Z Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 6 Next select a format Select between Eurocontrol Asterix Aircat 500 RDIF CD etc Eurocontrol AIRC ATSOQD V Asterix Ericsson SRT Ericsson 700 BHIL TOSHIBA Now press the play gt button An alphanumeric display will show the decoded Hex data The event data is read in blocks of 25000 events so data may differ in length Each time a valid data block is found it is d
405. rom the TRD data structure as defined in P2B2 The TRD data structure consists of all target reports and the links to the corresponding interrogations Each TRD record contains one Mode 5 target report and all the links to the roll call interrogations corresponding to that target in that beam dwell scan The P2B2 software allows parametric filtering and display of all the parameters defined The re interrogation rate analysis will add a number of fields to this data structure These fields can be used in the parametric filter and display 5 3 8 4 Assumptions The tool will be used in the context of CEVAP evaluation Because the evaluation is restricted to Elementary and Enhanced Surveillance a very complex tool can be avoided by making a number of assumptions e The calculation is only based on surveillance interrogations UF4 UF5 including GICB extractions e The TRD records that contain links to AICB broadcast Comm B Comm A Comm C and Comm D interrogations are flagged so they can be excluded from the automatic a Hise uus oume st RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 51 overall calculations and be investigated separately The exclusion of these data link transactions will not have a large impact on the CEVAP evaluations and when they appear they will be known 5 3 8 5 Results In the method described for each individual target report the following fi
406. rotocols or configurations it might be required to modify the tools to accomodate these different requirements The recordings are performed using the build in ethernet port of the computer running the tool The software tool described in this document was specifically designed for the AENA supplied specifications and as thus can record the AENA dedicated DDE format as well as Asterix The TCP IP tool was specifically developed for EADS and records all types of TCP IP oriented Asterix and EADS dedicated data formats RR SIP PEX RR PEX ST The recording can then be converted into a suitable data format for further evaluation this can be the RASS C compatible Mayer IOSS format or the RASS S4 data format Furthermore since the full communication protocol is recorded together with the radar data an analysis of the line quality and communication protocol syntax is possible 2 0 Network Data Recording Hardware Requirements The recording equipment includes the following hardware One Computer having an ethernet port min 10 Mbit ethernet optionally a Hub to connect to the Radar local network The recommended computer platform for running RASS Se including Network recording would be a macintosh G3 or G4 power book min 192 Mb RAM 300 Mhz clock or a PC with PII min 128 Mb RAM 500 Mhz as iens usns Veume4 S RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP
407. s Server Options Clock has not been synchronized p Menu Bar Clock amp on Off a m Format Before noon After noon Separator Formats selection from the data and Time control panel 4 6 Overview of Connections RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 zi Clock Options inas ddmi A RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VILO RJ45 phem si Passive ANTENNA INPUT RJ45 m Ethernet m X Hub RECEIVER m 12V OWER ine Ethernet for Yellow VI FERNS Black CIk ae Red Vr ace eer A RJ45 5 or 4 50m me cable Serial port dB25m L SS 2xdB15HDm O z a dB15HDm 20 to 370 VDC Heer cy Ro i s CI dB15HDm dB15HDm For RVR connections see Vol 5 Chapter III dB9 or dB37 ES E intieselt cdadvonies_ Volume IV RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 10 5 0 User Interface The correct use of the Pd and accuracy tool largely depends on the correct sequence of generation recording converting and time merging of several files The following diagram shows the typical files and their position within a campaign folder The files in red are important for this tool D SS 3 PD ACCURACY SS 3 RaW ROR C FOEMS EXAMPLES 5 TAKE2 EDR ARP UTC timestamp link file
408. s Volume 1V RASS S User Manual Chapter VII P1 P4 interface VII 1 Chapter VII P1 P4 interface 1 0 Introduction This chapter will explain you how to convert PTE P1 data format files into PTE P4 data format files The P1 P4 convert tool is able to convert ASTERIX Cat034 Cat048 and Cat001 002 EDR recording files into P4 Category 048 034 Tag and Chain Information Target Report Files Evenso PTE P1 54 format files originating from a scenario or a video reference extraction can be converted into P4 reference Data File Format 2 0 Making a P1 P4 file format conversion 1 Load the P1 P4 conert tool from the RASS S toolbox Select Campaign Folder Report Printing Table Printing Change Settings Bugreport Conver th iles F1 ta F4 Conyert The following window will appear on the screen P1 to P4 Convert vi Format Source P 24 File Format Macintosh amp V C AMP amp IGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE 332 DAT ack Aw a EDR File E x 1 2 z 4 EMS TRE T201 O2 2 70602 T 1 bJa Lle LJ add North Destination Progress Macintosh AV C AMF amp IGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE 442 ESPORTS P4 oie emz trk t201 02 270602 t1 cat E o 0 jJ The user interface of the GDLP tool is divided into several functional panels At the top of the window there is a row of buttons to operate the tool Toggle Help window on off gt Start conversion RUM4 Ch VII P1 P4 interface v4 4 2 25 07 02 a nask cladkonies oume
409. s Volume IV RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 1 Chapter VI Using PIE P1 forthe calculation of Theoretical Indication of SSR Pd and Accuracy 1 0 General The PTE P1 Engineering Change Proposal was formulated in a document by Eurocontrol called Indication of SSR Probability of Detection and Accuracy dated 19 05 99 contract C 1 xxx HQ BE 99 This document requested to propose a development of an additional functionality in the existing analysis section of the PTE P1 software This Manual describes the operation of the ECP implementation under RASS S version 4 4 2 and further ECP 38 and 45 were integrated in v 4 4 0 of the tool ECP 38 includes the early detection Mode and eliminates if enabled the All Call replies for the calculation of the Probability of correct Code Validation ECP 45 includes four additional result flags in the output data of the Pd and Accuracy tool A VALIDATED C VALIDATED A CORRECT and C CORRECT The inventory tool and all related sub functions such as filters and Third View display now allow the use of these flags ECP 44 was implemented in v 4 4 2 of the tool This CP now allows the use of scenarios with duplicate Mode S addresses Previuosly the linking of Mode S targets was only based on 5 address and now this includes target position same as for SSR targets The tool provides an Theoretical indication of probability of detection Code performan
410. s spreadsheet file is according to the PTE P2B1 ICD To perform the export use the following window Export RFS Data vi Please define RESULT folder Destination Folder AY Time format Header Data and Destination fields v Index v Recording Time v Recording Date v Target ID v Track Mr vf Scan vf Mode 1 wf Mode 2 Tilter Azimuth deq is less than or equal to Azimuth deq is greater than or equal to 0 452374 Range Mr is less than or equal to 135 436295 Range Nm is greater than or equal to 2 481484 SelectFolder vi Please select the EXPORT folder to hold the converted RFS txt file Info EXPORTS Poms X e INVENTORY EXPORT ew i J Progress Record nr TTT Lines written a Sean ar 14 50 19 21 03 2001 Select an EXPORT folder using the select folder button This will enter an export folder in the Destination folder indicator Destination Folder PlayStation Alain C AMP AIGN S4 PTE P2B1 FAT g EXPORTS INYENTORY EXPORT Next select or deselect the fields you require for export in the Header Data and Destination fields Then click the Ok button and the export starts If you select List Data the following window will appear RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 a ur j anf js l mil s Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 21 DataExportlist2B vi Export Select
411. s X 16 Data Conversion and Merui Linki Analvss The data recorded in Central or Local situation now needs to be converted into the proper formats for Data Linking and Data Analysis All these functions can be done by means of the P5 Time Merger and Linker 3 1 Time Merging and Linking The Time Merger part of the tool is used to combine the recorded interrogation data of the RES or RFTS which does not contain reply data with the EDR recorded UTC timing information As a result a detailed IRD data file is produced The tool also converts the raw EDR data into 548 and 518 files 3 1 2 Software Manipulations RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 1 Load the tool from the RASS S toolbox Analysis Statistics Tabular Fd ZD Pd Time Plerger amp Linker PZB Fd amp Accuracy Calculation DataLink Analyser PZEZ Data Import Export Interrragatian Reply Viewer 5 File Viewer Data Display for Datalink FZBZ Time Merger Linker P5 Data Display for Cluster PS The following window will appear on the screen Time Merger amp Linker P5 vi Result Folder Input Data gt System Map Folder EDR Recording Folder Map Folder ECR Recording Folder i o Action Progress Int tion Recording Fold D oA ve s nterragation Recording Folder E SE Make IRD al Rev 2 Co scans r Current Kb UM m b i0 020 040s Cie Link rep ror L0 b mays mre sc Lo ee4 9 m Line selection
412. s X 7 Y connection passive Cat 17 data wa local CAT48 SVC local Cat 48 PVC aa emote CAT48 SVC workstation ul CAT17 CHA Serial port e ESS SCS DB15HDm oooooooooOQg lm l 8 ut Range 264 VAC 370 VDC OOOOOOOOOOQOOQ pe ARP lt q ACP AENEA Figure 5 Typical Local setup for PTE P5 data recordings 2 1 4 GPS Connections Connect the GPS according to the drawing made on the next page If for any reason you can not use the GPS make sure that the computers connected to the simulation RES and the recording EDR have the correct UTC time set try to sync them to within one second The results will not be that accurate as when GPS recording is provided The GPS antenna must be put outside such that it has free sight of the sky Connect the serial port directly or using the RJA5 extension cable plus the RJ 45 to PPS breakout box The serial cable is a dB25 male to mini din male cable In order to operate correctly the mini din connector must be plugged into your computers serial port Or if your PC only has USB bus plug the serial port into the USB to serial convertor Next plug the dB25 into the female dB25 to RJ45 convertor This item also serves as breakout box to supply the PPS pulse to the EDR and to feed the GPS permanently with 12 V power Now plug the RJ45 extension cable 5 m or 50 m in the breakout box and connect th
413. s and return to the Data Display P5 tool 4 Use the Load button to load a TRD data set The following dialog will pop up and allows you to select a file as iaa Gledventes__voumes 3 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 25 Load LoadTRDDatafromFolder P5 vi Please select the data for layer x 1 TED Folder pathname HE irk C AMF AlGN S4 PS TESTING DDB LINKED D AT A Az TED Sean select 5 1 Filter Custer f 5ingle y The TRD Folder path name indicator will show the name of the file currently present in memory for the selected layer TRE Folder pathname HE irk CAPTP AlGN S4 PS TESTING DOE LINKED D ATA PS TEST NNCOP TS Type in a new path name or click the Find folder button to select a new TRD data set Find Folder The slider control will automatically alter its maximum value to the total number of revolutions present in the selected file Use the two sliders to select a portion of the file for loading TED Scan select Caz 140 I I I I I I 140 100 120 140 160 i Click the button to view more details of the selected TRD Data set The following window will appear RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 a nask cladkonies oume RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X26 View TRD Attributes vi File Mame User Com
414. s enabled Type in the desired value and hit the return key value 02 00 00 The chosen value is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the logical connection is enabled Select a logical operator from the list C And O Dr i Except The chosen value is automatically transferred to the filter This process is repeated until the filter setting is complete A filter setting can saved to disk with the Save Load button Clicking the button will clear the selected line from the filter setting clicking the button will clear the complete filter setting The Cancel button or recalled from disk by clicking the button will close the window and ignore all changes Click the button to load the filtered RASS S data A progress indicator will appear The loading may take some time depending on the number of revolutions selected The loading process can be stopped at all times by clicking the button The records already loaded will be used for further analysis Loading records Se Cancel After the loading the program will calculate the selected display This will take a RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 E j anf js l inil P Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 7 few seconds a progress indicator will appear in the lower right corner Interzoft Electronics 5 The Inventory tool is build up with layers of data At all t
415. s from bottom to top Just as for the Z axis the user must first select a source from the list of five and then define each of the five cursor shapes not mandatory select None if not used Click OK to proceed or Cancel to ignore The following window may appear depends on the selected geographical display zs siters nb elsi Volume y RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 71 DD Third Vig a SSS TRD Slant Nm p TAE Au M gl sm X I 2S 223 tel z Color scale Hels 30 0 25 0 z z ise 15 0 10 0 10 Cursor Legend 22 E eA T TEE e Target Info Q 4 Code 1000 FL S 1 PTEOO1 Range Mri 10 00 amp zimuth deg 5 00 Scan 1 59 ces 30 25 20 15 10 oS 15 20 25 30 25 BackGround TRD Slant X Mm C The look and feel of the Third View tool is similar to the Data Display tool Things like Background Ml BakGround Square graph E Toggle help D Histogram kl 3 Al Multilevel link es Data Link Status Display Print Target info EE XY FERE zooming and panning I s egil I win react in the same way as for the Data Display The top right selector allows to select the data for the colour scale in this case TRD range Nm _____TRD Range md To edit this list of possible Z Axis definitions choose define custom from the list to add a new Z a
416. s in the specifications but per Target 5 The viewer has a number of buttons to call special functions Call The help window Printout the tabular result Printout the graph Printout the contents of the graph as a table Call the histogram function Call The online reference pdf files Close the window 6 The user can also enable or disable one of the graphs by using the check boxes near the graphs legends This improves the readability of the curves 58 GICB exchngs p Z 56 o ese e GICB err Li 54 CC cmds p LJ 52 B CC exchngs a 50 e CC err a LJ 48 CD omds s LJ 46 CD exchngs a oO zd m CD err k e ee ModB compl 42 M 40 rsor e 8 ee e C Ge 9 9 woo wm oe ee 36 I 1 1 1 1 1 I I I 1 1 1 1 I 1 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 2 x I T tID amp R y 91 s XJ 7 If the user clicks the button the table is printed 8 If the user wishes to print the graph he has to click the Ej button 9 Use the tabular output to create a table from the graph data LE 10 The data can also be passed to a histogram function by clicking the button 11 The cursor can be used to query on specific points in the graph RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 E ES N Volume 4 Mak aadrentes RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link An
417. s or build your own matching connector For details on the serial pins see Volume 4 Chapter IV For the passive Cat 17 connection use the connectors shown below These cables can be purchased separately for IE or can be build by the customer EDR Chl connector dB25female To ni Radar dB25male remark Clock for EDR Ch 1 is sampled from Internal Radar Tx Clock 1 TxC and 14 TxC If External clock is used use 4 TrxC and 17 TrxC Figure 4 Y connector for passive connections for Raytheon Systems ilizset cladienies Yoeme4 RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 6 dB25female dB25male is sampled from Internal Radar Tx Clock 15 TxC and 12 TxC If external clock is used use 24 TrxC and 11 TrxC Figure 4 Y connector for passive connections for Thales Systems standard RS422 connection Connect the EDR ACP and ARP input to the Radar ACP ARP output Preferable use the APM see Vol5 Ch VII AFU APM in between Use a High Density dB15 extension cable Male to Male to perform this action An other possibility is to use a High Density dB15 to five BNC video cable In that case use the Red ARP and Green ACP cable RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 Bs miscere adadin Volume 4 st RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysi
418. s other users to link to shared programs 4 5 Date and Time considerations The operation of the Pd and Accuracy tool require the correct setting of the computer clocks This can be done by selecting the Data amp Time control panel selectable from the apple menu T File Edit Format Font Size Style Outline View Hel About ClarisWorks Gi Aplications Current Date 409 Vv al4 Apple DVD Player re eae NUNG 28 03 2000 D Apple System Profiler ApplecD Audio Player i Automated Tasks z Calculator fo Chooser amp Control Panels Appearance S Graphing Calculator ZEE Cy HANDY ARAT 3 Internet Access i Key Caps Control Strip Ee Network Browser Date amp Time 1 Nnte Pad NialAccict Time Formats Region Flemish Clock amp 24 hour 2 12 hour Noon amp midnight C 0n e 12 00 ki Use leading zero for hour Samples f Favorites Apple Menu Options Configuratian Manager 00 34 16 56 The tool is preferably used in a 24 hour clock mode in stead of the US or British standard of AM and PM For this select Flemish as region in the Time Be BEI Bae Time Zone Date amp Time time zone L Set Daylight Saving Time Automatically vd Daylight Saving Time is in effect Brussels is a city in the current Set Time Zone O Use a Network Time Server Time server Apple America
419. s to add a third dimension to the display The third dimension is displayed as a colour scale The Third View tool will take the active layer as a starting point to represent the same data as the Data Display but with the possibility to add a third colour axis The first time that the Third View tool is used the following window will appear E nakk decionigs an z RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis XAI Define 7 Axis P5 vi DIEN CALC Activity BrCB rs 2 AXIS pur Pe Activity BrCB Cursor ir Pme BrCB S C ErCE S NC BrCE 0 BrCB C BrCB A This window allows the user to select the contents of the colour axis in a similar way as for the X Y axis see above There are seven different sources of information for the Z axis Each type of source has its corresponding list of possible axis definitions The list is automatically update according to the source selection On top of the axis selection there is a possibility to define the shape of the cursor display There are five plus default different cursor shapes to define from a list of 17 possible shapes The priority of the cursors increases from bottom to top Just as for the Z axis the user must first select a source from the list of five and then define each of the five cursor shapes not mandatory select None if not used Click OK to proceed or Cancel to ignore The following
420. scenario generator which adds the data link events This one creates all required scenario files including the data link stream files for the RES and an S4EV file The RES replays the scenario on RF and creates in turn a result log file which contains information such as the closeout of certain data link events the number of all calls received by a target etc and an interrogation file This file is relatively time stamped relative to the start of the scenario using a 2 byte counter with resolution of 25 ns The data in the file contains each received interrogation with its corresponding time stamp ACP ARP and Mode contents plus for Roll Call interrogations the first 32 bits of the reply data This interrogation file forms the starting point of the IRD data file created by the Time Merger tool This tool in fact combines all the above files with an EDR recorded UTC time stamp file This file time stamps each ARP pulse of the radar to a lps resolution UTC The file is created by means of a GPS connected to the same computer as the EDR This setup is always required since we want to record the asterix output of the radar anyway The Time merger starts with the interrogation recording of the RES which already contains the first 32 bits of the reply in case of roll call and puts this information in the IRD records In case of SSR or All Call interrogations no reply part is created In case of Roll call short reply
421. se Data Link Status Display window Use the 2 button to activate the Multi Level Link with the Protocol Viewer tool or the Analyse Pulse Recording tool Notice that the corresponding EDR raw recording Protocol Viewer or the corresponding pulse recording file Analyse Pulse Recording needs to be load in the respective tools in order to use the Multi Level Link Select one of the three available links Cat048 Cat018 or video The principle of Multi Level Linking used in the Data Display is similar to the one used in the Inventory tool except that there is an extra link for the Cat018 data towards the Protocol Viewer tool i Link ta Catr48 Link ta Catri18 Link to v idea Select a point of interest using the query cursor red cross then activate the Multi level Link The corresponding information will be displayed in the respective tool Protocol Viewer or Analyse Pulse Recordings For more information about Multi Level Linking please consult the user manual Volume 3 Chapter III and Volume 4 Chapter V Click the LE button to open the TRD Counter window This tool allows the calculation of certain user defined parameters per scan or part of a scan The following window will appear with a different contents zs siters nb elsi Volume zi RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 76 Oo TRD Counter vi E occurances of ACAS RA Status ACAS RA A ACAS RAS C
422. sen with the button ES Clicking the lll button will display the third axis in absolute values The default representation of the dot the point style can be chosen from a picture list by clicking the button The graph is redrawn with the point style of your choice This does not change anything for the colour scaling or XY scaling The selector just on top of the graph displays the current Data Display layer which is represented in the Third view tool 1 RADIAL 36 SCEM1 DFS ww The user can select one of the 10 layers of the Data Display tool and the corresponding data will be loaded in to the Third View tool with the third axis as a colour scale Data Display layers with no data are listed as None RADIAL 36 SCEH1 DFS Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone Hone By clicking the button select query cursor and X button centre query cursor the query cursor can be dragged to a specific target and the corresponding target information will be displayed in the target info panel as hese Gledventes__voumes i RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 44 Target Info G 4 Code 625 FL 230 s Range Mri 61 28 Azimuth deg 222 89 Scan 1z y DLF Status Display SCF 1 Status Display 16 Click the Ly SCF 2 Status 0 255 menu to open the Data Link Status Display or SCF Status Display window The i
423. ser Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 25 query cursor a can be dragged to a specific target and the corresponding target information will be displayed in the target info panel Target Info CQ G amp Cade 629 N a FL S30 s Range Mr 61 28 amp zimuth deg 222 89 Scan 13 On top of the default point style a special point style can be assigned to specific status of the target There are 5 special point styles available The can be found in the custom legend panel Custom Legend we YIL ww YIL we YI jJ we YI jJ we v Select a specific status and a corresponding point style from their respective lists All targets which obey the specific status will be displayed in this point style instead of the default point style The top special point style has priority over the lower one if a target complies with more than one specific status Target which not comply with any of the specific status are represented by the default point style chosen by the button V Mone Miss False Plot A Code Swap Acquisition Reflection Simulation Walid Valid C Valid A amp C Garbled Garbled C Garbled amp amp C koll Call Comb ined Sector Message REA Present ID Present Mode S Present Hi jack Radio Failure Emergency SFI Mil Emergency Mil Identit RUM6 Ch IMI RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH E j anf js l mil m Volume 4 RASS S User
424. set I If a specific target is selected and the lock is set the targets range and azimuth is displayed in a comment field and is also transmitted serially trough the modem port of the computer running the convert program ASCII data 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity This data can be fed to an other computer running for example the window based video recording or the target injection The same data is also copied into a global memory which allows a window based recording run on the same computer to be tracked Using this it is possible to slave the video recorder to any target produced by the radar If a target is missed for any reason no position update is transmitted By clicking the Pause button m the PPI screen will be frozen 6 3 Info Check this box to show additional information about the current conversion Info Message 542300 Rev 247 Time 15 16 47 000 Date 15 11 1999 Current Eb 0 00 Error D Message will show the number of valid messages counted Plot Track EMM etc messages Rev will show the current detected revolution counted North messages Time Date shows the absolute date and time of the recording Current kB indicator shows the of Kb which have already been processed Error shows the number of errors counted 7 Option buttons The Scan button scans a few blocks from the data source and colours the line check boxes green if the recording h
425. sis Each counter is represented by a line in the graphical display or by a line in the tabular display of the main window En Use the button to cut a counter from the counter definition list use the button to copy a counter from the counter definition list or use the button to paste a counter into the counter definition list Once the analysis definition is finished use the button to save the analysis in the CAMPAIGN GENRAL TEMPLATES directory The new type of analysis will be added to the Analysis types list and will appear from now on each time that the TRD Counting window is opened Click the button to close the TRD Counting window and return to the Data Display tool 12 Click the button to stop the S File Viewer tool ihitaselt cleckonies ame zi RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 27 5 0 The Cluster Stability Analyser The Cluster Stability Analyser tool allows the user to make an assessment of the stability of the cluster over a period in time The cluster stability is calculated from the point of view of a specific node of the cluster It is not an overall figure applicable for the entire cluster The cluster stability assessment is based on the contents of the NIMs send to and transmitted from a specific node of the cluster It is calculated using a sliding window defined by the width and the step size of the window The last valid NI
426. ssive means that this channel is recorded in spy mode listening only The Line Type electrical standard needs to be selected Set the Rx and Tx clock to external slave mode 2 Select the Line Type electrical standard RS 232 or RS 422 3 Choose the protocol appearance of the recorder DTE or DCE This is the logical appearance of the channel electrically it is default wired as a DTE 4 Select the Rx and Tx clock generation internal or external If internal is chosen for one of both specify the baud rate P3udrate L22000 5 Select the protocol Layer to be used for the active recording U HDLC or SYNC 13 LAPB and X25 3 are not supported by the UDR 6 Select the data format This is especially important since it will allow the serial convert program to automatically perform a convert with the correct data format setting RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 Fy N E i Ei i fall 4H mil Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 10 y ASTERIX RDIF CD xxx LIMK 1 RSRE Click to save these settings or click to discard them and return to the recording tool 3 A recording will always create a new temp file Beware a new recording will overwrite the data stored on the disk from a previous recording To start the recording click the start button To stop a recording click the
427. st cat 048 for that target supplemented by a user defined maximum delay This delay is determined from a user input number of scans Max acquisition scans GICB recalculated towards time using calculated rotation speed TGICB is the ordered periodicity of Comm B BDS extraction input by the user The a hice eins Velume4 S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 24 parameters is only calculated for targets with at least 1 GICB extraction found for that track Pd GICB BDS This parameter list allows the input of the expected BDS extractions in the data The parameter is used in calculating the probability of successful Comm B delivery through Cat 048 The GICB Pd is only calculated for the BDS registers defined in this list Pd GICB Periodicity This parameter list allows the input of the expected BDS periodicity TGICB in the data The parameter is used in calculating the probability of successful Comm B delivery through Cat 046 Max acquisition scans GICB This parameter is used in calculating the probability of successful Comm B delivery through Cat 048 The Pd is determined by dividing the number of correct extracted GICBs in one scan for one target by the expected number of extractions The later in turn is calculated from the time of detection of the last scan of that target minus the time of detection of the target showing the first GICB extraction A maximum bo
428. stability assessment can be interrupted at all times by clicking the button All result obtained up to that moment will be displayed and can be analysed mak dedne zi RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 29 6 The following data will appear in the window Cluster Stability vi FB Ley e Jon ew Node Nb Parameters 1 File Pathname Window 3 000 s Macintosh AY C AMP AIGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE 442 RESULTS DUSS GATW 1906 NODE1 del Si7 se is in Io Available Nodes ASTERIX Cat817 record 1 1 Time 09 31 05 765 300 Hzn s Azimuth 219 155 deg Timing 1 zn ata Data Source Identi E O9 50 22 778 X SAC 8x62 SIC x eoo puss t2 09 20 22 778 X 812 Data Destination Identifier x34 DIC 181 GATH t 00 00 00 000 000 Message Type 888 Network informati yon Legend 350 C luster Stati pest lore Available Nodes SAC 8x62 SIC O52 DUSS 6 00 ASTERIX Cat 17 record 1 1 Time 09 31 04 771 400 H M S Date 19 06 2002 Azimuth 159 697 deg 3 00 818 Data sores identi fie 0x34 SIC 101 GATH bli Desti nation Identifier 0x62 DIC 052 DUSS 0 00 1 aan Message Type Network information 350C luster Stati oiod list IE son ale SAC 8x34 SIC 181 GATH 2 SAC 8x62 SIC 852 DUSS Jj 29311 qj l i i i i i 4 0931 00 278
429. stics nan zero 2205 Count 0 094 Mean Population nan zero oo 2153 Count ie 0 096 Cursor n o Hits 0 1459 Low 0 1469 High 0 032 0 157 Comment ME E era pm m m u I vj sss n x I l I l I l 0 1562 0 1400 0 1200 0 1000 0 0800 0 0600 0 0400 0 0200 o 0000 4 Azimuth deg If statistics are required per scan e g mean range bias per scan this can be done by using the inventory Mathematical features The data must be reloaded or copied from layer 1 or 2 and the appropreate mathematical function must be selected for the layer using the preferences 4 Range Nm Hot defined amp Range NmJ f Scan wr n Inventory Preferences vi Layer settings Dynamic Labels r Math Settings L1 eine Q No Math n Max Li Type Li Target ID Li Velocity o L Time TrackMr Heading Q Min LJ xv i Scannr PSR Refi QO RMS sd Position C 1 Code LJ SSR Refi Mean wd Mode A 2Code Com Cap Q Deit J Mede C Elevation J acas 3s O Modes Power I FLstat Q Sum Li Overlap Li Target Gen Bl Set Delta X J Identity Scan Mr RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 3 poems exam 4 poems exam Tl Mean fit m Max fit m Min fit initio dadne Volume z RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI
430. stop button 4 Now check the Recording panel bb n 11 rhy Time 14 40 47 6 24 2003 UDR Status UDR serial Mr 5 The Recording panel displays the current hard disk recording position should read zero at start in Kb the UDR serial number and the UDR status The UDR status indicator can have 2 different values UDR OK ready to start recording UDR NOT FOUND check if UDR is properly connected and detected in the device manager 5 In case the use GPS check box is checked the program will check the presence of the GPS This is indicated in the GPS acquisition window and the GPS Init window The GPS messages are made visible and the status of the time stamping is indicated i UDR GPS init vi Status P5 Set Time 172 76 Sequence Number az UTC Time of Day 15 21 45 GPS to UTC Time Offset D 000000000 s Time Mark WOT valid GPS Sync Cancel Click Cancel in case the time stamping is not important or wait until the time is UTC sync and click OK to continue The UDR init window will close but the GPS status is continuously monitored in the UDR Acquisition vi window RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 F n 3 i l 4 o n A Seria Communication JUR v6 0 2 ll Bom ui oil rc aai 5 LL olume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 11 E UDR GPS Acquisition vi BE Set Time 517 76 Sequence Number 427 UTS T
431. t 16384 ACP per revolution 16 bit 65536 ACP per revolution RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 F n 3 i l 4 o n A Seria Communication JUR v6 0 2 ll Bom ui oil rc aai 5 LL olume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 9 i UDR Preferences vi General Lina Lith 12 bit ACPR 4090 3 14 bit ACPR 16384 10 bit ACPR 09536 Use GPS LJ If the GPS timing box is checked make sure a GPS is connected to the system GPS timing is mandatory for PSR Scenario generation and transmission delay analysis The preferences window is also used to configure the different channels individually Each of the six channels can have its own settings Select a channel by clicking on its respective tab According to the Line settings some controls can be disabled The following window will appear i UDR Preferences vi General Linel Line General Linel Line Line settings 1 Physical Layer 1 Line settings 2 Physical Layer 2 Layer unice Line Type Layer uunc Line Type Type Appearance oce Type Appearance oce Protocol Rx Clock Protocol Ree Clock Tx Clock External Tx Clock External Baudrake Baudrate It is most convenient to enter the settings left to right starting with the Line Settings 1 Specify the Type of recording None or Passive None means that this channel is not used No further settings need to be entered Pa
432. t Tab Separated format Ei Export list to spreadsheet Tab Separated format Cut item from list Ep Copy item from list paste item in list Empty list em Undo last Select all Print list Sort list according to sort key Close window 15 Click the button to open the Third View tool This tool allows to add a third dimension to the display The third dimension is displayed as a colour scale The Third View tool will take the active layer as a starting point to represent the same data as the Data Display but with the possibility to add a third colour axis The first time that the Third View tool is used the following window will appear iniacat dadon eet S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 70 Define 7 Axis vi BrCB S E BrCB S NC BrCB BErCB C ii L Ee E Ee DES BrCB A Cancel This window allows the user to select the contents of the colour axis in a similar way as for the X Y axis see above There are five different sources of information for the Z axis Each type of source has its corresponding list of possible axis definitions The list is automatically update according to the source selection On top of the axis selection there is a possibility to define the shape of the cursor display There are five plus default different cursor shapes to define from a list of 17 possible shapes The priority of the cursors increase
433. t The data Range Azimuth A code Altitude Track number etc is presented in a text field in the right upper corner of the PPI graph Also the red cursor will be positioned on the current position of this aircraft The selected A code will be copied in the AC ID field When the user zooms arround a selected target the X and Y scalses will automatically be updated such thet the selected target always remains in the middle of window The user can also enter manually a particular A code to be searched for in the AC ID field To do this first unlock the field fill in the A code and lock the field again The data Range Azimuth A code Altitude Track number etc is presented in a text field in the right upper corner of the PPI graph Also the red cursor will be positioned on the current position of this aircraft The last way to select an aircraft is to move the red cursor using the cursor mouse pointer The data Range Azimuth A code Altitude Track number etc is presented in a text field in the right upper corner of the PPI graph The selected A code will be copied in the AC ID field and will be selected in the list The A code of the selected aircraft will always be displayed near the red cursor RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 3 nask dadon Volume RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder II 24 The A code selected will be tracked continuously by the red cursor if the lock selector is
434. t 8895 TESTING AY RESULTS TEST Pages 138 f R w TEST 3 Mees A AP Auto Save EDR Zeno Interarrival Time ms Whe xn AF 17 000 IF yi e Xx Display 4 iren Update v Pages En UF 4 20 14 000 UF 5 21 r Interrogation Info Other 13 000 tphase 36 5315 ms 867 11 u di de wb d ee ee odes cu a a e Ms 12 000 UF 11 PR 0 1l 0 CL 0 44 10986C E r 11 000 Revolution 6 Scenario Generation n bz 10 000 zimuth 226 964 deg T T 3 000 Antenna Diagram Editor Trajectory Scenario Generation Trajectory Reconstruction Ewent Scenario Generator Interference Generator RES RES Main Cantral amp 000 7 000 6 000 5 000 Interrogation Analysis FES Self Test amp Calibration Mass Recompile Scenarios RES Interrogation Recorder 4 000 i 1 i 1 225 011 230 000 235 000 240 000 247 159 deg b d Before starting the recording first set the RES trigger settings correctly RES Int Rec Prefs vi SS RIU Serial Nb 25 1 1z ESG Serial Nb 24 1 1z r RES Settings A Coupler Loss dB 82 1 Trigger dBm Insertion Loss dB 60 0 Mode S DAC v 40 0 Next select the proper recording Mode Stand Alone The recording starts and stops using the Record buttons of the tool Slaved EDR The Recording starts and stops simultaneously with the EDR given that the EDR
435. t accurate as when GPS recording is provided The GPS antenna must be put outside such that it has free sight of the sky Connect the serial port directly or using the RJ45 extension cable plus the RJ 45 to PPS breakout box The serial cable is a dB25 male to mini din male cable In order to operate correctly the mini din connector must be plugged into your computers serial port Or if your PC only has USB bus plug the serial port into the USB to serial convertor z RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 Z iniaset deon me RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI7 Next plug the dB25 into the female dB25 to RJ45 convertor This item also serves as breakout box to supply the PPS pulse to the EDR and to feed the GPS permanently with 12 V power Now plug the RJ45 extension cable 5 m or 50 m in the breakout box and connect the other side to the male RJ45 to dB25 convertor Finally this connects to the dB25 input of the GPS Also connect the PPS pulse provided by the breakout box to the event input of the EDR RJ45 5 or 50 m cable MiniDin PPS pulse Fig 3 Connections for GPS recording Once the EDR recording is started a dialog will appear controlling the GPS Make sure the GPS is UTC sync before proceeding because otherwise no proper UTC data is provided by the tool This can be verified by checking the colour of the dialog text if itis red the GPS is not time sync ed 4 4
436. t thing to do is to select an EDR recording folder to be exported Click the button in the source folder panel to browse for an EDR recroding folder Click the button to check which lines were used during the recording The Boxes corresponding to the used lines become green Line selection tJi Uz Uz 4 Ls Ce Click the button to view the EDR settings used during the recording If the recording was made with an earlier version of the EDR recording software the following messages will appear N View EDR Recording Settings Ma EDR Recorder settings available for this recording Otherwise the EDR recording settings used during the recrodidng are dispayed in a separate window View EDR Preferences vi Line 5 A Line Settings Type Passive Line Type RS422 Layer LAP B Appearance DCE Rx Clock External Physical Layer Tx Clock Internal Baudrate m 425 Channels ait inii 43 HEP i a NT ieu r Comment 5 Browse for a destination folder by clicking the button in the destination panel 6 Select a line to be exported by checking the corresponding box If multiple lines are selected the data of these lines is interleaved according to their time of recording The a RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 mamik eiadueuxdias RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIIL 8 data will be merged
437. t215 59 10 275 712 X 5t 0 000000 s Target Info Q 0 a 2 PTEO02 Range Nm 15 24 Azimuth deg 15 00 The Window Position slider can be used to scroll through the complete trajectory of the selected target This manipulation is actually the same as moving the query cursor in the Data Display tool across the selected trajectory There are two timing cursors available t1 and t2 grey lines in the display Both display the UTC time stamp of the transaction that they are locked on At displays the difference in seconds between the two timers This time difference is also display at the bottom of the data link Status Display in between the two cursor lines Use the X button next to the UTC time to centre the respective cursors zs uites elsi Volume y RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 75 16 17 RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 Timing Info t 16 01 16 026 739 X t2 16 01 16 960 850 X At 0 834111 s Enlarging or shrinking the Data Link Status Display can be done by clicking and dragging the lower right corner of the window Click the zi button in the upper right m corner to expand the Data Link Status Display tool to full screen size Click the E button in the lower right corner of the window to square the display of the Data Link Status Display tool Click the 4 button to clo
438. ta happens a lot faster because the data will not be shown on the screen It is the displaying of the data that consumes a lot of time Display n Off Timing messages 16 If the Radar timing signals were recorded together with the radar data the can be displayed during the analysis The Timing messages can be Using these radar timing signals the user can jump directly to any scan azimuth combination by entering the corresponding values and clicking the Search 4 button Search Q Sean o re Azimuth deg 17 A Progress bar gives an idea how far the file has been processed Progress E 2 4 Filtering Data 18 Another way of reducing the amount of information to be displayed is to filter the selected trajectory data by clicking the Filter button in the top row of buttons Clicking this button activates a filter search editor function iriacelt cadvanies Volume IV y RUM4 Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 8 Searcheditor2 yvi Search Editor is equal to Cr i Except Search in selection Clear All A filter consists of four functional blocks The first block is the object of filtering Choose an object of the list Use the scroll bars to page through the list and click the wanted item Date Time Target ID Track Mr Scan Mr 1 Cade 2 Code The chosen item is automatically transferred to the filte
439. the data channel connections The UDR has two high speed serial communications channels for passive recording Each of the channels can be configured individually They can handle transmission speeds up to 128 Kb s Two electrical standards are supported RS232 single ended and RS422 differential The serial data are fed to the recorder using two DB15 connectors R5485 standard connections on the front panel of the UDR CH1 CH2 Ta DB15 to RJ45 cable RJ45 to DB25 customisable The unit is supplied with two 2 5 meter cables for connection of the DB15 to a RJ45 connector An RJ45 to DB25 adapter with the pins not entered in the connector yet is included and allows you to make your own customised connections DB15 to RJ 45 cables RUM6 Ch XII Serial Communication UDR v6 0 2 18 06 2003 Fy N 3 ee lu E fal rll a mil d E Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter XII Serial Communication using UDR IV 4 The following table lists the connections of the DB15 to RJ45 connection cable This will allow you to configure the RJ145 DB25 adapter according to your configuration Connection between RJ45 and DB15 A A gt Name J W RJ45 Name DB15 male _ RxD lo RXD 2 2 Gad o 20 Gnd 18 TxD 0000000021 3 ooo TXD 202022222 20 12V M d 10V DB THO o oo d TrxC oo a Eo O EEEN NNUS cU O TN EE Ll ERE REN ENTE E 15 RxC 8 RxC 6 In case
440. the data link performance of the radar will for obvious reasons require some input data This data needs to be recorded in some way The recording of surveillance and data link function data asterix is straight forward and was already discussed in previous chapters of this manual The recording of the interrogation and reply data on the other hand requires two separate setups depending on whether we are dealing with a FAT setup SCENARIO or SAT setup LIFE data In case of FAT setup the RES is used to generate the radar environment targets transponders ADLP s reflectors etc This also facilitates the recording of the interrogations and replies since the RES already decodes the interrogations and generates the replies This eliminates the requirement to reconstruct replies from video data In case of SAT setup the raw video data Sum and OBA is sampled by the RVR and RVI see Volume 3 Ch III and is converted into the required format by means of the appropriate software This step requires some form of extraction and is not always 100 reliable This is caused by the fact that FRUIT and other unknown factors may corrupt the replies of the transponders 2 1 Recording in SC ENARIO case In the scenario case the data recording is performed by means of the EDR and GPS and the RES itself also performs the task of recording the interrogations and replies 2 1 1 Data Recording The Recording functionality of data fo
441. there are seven different sources of objects available there are seven different lists with objects Choose an object of the list Use the scroll bars to page through the list and double click the wanted item Check the alphabetical field list checkbox for automatic alphabetical arrangement of the list By typing in the first letters the corresponding item will be automaticcally scrolled up for selecting Double click the wanted item Sf Alphabetical Field List The chosen item is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the condition is enabled In the same way select a condition from the list Notice that the conditions contain and does not contain are only available for string type objects is equal to is not equal to is greater than is greater than or equal to is less than is less than or equal to contains The chosen item is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the value is enabled Type in the desired value and hit the return key Notice that the format of the value field is automatically adjusted corresponding to the selected object value 02 00 00 The chosen value is automatically transferred to the filter and the next block the logical connection is enabled Select a logical operator from the list The chosen value is automatically transferred to the filter This process is repeated until the filter setting is complete Save A filter setting
442. these type of files converting SASS S or PTE P4 internal format into 54 files are not available at this time yet Therefore we will require a straight forward conversion of the EDR recording into a S4RD data file Obviously there is no need to select the scenario If available select the RES recording folder which is the folder containing the interrogation recording This can also be a folder containing interrogations recorded by the RFTS Typically the RES will run an EMPTY scenario when making such recordings Next select the EDR recording folder See above and set the correct parameters Finaly select the RESULT folder As output specify the folowing options if the RES or RFTS was specified to record interrogations Output B4sc 7 518 548 WA sarb WA Analyse W TRD IRD A Rcony RA TRO M In case you have not recorded interrogations using the RES or RFTS unselect the IRD checkbox Output s4sc s18 s48 M sarb AA Analyse Vf TRD IRD 7 RCenly 7 TRO ff RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 lie nase Gladventies _Volume4 S RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 20 Time Merger P2B vi S m Creating IRD data Scenario Folder Result Folder e o Path Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE 432 RESULTS REC LIVE RES Recording Folder Dutput Macintosh AV CAMP AIGN S4 ACCEPT ANCE 2 V422 RESULTS REC LI
443. time stamp of the target report and reference can differ not only due to the bias but also because the scenario reference positions and time stamps are always related to the moment the target is at bore sight while the radar target reports are based on detection time 1 Because the scenario reference also contains speed and heading the reference position at a time indicated by the target report can be extrapolated for each target report using a linear approximation Because the same approximation for calculating the position of the targets are used in the firmware of the RES during simulation in fact these corrections are exactly what the RES has generated Range y Range Velocity p ATs cos Azimuth Heading Azimuth ref Azimuth y 180 Velocity ATs sin Azimuth y Heading y z Range y 2 Using the Mode calculated reference and asterix arrays see 4 1 all targets having a valid link index all non missed or false plots in the reference array are used to calculate the Range and azimuth error as The Link index is used to locate the corresponding record in the asterix array ARange s Range q Range y AAzimuth s Azimuth q Azimuth 3 The Range Bias is defined as R s 1 N X ARanges As 1 N AAzimuthg N Total number of non missed Mode 5 reference plots 4 From this also the standard deviation is calculated as STD Range V 1 N X ARange 5 Rg STD Azimuth V 1 N X
444. tion v Stop the Data Display P5 tool Most of the left side is occupied by the geographical display At the right side we can find the legend manual Designation Flag and the Target Information Legend 14 Mone 1B Mone 1C None 10 Mone TRD Slant Y Nm TRD Slant Y Nm f TRD Slant X Nm kal 0 1E None 1F Mone 24 Mone zB Mone 2C Mone 2D Mone 2E None zF Mone 24 Mone 3B Mone SC Mone zD None SE None SF Mone ME Flag d oes MEMALA 1 i GH Bi 1 0 wv BackGround TRD Slant X Nm 1 SEAS o E 2 Click the LabVIEW Run button in the upper left corner of the window to start the Data Display P5 tool 3 The Data Display P5 tool will automatically load the default display list and the first display type from this list is selected as default display type a RUM4 Ch X SCF Analysis v4 4 2 25 7 02 nask cladkonies oume RASS S User Manual Chapter X Surveillance Coordination Function Analysis X 24 TRO lant Y Nm ATRD Slant 4 Mr TRE Y Mm ATRO amp Mm TRE Range Mm TRD Azimuth deg TRE Range Mm IRD Azimuth Reply deg CALC GICB delivery delay s TRD Fractional scan CALC GICB processing delay s TED Fractional scan TED Broadcast Comm B events TED Fractional scan CALC GICE delivery delay s TRD Fractional scan TED Range Nm TRD Azimuth deg IRD Azimuth Int deg TED 3 4 C
445. tion The delay is determined from the first segment of the transmitted short Uplink packet to the last valid segment of the packet In case the delay is superseded a Comm A failure is declared Max Comm B duration 3 0 This parameter N2 determines the maximum duration that is allowed for a Comm B transaction This parameter is used for determining GICB failure Broadcast Comm B failure AICB failure and ACAS RA failure The delay is determined from the announcement of the event in case of down link events or the first extraction command in case of GICBs and the closure of the transaction In case the delay is superseded one out of four possible Comm B failures are declared Max Comm C duration 4 0 This parameter N3 determines the maximum duration that is allowed for a Comm C transaction The delay is determined from the reservation interrogation for the long Uplink packet to the Comm C technical acknowledgement or Closeout acknowledgment In case the delay is superseded a Comm C failure is declared Max Comm D duration 5 0 This parameter N4 determines the maximum duration that is allowed for a Comm D transaction The delay is determined from the Announcement reply of a long Downlink packet to the Closeout interrogation In case the delay is superseded a Comm D failure is declared Max A code Change duration This parameter NO determines the maximum duration that is allowed for a Mode A code Change The delay is determined from the ann
446. tion cable Interface kit containing metal amp plastic case 1x 2m 37 p flat cable for connection box 4 x 3m25 p flat cable for data connections data recorder connection box Custom made connection cables breakout boxes for custom adaptation of connectors Aluminium case as hee ellipsis oume RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 zi RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder IL 2 3 0 Data Recorder Connections The radar data recorder has six data inputs from which two are dedicated to network communications and asynchronous lines and four are reserved for synchronous data recording The data can be fed to the recorder either by using the two front panel connectors which contain both an asynchronous and a synchronous channel or by using the data recorder connection box The last option is preferable because it allows for remote access of the data lines using a longer cable and the data and clock lines can be checked using LEDs For the moment there are two RDR hardware configurations in use the previous version which uses the breakout box and the flat cables and the new version with the RDR interface module and the RS232 probe modules Please consult the paragraphs corresponding to your RDR hardware configuration 1 RDR hardware configuration with breakout box The following picture shows a typical setup for data recording of two channels Laptop computer RadarData Recorder Har
447. togram Information about the histogram can be entered in the comment field This field will be printed together with the histogram Comment NENNEN Click the return tool 4 button to close the histogram function and return to the Inventory The background range circles can be turned On Off by checking the JBackGround box A background map of the area can be turned On Off by checking the m ma box The map is calculated from the coordinates of the radar in the site file The map is only available in the PPI and XY display type When a layer is set to dynamic mode it can be manipulated by some of the top row buttons Notice that all the dynamic layers present in the Inventory tool are affected by these buttons RUM6 Ch III RDR Analysis v6 0 2 18 06 2003 BH E j anf js I oe mil m Volume 4 RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III 19 gt Start dynamic live layers Pause dynamic live layers Stop dynamic live layers Step forward in dynamic live layers Step backward in dynamic live layers Set filter for active dynamic live layer The Set Filter button affects only the active layer For each dynamic layer an individual filter can be set Once a dynamic run is started by clicking the button it keeps on running even if the end of the file is reached A dynamic run always has to be stopped manually by clicking the button All the Mode A codes present in the active dynamic layer are displayed on
448. togram can be entered in the comment field This field will be printed together with the histogram Comment ee Click the return button to close the histogram function and return to the S File Viewer tool 9 By loading filtering zooming and selecting custom X Y Z axis a specific data set can be displayed on in the S File Viewer tool This data set can be displayed as a 2D histogram by clicking the histogram button Sa 2D Histogram The following window will appear ihitaselt cleckonies ame zi RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 23 2DHistogram vi 000 Message Type f Time Azimuth of Recording deg r Settings l sani A Absolute y a x Relative WES Ed ve lower Inclusion X Bin size Y Bin size r Cursor Population 8 13257 Count X Bin Boundary 0 x Low 0 X High r Y Bin Boundary 0 Y Low 0 Hits 0 Y High X Statistics Y Statistics 98507303 95 Total 50158222 611 Total 60232 881 Mean 3783 535 Mean 431 756 STD 104 263 STD 60234 428 RMS 3784 971 RMS 60989 076 Max 3959 978 Max 59351 392 Min 3600 000 Min Comment 0 Il 1 1 1 1 55751 56000 56200 56400 56600 56800 57000 57200 57391 Time of Recording h m s The operation of the 2D histogram is very similar to the 1D histogram In stead of bars representing the number
449. tool The second file that is created x S4RD is the file that contains the Radar Data 5 5 Inventory Data Loading The Pd Acc tool is normally used as an extension to the inventory tool The inventory must be used first So open the Inventory vi and Pd Acc vi tools from the RASS S Toolbox Inventory Statistics Statistics Tabular Pd Tabular Pd 3D Pd 3B Pd Scenario Time Merger Scenario Time Merger Pd amp Accuracy Calculation Pd amp Accuracy Calculation You must now load the two input files Time stamped Scenario in layer 1 and Asterix converted in layer 2 in the inventory tool The correct file names xS4SC and x S4RD will already be pre loaded in the 3 E nak dadvonies Youve RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 18 inventory layer 1 and 2 For details see manual on Inventory tool Use the filter of the inventory tool to cut off sections of the data Important Remark The Pd and accuracy tool will mark coasted track plots as false targets if they are not found in the scenario data Further more they should not be present in analysed data since coasted tracks are in fact misses Therefore the user should include the filter criteria Miss False to filter out the coasted tracks mol ll o 1o Ir entry vi I I I I I g i b x u EX lt
450. tool using the 25 button in the upper left corner of the window Every time the tool is started a preference window will pop up This window can also be evoked by clicking the button Setup Channels vi kz Line 1 Type Baud rate Databits Stop bits Parity Clock Line 2 Clock Line 4 E Rising edge 5 Rising edge Clock Line 5 Clock Line amp E Rising edge E Rising edge The preferences window is used to set up the different lines Lines 1 and 3 are dedicated to serial communication For the moment only asynchronous serial communication is supported The baud rate number of data bits number of stop bits and parity can be entered in the respective controls Lines 2 4 5 and 6 are format independent The DSP triggering can be set to the rising clock edge the falling clock edge or disabled if the line is not used for recording E Rising edge s Falling edge Disabled Click the button to close the preferences window and return to the Serial Recording tool 3 Now it is time to check the Info panel zs hisses ellipsis olume y RUM4 Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder ILI Infa HD Size 1045524 kb HD Position O Kb EDE serial Mr RDR_OS 02 028 EDE Status Radar Data Recorder OF The Info panel displays the hard disk size if inserted in Kb the current hard disk recording position should be zero in Kb the RDR serial numbe
451. ulse arrives Never start the pulse recording first and then the EDR since this will result in a one scan offset between asterix data and interrogation reply data a Huse Gaines oume S RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 10 3 Data Conversion and Merging Linking Analysis The data recorded in SCENARIO or LIFE situation now needs to be converted into the proper formats for Data Linking and Data Analysis This can be done by means of the Time Merger in case of Scenario and Life if no reply data is required and by using the Analyse Pulse recordings in case of LIFE data 3 1 Time Merging The Time Merger tool is used to combine the recorded interrogation and reply data of the RES which does not contain ALL reply data but only partial data with the scenario information As a result a detailed IRD data file is produced The tool also produces the required UTC time stamped scenario data 545C and the Asterix data files 548 and S18 In case where no scenario is available LIFE the time merger can create the IRD S4RD and 548 data required for life analysis The time merger now also calls the data Linker and analyser since v 4 3 3 automatically so you do not need to start this tool seperately 3 1 1 0peration for SCENARIO The Trajectory scenario generator creates a scenario positional file xxx S4TJ This file is read by the event
452. unction The disk is probed for data in steps specified by Step Size When data is found the exact beginning and ending of a recording is located and the separate recordings are displayed ECE Scanning Oav7fo7 9 29 04 20000 Offset kB 1877797 13 49 48 g 7 97 13 58 10 37857 Length kE of Peay Start date 3 29 04 Start time are End date dis 51 2 Step Size Kb zi i 13 49 48 End time When a recording is selected by single mouse click information will be given on the position and length of the recording the start date and time and the end date and time Double clicking a recording will copy the Offset and Length information to the conversion source offset and length controls This is required for conversion of data from the data recorder These controls can also be set manually by the user 3 The RDR Status is shown in the Main control bar BeA The indicator returns the status of the Radar Data Recorder Radar Data Recorder OK Several messages can be displayed as hee electi onica peA S RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 RASS S User Manual Chapter II Radar Data Recorder II 22 Radar Data Recorder OK Radar Data Recorder NOT FOUND No Disk Inserted Disk is write protected when something is wrong with the radar data recorder or it is not connected all the functions regarding the data recorder are disabled greyed out 4 Progress bar If applicable the pro
453. undary is put on this last time in the form of a maximum scan number The PTE P2B2 Data link model B compliance status calculation calculates for a whole scenario without any filter applied the following percentages of success of the data link exchanges performed during the scenario run The data link model B compliance status shall be equal to the percentage of successful run within a complete scenario e GICB BDS gt 4 0 e Comm C e Comm D e Global GICB Comm C Comm D model B compliance status A run shall be declared successful if e all the data link transactions Comm C and Comm D are successful e All GICB extractions has been successful The PTE P2B2 tool declares GICB extraction successful for the run if the number of extracted GICB started and completed in 1 beam during the run times the number of targets in the peak s and in the background times the number of scans of the run is above or equal to the user defined percentage default 100 Because the targets are not moving there is always exactly one rendezvous beam target per scan The PTE P2B2 tool declares a Comm C successful if started reservation and completed close out in less than a user defined number of beams N3 1 20 1 completed reservation to close out in less than the maximum duration N3 1 20 1 in scan numbers default 1 specified by the user The PTE P2B2 tool declares a Comm D successful if completed reservation to close out in
454. ved Export list To display the list in tabular view click on the button To leave the Data Export window and return to the Data Display click the Cancel J on Depending on the selected items the following window will appear notice the the data is sorted in ascending order according to the consecutive selected items 5 RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 hiak dadon eet RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis X 69 oO PrintTables vi Data Display listing Layer name 1 RADIAL 36 SCENI DFS Window x max 09 09 TRD Slant X INm x min 10 74 TRD Slant X Nm v max 18 98 TRD Slant Y Nm v min 22 55 TRD Slant Y i TRO dex TRD Time of TRD Addres TRD Range M TRD Azimuth rro wwe _ O ______ o femna nz psom p J T 1 esessamps nsn so fo _ z eroana zm som fo _ resoseioje ars s iesoszoees zs k i10 526 cs CETE Lien asso EEEE IN an j anj a ecijolo ojojo o o o 00o VIVIKI N on j onj ajajan 0 90 9099 o eoOIolojojo eoiIolojilojo oOI ojojojo h a e e e o at t641 17 948x3 42 t61122324xs 24 710 hy a e e e e The top row buttons operate the window Toggle Help window On Off Save list contents to disk Internal format Load list contents from disk Internal format Import list from spreadshee
455. w asterix or other protocol messages into the SASS S defined S4 format This format can be used later for analysis and viewing of the data The EDR convert also allows the conversion of data into the IOSS Mayer or DCP MUX format used by the SASS C tool as input format For the moment the following data formats are supported on the convert tool ASTERIX Cat 001 ASTERIX Cat 002 ASTERIX Cat 016 ASTERIX Cat 034 ASTERIX Cat 048 RDIF DDE 4 2 Convert vi After a serial recording or even while the serial recording is being performed you can convert the recorded data into a DCP MUX format or into a RASS S format other formats may be foreseen in the future Madrec etc The convertor program also allows you to see the data in a PPI format or a Hex format This comes in handy to check the recording process while it is being performed Recordings made in active or Y passive mode pairs 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 and 5 amp 6 are cleared from retransmitted information LAP B and X25 Only confirmed information is allowed through the conversion process and used for further processing 1 Load the Convert Radar Data tool from the RASS S toolbox EDR Data Analyzer EDF Bit Recorder EDR Convert Bit Recording EDF Serial Recorder EDR Convert Serial Recording GDLP Protocol Viewer EDR Replay EDR Export UDP IF Recorder Convert Network Recording The following window will appear on the screen as iens usns Veume4 RUMA Ch XI
456. well as the user data are shown Comm Layer r Rx analysis Msg Nr 2 Size 66 Status Time 13 42 61 956666 Line 1 Level destination address 66 61 62 BC C1 BA source address 66 36 65 BA BB 2C protocol amp xS86G IP User data 45 66 66 26 G5 SB 46 66 FF 11 AS 66 1E Ca AS A SD GF A1 GF R1 A 12 54 en Da 14 C2 01 4A E DO 55 55 55 55 55 55 Msg Nr 1 Size 66 Status Time 13 42 61 917666 Line 1 Level destination address 66 61 62 BC C1 BA source address 66 36 65 BA BB 2C protocol amp xS880 IP User data 45 66 G 2A 85 SA 46 66 FF 11 AS 66 1E CO AS G SD GF R1 GF A1 aeo 16 AG OE C1 CO 14 C2 FE 4A E D9 28 66 66 55 55 Msg Nr 8 Size 66 Status Time 13 242 61 961666 Line 1 Level destination address 66 61 62 BC C1 BA source address 66 36 65 BA BB 2C protocol amp axS80 IP User data 45 66 66 29 65 59 46 66 FF 11 RUMA Ch V Protocol Viewer v4 4 0 08 03 02 nask dedna VoEmelv pl RASS S User Manual Chapter V Protocol Viewer V 12 2 6 2 IP Displaying Mode The IP layer is the second layer The IP information such as version TOS Length Identification Flags protocol Addresses and Options are indicated Comm Layer Ex analysis Hzg Hr 2 Size 68 Status Time 13 42 81 05588mH Line 1 Level version 4 Header Length 24 TUS 4 Total Length 38 Identification 35B Flags Fragment Offset B TTL 259 Protocol 17 UDF
457. x 32 14 23 19 44 E mail PTE support intersoft electronics com intaisat clecenties otume 3 RASS S User Manual Revision Date RASS S4 Information MODIFICATIONS Description CHANGE Responsible RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 ry Ir iore clacdvonfigs Volume gt RASS S User Manual Chapter I Introduction I 1 Chapter Introduction 1 0 Radar Data Recording and Analysis The final stage in the radar chain is the data processing and the corresponding data transmission elements data lines modems telephone or dedicated data lines The Radar Data Recorder RDR 184 can be used to evaluate all these elements This equipment records without interfering the transmission the digital data coming from any synchronous or asynchronous data line regardless of the transmission protocol to its hard disk in a raw format This means that not a single bit or data corrupting spikes is lost The Radar Data Recorder can operate in an operational radar environment Special software tools are used to evaluate the signal s quality in a first stage After quality evaluation the data is decoded to check the protocol If the data quality and protocol are correct a data recordin
458. xchange In case the user selects Rate per target the X axis can contain one of 2 different values 5 address or Target ID Use the X scale menu to select one 4 scale 5 address wm ETE In case S address is selected you can modify the X scale format into hex representation by using the graph s pallet RUMA Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 4 0 06 03 02 E EE A Volume RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 45 MENZE Format b Decimal Mapping Mode gt Engineering Tabular resu rop PFop Binary Octal s2 k 4 Hexadecimal Relative Time Absolute Time B re gt b x ap b gt jad un jad 5 c z o b O oO c c O 5 un e O C E un Rs b Q ES c 5 C Ei O 5 n E Call The help window Printout the tabular result Printout the graph Printout the contents of the graph as a table Call the histogram function Call The online reference pdf files Close the window 5 The user can also enable or disable one of the graphs by using the check boxes near the graphs legends This improves the readability of the curves Pd 9 w y scale Pd GICB BDS x40 b vd uS xx s Pd GICB BDS x50 LJ 90 00 Pd GICB BDS x60 LJ 80 00 Pd GICB EDS x70 J 70 00 LI O 60 00 a 4d 50 00 Lo 40 00 M z0 00 ws B4 20 00 10 00 0 007 I I I I I I I I I I I I 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 x nn A
459. xis definition or click on the P button to edit a item of the list The editing loading and saving is similar to the X Y axis definition used in the Data Display tool Automatically the corresponding data is loaded into the tool and displayed as a colour scale The progress of the loading is displayed in a progress bar LI j 3 RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 1 15 03 01 iniasat dadon em RASS S User Manual Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 72 The full range of the colour scale is visible in the colour ramp The colours go from black over blue green and yellow to red It introduces a feeling from cold to hot or from low to high The first time that the data is presented the colour scale is auto scaled this means that the highest value is represented in red and the lowest value is represented in black In between there is a linear distribution of the values according to the corresponding colour The colours can not be changed only their corresponding values can be changed Color zcale 140 0 100 0 75 0 50 0 25 0 5 By changing the high or low colour values the colour scale can be redistributed over a limited range All values above the highest are represented by red all values below the lowest are represented by black Auto scaling for the colour axis is similar to the auto scaling of the XY axis by using the Il button The precision of the colour axis can be chosen with the button E Clicking the
460. xport process View Info L View Hex ie gene 4 e S E i Rer F x i DNE DV D DG i ris Wu i oe eee l ee ne rene eee E LEER HE Progress FFI Ww j E 20 40 60 au 100 5 By checking the View Info box Ll the following information is continually updated during the export process messages processed revolution number ARP date and time during the recording current Kbs processed and errors counted View Info fy Message o Rev 9 Date 04 05 2000 Current Kb Error By checking the View Hex box Ll the data being exported is continually displayed message per message in Hex format 1100 16F0 0628 0826 0006 0628 0826 0822 czz OC24 0820 A progress bar indicates the progress of the data export process as herent dadene volumes zi RUMA Ch VIII EDR Data Export v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VIII Data export VIII 6 Progress I l l l l 20 40 60 au 100 A PPI indicator displays the radar turning ARP ACP information stored during the recording If this dial is not rotating it means that no ARP ACP signals were connected to the EDR hardware during the recording In this case the data can not be exported properly The third part is the input panel for the batch processing This panel can be displayed by clicking the button in the lower left corner of the EDR Data export window The panel can be closed again by clicking the button
461. xt if itis red the GPS is not time sync ed RUM4 Ch IX Data Link Analysis v4 3 3 05 10 01 z z olume 4 8 nat dadene eE RASS S User Manual 2 RUM4 Ch IX 2 1 1 3 Network Connections Chapter IX Data Link Analysis IX 6 The two PC systems running both the EDR and the RES must be put into a local area Network This can be done using a simple twisted RJ 45 cable network using two computers or using a simple Hub Once the ethernet connections are present put both PCs in sharing mode ing control panel This can be done by using the File Shar File Sharing B Start Stop dE wner Name Appearance Apple Menu Options AppleTalk Control Panels f Favorites 4 Graphing Calculator Activity Monitor Network Identity PTE 1 RES Owner Password 1 Computer Name PTE 1 RES Capture ColorSync Configuration Manager Control Strip Date amp Time DialAssist 3 HANDY gt Q Internet Access gt Key Caps Network Browser Note Pad B File Sharing on tatus Click Stop to turn off file sharing T users from accessing shared folder his prevents other Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Exchange File Sharing General Controls Internet gj ProCalc G Recent Applications gt jj Recent Documents Eg Recent Servers gt Eff Remote Access Status Program Linking
462. y in the setup window a message will announce the problem Error Invalid filter sockets 1 1 Click on the Ok button to leave the window Ok is only available if a valid filter is defined Add more filter if needed using the Add button Use the Edit button to edit the filter This will evoke the same window as above Use the Delete button to clear a filter from the definition window Use the Save button to save a set of stream definitions to disk File Dialog FILTERS i Saving filter configuration demo filter View All a Use the Read button to reload a set of stream definitions from disk Use the return button to close UDP_IP Parameter window 3 Now start the recording by clicking on the Record button I as iens usns Veume4 S RUMA Ch XI network recording v4 4 1 08 04 02 RASS S User Manual ChapterXI Network recording Tools on UDP IP and TCP IP XL6 UPD IP Recorder vi Destination IF Source F ASTERIX amp l 1234 Ba Hal Hal Gi aal dil Bal Hiz B2 BAT BA ea Be BG Ba mal mal mas Recording Information Buffering oF Recording Time Inn 00 00 The byte and packet counters will increment and will show the number of packets and bytes recorded so far The data is recorded into a temporary file on the hard disk of the SASS S computer 4 The save button saves the recorded data to a user defined folder Click the Save 193 button to initiate the copy tool The following windows wil
463. y starts the specified conversion Abort a running batch procedure Once the required data is converted in to the same format it can be used for comparison or analysis in the selected radar analysis tool 1 RUMA Ch II RDR Recording v4 3 1 15 03 01 as hee ellipsis oume RASS S User Manual Chapter III Radar Data Analysis III Chapter Ill Radar Data Analysis 1 0 Introduction After converting the raw recorded data to the RASS 5 format it can be used by several programs for analysis This can be done by inventory analysis statistical analysis or Pd calculation Corresponding to each analysis one or more tools are used Inventory tool This tool shows the recorded data static and dynamic in a Plan Position Indicator PPI format as well as different alternative formats Statistic tool This tool calculates the number of erroneous plots or tracks in a recording Tabular Pd tool This tool calculates the Pd and lists it in a table 3D Pd tool This tool calculates the Pd for different sectors 2 0 Radar Data Analysis 2 1 The Inventory tool The first tool in the row is the Inventory tool It allows you to visualise data in different formats PPI vertical diagram A or C code versus time Range versus elevation A preferences window can be called to set the display static or dynamic as desired to add labels or to apply mathematical functions on the data Upon loading the RASS S data special filter
464. y the target report can be extrapolated for each target report using a linear approximation Because the same approximation for calculating the position of the targets are used in the firmware of the RES during simulation in fact these corrections are exactly what the RES has generated Range y Range Velocity p ATA cos Azimuth y Heading y Azimuth ref Azimuth p 180 Velocity ATA sin Azimuth y Heading y Range y 2 Using the Mode A calculated reference and asterix arrays see 4 2 all targets having a valid link index all non missed or false plots in the reference array are used to calculate the Range and azimuth error as The Link index is used to locate the corresponding record in the asterix array ARange A Range q Range y AAzimuth A Azimuth q Azimuth a biegen Gladvonties VolumelV S z RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 RASS S User Manual Chapter VI Pd and Accuracy Calculation VI 41 3 The Range Bias is defined as R A 1 N X ARangeA AA 1 N X AAzimuthA N Total number of non missed Mode A reference plots 4 From this also the standard deviation is calculated as STD RangeA V 1 N X ARange A RA STD AzimuthA Y 1 N X AAzimuth A AA In the created result file the AAzimutha and ARange A valuesare entered in the 54 field A Azimuth and A Range They can be visualised in the inventory tool RUM4 RASS S Info v4 4 2 25 07 02 mack cadvenie

RASS-S User Manual Vol4 v6.1.0 December 2003

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents